Specifications Volume One (Div. 0 thru 07) - Lord and Son ...

Emerald Coast Utilities Authority 

Emergency Operations Support Addition 

to the Customer Services Bldg. 

Ellyson Industrial Park 

FOR 


BID No. CC 2010 –10 

Volume I 

Div. 0-7 

ECUA Project CIP No. CS141E 

HMMF Project No. 239903 

ISSUED FOR BID 

April 21, 2010 

PREPARED BY: 

ARCHITECTS ENGINEERS SURVEYORS 

5111 NORTH 12 TH AVENUE 

POST OFFICE BOX 2518 

PENSACOLA, FLORIDA 32513-2518 

AAC000035 EB0000155 LB00006783 LC26000216

EMERALD COAST UTILITIES AUTHORITY 

EMERGENCY OPERATIONS SUPPORT ADDITION & 

ALTERATIONS TO THE CUSTOMER SERVICES BUILDING 

PENSACOLA, FLORIDA 

ECUA CIP No. CS-141E 

BID No. CC2010-10 

Pensacola, Florida 

INDEX 

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE WORK 

PAGES 

VOLUME I 

DIVISION 0 – GENERAL CONDITIONS 

00003 – Invitation to Bid................................................................................................................................ 2 

00004 – Instructions to Bidders..................................................................................................................... 3 

00005 – Contractor's Proposal...................................................................................................................... 9 

00006 – Bid Bond ......................................................................................................................................... 1 

00007 – Exhibit A -C ..................................................................................................................................... 3 

00008 – Standard Form of Agreement ......................................................................................................... 3 

00009 – Performance Bond ......................................................................................................................... 2 

00010 – Labor and Material Payment Bond .................................................................................................2 

00011 – Measurement & Payment................................................................................................................ 5 

00012 – Contractor’s Warranty ..................................................................................................................... 1 

00013 – Contractor's Final Affidavit ............................................................................................................. 1 

00014 – Risk Management Policy and Standards ....................................................................................... 7 

00015 – Standard General Conditions ...................................................................................................... 42 

00016 – Supplementary General Conditions ................................................................................................ 3 

00017 – Special Conditions........................................................................................................................... 4 

00017A – Special Conditions-Attachment A .................................................................................................4 

00017B – Special Conditions-Attachment B .................................................................................................3 

00018 – Contractor Pay Application.............................................................................................................. 1 

00019 – FDEP Supplementary Conditions Equipment Mat ........................................................................ 34 

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL 

01004 – Testing Laboratory Services............................................................................................................ 3 

01010 – Summary of Work ........................................................................................................................... 2 

01015 – Abbreviations and Definitions ........................................................................................................ 4 

01025 – Payment, Modification, & Completion Procedures.......................................................................... 7 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Table of Contents Page 1 of 5 

& Alterations to the Customer Services Bldg. 

HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP No. CS141E

01090 – References.................................................................................................................................... 14 

01100 – Summary......................................................................................................................................... 2 

01200 – Progress Documentation & Procedures.......................................................................................... 4 

01210 – Allowances ...................................................................................................................................... 2 

01230 – Alternates ........................................................................................................................................ 2 

01300 – Submittals........................................................................................................................................ 6 

01400 – Quality Requirements...................................................................................................................... 4 

01500 – Temporary Facilities and Controls................................................................................................... 6 

01524 – Construction Waste Management................................................................................................... 5 

01600 – Product Requirements .................................................................................................................... 7 

01700 – Execution Requirements ................................................................................................................. 5 

01731 – Cutting & Patching........................................................................................................................... 4 

01732 – Selective Demolition........................................................................................................................ 4 

01770 – Closeout Procedures....................................................................................................................... 4 

01782 – Operation & Maintenance Data ....................................................................................................... 7 

01800 – Project Record Documents ............................................................................................................. 4 

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION 

02102 – Clearing and Grubbing .................................................................................................................... 2 

02200 – Earthwork ........................................................................................................................................ 2 

02210 – Grassing.......................................................................................................................................... 3 

02215 – Excavation....................................................................................................................................... 4 

02220 – Building Demolition.......................................................................................................................... 4 

02221 – Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction.................................................................................. 5 

02280 – Soil Treatment.................................................................................................................................3 

02500 – Site Drainage................................................................................................................................... 8 

02512 – Base Course.................................................................................................................................... 2 

02513 – Asphalt Concrete Paving................................................................................................................. 5 

02556 – Water Distribution and Service Lines ............................................................................................ 28 

02570 – Sanitary Sewer ................................................................................................................................ 8 

02826 – Ornamental Metal Fences & Gates.................................................................................................5 

02905 – Transplanting................................................................................................................................. 10 

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 

03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete................................................................................................................. 18 

03310 – Concrete Sealer .............................................................................................................................. 3 

03521 – Lightweight Insulating Concrete ...................................................................................................... 3 

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 

04230 – Reinforced Unit Masonry............................................................................................................... 15 

04720 – Cast Stone....................................................................................................................................... 4 

04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.............................................................................................................. 12 




DIVISION 5 – METALS 

05120 – Structural Steel................................................................................................................................ 8 

05210 – Steel Joists ...................................................................................................................................... 4 

05310 – Steel Deck ....................................................................................................................................... 5 

05311 – Acoustical Roof Deck Assembly ..................................................................................................... 6 

05500 – Metal Fabrications ........................................................................................................................... 6 

05511 – Metal Stairs ..................................................................................................................................... 8 

05521 – Pipe and Tube Railings ................................................................................................................... 6 

05580 – Architectural Metal Column Covers.................................................................................................4 

05811 – Architectural Joint Systems ............................................................................................................. 3 

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS 

06100 – Rough Carpentry............................................................................................................................. 3 

06402 – Interior Architectural Woodwork.................................................................................................... 12 

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

07115 – Bituminous Dampproofing............................................................................................................... 4 

07130 – Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing ................................................................................................ 4 

07210 – Building Insulation ........................................................................................................................... 4 

07241 – Polymer-Based EIFS....................................................................................................................... 9 

07265 – Underslab Vapor Protection ............................................................................................................ 3 

07270 – Air & Vapor Barrier System ............................................................................................................. 7 

07411 – Metal Roof Panels ........................................................................................................................... 5 

07541 – Feltback Adhered, Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.................................................................. 13 

07600 – Roof Flashing & Sheet Metal........................................................................................................... 2 

07720 – Roof Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 5 

07811 – Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials .................................................................................................... 5 

07841 – Thru Penetration FS System ........................................................................................................... 5 

07900 – Joint Sealants.................................................................................................................................. 4 

VOLUME II 

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS 

08110 – Steel Doors & Frames..................................................................................................................... 8 

08211 – Flush Wood Doors .......................................................................................................................... 5 

08411 – Aluminum–Framed Entrances & Storefronts ................................................................................ 12 

08510 – Steel Windows ................................................................................................................................ 4 

08710 – Door Hardware.............................................................................................................................. 16 

08800 – Glazing .......................................................................................................................................... 10 

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 

09111 – Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing.................................................................................................... 5 




09240 – Gypsum Board ................................................................................................................................ 5 

09250 – Cementitious Gypsum Boards ........................................................................................................ 3 

09265 – Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies ........................................................................................... 3 

09310 – Porcelain and Ceramic Tile ........................................................................................................... 13 

09512 – Acoustical Tile Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 7 

09580 – Drywall Suspension Systems .......................................................................................................... 4 

09650 – Resilient Flooring and Base ............................................................................................................ 8 

09680 – Carpet.............................................................................................................................................. 7 

09705 – Resinous Flooring ........................................................................................................................... 6 

09900 – Painting ......................................................................................................................................... 11 

09950 – Wall Coverings ................................................................................................................................ 5 

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 

10100 – Visual Display Boards...................................................................................................................... 6 

10155 – Toilet Compartments....................................................................................................................... 4 

10200 – Louvers and Vents .......................................................................................................................... 5 

10431 –Signage .......................................................................................................................................... 12 

10520 – Fire Protection Specialties............................................................................................................... 5 

10530 – Walkway Covers ............................................................................................................................. 3 

10655 – Accordion Folding Partitions............................................................................................................ 6 

10801 – Toilet Accessories ........................................................................................................................... 6 

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 

11067 – Acoustical Panel System................................................................................................................. 4 

11130 – Audio-Visual Guidelines ................................................................................................................ 28 

11132 – Projection Screens .......................................................................................................................... 6 

11140 – Integrated Screen Control System .................................................................................................. 3 

11400 – Food Service Equipment............................................................................................................... 13 

11451 – Appliances....................................................................................................................................... 4 

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 

12484 – Entrance Mats .................................................................................................................................4 

12492 – Vertical Blinds.................................................................................................................................. 5 

12710 – Fixed Audience Seating .................................................................................................................. 6 

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – NOT USED 

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS 

14210 – Electric Traction Elevators............................................................................................................... 9 

14240 – Hydraulic Elevators.......................................................................................................................... 7 

14420 – Wheelchair Lifts............................................................................................................................... 4 




DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 

15100 – General Requirements for Mechanical Work .................................................................................. 8 

15200 – Testing & Balancing Air Distribution System ................................................................................... 2 

15400 – Plumbing ....................................................................................................................................... 17 

15510 – Fire Protection .................................................................................................................................6 

15800 – HVAC ............................................................................................................................................ 29 

15900 – Facility Management and Direct Digital Control System ............................................................... 13 

APPENDICES 

APPENDIX-A – Geotechnical Investigation – Building Additions................................................................ 19 

APPENDIX-B – Geotechnical Investigation – Parking Expansion ................................................................ 7 

APPENDIX-C – Hazardous Materials Survey ............................................................................................. 13 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 




INVITATION TO BID 


Sealed bids for the ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services 

Building, will be received in the office of the Purchasing and Stores Manager, Emerald Coast Utilities 

Authority (ECUA), 9255 Sturdevant Street, Ellyson Industrial Park, Pensacola, Florida 32514, until 2:00 

p.m., Local Time, on May 18, 2010, at which time the bids will be opened and read aloud in Room 215 at 

9255 Sturdevant Street. Bids received after said time will be returned unopened. A mandatory pre-bid 

conference will be held at the offices of ECUA, Room 215, 9250 Sturdevant Street, Pensacola, FL, 

32514, at 10:00 a.m., Local Time, on Tuesday, May 5, 20 10. Bids received from entities not represented 

at the pre-bid conference shall not be opened. 

The principal features of the work to be known as: 

ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services Building 



Bid No. CC-2010-08 

Can be briefly described as follows: 

Construction of Emergency Operations Support facilities as an approximate 37,400 sq. ft. addition to the 

Customer Services Building, to include business and assembly spaces. Work to include supply and/or 

installation of all equipment as indicated on the drawings and all incidental selective demolition, minor 

interior alterations, site work, paving, and grading for a complete and fully functional facility. 

Plans and specifications may be examined at the: 

- ECUA Engineering Department, 9300 Sturdevant Street, Ellyson Industrial Park, Pensacola, Florida 

(telephone 850/969-3310). 

- Plan Room of F. W. Dodge, 700 S. Pace Blvd., Pensacola, FL 32501. 

Plans and Specifications will be provided in electronic format (.pdf on DVD/CD) only and may be obtained 

at Hatch Mott MacDonald, LLC, 5111 North 12 th Avenue, Pensacola, Florida, 32504 free of charge. 

Contractor may request shipment of DVD to Contractor’s location by paying shipping and handling fee of 

$50 in the form of a check or money order payable to Hatch Mott MacDonald. 

Inquiries and clarifications on the Plans and Project Manual shall be provided in written form to Hatch 

Mott MacDonald, fax number (850) 484-8199, attention: Tom Ruff. Written inquiries and clarifications will 

only be accepted up to seven (7) calendar days prior to bid opening. 

A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for a public 

entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may 

not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or 

public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to a public entity, may not be awarded or 

perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public 

entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in 

Section 287.017, Florida Statutes, for CATEGORY TWO ($25,000) for a period of 36 months from the 

date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. 

Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of at least 90 days from date of opening. Complete insurance 

coverage will be required from the successful bidder prior to signing the contract. 

The Emerald Coast Utilities Authority reserves the right to waive informalities in any bid: reject any or all 

proposals in whole or in part; rebid a project, in whole or in part; and to accept the proposal in its 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Invitation to Bid 00003 – 1 




judgement is the lowest and best bid of a responsible bidder. In accepting a bid, the ECUA may award a 

contract based only on the base bid, the base bid plus all alternates, or the base bid plus any alternates 

accepted in consecutive order as they are listed on the Contractors Bid Proposal form which the ECUA 

selects – with all decisions being based upon what the ECUA believes to be in the best interests of it’s 

ratepayers, in the reasonable exercise of its discretion. The ECUA further reserves the right to accept 

any bid or proposal in whole or in part and to increase or decrease quantities as may be required to meet 

the needs of the ECUA. 

The ECUA does not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, religion, age, and 

handicapped status in employment or provision of service. 

Bid proposal must be clearly marked on the envelope: 

BID: ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services Building 


BID NO.: CC 2010-10 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Invitation to Bid 00003 – 2 



INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 

I. General 

BIDS will be received by the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority (herein called the "OWNER") as specified in 

the Invitation to Bid. The BIDS will be publicly opened and read aloud at the designated time and place. 

Each BID must be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority. 

Each sealed envelope containing a BID must be plainly marked on the outside with the name and the 

number of the project for which the BID is submitted; and the envelope should also show on the outside, 

the BIDDER's name and address. 

BIDDERS must satisfy themselves as to the accuracy of the estimated quantities in the BID schedule by 

examination of the site and a review of the drawings and specifications including any addenda. After 

BIDS have been submitted the BIDDER shall not assert that there has been any misunderstanding 

concerning the quantities of work or of the nature of the work to be done. 

The OWNER shall provide to the BIDDERS prior to BIDDING, all the information which is pertinent to, 

and which delineates and describes, the land owned and rights-of-way acquired or to be acquired. 

The CONTRACT DOCUMENTS contain the provisions required for construction of the PROJECT. 

Information obtained from an officer, agent, or employee of the OWNER or any other person shall not 

affect the risks or obligations assumed by the CONTRACTOR or relieve the CONTRACTOR from fulfilling 

any of the conditions of the contract, unless properly documented by issuance of an addendum. 

All BIDS must be made on the required BID form. All blank spaces for BID prices must be filled in, in ink 

or typewritten, and the BID form must be fully completed and executed when submitted. One (1) original 

and two (2) copies of the BID form are required. 

A BIDDER may not modify its BID after BID opening. Errors in the extension of unit prices stated in a BID 

or in multiplication, division, addition, or subtraction in a BID may be corrected by the Director of 

Engineering prior to award. In such cases, unit prices shall not be changed. 

Any BID may be withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of BIDS or authorized 

postponement thereof. Any BID received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. No 

BIDDER may withdraw a BID within ninty (90) calendar days after the actual date of the opening thereof. 

The OWNER may waive any informalities or minor defects or reject any and all BIDS. A conditional or 

qualified BID will not be accepted. 

BID tabulations will be posted for review in the Purchase Section, 9255 Sturdevant Street, Ellyson 

Industrial Park on or about four (4) business days following bid opening, and will remain posted for a 

minimum of seventy-two (72) hours excluding weekends and holidays. 

Bids shall include sales tax and all other applicable taxes and fees. The OWNER may elect to utilize a 

tax savings agreement for equipment and/or materials at their sole discretion. 

Each BID must be accompanied by a BID BOND payable to the OWNER for five percent (5%) of the total 

amount of the BID. As soon as the BID prices have been checked and compared, the OWNER will return 

the BONDS of all except the three lowest responsible BIDDERS. When the AGREEMENT is executed, 

and the PAYMENT and PERFORMANCE BONDS have been executed and approved, the BID BONDS 

of the remaining BIDDERS will be returned. A certified check may be used in lieu of the BID BOND. 

The OWNER may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the BIDDER 

to perform the work, and the BIDDER shall furnish to the OWNER all such information and data for this 

purpose as the OWNER may request. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any BID if the evidence 

submitted by, or investigation of, such BIDDER fails to satisfy the OWNER that such BIDDER is properly 

qualified to carry out the obligations of the AGREEMENT and to complete the work contemplated herein. 

The low BIDDER will be required to perform at least twenty-five percent (25%) of the contract work with 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Instruction To Bidders 00004 – 1 

& Alterations to the Customer Sevices Bldg. 


his/her own employees. The BIDDER to whom the contract is being awarded shall supply the names and 

addresses of major material suppliers and subcontractors when required to do so by the OWNER. 

A PERFORMANCE BOND and PAYMENT BOND each in the amount of one hundred percent (l00%) of 

the contract price, with a corporate surety approved by the OWNER, will be required for the faithful 

performance of the contract, when the AGREEMENT is executed. Attorneys-in-fact who sign BID 

BONDS or PAYMENT BONDS and PERFORMANCE BONDS must file with each BOND a current 

certified copy of their Power of Attorney. 

Certificate of Insurance, as specified herein, shall be submitted at the time of signing the AGREEMENT. 

The BIDDER to whom the contract is being awarded will be required to execute the AGREEMENT and 

obtain the PERFORMANCE BOND, PAYMENT BOND and Insurance on or before ten (10) calendar days 

following delivery of the notice of award to the BIDDER. If the BIDDER fails to properly execute the 

AGREEMENT or obtain the required PERFORMANCE BOND, PAYMENT BOND, or Insurance within the 

allotted time, the OWNER may consider the BIDDER in default, in which case the BID BOND or check 

accompanying the proposal shall become payable to the OWNER. 

The OWNER within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of acceptable PERFORMANCE BOND, PAYMENT 

BOND, Insurance Certificates and the AGREEMENT signed by the CONTRACTOR to whom the contract 

is being awarded shall sign the AGREEMENT and return to such CONTRACTOR an executed duplicate 

of the AGREEMENT. Should the OWNER not execute the AGREEMENT within such period, the 

BIDDER may by written notice withdraw the signed AGREEMENT. 

The CONTRACTOR shall thereupon record the PAYMENT and PERFORMANCE BONDS at the 

Escambia County Courthouse and return the recorded originals to the OWNER within seven (7) calendar 

days. 

The NOTICE TO PROCEED shall be issued within ten (10) calendar days of the receipt by the Contractor 

of the building permit issued by the Escambia County Inspections Department. The Contractor shall notify 

the Owner within five calendar days of said receipt of permit. 

II. Bid Protest Procedure 

Any person whose substantial interests are directly and adversly affected by the award or intended award 

of a purchase order or contract or by plans or specifications contained in an INVITATION TO BID or 

request for proposals may file a protest in accordance with the following rules and section 12 of the ECUA 

act (Chapter 2001-324, Laws of Florida as amended). 

NOTICE OF PROTEST of plans, specifications or other requirements contained in an INVITATION TO 

BID or in a REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS shall be filed not later than 5:00 p.m. of the third business day 

following receipt of the PLANS or SPECIFICATIONS. NOTICE OF PROTEST of the rejection of a bid or 

proposal as non-responsive shall be filed not later than 5:00 p.m. of the third business day following 

notice to the bidder of the rejection. NOTICE OF PROTEST of the award or intended award of a 

purchase order or contract to the lowest bidder shown on a posted bid tabulation shall be filed not later 

than 5:00 p.m. of the third business day following the posting of the bid tabulation. NOTICE OF 

PROTEST of the award or intended award of a purchase order or contract to a bidder other than the 

lowest bidder shown on a posted bid tabulation shall be filed not later than 5:00 p.m. of the third business 

day following NOTICE OF THE AWARD of a purchase order or contract. 

A NOTICE OF PROTEST shall be in writing and shall state the subject matter of the PROTEST. 

A formal written PROTEST shall be filed within seven (7) business days after the filing of NOTICE OF 

PROTEST. A formal written PROTEST shall state with particularity the facts and the law on which the 

PROTEST is based. 

NOTICE OF PROTEST and formal written PROTEST of PLANS or SPECIFICAITONS for or the award or 

intended award of a CONTRACT shall be filed with the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR or his or her designee. 




Failure to file a NOTICE OF PROTEST or failure to file a formal written PROTEST within the times 

permitted shall constitute a waiver of proceedings under these rules and under Section 12 of Chapter 

2001-324, Laws of Florida, as amended. 

Upon receipt of a NOTICE OF PROTEST which has been timely filed, the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR shall 

stop the BID SOLICITATION or PURCHASE ORDER or CONTRACT AWARD process until the protest 

has been resolved. However, the BID SOLICITATION or PURCHASE ORDER or CONTRACT AWARD 

process may proceed when the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR determines that delay would be detrimental to 

the interests of ECUA. Any award of a PURCHASE ORDER or CONTRACT under such conditions shall 

be subject to the outcome of the PROTEST. After the award of a CONTRACT or PURCHASE ORDER 

resulting from a bid in which a timely protest was received and in which ECUA did not prevail, ECUA may 

take such action as it considers appropriate, which may include, but shall not be limited to, award of the 

CONTRACT or PURCHASE ORDER to the prevailing party, cancellation of the CONTRACT or 

PURCHASE ORDER, or REBIDDING. 

The EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR shall provide reasonable opportunity to resolve a PROTEST by 

AGREEMENT. If AGREEMENT is not reached within such time as the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR or his or 

her designee considers reasonable under the circumstances, the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR or his or her 

designee shall review the facts and the law on which the PROTEST is based, and shall render a decision 

which shall be in writing and shall be promptly transmitted to the PROTESTOR. 

If the PROTESTOR wishes to continue the PROTEST beyond the decision of the EXECUTIVE 

DIRECTOR or his or her designee, the PROTESTOR shall be required to file a PETITION for review by 

the ECUA board. This PETITION shall be made in writing and presented to the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR 

within ten (10) days after NOTICE of the decision of the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR or his or her designee; 

otherwise, the decision of the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR or his or her designee shall be FINAL and 

BINDING. Such PETITION shall state the particular GROUNDS on which it is based and may include 

pertinent documents and evidence relating thereto. Any GROUNDS not stated shall be deemed to have 

been waived by the PROTESTOR. This PETITION must also be accompanied by a PROTEST BOND of 

an amount equal to 1.0 percent (1%) of the value of the solicitation, but in no case less than $1,000 nor 

greater than $10,000.00. This BOND shall be in the form of a money order, certified cashier’s check, or 

certified bank check made payable to the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority. Failure to post such BOND 

within ten (10) business days after the decision of the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR or his or her designee 

shall result in the PROTEST being dismisssed by the EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR. 

The BOND required by the above paragraph shall be conditioned upon the payment of all costs and 

charges which may be adjudged against the person filing the PETITION for review. If the PROTESTOR 

prevails, the BOND shall be returned to the PROTESTOR. If however, ECUA prevails, the BOND shall 

be forfeited, and ECUA shall be entitled to recover the costs and charges, excluding attorney’s fees, of 

such hearing. The entire amount of the BOND also shall be forfeited if it is determined that a PROTEST 

was filed for a FRIVOLOUS or IMPROPER PURPOSE, including, but not limited to, the purpose of 

harassing, causing unnecessary delay, or causing needless cost for ECUA or another interested 

party/parties. 

Any NOTICE required or permitted under this BID PROTEST procedure shall be effective when delivered 

personally or by facsimile, or when deposited in the U.S. Mail. If notice is given only by mail, three (3) 

days shall be added to the time within which a PROTESTOR may file a NOTICE OF PROTEST or 

PETITION for review. 

-END- 




CONTRACTOR'S PROPOSAL 



to the Customer Services Building 



Bid No. CC2010 – 10 


9255 Sturdevant Street 


Pensacola, FL 32514 

Date: __________________ 

Gentlemen: 

The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only person or persons interested in the Proposal as 

principal or principals is or are named herein; that this Proposal is made without connection with any other 

person, company, or parties making bid or proposal; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith, without 

collusion or fraud. 

The Bidder further declares that he has examined the site of the work, the Plans and Specifications for the 

work, the Contract Documents relative thereto, and has read all Special Provisions and Addenda furnished 

prior to the opening of bids; and the Bidder further declares that he has informed himself fully in regard to all 

conditions pertaining to the work. 

The Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Proposal is accepted, to contract with the Owner in the form of 

contract specified, to furnish all necessary materials, equipment, machinery, tools, and labor necessary to 

complete the work in full and in accordance with the shown, note, described, and reasonably intended 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

The award will be made to a single contractor based on the combination of Base Bid, plus Deductive Alternate 

Bid Items, if any, to accomplish the project within the allowable funds. If Deductive Alternate Bids are 

considered, then all bids will be evaluated using the cumulative value of the same Deductive Alternate Bid 

Items in the order listed in the Contractor’s Proposal. 

The Bidder also agrees that, at the time of signing the Contract, he will furnish the required insurance 

certificates. 

The Bidder further agrees that in case of failure on his part to execute said Contract, with the Certificates of 

Insurance and Payment and Performance Bonds within ten (10) consecutive calendar days after written notice 

having been given of the award of the Contract, the Contract will be awarded to the next higher responsible 

bidder, and the undersigned will not be considered as a responsible bidder for future contracts for a period of 

at least one year. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Contractor’s Bid Proposal 00005 – 1 


HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP CS141E


BASE BID 

ECUA EMERGENCY OPERATIONS SUPPORT ADDITION 

Item 

No. 

Description Units Quantity Unit Cost Total 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

Mobilization / Demobilization 

(≤2% of Total Bid) 

Prevention, Control, and 

Abatement of Erosion and 

Water Pollution 

Demonstration Testing 

(≥0.5% of Total Bid) 

Closeout Documentation 

(≥1.0% of Total Bid) 

Emergency Operations Support 

Addition, complete 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

6. Electrical Service Allowance LS 1 $_____N/A____ $12,000.00 

7. Permit Fee Allowance LS 1 $_____N/A____ $50,000.00 

8. Office Furniture Allowance LS 1 $_____N/A____ $305,000.00 

9. 

10. 

11. 

Contractor’s Indirect Costs for 

Coordination of the VOIP Phone 

System & Appurtenances 

Installation 

Human Resources Building 

Hazardous Material Removal 

Allowance 

Administration and All Other 

Work Requirements 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $40,000.00 

LS 1 $_____N/A____ $___________ 

Total Base Bid for ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition and Alterations to the Customer 

Services Building $______________________ 

(In Words) 





DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATE BID ITEMS 

ECUA EMERGENCY OPERATIONS SUPPORT ADDITION 

Indicate the deductive cost of the following alternates: 

Item 

No. 

Description Units Quantity Unit Cost Total 

D-1. 

D-2. 

Delete the Fencing at the 

Courtyard. 

Delete the Pavilion and Concrete 

Slab. 

LS 1 $_____N/A___ $___________ 

LS 1 $_____N/A___ $___________ 

D-3. Delete the Walkway Cover. LS 1 $_____N/A___ $___________ 

D-4. 

Delete the Demolition of Human 

Resources Building. 

LS 1 $_____N/A___ $___________ 

Total of deductive alternates D-1 through D-4 Bid for 

ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition 

$___________________________ 

(In Words) 

Contractor’s Name 





LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS 

In compliance with the Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned submits the following names of Subcontractors 

to be used in performing the Work. 

Bidder certifies that all Subcontractors listed are eligible to perform the Work. 

Subcontractor’s Work 

Subcontractor’s Name 

Site Work 

Roofing 

Masonry 

Elevators 

Plumbing 

Mechanical 

Electrical 

Telecommunications 

Audio – Visual Systems 

(If the Work is to be performed with CONTRACTOR’s forces, indicate “none”) 

Other Work (Describe) 

Subcontractor’s Name 

NOTE: This form must be submitted with the Bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. Failure to 

submit all information may be cause for rejection of bid. 

Bidder’s Signature 





QUALIFICATIONS PACKAGE 

FOR THOSE NOT PREVIOUSLY PRE-QUALIFIED BY ECUA 

EMERGENCY OPERATIONS SUPPORT ADDITION 

ECUA CIP CS141E BID NO. CC2010-08 

The Emerald Coast Utilities Authority (ECUA) of Escambia County, Florida is soliciting Public Bids from 

interested Florida licensed general contractors experienced in commercial building construction of similar size 

and complexity to the project described herein. This includes commercial construction on non-combustible, 

type-II buildings of medical, educational, laboratory or institutional occupancy. 

1. General 

A. Documentation provided must be specific and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. 

Documentation provided must pertain specifically to the entity that will bid for and construct the 

project, not an affiliated company, parent firm or entity. 

B. No interpretation of the meaning of the Bid Package or other qualification documents will be 

made to any Bidder orally. Every request for such interpretation shall be made in writing and 

addressed to ECUA in care of Hatch Mott MacDonald, Attention: Tom Ruff, 5111 North 12 th 

Avenue, Pensacola, Florida 32504 (e-mail: ed.shaw@hatchmott.com; FAX 850-484-8199), and 

to be given consideration must be received at least five business days prior to the date fixed for 

Bid submittal. Any and all such interpretation and any supplemental instructions will be in the 

form of written Addenda to the Bid which, if issued, will be mailed, shipped, faxed or e-mailed to 

all prospective Bidders (at the respective addresses furnished) prior to the date fixed for receiving 

the Bid. Failure of Bidders to receive or acknowledge any Addendum shall not relieve them of any 

obligation under the Bid. All Addenda shall become part of the Bid. 

C. Bidders previously pre-qualified by the ECUA under ECUA RFQ Number 2007-18 or 2007- 

18A, or the contractor awarded the bid for the ECUA Water Quality Laboratory, ECUA Bid 

No. CC2009-21, need not provide the qualification documents required herein. 

D. Pre-qualification packages are to be submitted in duplicate, at the time of the bid submission with 

the bid package. 

2. Qualification Determination 

A. Bidders may not be deemed qualified if: 

1. The Bidder fails to submit a responsive Bid, including failing to provide all required 

documentation; 

2. The Bidder fails to meet all the Technical Experience Requirements; 

3. The Bidder fails to meet all the Corporate Experience Requirements; 

4. Reasonable grounds exist that Bidder is involved in collusion among other Bidders. 

5. The Bidder, or any of its principals, is currently disbarred from bidding on public entity work in 

any state. 

B. Final determination of Bidder’s qualification status rests solely with the Emerald Coast Utilities 

Authority, Escambia County, Florida. 

3. Qualification Criteria 

A. Technical Experience Requirements: 





1. Descriptions of a minimum of three (3) comparable projects of similar size and complexity to 

the project described herein. All projects submitted must be of non-combustible construction, 

approximately 25,000 square feet or more and be of medical, educational, or business 

occupancy. 

2. Each of the Projects must have been completed since January 1, 1997. At least one of these 

projects must have been completed since January 1, 2002. Projects currently under 

construction will not qualify. 

3. At least 25 percent of the labor-related items on each Project must have been completed by 

the Bidder’s own work force. 

B. Corporate Experience Requirements: 

1. Evidence of a minimum of five (5) years in business under the same corporate name. 

2. Proof of required licensure in the State of Florida for the proposed project. 

3. Summary of claims and lawsuit history for the past five (5) years. 

4. Availability of personnel and project scheduling techniques. 

5. Recent local working experience (SE United States). 

4. Required Documentation 

A. Technical Experience: 

1. For each project submitted as documentation of meeting the Technical Experience Criteria, 

provide all the information specified in Paragraphs 2 through 10 below. 

2. Corporate name of Contractor executing construction contract. 

3. Name of project as bid, name of Owner, name of Design Firm, name of Construction 

Administration Firm, if different than Design Firm. 

4. Name, position or title, address and telephone number of contact person currently employed 

by each of the above. 

5. Percent of labor-related items performed by the Bidder’s own work force. 

6. A complete description including sizes, quantities, structures, and major items of equipment. 

7. Name and contact information for major subcontractors, including earthwork, reinforced 

concrete, jack and boring, pipe laying and paving. If work was self-performed, please 

indicate such. 

8. Name and contact information of representatives of major material suppliers. 

9. The bid amount and final cost to Owner, with an explanation of cost changes, if any, including 

change orders. 

10. Provide experience of proposed on-site project manager and/or field superintendent who 

would be involved in this project. Experience can be from previous employment but must be 

pertinent to technical characteristics listed under Technical Experience Criteria. 

B. Corporate Experience: 

1. Provide name, address and telephone number of Bidder’s corporate headquarters, regional 

office, subsidiaries and affiliates, if any. Provide name, title, and biographical summary of 

pertinent corporate officers. Provide a statement that Bidder has operated under the current 

corporate name for the last five years. Additionally, provide the Bidder’s date and state of 

incorporation, and status to do business in the state of Florida. 

2. Provide a statement that Bidder has not defaulted on a project nor failed to complete a 

project within the past ten years. If this is not the case, explain and provide project contact 

information. 

3. Provide a statement that Bidder has not filed for bankruptcy or been judged bankrupt at any 

time over the past nine years. If this is not the case, explain. 

4. Provide a statement that Bidder has not been involved in liquidated damages in the past five 

years. If this is not the case, explain and provide contact information. 





5. Provide a statement that the Bidder has never abandoned a project, even temporarily, during 

a dispute. If this is not the case, please explain and provide contact information. 

6. Provide a statement whether Bidder has or has not been involved in litigation as a plaintiff 

against an Owner, Design Firm or Construction Contract Administration Firm, or served the 

Owner with a claim for additional compensation prepared by an attorney or a claims 

consultant, excluding routine change order requests, in the past five years. If Bidder has, 

explain and provide contact information. List any lawsuits or administrative actions to which 

the Bidder is currently a party or has been a party (either as a plaintiff or defendant) during 

the past ten years. For each suit, list all parties and indicate whether any party was a 

bonding company, insurance company, an Owner or other. Identify the project giving rise to 

the suit or administrative action, explain the basis of the claim, and whether a settlement was 

reached or a judgment entered into for or against the Bidder or the Bidder’s bonding 

company or insurance company. 

7. Provide a statement that the Bidder, as well as all of its affiliated companies, is not involved in 

any dispute, formal claim, or litigation with the Owner, nor any authority or organization with 

which the Owner has a vested interest. If this is not the case, please explain. 

8. Provide a statement that the Bidder has a Quality Control/Quality Assurance Program, which 

meets the performance requirements of a project to ensure that it is properly constructed in 

accordance with project documents, manufacturer’s requirements and within a specified 

project schedule, with the date it was last updated. If this is not the case, please explain. 

9. Provide the Bidders Safety Program the date it was last updated. If this is not the case, 

please explain. Provide a copy upon request. 

10. Provide a statement that the Bidder endorses a drug free work place. 

11. List all other projects currently under contract in the United States, the current contract 

amounts and scheduled completion dates. 

5. Supplemental Information and Requirements 

1. The Owner will not be liable in any way for any costs incurred by any Bidder in the preparation of 

its Bid Documents nor participation in any discussions. 

2. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all Bids. The Owner, upon receipt of the 

Bid, shall have the right to investigate work performed by the Bidder on projects referenced by the 

Bidder, or any other projects performed by the Bidder. Investigations will be performed by 

Owner’s personnel or its representatives as deemed appropriate by the Owner, which may 

include site visits and interviews with Project Owners and Construction Contract Administration 

staff. 

3. The Bid must include responses to all information requested. The Bid shall address required 

documentation in the order identified above, indexed and clearly identified. Additional data may 

be submitted as deemed appropriate to support or augment the required documentation. 

Submittal shall be prepared on standard 8 ½” x 11” letter size paper, with text on one side, using 

12-point font, and bound on the left side. No page limitation has been established for the 

application submission, but non-pertinent “boilerplate” materials are strongly discouraged. 





TRENCH SAFETY COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION 

Any trench or similar excavation having a depth in excess of five (5) feet will be subject to the Excavation 

Safety Standards established by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 29.C.F.R. s. 1926.650 

Subpart P. 

By the signature of its undersigned authorized representatives, the Bidder hereby assures ECUA that any such 

excavation performed by the Bidder will be performed in compliance with all applicable trench safety 

standards. 

The cost of compliance with applicable trench safety standards is estimated by the Bidder to be 

$___________________, which cost is included in the amount of the bid. 

The specific methods of compliance with applicable Trench Safety Standards, and the cost of compliance are 

as follows: 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

_________________________________________________________________________________ 

______________________________________________ 

Authorized Official 

(Print/Type) 





Receipt is acknowledged of the following addenda: 

No. _______________ Dated _______________ 

No. _______________ Dated _______________ 

No. _______________ Dated _______________ 

No. _______________ Dated _______________ 

No. _______________ Dated _______________ 

BIDDER agrees that the OWNER has the right to waive informalities in any bid; reject any or all proposals, in 

whole or in part; re-bid a project, in whole or in part; and to accept a proposal that in its judgment is the lowest 

and best bid of a responsible bidder. BIDDER further agrees that the OWNER may award a contract based 

only on the base bid, the base bid plus all alternates, or the base bid plus any alternates—with all decisions 

being made based upon what OWNER believes to be the best interest of its ratepayers, in the reasonable 

exercise of its discretion. BIDDER also acknowledges and agrees that the OWNER reserves the right to 

increase or decrease quantities as may be required to meet the needs of OWNER, at the unit price which was 

bid. 

Respectfully submitted, 

By: 

(Date) 

(Signature) 

(Print/Type) 

(Title) 

(SEAL - IF BIDDER IS A CORPORATION) 

(Company) 

(Business Address) 

(Telephone Number) 

(Fax Number) 

(Federal ID Number) 

Florida Licenses Held: 

Type: 

No.: 

No.: 

No.: 

No.: 

END OF CONTRACTOR’S PROPOSAL 




BID BOND 

BID BOND 

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we ________________________________ 

_________________________ as Principal, hereinafter ___________________, called the Bidder, and 

the _______________________________________, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the 

State of ___________ as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Emerald 

Coast Utilities Authority as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of 

______________________________________________________________________________ for the 

payment of work on the Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services Building 

which sums, well and truly to be made, the said Bidder and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, 

executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 

WHEREAS, the Bidder has submitted a bid for construction of an Emergency Operations Support 

Addition to the Customer Services Building, Bid No. CC2010-10, known as: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services Building 


NOW THEREFORE, if the Owner shall accept the bid of the Bidder and the Bidder shall enter into a 

contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may 

be specified in the bidding or contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful 

performance of such contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the 

prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Bidder to enter such contract and give such bond 

or bonds, if the Bidder shall pay to the Owner the penalty hereof, then this obligation shall be null and 

void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect, unless returned by Owner to Bidder; until Owner shall 

demand payment by Surety, all as allowed in the Contract Documents. 

Signed and sealed this ______ day of _______________ A.D. ________. 

ATTEST: 

(Principal) 

(SEAL) 

(Print/Type) 

ATTEST: 

(Title) 

(Attach Certified Copy of Power of Attorney) 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Bid Bond 00006 – 1 



EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE / EXHIBIT – A 

During the performance of this Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees as follows: 

1. The CONTRACTOR will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment 

because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The CONTRACTOR will take affirmative action to 

ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard 

to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the 

following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or 

termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including 

apprenticeship. The CONTRACTOR agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and 

applicants for employment, notice to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of 

this non-discrimination clause. 

2. The CONTRACTOR will in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on 

behalf of the CONTRACTOR, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment 

without regard to race, religion, sex, or national origin. 

3. The CONTRACTOR will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has 

a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union or 

workers' representative of the CONTRACTOR's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order 

11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to 

employees and applicants for employment. 

4. In the event of the CONTRACTOR's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this 

contract or with any of such rules, regulations, or orders, this Contract may be canceled, terminated or 

suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts with the 

Emerald Coast Utilities Authority. Provided, however, that no such action shall be taken without prior 

notice to the CONTRACTOR and an opportunity for a hearing before the governing Board of the Emerald 

Coast Utilities Authority or its designee. 

5. The CONTRACTOR will include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (5) in every subcontract 

or purchase order for an amount exceeding Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000), or which can reasonably be 

expected to have an aggregate total value exceeding Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000) in any twelve (12) 

month period, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. 

Date: 

Sign: 

Print/Type: 

(Contractor) 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Exhibit A 00007 – 1 



CERTIFICATION OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES / EXHIBIT – B 

By entering into this Contract, the CONTRACTOR certifies that he does not maintain or provide 

for his employees any segregated facilities at any of his establishments, and that he does not permit his 

employees to perform their services at any location under this control, where segregated facilities are 

maintained. He certifies further that he will not maintain or provide for his employees any segregated 

facilities at any of his establishments, and that he will not permit his employees to perform their services 

at any location, under his control, where segregated facilities are maintained. The CONTRACTOR 

agrees that a breach of this Certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity Clause in this Contract. 

As used in this Certification, the term "segregated facilities" means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest 

rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage 

or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and 

housing facilities provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact 

segregated on the basis of race, color, religion or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or 

otherwise. He further agrees that (except where he has obtained identical certifications from proposed 

subcontractors for specific time periods), he will obtain identical subcontractors or purchase orders 

exceeding $10,000; that he will retain such certifications in his files and make them available to the 

Emerald Coast Utilities Authority upon request. 

Provided, however, that such certification shall not be required in the case of purchase orders or 

contracts which, in case of a Federal Government contract or subcontract, would be exempt from 

compliance with the Equal Opportunity Clause by 41 CFR Sec. 60-1.5. This Section provides for the 

exemption of transactions not exceeding $10,000, contracts and subcontracts for indefinite quantities 

estimated not to exceed $10,000 in any contract year, contracts with certain educational institutions, work 

on or near Indian reservations, facilities (including, but not limited to, agencies, instrumentalities or 

subdivisions of state or local government) which are separate and distinct from activities of the prime 

contractor or subcontractor emergencies involving national security. 

Date: 

Sign: 

Print/Type: 

(Contractor) 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Exhibit B 00007 – 2 



DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE / EXHIBIT – C 

The undersigned contractor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that 

(Contractor) 

does: 

1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, 

possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the 

actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 

2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of 

maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee 

assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse 

violations. 

3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under 

bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 

4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working 

on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the 

terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo 

contendere to, any violation of Chapter 1893 or of any controlled substance law of the United 

States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later that five (5) days after such 

conviction. 

5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or 

rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is 

so convicted. 

6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of 

this section. 

As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above 

requirements. 

Date: 

Sign: 

Print/Type: 

(Contractor) 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Exhibit C 00007 – 3 



STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 

STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT 

BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR 

(This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged 

with respect to its completion or modification). 

THIS AGREEMENT made as of the _____ day of ______________ in the year 2010 by and 

between, the EMERALD COAST UTILITIES AUTHORITY, (hereinafter called OWNER) and 

_______________________________________________________________ (hereinafter called 

CONTRACTOR), 

WITNESSETH THAT OWNER and CONTRACTOR in consideration of the mutual covenants 

hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: 

Article 1. WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all Work as specified or indicated in 

the Contract Documents for the completion of the Project generally described as follows: 



ECUA CIP No. CS141E 

HMM Project No. 239903 

Bid No. CC 2010-10 

Article 2. Hatch Mott MacDonald Florida, LLC, 5111 N. 12 th Avenue, Pensacola, Florida, 

32504, will act as Engineer and Architect in connection with this Project in accordance with the Contract 

Documents. 

The Project has been designed by: 

Hatch Mott MacDonald Florida, LLC, 5111 N. 12 th Avenue, Pensacola, Florida, 32504. 

Article 3. CONTRACT TIME. The Work shall achieve Substantial Completion within 450 

calendar days after the date on which the Contract time commences to run as provided in paragraph 

17.02 of the General Conditions, and in accordance with Article 6 of this Agreement and Special 

Condition item 4. Moreover, Final Completion shall be reached no later than 60 days after Substantial 

Completion is reached. 

Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE. Owner shall pay Contractor for performance of the Work in 

accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows: Lump Sum per Bid Proposal 

included. 

Article 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the 

Contract between Owner and Contractor are attached hereto and made a part hereof and consist of the 

following: 

5.1 This Agreement (pages 00008-1 through 00008-3) 

5.2 Exhibits A, B, and C to this Agreement (pages 00007-1 through 00007-3) 

5.3 Contractor's Bid Proposal (pages 00005-1 through 00005-9) 

5.4 Contractor’s Insurance Certificates consisting of ____ pages 

5.5 Addenda Numbers _____ 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Standard Form of Agreement 00008-1 




5.6 Notice of Award (dated ____________) 

5.7 Instructions to Bidders (pages 00004-1 through 00004-4) 

5.8 Measurement and Payment (pages 00011-1 through 00011-5 

5.9 Risk Management/Insurance Requirements (pages 00014-1 through 00014-7) 

5.10 General Conditions (pages 00015-1 through 00015-42) 

5.11 Supplementary General Conditions (pages 00016-1 through 00016-3) 

5.12 Special Conditions (pages 00017-1 through 00017-4) 

with Attachment A (4-pages)and Attachment B (3-pages) 

5.13 Application and Certificate for Payment (page 00018-1) 

5.14 FDEP Supplementary Conditions – Construction Procurement (pages 00019-1 through 

00019-34), including Appendices. 

5.15 Technical Specifications 723 Pages (Divisions 1-16). 

5.16 Drawings 110 Sheets. 

5.17 Appendix – A (Geotechnical Report by: Larry M. Jacobs & Associates) 

5.18 Appendix – B (Geotechnical Report by: Larry M. Jacobs & Associates) 

5.19 Appendix – C (Hazardous Materials Survey by: Professional Service Industries) 

Article 6. 

TIME FOR COMPLETION; LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. 

Contractor agrees to commence the work under the Contract Documents within ten (10) calendar days of 

receipt of written Notice to Proceed and, subject authorized adjustments, to achieve Substantial 

Completion not later than 450 calendar days after commencement of the Work, and to achieve Final 

Completion in accordance with Section 01025 of these specifications not later than sixty (60) calendar 

days after the date established for Substantial Completion. Contractor further agrees to pay liquidated 

damages in the amount of $500.00 for each consecutive calendar day Contractor is late in achieving 

Substantial Completion and $100.00 for each consecutive calendar day Contractor is late in achieving 

Final Completion. The notice to Proceed will not be issued until a building permit has been issued by the 

Escambia County Inspections Department. 

Article 7. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

7.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General 

Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 

7.2 Neither Owner nor Contractor shall, without the prior written consent of the other, 

assign or sublet in whole or in part his interest under any of the Contract Documents; and, specifically, 

Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due without the prior written consent of Owner. 

7.3 Owner and Contractor each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns, and 

legal representatives to the other party hereto in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations 

contained in the Contract Documents. 

7.4 The Contract Documents constitute the entire Agreement between Owner and 

Contractor and may be altered, amended or repealed only by a duly executed written instrument, in the 

form of a Change Order. 





IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement the day and year first 

above written. 

OWNER: 

CONTRACTOR: 

EMERALD COAST UTILITIES AUTHORITY 

By 

By 

Executive Director 

Print/Type 

(President) 

Attest 

(SEAL) 

Attest 

(SEAL) 




PERFORMANCE BOND 


KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we 

, as Principal hereinafter called Contractor, 

whose business address is: 

, and 

whose telephone number is: 


, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the 

State of 

, as Surety, whose business address is: 

, and whose telephone number is: , are 

held and firmly bound unto Emerald Coast Utilities Authority, as Obligee, whose business address is: 

P. O. Box 15311, Pensacola, Florida 32514, and whose telephone number is: (850) 476-5110, 

hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of 

Dollars ($ 

), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the 

Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, 

jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 

WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written contract dated , with the 

Owner for Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services Building, in 

accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority, which 

contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract, for work to be 

performed at the following location(s): 

THE PRINCIPAL FEATURES of the work are briefly described as follows: 


Customer Services Building, including business and assembly spaces. Work to include supply and/or 


interior alterations, site work, paving and grading for a complete and fully functional facility. 

NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly 

and faithfully perform said Contract, then this obligation shall be null and voided otherwise shall remain in 

full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the 

Owner. Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the Contract, the 

Owner having performed Owner's obligation thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or 

shall promptly: 

1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or, 

2. Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and 

conditions, and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or, if the 

Owner elects, upon determination by the Owner and the Surety jointly of the lowest 

responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make 

available as Work progresses (even though there should be default or a succession of 

defaults under the contract or contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph) 

sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the contract price; but 

not exceeding, including other costs and damages for which the Surety may be liable 

hereunder, the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the 

contract price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner 

to Contractor under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly 

paid by Owner to Contractor. 

Any suit under this Bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years from the date on which 

final payment under the Contract falls due. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Performance Bond 00009 – 1 




The notice and time limitation provisions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, are incorporated in this Bond 

by reference. 

No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the 

Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. 

Signed, sealed and delivered . 

(Seal) 

(Witness) (Signature) 

(Print/Type) 

(Title) 

(Surety) 

By 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Performance Bond 00009 – 2 



LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we 

, as Principal hereinafter called Contractor, 

whose business address is: 


whose telephone number is: 


, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the 

State of 

, as Surety, whose business address is: 

, and whose telephone number is: 

are held and firmly bound unto Emerald Coast Utilities Authority, as Obligee, whose business address 

is P. O. Box 15311, Pensacola, Florida, 32514, and whose telephone number is (850) 476-5110, 

hereinafter called Owner, in the sum of: 

Dollars ($ 

), for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be 

made, the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and 

assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 

WHEREAS, the Contractor has entered into a written contract dated , with the 

Owner for ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition to the Customer Services Building, in 

accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority, which 

contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract, for work to be 

performed at the following location(s): 

THE PRINCIPAL FEATURES of the work are briefly described as follows: 


Customer Services Building, including business and assembly spaces. Work to include supply and/or 


interior alterations, site work, paving and grading for a complete and fully functional facility. 

NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Contractor shall promptly 

make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably 

required for use in the performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it 

shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions: 

1. A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a 

Subcontractor of the Contractor for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably required 

for use in the performance of the Contract, labor and material being constructed to 

include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental 

of equipment directly applicable to the Contract. 

2. The above named Contractor and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the 

Owner that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full before the 

expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such 

claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such 

claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final 

judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, and have execution 

thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any 

such suit. 

3. No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant. 

a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract with the Contractor shall 

have given written notice to any two of the following, the Contractor, the Owner, 

or the Surety above named, within ninety (90) days after such claimant did or 

performed the last of the work or labor, or furnished the last of the materials for 

which said claim is made, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed 

and the name of the party to whom the materials were furnished, or for whom the 

work or labor was done or performed. Such notice shall be served by mailing the 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Labor and Material Payment Bond 00010 – 1 



same by registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid in an envelope 

addressed to the Contractor, Owner or Surety, at any place where an office is 

regularly maintained for the transaction of business, or served in any manner in 

which legal process may be served in the state in which the aforesaid project is 

located, save that such service need not be made by a public officer. 

b) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which Contractor ceased 

Work on said Contract, it being understood, however, that if any limitation 

embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the construction 

hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the 

minimum period of limitation permitted by such law. 

c) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county or other 

political subdivision of the state in which the Project, or any part thereof, is 

situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in which the Project, 

or any part thereof, is situated, and not elsewhere. 

4. The amount of this Bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or 

payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of 

mechanics' liens, which may be filed on record against said improvement, whether or not 

claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this Bond. 

5. The notice and time limitation provisions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes are 

incorporated in this Bond by reference. 

6. 

Signed, sealed and dated . 

(Seal) 

(Witness) (Signature) 

(Print/Type) 

(Title) 


By 

(Surety) 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Labor and Material Payment Bond 00010 – 2 



MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 

PART 1 – SCOPE OF THE WORK 

The scope of this section of the Contract Documents is to further define the items included in 

each Bid item in the Bid Proposal section of these Specifications. Payment will be made based 

on the specified items included in the description in this section for each bid item. 

1.01 General 

All Contract Prices included in the Bid Proposal section will be full compensation for all labor, 

materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the construction as shown on 

the drawings and/or as specified in the Contract Documents to be performed under this contract. 

Actual quantities of each item bid on a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the 

construction in the manner set up for each item in this section of the specifications. Payment for 

all items listed in the Bid Form will constitute full compensation for all work shown and/or specified 

to be performed under this project. 

1.02 Estimated Quantities 

The quantities shown are approximate and are given only as a basis of calculation upon which the 

award of the Contract is to be made. The Owner/Engineer does not assume any responsibility 

that the final quantities, nor shall the Contractor claim misunderstanding because of such estimate 

of quantities. Final payment will be made only for satisfactorily completed quantities of each item. 

1.03 Work Outside Authorized Limits 

No payment will be made for work constructed outside the authorized limits of work. 

1.04 Measurement Standards 

Unless otherwise specified for the particular items involved, all measurements of distance shall be 

taken horizontally or vertically. 

1.05 Area Measurements 

In the measurement of items to be paid for on the basis of area of finished work, the lengths 

and/or widths to be used in the calculations shall be the final dimensions measured along the 

surface of the completed work within the neat lines shown or designated. 

1.06 Lump Sum Items 

Where payment for items is shown to be paid for on a lump sum basis, no separate payment will 

be made for any item of work required to complete the lump sum item. Lump sum bid items shall 

be complete, tested, and fully operable prior to request for final payment. The lump sum price bid 

for various items shall be compensation in full for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, 

dewatering and incidentals necessary to install these items complete and operable in every detail 

and in accordance with these plans and specifications. 

1.07 Unit Price Item 

Separate payment will be made for the items of work described herein and listed on the Bid Form. 

Any related work not specifically listed, but required for satisfactory completion of the work shall 

be considered to be included in the scope of the appropriate listed work items. The unit price bid 

for the various items shall be compensation in full for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Measurement and Payment 00011 – 1 



and incidentals for the item in place, complete in every detail. There will be no direct payment for 

clearing, grubbing, excavation, bracing, dewatering, backfilling, clean-up, sheeting, shoring, 

restoration of property, testing or other items of work necessary for installation of the item. 

1.08 Other Provisions 

No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be 

included in the applicable pay items of work. Reduction in retainage shall not be requested by the 

Contractor or made by the Owner until as-built (record) drawings have been submitted to the 

Engineer and approved. 

• Trench excavation, including necessary pavement removal, rock removal, and 

muck removal. 

• Sheeting and shoring. 

• Clearing, grubbing and grading. 

• Excavation, including necessary pavement removal, rock removal and muck 

removal. 

• Removal and disposal of excess materials remaining after excavation. 

• Dewatering and disposal of surplus water. 

• Structural fill, backfill and grading. 

• Testing and placing system in operation. 

• Any material and equipment required to be installed and utilized for tests. 

• Maintain the existing quality of service during construction. 

• Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 

• Operation and Maintenance manuals. 

1.09 Application For Payment 

The Contractor shall submit an application for payment, no more frequent than monthly, to the 

Engineer for review and approval upon partial completion of the project before the Contractor will 

be compensated for the work performed during that period. The application shall invoice work 

completed as detailed in the Contractor’s Proposal. Final payment in full will be made when work 

is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner, and the Engineer, when it has been shown that the 

Contractor has discharged all obligations of this Contract (Release of Liens) and when all punch 

list items have been corrected. Application for payment will be made on the standard AIA form, or 

type of form approved by the Owner. 

PART 2 – NOT APPLICABLE 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.01 Bid Item No. 1 – Mobilization/Demobilization 

Payment for all work included under this bid item will be made at the lump sum price bid for 

mobilization and demobilization of all labor, equipment, materials, and appurtenances necessary 

for construction of the project. Mobilization shall include all items detailed in Article 101-1 of the 

FDOT Standard Specification. Also included, but not limited to, as part of this bid item is the cost 

for project performance indemnification’s, photographs, shop drawings, working drawings, 

schedules, record drawings and documents, coordination, and phasing and other miscellaneous 

items associated with the work. Payment for this bid item will be lump sum. The lump sum price 

for mobilization/demobilization will be limited to two percent (2%) of the total contract amount. 

Two thirds of the lump sum amount will be payable upon mobilization only after proper 

documentation is submitted to the Engineer, including an approved CPM schedule, approved 




Schedule of Values, and Preconstruction Photographs. The remaining third will be payable upon 

demobilization. 

3.02 Bid Item No. 2 – Prevention, Control and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution 

Payment for all work included under this bid item will be made at the lump sum price bid for all 

work associated with the prevention, control, and abatement of erosion and water pollution in 

accordance with the contract documents. Payment shall include all items and incidentals 

necessary to complete the work. Payment for work included under this bid item will be lump sum. 

Contractor is advised that erosion control measures shown on the plans are the minimum. 

Additional erosion control measures may be required due to Contractors operations. Such 

additional erosion control measures shall be included in the Contractors lump sum price. 

3.03 Bid Item No. 3 – Demonstration Testing 

Payment for all work included under this bid item will be made at the lump sum amount for the 

work covered by this item and shall be full and complete compensation for the entire work. The 

work covered by this item includes furnishing all material, labor, equipment and incidentals 

necessary to successfully perform all mechanical, and electrical control testing required by the 

contract documents so that performance and compliance may be demonstrated to the Engineer. 

This pay item shall also include all additional tests required due to failure of previous tests or 

reinstallation of any work. THIS ITEM BID SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 0.5% OF THE ENTIRE 

CONTRACT BID AMOUNT. 

3.04 Bid Item No. 4 – Closeout Documents 



work covered by this item includes furnishing closeout documentation as specified in the contract 

documents including, but not limited to, warranty information, final release of lien, record drawings 

and O&M manuals shall be compensation in full for all material, labor, equipment and incidentals 

necessary to prepare and furnish all engineer-approved documentation required by the contract 

documents. The Owner shall make no additional payment for draft or preliminary submittals 

initially made or resubmitted due to incompleteness or rejection by the Engineer. Payment for 

work included under this bid item shall be made in full with the Contractor’s final payment. THIS 

ITEM BID SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 1.0% OF THE ENTIRE CONTRACT BID AMOUNT. 

3.05 Bid Item No. 5 – Emergency Operations Support Addition, Complete 



work covered by this item includes all work required for the Addition and Alterations to the 

Customer Services Building as described in the Contract Documents. Items included in this bid 

item shall include, but is not limited to dewatering, excavation, shoring, fill, site clearing and 

grubbing, site grading, testing, furnishing and installing all valves, meter, manholes, emergency 

generator, power and controls, piping, covers, hatches, gaskets, potable water piping, fencing, 

stormwater structures, restoration, landscaping, general, mechanical, electrical & plumbing and all 

other appurtenances and requirements to provide a fully functional facility in accordance with the 

contract documents. However, labor, materials and appurtenances required for the installation 

and proper operation of excluded equipment shall be included in this bid item. Omission of a 

specific item or component part of a system obviously necessary for the proper functioning of the 

equipment or system shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing the item as 

part of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. 




3.06 Bid Item No. 6 – Electrical Service Allowance 

Payment for this bid item will be made as a reimbursement up to the amount of twelve thousand 

dollars ($12,000.00) allowance for fee required by Gulf Power Company for installation of 

electrical service to the Water Quality Laboratory. All monies will be held by the Owner and 

disbursed to the Contractor only to the extent of actual Gulf Power fees incurred and paid with 

copies of invoices submitted to the Owner. Cost for Contractor’s project management, overhead 

and profit shall be included in other bid items. 

3.07 Bid Item No. 7 – Permit Fee Allowance 

The Owner has allocated fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) for a permit fee allowance. The 

Contractor is responsible to initially pay all permit fees associated with the Work. The Owner will 

reimburse the Contractor the actual amount of the permit fee for all paid permit fees provided 

copies of the paid receipts are included with the Contractor’s request for payment. Cost for 

Contractor’s project management, overhead and profit shall be included in other bid items. This 

allowance will include the EPA National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit 

as noted on Sheet C-1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all NPDES inspections. 

3.08 Bid Item No. 8 – Office Furniture Allowance 

The Owner has allocated three hundred five thousand dollars ($305,000) for an Office Furniture 

allowance. All monies will be held by the Owner and disbursed to the Contractor only to the extent 

of actual cost incurred. Cost for Contractors project management, overhead and profit shall be 

included in other bid items. 

3.09 Bid Item No. 9 – Contractor’s Indirect Costs for Coordination of the VOIP Phone System & 

Appurtenances Installations 

Work to install the VOIP phone system and appurtenances will be performed by a separate 

contractor and the Owner under a separate contract. The Owner shall be responsible for the 

installation of the network switches and the UPS equipment (other than the UPSs for the 

Emergency Operations Support Addition). The cost for the Contractor’s project management and 

coordination shall be included in Bid Item No. 9, Contractor’s Indirect Costs for Coordination of the 

VOIP Phone System & Appurtenances Installation. 

3.10 Bid Item No. 10 – Human Resources Building Hazardous Materials Removal Allowance 

The Owner has allocated forty thousand dollars ($40,000) for the removal of hazardous materials 

allowance from the Human Resources Building. All monies will be held by the Owner and 

disbursed to the Contractor only to the extent of actual cost incurred. Cost for Contractor’s project 

management, overhead and profit shall be included in other bid items. If Deductive Alternate No. 

D-4 – Building Demolition is taken, then this item shall be deleted via a deductive change order 

after the Notice to Proceed has been issued. Cost for Contractor’s overhead and profit shall be 

included in other bid items. 

3.11 Bid Item No. 11 – Administration and All Other Work Requirements 



work covered by this item includes all costs associated with managing and administering the 

project as well as all costs associated with any work required to provide a facility as described in 

the contract documents, which is not accounted for in other bid items. Payment for work included 

under this item will be made with each pay request based upon the lump sum bid divided by the 

number of months remaining in the Contractor’s approved CPM schedule. 

3.13 Deductive Alternate No. 1 – Fencing at Courtyard (D-1). 




Delete all costs associated with the installation of the Aluminum Fencing with Gates at the 

perimeter of the Courtyard as shown on the Drawings. 

3.14 Deductive Alternate No. 2 – Courtyard Pavilion and Concrete Slab (D-2). 

Delete the Pavilion and Concrete Slab as shown on the Drawings. Alternate shall include the wallmounted 

water fountain and associated piping. Note: Sod as specified in Section 02210 shall be 

provided in this area as a part of the base bid if this alternate is accepted. 

3.15 Deductive Alternate No. 3 – Walkway Cover (D-3). 

Delete the Walkway Cover adjacent to the Courtyard. Alternate shall include attached exterior 

lighting. The concrete sidewalk beneath the walkway cover is not a part of this alternate. 

3.16 Deductive Alternate No. 4 – Building Demolition (D-4). 

Delete the demolition of the existing Human Resources and Training Building as specified in 

Section 02221 of the Project Manual. Demolition will be completed by the Owner no later than 

ninety (90) days prior to Substantial Completion. 

END OF SECTION 00011 




CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY 

(Date) 

PROJECT: 





Bid No. CC 2010-10 

_______________________________________ warrants that all work shall remain in serviceable and good 

condition (ordinary wear and tear abuse and causes beyond the control of 

______________________________ excluded) for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of 

the work, and states that they will repair or replace without cost to the EMERALD COAST UTILITIES 

AUTHORITY, any imperfection in whole or in part which may develop in the work during the period above 

stated and any damage to other work caused by imperfections or the repairing of same. 

Witness 

Witness 

STATE OF FLORIDA 

COUNTY OF ESCAMBIA 

Before me this day personally appeared, ____________________________________, who, being first duly 

sworn, deposes and says that he/she executed the foregoing instrument for the uses and purposes set forth 

therein. 

Sworn to and subscribed before me this ________ day of __________________, 2010. 

__________________________ 

Notary Public 

State of Florida 

_________________________ 

SEAL 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Contractor’s Warranty 00012 – 1 



CONTRACTOR’S FINAL AFFIDAVIT 

STATE OF FLORIDA 

COUNTY OF ESCAMBIA 

BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, personally appeared 

who, after being duly sworn, deposes and says that: 

1. He/She is the of , 

hereinafter called the "Contractor", and as such makes this affidavit upon person knowledge. 

2. This affidavit is made for the purpose of inducing final payment from the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority to 

the Contractor for the following project: 

TITLE: ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition 




BID No. CC 2010-10 

under contract dated 

, as amended. 

3. All laborers, material men, and subcontractors who have provided materials or services to or for the Contractor 

under said contract or who have or may have liens against any property of the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority or 

any claim against the Emerald Coast Utilities Authority or against the payment bond if any on said project, have 

been paid in full, except the following: 

(If none, state "None") 

DATED this day of , 2010 

BY: 

PRINT/TYPE: 

TITLE: 

of 

(Contractor) 

The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me this day of , 2010, by 

, who is known by me to be the 

of 

, the Contractor, and who is personally known to 

me. 

SIGN: 

PRINT/TYPE: 

Notary Public, State of Florida 

My Commission Expires: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Contractor’s Final Affidavit 00013 – 1 



RISK MANAGEMENT POLICY AND STANDARDS 

FOR 

AGREEMENTS, CONTRACTS AND LEASES 

DEFINITIONS 

The following definitions apply to these Risk Management Provisions: 

Contract - The contract or agreement of which these Risk Management Provisions are a part for the 

construction, alteration, repair, or demolition of a structure or facility. 

Organization - The Emerald Coast Utilities Authority, a local governmental body of the State of Florida, its 

Board, officers, employees, volunteers, representatives, and agents. 

Other Party - The other party to the Contract of which these Risk Management Provisions are a part, any 

subsidiaries or affiliates, officers, employees, volunteers, representatives, agents, contractors, and 

subcontractors. 

HOLD HARMLESS 

The Other Party agrees to hold the Organization and the members of its governing board and its other 

officers and employees harmless against all claims for bodily injury, sickness, disease, death, personal 

injury, or damage to property or loss of use resulting there from, arising out of or related to the Contract, to 

the extent such claims are caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of 

the Other Party and persons or entities employed or utilized by the Other Party in the performance of the 

Contract. 

PAYMENT ON BEHALF OF ORGANIZATION 

The Other Party agrees to pay on behalf of the Organization all claims described in the above "Hold 

Harmless" paragraph, and to pay the reasonable costs and fees of the attorneys selected by the 

Organization, at trial and on appeal, to defend the Organization and its officers and employees against 

such claims. Provided, however, that the total liability of the Other Party to the Organization under the 

above "Hold Harmless" paragraph and this "Payment on Behalf of Organization" paragraph shall not 

exceed the sum of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per claim or occurrence. 

Such payment on behalf of the Organization shall be in addition to any and all other legal remedies 

available to the Organization and shall not be considered to the exclusive remedy of the Organization. 

LOSS CONTROLS/SAFETY 

Precaution shall be exercised at all times by the Other Party for the protection of all persons, including 

employees, and property. The Other Party shall comply with all laws, regulations, or ordinances relating to 

safety and health, and shall make special effort to detect hazardous conditions and shall take prompt 

action where loss control/safety measures should reasonably be expected. 

The Organization may order work to be stopped if conditions exist that present immediate danger to 

persons or property. The Other party acknowledges that such stoppage will not shift responsibility for any 

loss or damages from the Other Party to the Organization. 

Insurance Requirements IR-1 REVISED 4/28/08 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Risk Management Requirements 00014 - 1 



SEVERABILITY 

The provisions of these Risk Management Provisions are severable. In the event a court of competent 

jurisdiction should declare any provision of these Risk Management Provisions to be void or contrary to 

public policy such provision shall be stricken from these Risk Management Provisions, and the remaining 

provisions shall be enforced as though the provision determined to be void or contrary to public policy had 

not been included herein. 

INSURANCE - BASIC COVERAGES REQUIRED 

The Other Party shall procure and maintain the following described insurance, except for coverages 

specifically waived by the Organization, on policies and with insurers acceptable to the Organization. 

These insurers shall have A.M. Best (or equivalent) rating of no less than A:VII unless otherwise agreed to 

by the Organization. 

These insurance requirements shall not limit the liability of the Other Party. The Organization does not 

represent these types or amounts of insurance to be sufficient or adequate to protect the Other Party’s 

interests or liabilities, but are merely minimums. 

Except for workers compensation, the Other Party waives its right of recovery against the Organization, to 

the extent permitted by its insurance policies. 

The Other Party’s deductibles/self-insured retentions shall be disclosed to the Organization and may be 

disapproved by the Organization. They shall be reduced or eliminated at the option of the Organization. 

The Other Party is responsible for the amount of any deductible or self-insured retention. 

Insurance required of the Other Party or any other insurance of the Other Party shall be considered 

primary, and insurance of the Organization, if any, shall be considered excess, as may be applicable to 

claims which arise out of the Hold Harmless, Payment on Behalf of Organization, Insurance, Certificates 

of Insurance and any Additional Insurance provisions of this agreement, contract or lease. 

Additional Insured 

Except for workers compensation and professional liability, the Other Party’s insurance policies shall be 

endorsed to name the Organization as an additional insured for "bodily injury", "property damage" or 

"personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by the Other Party’s acts or omissions; or the 

acts or omissions of those acting on the Other Party’s behalf; in the performance of the Other Party’s 

ongoing operations for the Organization. The preferred Commercial General Liability coverage 

endorsement is ISO Form CG 20 10. 

Workers Compensation Coverage 

The Other Party shall purchase and maintain workers compensation insurance for all workers 

compensation obligations imposed by state law and employer’s liability limits of at least $100,000 each 

accident and $100,000 each employee/$500,000 policy limit for disease. 

The Other Party shall also purchase any other coverages required by law for the benefit of employees. 

General, Automobile and Excess or Umbrella Liability Coverage 

The Other Party shall purchase and maintain coverage on forms no more restrictive than the latest 

editions of the Commercial General Liability and Business Auto policies of the Insurance Services Office. 

Minimum limits of $ ,000,000 per occurrence for all liability must be provided, with excess or umbrella 

insurance making up the difference, if any, between the policy limits of underlying policies (including 





employers liability required in the Workers Compensation Coverage section) and the total amount of 

coverage required. 

Commercial General Liability Coverage - Occurrence Form Required 

Coverage A shall include bodily injury and property damage liability for premises, operations, products and 

completed operations, independent contractors, contractual liability covering this agreement, contract or 

lease, broad form property damage, and property damage resulting from explosion, collapse or 

underground (x,c,u) exposures. 

Coverage B shall include personal injury. 

Coverage C, medical payments, is not required. 

The Other Party is required to continue to purchase products and completed operations coverage, at least 

to satisfy this agreement, contract or lease, for a minimum of three years beyond the Organization’s 

acceptance of renovation or construction projects. 

Business Auto Liability Coverage 

Business Auto Liability coverage is to include bodily injury and property damage arising out of ownership, 

maintenance or use of any auto, including owned, non-owned and hired automobiles and employee nonownership 

use. 

Excess or Umbrella Liability Coverage 

Umbrella Liability insurance is preferred, but an Excess Liability equivalent may be allowed. Whichever 

type of coverage is provided, it should be at least “following form” and shall not be more restrictive than 

the underlying insurance policy coverages. 

EVIDENCE/CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 

Required insurance shall be documented in Certificates of Insurance, including indication that the policy(s) 

is endorsed to provide the Organization at least 30 days in advance notice of cancellation, non-renewal or 

adverse change. 

New Certificates of Insurance are to be provided to the Organization at least 15 days prior to coverage 

renewals. 

If requested by the Organization, the Other Party shall furnish complete copies of the Other Party’s 

insurance policies, forms and endorsements. 

For Commercial General Liability coverage the Other Party shall, at the option of the Organization, provide 

an indication of the amount of claims payments or reserves chargeable to the aggregate amount of liability 

coverage. 

Receipt of certificates or other documentation of insurance or policies or copies of policies by the 

Organization, or by any of its representatives, which indicate less coverage than required does not 

constitute a waiver of the Other Party’s obligation to fulfill the insurance requirements herein. 





ADDITIONAL INSURANCE 

If checked below, the Organization requires the following additional types of insurance. 

 

Property Coverage for Leases 

The Other Party shall procure and maintain for the life of the lease, all risk/special perils (including 

sinkhole) property insurance (or its equivalent) to cover loss resulting from damage to or 

destruction of the building, improvements and personal property/contents. The policy shall cover 

100% replacement cost, and shall include an agreed value endorsement to waive coinsurance. 

Coverage shall also include continued full payment of rents to the Organization for up to one year 

after damage or destruction of the property. 

 

Commercial General Liability Coverage Project Aggregate 

Because the Commercial General Liability form of coverage includes an annual aggregate 

limitation on the amount of insurance provided, a separate project aggregate limit of $_________ 

is required by the Organization for this agreement or contract. 

 

Liquor Liability Coverage 

In anticipation of alcohol being served, the Other Party shall provide evidence of coverage for 

liquor liability in an amount equal to the general/umbrella/excess liability coverage. If the general 

liability insurance covers liquor liability (e.g. host or other coverage), the Other Party's agent or 

insurer should provide written documentation to confirm that coverage already applies to this 

agreement, contract or lease. If needed coverage is not included in the general/umbrella/excess 

liability policy(ies), the policy(ies) must be endorsed to extend coverage for liquor liability, or a 

separate policy must be purchased to provide liquor liability coverage in the amount required. 

 

Owners Protective Liability Coverage 

For renovation or construction contracts the Other Party shall provide for the Organization an 

owners protective liability insurance policy (preferably through the Other Party’s insurer) in the 

name of the Organization. 

This is redundant coverage if the Organization is named as an additional insured in the Other 

Party’s Commercial General Liability insurance policy. However, this separate policy may be the 

only source of coverage if the Other Party’s liability coverage limit is used up by other claims. 

 

Builders Risk Coverage 

Builders Risk insurance is to be purchased to cover subject property for special perils (all risks or 

equivalent) of loss (including theft and sinkhole), subject to a waiver of coinsurance, and covering 

on-site and off-site storage, transit and installation risks as indicated in the Installation Floater and 

Motor Truck Cargo insurance described hereafter, if such coverages are not separately provided. 

If flood and/or earthquake risks exist, flood and/or earthquake insurance are to be purchased. 

If there is loss of income, extra expense and/or expediting expense exposure, such coverage is to 

be purchased. 

If boiler and machinery risks are involved, boiler and machinery insurance, including coverage for 

testing, is to be purchased. 





The Builders Risk insurance is to be endorsed to cover the interests of all parties, including the 

Organization and all contractors and subcontractors. The insurance is to be endorsed to cover 

testing and to grant permission to occupy. 

 

Installation Floater Coverage 

Installation Floater insurance is to be purchased when Builder’s Risk insurance is inappropriate, or 

when Builder’s Risk insurance will not respond, to cover damage or destruction to renovations, 

repairs or equipment being installed or otherwise being handled or stored by the Other Party, 

including off-site storage, transit and installation. The amount of coverage should be adequate to 

provide full replacement value of the property, repairs, additions or equipment being installed, 

otherwise being handled or stored on or off premises. All risks coverage is preferred. 

 

Motor Truck Cargo Coverage 

If the Installation Floater insurance does not provide transportation coverage, separate Motor 

Truck Cargo or Transportation insurance is to be provided for materials or equipment transported 

in the Other Party’s or other vehicles from place of receipt to building sites or other storage sites. 

All risks coverage is preferred. 

 

Contractor’s Equipment Coverage 

Contractor’s Equipment insurance is to be purchased to cover loss of equipment and machinery 

utilized in the performance of work by the Other Party. All risks coverage is preferred. 

 

Fidelity/Dishonesty Coverage - for Employer 

Fidelity/Dishonesty insurance is to be purchased to cover dishonest acts of the Other Party’s 

employees, including but not limited to theft of vehicles, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, etc., 

especially property necessary to work performed. 

 

Fidelity/Dishonesty/Liability Coverage - for Organization 

Fidelity/Dishonesty/Liability insurance is to be purchased or extended to cover dishonest acts of 

the Other Party’s employees resulting in loss to the Organization. 

 

Garage Liability Coverage 

Garage Liability insurance is to be purchased to cover the Other Party and its employees for its 

garage and related operations while in the care, custody and control of the Organization’s 

vehicles. 

 

Garagekeepers Coverage (Legal Liability Form) 

Garagekeepers Liability insurance is to be purchased to cover the Other Party’s liability for 

damage or other loss, including comprehensive and collision risks, to the Organization’s vehicles 

while in the care, custody and control of the Other Party. This form of coverage responds only 

when the Other Party is legally liable for the loss. 





Garagekeepers Coverage (Direct-Excess Form) 

Garagekeepers Liability insurance is to be purchased to cover damage or other loss, including 

comprehensive and collision risks, to the Organization’s vehicles while in the care, custody and 

control of the Other Party. This form of coverage responds on a legal liability basis, and also 

without regard to legal liability on an excess basis over any other collectible insurance. 

 

Watercraft Liability Coverage 

Because the Other Party’s provision of services involves utilization of watercraft, watercraft liability 

coverage must be provided to include bodily injury and property damage arising out of ownership, 

maintenance or use of any watercraft, including owned, non-owned and hired. 

Coverage may be provided in the form of an endorsement to the general liability policy, or in the 

form of a separate policy covering Watercraft Liability or Protection and Indemnity for bodily injury 

and property damage. 

 

United States Longshoremen and Harborworkers Act Coverage 

The Workers Compensation policy is to be endorsed to include United States Longshoremen and 

Harborworkers Act Coverage for exposures which may arise from this agreement or contract. 

 

Jones Act Coverage 

The Workers Compensation policy is to be endorsed to include Jones Act Coverage for applicable 

exposures (for work on, over or in navigable waters) which may arise from this agreement or 

contract. 

 

Aircraft Liability Coverage 

Because the Other Party’s provision of services involves utilization of aircraft, aircraft liability 

coverage must be provided to include bodily injury and property damage arising out of ownership, 

maintenance or use of any aircraft, including owned, non-owned and hired. 

The minimum limits of coverage shall be $__,000,000 per occurrence, Combined Single Limit for 

Bodily Injury (including passenger liability) and Property Damage. 

 

Pollution/Environmental Impairment Liability Coverage 

Pollution/environmental impairment liability insurance is to be purchased to cover pollution and/or 

environmental impairment which may arise from this agreement or contract. The required 

minimum coverage is $3,000,000. The coverage period shall be extended beyond the date of the 

completed project, until the expiration date of the performance bond. 

PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY, MALPRACTICE AND/OR ERRORS OR OMISSIONS 

If checked below, the Organization requires the following terms and types of insurance for professional, 

malpractice, and errors or omissions liability. 

 

Hold Harmless 

The following replaces the previous Hold Harmless wording. 

The Organization shall be held harmless against all claims for bodily injury, sickness, disease, 

death or personal injury or damage to property or loss of use resulting therefrom arising out of 





performance of the agreement or contract, unless such claims are a result of the Organization’s 

sole negligence. 

The Organization shall also be held harmless against all claims for financial loss with respect to 

the provision of or failure to provide professional or other services resulting in professional, 

malpractice, or errors or omissions liability arising out of performance of the agreement or 

contract, unless such claims are a result of the Organization’s sole negligence. 

 

Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance 

The Other Party shall purchase and maintain professional liability or malpractice or errors or 

omissions insurance with minimum limits of $_ ,000,000 per occurrence. 

If a claims made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later 

than the inception date of claims made coverage, unless the prior policy was extended indefinitely 

to cover prior acts. 

Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting 

period (ERP) of as great duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated 

aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the 

inception date of claims made coverage. 

The Other Party shall procure and maintain the following described insurance, except for 

coverages specifically waived by the Organization, on policies and with insurers acceptable to the 

Organization. 

These insurance requirements shall not limit the liability of the Other Party. The Organization 

does not represent these types or amounts of insurance to be sufficient or adequate to protect the 

Other Party’s interests or liabilities, but are merely minimums. 

Except for workers compensation, the Other Party waives its right of recovery against the 

Organization, to the extent permitted by its insurance policies. 

The Other Party’s deductibles/self-insured retentions shall be disclosed to the Organization and 

may be disapproved by the Organization. They shall be reduced or eliminated at the option of the 

Organization. The Other Party is responsible for the amount of any deductible or self-insured 

retention. 

Insurance required of the Other Party or any other insurance of the Other Party shall be 

considered primary, and insurance of the Organization shall be considered excess, as may be 

applicable to claims which arise out of the Hold Harmless, Payment on Behalf of Organization, 

Insurance, Certificates of Insurance and any Additional Insurance provisions of this agreement, 

contract or lease. 






Emergency Operations Support Addition ---Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract--- 00015 -1 






























































































































SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 

These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of the 

Construction Contract (the "General Conditions") and other provisions of the Contract Documents as 

indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. 

Refer to: 

GC-1 

GC-2.02.A 

GC-4.02 

The terms used in these Supplementary General Conditions which are defined in 

the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General 

Conditions. 

Amend the first sentence of paragraph 2.02.A of the General Conditions as 

follows: Replace "ten copies" with "five copies.” 

In the preparation of Drawings and Specifications, ENGINEER has relied upon 

the following reports and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the 

site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work: 

GC-4.02.A.1 Title/Author: Report Location: 

Larry M. Jacobs & Associates, Inc. 

“Geotechnical Exploration Report for the 

Project Manual 

Proposed ECUA Emergency Operations 

Appendix A 

Support Building” 

“Geotechnical Exploration Report for the 

Project Manual 

Proposed ECUA Ellyson Field Parking Expansion 

Appendix B 

Any geotechnical information included is for information only. The ECUA and the 

Engineer do not assume any responsibility for the Contractor's interpretation or 

conclusions drawn from the data. 

The Contractor may, at his option, perform additional subsurface investigations at 

his own expense. Copies of the results of these investigations shall be furnished 

to the ECUA and Engineer. 

GC-4.06.G 

GC-4.06.H 

GC-5.04- 

GC-5.07 

GC-5.08.A 

GC-5.09.A 

Delete paragraph 4.06.G of the General Conditions in its entirety. 

Delete paragraph 4.06.H of the General Conditions in its entirety. 

Delete paragraphs 5.04 through 5.07 of the General Conditions in their entirety. 

Risk Management/Insurance Requirements shall be as shown in the ECUA Risk 

Management Policy and Standards. 


follows: Replace "insurance required by paragraph 5.06" with "Builder's Risk 

insurance coverage,” if Builder's Risk insurance coverage is required by the 

ECUA Risk Management Policy and Standards. 


follows: Delete "either"; delete "or CONTRACTOR"; replace "the other party" 

with "CONTRACTOR"; replace "Article 5" with "the Contract Documents"; and 

replace "the objecting party" with "OWNER." 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Supplementary General Conditions 00016 – 1 



Amend the second sentence of paragraph 5.09.A of the General Conditions as 

follows: Delete "OWNER and"; delete "each"; and replace "the other" with 

"OWNER.” 

Amend the third sentence of paragraph 5.09.A of the General Conditions as 

follows: Replace "either party" and "such party" with "CONTRACTOR" and 

replace "the other party" with "OWNER.” 

Amend the fourth sentence of paragraph 5.09.A of the General Conditions as 

follows: Replace "the other party" with "OWNER"; replace "such other party's" 

with "OWNER'S"; and replace "the party who was required to provide such 

coverage" with "CONTRACTOR.” 

GC-5.10.A 

GC-6.10 

GC-6.16.A 


follows: Replace "paragraph 5.06" with "the ECUA Risk Management Policy and 

Standards." 

Amend paragraph to add as follows: except as specifically excluded. 

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.16.A of the General 

Conditions, which shall read as follows: 

"B. In the event of a storm or a threatened storm OWNER may, in its 

discretion, require CONTRACTOR to secure the Work site and all loose 

materials, to stabilize all equipment at the Work site, and to suspend the Work 

until authorized by OWNER to resume the Work. No adjustment to the Contract 

Price shall be made on account of such action by OWNER." 

GC-6.20 

GC-12.01.B.3 

Delete paragraph 6.20 of the General Conditions in its entirety. Indemnifications 

obligations of CONTRACTOR shall be as shown in the ECUA Risk Management 

Policy and Standards. 

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 12.01.B.3 of the General 


"4. In no event shall any adjustment in the Contract Price be made 

on account of damages for delay, impact claims or similar claims arising out of 

any change in the Work." 

GC-14.02.C.1 

GC-16.01 

Delete paragraph 14.02.C.1 of the General Conditions in its entirety. 

Delete the second sentence in paragraph 16.01.A in its entirety. Add a new 

paragraph immediately after paragraph 16.01.A of the General Conditions, which 

shall read as follows: 

GC-17.02.A 

“B. OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that in the event of any 

dispute or claim relating to, arising out of, or interpreting the contract documents 

delineating their contractual relationship, all such disputes or claims shall be 

fully, finally and exclusively decided by a State court of competent jurisdiction 

sitting in Escambia County, Florida. Additionally, OWNER and CONTRACTOR 

knowingly and willingly hereby waive their respective rights to have any such 

disputes or claims decided by a jury; instead, their sole relief shall be via a bench 

trial in which the judge alone sits as the finder of fact.” 

Add a new paragraph immediately after paragraph 17.02.A of the General 




HMMF No. 227905/ECUA No.CS-141B

"B. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the 

essence of the Agreement." 

GC-17.04.A 


follows: Add the following after Contract Documents in the fourth line of the 

paragraph, “including, but not limited to, the Hold 

Harmless/Indemnification/Payment on Behalf of ECUA provisions of the Risk 

Management Policy and Standards. 




HMMF No. 227905/ECUA No.CS-141B

ATTACHMENT A 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Special Conditions 00017A – 1 



ATTACHMENT A 




ATTACHMENT A 




ATTACHMENT A 




SPECIAL CONDITIONS 

Where there may be a conflict between this section and other sections or plans, this Section shall prevail: 

1. Owner Direct Purchase of Supplies, Materials and Equipment: 

A. The Contractor shall select, describe, prepare shop drawings, pursueand otherwise be 

responsible for selecting all supplies, materials and equipment to be purchased pursuant to 

this Project. The Contractor shall also identify the vendor from whom the materials and 

equipment will be purchased pursuant to this Project. Whenever those materials and 

equipment are ready for purchase, however, it shall notify the Owner accordingly. 

B. The Owner shall, at its sole discretion, have the option to purchase directly from the supplier 

or vendor, any supplies, materials or equipment included in the Contractor’s bid for the 

Contract. The Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to assign to the Owner 

agreements with suppliers for such goods. The Contractor shall, prior to any significant 

purchase of supplies, materials or equipment and within forty-five days of the issuance of the 

Notice to Proceed submit, and update monthly thereafter, for consideration by the Owner, a 

list of all supplies, materials or equipment to be purchased which in the aggregate costs 

$25,000 or more, organized by supplier or vendor. Such list shall include a brief description 

of the supplies, materials or equipment and the name and address of the supplier or vendor. 

Goods not required for the performance of the Contract shall not be included in this list. The 

Owner reserves the right to delete or add items to this direct purchase list when it deems it to 

be in the Owner’s best interest. 

C. If the Owner decides to purchase supplies, materials and/or equipment directly, the 

Contractor shall furnish the Owner in writing such information as is reasonably necessary and 

sufficient for the Owner to issue its Owner purchase order for the requested item. 

Attachment A to these Special Conditions is the General Provisions applicable to Purchase 

Orders issued by the Owner. Some of the generic conditions may not be in full agreement 

with the Special Conditions of the contract. Any difference will be addressed in the Purchase 

Order text (e.g., items are to be shipped F.O.B. manufacturer) as a clarification. The 

Contractor’s Terms and Conditions may be more stringent than these but cannot be any less 

stringent. 

D. Owner will then issue the purchase order directly to the vendor along with a copy of its 

certificate of exemption. In turn, the vendor shall invoice the Owner directly for the materials 

and equipment, and the Owner will be responsible for and pay that invoice directly. 

E. The Contractor shall immediately notify all subcontractors and material and equipment 

vendors and suppliers of the Owner’s intent to reduce the construction cost of the project by 

the direct purchase of properties, materials, et cetera, in the manner herein described and 

the Contractor shall not withhold his consent to the arrangement. 

F. The Owner will be responsible for accepting and receiving all materials and equipment 

purchased under this Agreement. Prior to accepting receipt of said materials and equipment, 

however, the Owner may request that the Contractor inspect said materials and equipment 

and compare them against the Bill of Materials for conformance therewith, and the Contractor 

shall perform this duty immediately upon such request. In the performance of this inspection, 

the Contractor shall also verify that the materials and equipment conform to the plans and 

specifications and determine that they are not defective. Upon such representation by the 

Contractor, the Owner will accept and receive the materials and equipment. 

G. As the equitable and legal owner of the materials and equipment purchased under this 

Agreement, the Owner shall bear the risk of loss from the time of purchase, while in transit, 

through receipt, and until such time as the Owner presents those materials and equipment to 

the Contractor for installation, use, or storage in the event installation or use is not possible or 

practical at that time. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Special Conditions 00017 – 1 



H. Subsequent to Owner's accepting and receiving the materials and equipment purchased 

under this Agreement, the Owner may immediately present said materials and equipment to 

the Contractor for installation or use, and the Contractor shall accept possession at that time. 

Should the Contractor not be able or in a position to immediately install or use the materials 

and equipment, the Contractor shall properly store and safeguard those goods and materials 

until such time as it is able to install or use them; this responsibility includes conformance to 

the equipment manufacturers' written guidelines for short and long-term storage. While in 

possession of these goods and materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of 

replacing or repairing any goods or materials lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed, as well as 

processing any warranty claims for defective goods and materials. 

I. The Contract amount, as due the Contractor under the Contract, shall be reduced by the sum 

of all amounts paid by the Owner for materials and equipment purchased under this 

Agreement, including any shipping, handling, or other, similar charges paid by the Owner, 

plus all of the savings of sales and use taxes. Attachment B to these Special Conditions 

provides examples of how to handle several different types of changes that might occur 

during the course of the contract. 

J. The Contractor shall submit his proposal for the Base Bid and each Alternate with the 

inclusion of all required taxes, including applicable sales and use taxes, the same as if the 

taxes were to be paid. Any sales and use tax savings will be realized during the performance 

of the Contract. 

K. Any costs incurred by the Contractor associated with the Owner’s direct purchases, shall be 

included in the base bid proposal for work and additional compensation for such costs shall 

not be due. 

L. By virtue of its payment of material and equipment invoices, the Owner further intends to 

benefit from any discounts offered for timely payment. In consideration of Contractor's efforts 

to assist Owner in achieving such discounts, all such discounts actually achieved shall be 

shared equally between Owner and Contractor. 

M. The Owner shall not be liable for delays in the work caused by delays in delivery of or defects 

in the materials supplied in accordance with these requirements, nor shall such delays or 

defects excuse Contractor in whole or in part from its obligation to timely perform the 

Contract. 

N. In the event Contractor objects to the payment of any supplier’s invoice for materials 

purchased directly by the Owner, Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner, provide 

all assistance, records and testimony necessary or convenient for the Owner to resolve the 

supplier’s claim for payment. 

O. A separate itemization of all Owner issued purchase orders shall be submitted with each 

application for payment. 

P. The Contractor shall coordinate with the vendors to establish the Contractor’s delivery 

schedule. This schedule shall be supplied to the Owner by the vendor with the Contractor’s 

written concurrence within thirty (30) calendar days of the execution of the Purchase Order or 

the Contract, whichever occurs last. 

Q. Vendor shall adjust his production schedule or provide for equipment storage such that actual 

delivery to the project site occurs at or within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date as 

established with the Contractor unless such delivery is delayed at the written request of the 

Contractor. 

R. Should the Contractor request delivery beyond the agreed schedule, the Contractor shall pay 

all costs of extended equipment storage. 

S. Should the vendor not deliver any component within the appointed time frame, the Contractor 

shall endeavor to minimize the project impact and shall advise the Owner of the impact of the 




delivery status. Contractor’s sole remedy shall be limited to an extension of the contract time 

to offset the actual impact to the project of the equipment delivery delays in accordance with 

Paragraph 12.02 of the Standard General Conditions of the construction contract. 

2. To maintain contract plan clarity, all system and equipment components may not be shown. 

Contractor is responsible to furnish and install all equipment, fittings, adaptors, connectors, piping, 

valves and other components to provide fully functional equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s 

requirements. 

3. ECUA will obtain the necessary Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP). The 

Contractor will obtain all other required permits. The Contractor will comply with all permit conditions 

and regulations of any governing agency. 

4. The Contractor shall provide a work plan, project schedule, payment schedule of values and shop 

drawing submittal schedule to the Project Engineer within 10 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. 

All major revisions must be approved in writing. The Contractor shall also provide the Owner and 

Engineer with a list of emergency, non-business hour, phone numbers for principal staff for project. 

5. Contractor shall utilize ECUA solid waste collection services for disposal of all construction and 

demolition waste. Contractor shall pay standard fees for disposal. 

Standard Fees are as follows: 

a. A 30 yd. roll-off construction container has a one time delivery fee of $21.84. 

plus a Rental fee of $1.73 per day (pro-rated) 

plus a Hauling fee of $119.60 per each occurrence (when container is full) 

plus a Disposal fee of $3.00 p/yd for each occurrence = $90.00. This is for construction / 

demolition debris only. 

b. There is an additional fee of $36.30 per ton for non-construction debris. 

6. Contractor shall present all submittals to the Engineer, as PDF documents, through e-Builder. For 

any submittal in excess of forty (40) pages and all large format print (greater than 8.5x11), Contractor 

shall also submit two (2) bound hard copies to the Engineer, not to be returned. All submittals shall 

be presented with the name of the project and submittal number identified on the cover which shall be 

clear, legible and clearly identified as to the material(s) to be specifically reviewed by the Engineer. 

Engineer shall review and comment on submittals through e-Builder only. Contractor is required to 

have one (1) hard copy of all approved submittals on-site during construction. Telefaxed copies of 

submittals are not to be accepted for review. 

7. Contours, topography and profiles of the ground shown on the Drawings are believed to be 

reasonably correct, but are not guaranteed to be absolutely so and are presented only as a 

reasonable approximation. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify all elevations required to 

successfully complete the work. 

8. The Contractor shall maintain prominent and clear labeling of its company name and its local phone 

number on all company owned or leased vehicles on the project site at all times during construction 

activities. 

9. The Contractor shall be responsible for all required FDEP Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 

Compliance and soil erosion and sediment control measures. The Contractor will ensure that erosion 

control is installed and maintained for the duration of the project and until final project site stabilization 

is established. The contractor will insure that erosion control is implemented and maintained for all 

wetlands, ditches, steep slopes, storm water inlets and other environmental and aesthetic areas 

adjacent to the project. Costs for stormwater pollution prevention and erosion and sediment control 

measures shall be included in the lump sum price bid for Prevention, Control and Abatement of 

Erosion and Water Pollution. 

10. Contractor is advised that existing water mains may be of various pipe materials, including asbestos 

cement. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of existing water mains during 




construction and shall be responsible for repairing any pipes damaged during construction. Repair 

sections shall be PVCP or DI. The Contractor shall comply with all work site, air emission, solid waste 

and personal safety and protection regulations as related to the excavation, exposure, cutting, 

handling, containment and disposal of existing water main pipe material. The removal, encapsulation 

or enclosure, storage and disposal of pipe materials containing asbestos shall be in accordance with 

Sections 455.301 through 455.309 of the Florida State Statutes, American Water Works Association 

Manual of Water Supply Practices No. M16 “Work Practices for Asbestos – Cement Pipe,” OSHA 

29CFR 1910.100, 1926.1101 Appendix F, Asbestos NESHAP; 40CFR 61-Subpart M, 40CFR 763- 

Appendix D and all other industry and regulatory requirements. 

11. ECUA will issue a final acceptance for the contract once the specified system becomes operational. 

Final acceptance will also be contingent on the acceptable restoration of all areas disturbed during 

construction. ECUA will also require the Contractor to provide his written warranty, release of lien, 

and acceptable “as-builts.” Upon final payment to the Contractor by the owner, the Contractor’s 

warranty will begin. 

12. Unless otherwise specified, the contractor will be required to limit construction to the hours of 7:00 AM 

to 8:00 PM, or to within daylight hours, whichever is more restrictive. All internal combustion-powered 

equipment and/or standby power generators shall have, as a minimum, a residential grade silencer 

(muffler) for equipment to be operating beyond the hours of operation allowed by local Noise 

Attenuation Ordinance requirements. The equipment shall be noise attenuated to emit a maximum 

noise level of 80 dBA at 30 feet from the equipment, unless otherwise required by local ordinance. 

13. All information transmitted to the Engineer and Owner shall be submitted in an electronic format using 

the “e-Builder” Web-based Project Management and Collaboration system. The Engineer will 

approve the following information via the “e-Builder” system: shop drawings, RFIs, Pay Requests, 

Purchase Orders, Field Directives, Change Orders, Construction Schedules, Project Photos, etc. The 

“e-Builder” software will also be used to release all plan and spec modifications throughout the 

construction project. The Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing all software licenses needed 

by the Contractor and its sub-contractors. The Owner and Engineer will provide their own licenses. 

Paper documents will not be accepted by the Owner or Engineer. “e-Builder” is located at the 

following location: 1800 NW 69 th Avenue, Suite 201, Plantation, FL 33313. The contact is Candace 

Amirault who may be reached at 954-556-6712 or camirault@e-builder.net. 

14. The Engineer's review of Shop Drawings and Samples submitted by the Contractor in accordance 

with Section 00015 Subsection 6.17 shall be reviewed without expense to the Contractor for the 

original submittal and first resubmittal, in response to the Engineer’s review of the original submittal, 

only. However, beginning with the second resubmittal, and for each subsequent resubmittals 

thereafter, the Contractor shall pay the cost of the Engineer's review. Payment shall be made in the 

form of a check, made payable to the Engineer in the amount of $500.00 and submitted with each 

required resubmittal. Second and subsequent resubmittals made without payment shall be returned 

to the Contractor without review and marked as incomplete. 

15. The contract time may be extended due to the occurrence of abnormal weather. Attachment B to 

these Special Conditions provides clarification on the procedure that ECUA will follow in consideration 

of these events. 





APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT Date: 04/27/10 

TO (OWNER): PROJECT: APPLICATION NO: 01 DISTRIBUTION TO: 

ECUA Emergency Operations Support Addition X OWNER 

9255 Sturdevant Street & Alterations to the Customer Services Building PERIOD TO: X ENGINEER 

Pensacola, FL 32514-0311 X CONTRACTOR 

FROM (CONTRACTOR): VIA (ENGINEER): APPLICATION DATE: 

Hatch Mott MacDonald 

5111 N. 12th Ave, Pensacola, FL 32504 CONTRACT DATE: 

CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 

1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM $0.00 

CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY 2. NET CHANGE BY CHANGE ORDERS $0.00 

Change Orders approved in ADDITIONS DEDUCTIONS 3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 + Line 2) $0.00 

previous months by Owner 4. ENCUMBRANCES: 

TOTAL a. Total Purchase Orders Issued by Owner (To Date) $0.00 

Number Date Approved b. Anticipated Tax Savings on Owner Issued POs $0.00 

c. TOTAL ENCUMBRANCES: (Line 4a + Line 4b) $0.00 

d. CONTRACT VALUE LESS ENCUMBRANCES: (Line 3 - Line 4c) $0.00 

5. EARNED TO DATE: 

a. Percentage of Work Complete-Excluding Owner Purchased Materials #DIV/0! 

b. Stored Materials - For Verification Only (See Attached) $0.00 

c. TOTAL EARNED TO DATE: (From Approved Schedule of Values) $0.00 

6. RETAINAGE: (% of Line 5C) 10% $0.00 

TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 7. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE (Line 5c less Line 6) $0.00 

8. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT (Line 7 from prior certificate) $0.00 

The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, 9. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE (Line 7 less Line 8) $0.00 

and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance 10. TAX SAVINGS AGREEMENT: (Through Summary No. N/A ) 

with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for a. Vendor Invoices Processed @ Contractors Request $0.00 

which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the b. Tax Savings on Processed Invoices $0.00 

Owner, and that the current payment shown herein is now due. c. Total Tax Savings Invoices & Credits Processed (Line 10a + 10b) $0.00 

d. Vendor retainages unpaid @ Contractors Request $0.00 

e. Remaining Balance on Encumb POs and Tax Savings (4c less 10c) $0.00 

CONTRACTOR 11. BAL. TO FINISH, INCL RETAINAGE & ENCUMB (Line 3 - Ln 7 - Ln 10c) $0.00 

12. CONTRACTOR'S BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE (Ln 4d - Ln 7) $0.00 

ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT 

By: Date: 04/27/10 In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on-site observations and the data comprising the above application, 

the Engineer certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Engineer's knowledge, information and belief the Work has 

progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is 

State of: Florida County of: Escambia entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. 

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 

Notary Public: 

ENGINEER: 

AMOUNT CERTIFIED $ 

(Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied for.) 

By: 

Date: 

This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named herein. 

Issuance, payment, and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. 


and Alterations to the Customer Services Bldg. 

HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP No. CS141E Contractor Pay Application 00018 – 1

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (CONSTRUCTION) EXHIBIT WWFS-04Li 

Florida Department of Environmental Protection 

Bureau of Water Facilities Funding 

Supplementary Conditions 

for 

Formally Advertised 

Construction Procurement 



HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP No. CS141E 

FDEP-1 

Revision 4 

September 1999 

FDEP Supplementary Conditions (Construction) 00019 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 

Article 

Number Article Title Page 

1 DEFINITIONS FDEP-4 

2 PRIVITY OF AGREEMENT/CONTRACT FDEP-6 

3 PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS FDEP-6 

4 RESOLUTION OF PROTESTS AND CLAIMS/DISPUTES FDEP-7 

5 CHANGES TO THE BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FDEP-7 

6 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS; SUBMISSION OF BIDS; 

OPENING OF BIDS 

FDEP-7 

7 BONDS AND INSURANCE FDEP-8 

8 AWARD OF AGREEMENT/CONTRACT FDEP-9 

9 CONTRACT TIME AND NOTICE TO PROCEED FDEP-9 

10 ITEMIZED CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN; 

CONSTRUCTION AND PAYMENT SCHEDULES 

FDEP-9 

11 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS FDEP-10 

12 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 

CONSTRUCTION PERMIT(S) 

FDEP-10 

13 ENGINEER FDEP-10 

14 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT FDEP-10 

15 ACCESS TO RECORDS FDEP-10 

16 ACCESS TO WORK SITE(S) FDEP-10 

*17 MINORITY AND WOMEN'S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES FDEP-11 

*18 VIOLATING FACILITIES (SECTION 306 OF THE CLEAN AIR 

ACT, SECTION 508 OF THE CLEAN WATER ACT, AND 

EXECUTIVE ORDER 11738) 

FDEP-11 

*19 DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (EXECUTIVE ORDER 12549) FDEP-13 




FDEP-2 

Revision 4 



20 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE 

ORDER 11246) 

Appendix Appendix Title 

Letter 

*A CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, 

INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION - LOWER 

TIER COVERED TRANSACTIONS 

FDEP-13 

Page 

FDEP-16 

B 

NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 

TO ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY 

(EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 

FDEP-18 

C GOALS AND TIMETABLES FOR MINORITIES AND FEMALES FDEP-20 

D EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE FDEP-23 

E NOTICE TO BE POSTED FDEP-25 

F 

STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT 

OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT 

SPECIFICATIONS (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 

FDEP-26 

G CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH 41 CFR 60-1.7: 

REPORTS AND OTHER REQUIRED INFORMATION 

FDEP-31 

H CERTIFICATION OF NONSEGGREGATED FACILITIES FDEP-33 

*NOTE: 

Articles 17, 18 19 and Appendix A only apply to Federal CAP Grant Projects. 




FDEP-3 

Revision 4 



FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


The intent of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) Supplementary Conditions is 

to complement and supplement other provisions of the Bidding Documents. However, if there is any 

conflict between the FDEP Supplementary Conditions and other provisions of the Bidding Documents, 

the FDEP Supplementary Conditions shall take precedence over the other provisions except when the 

other provisions are similar to, but more stringent than, the FDEP Supplementary Conditions. When 

other provisions of the Bidding Documents are similar to, but more stringent than, the FDEP 

Supplementary Conditions, the more stringent provisions shall apply. 

ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 

1.1. Wherever used in these Supplementary Conditions (except in the appendices to these 

Supplementary Conditions), the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to 

both the singular and plural thereof. 

1.1.1. Addendum - A written or graphic instrument that is issued prior to the opening of bids and 

that clarifies, corrects, or changes the Bidding Documents. 

1.1.2. Agreement or Contract - The written agreement between the Owner and the Contractor 

covering the Work to be performed and furnished; these Supplementary Conditions and other 

Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement/Contract and made a part thereof as provided 

therein. 

1.1.3. Application for Payment - The form that is accepted by the Engineer and used by the 

Contractor in requesting progress and/or final payments and that is to include such supporting 

documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 

1.1.4. Bid - The offer or proposal of a bidder submitted on the prescribed form and setting forth the 

price(s) for the Work to be performed and furnished. 

1.1.5. Bidder - Any person, firm, or corporation that submits a bid directly to the Owner. 

1.1.6. Bidding Documents - The Advertisement for Bids or the Invitation to Bid, the Instructions to 

Bidders or the Information for Bidders, the Bid Form, the proposed Contract Documents, and all 

addenda. 

1.1.7. Bond - An instrument of security. 

1.1.8. Change Order - A document that is recommended by the Engineer and signed by the 

Contractor and the Owner; that authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an 

adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time; and that is issued on or after the Effective Date 

of the Agreement/Contract. 




FDEP-4 

Revision 4 



1.1.9. Contract Documents - The Agreement/Contract; the Contractor's Bid when attached as an 

exhibit to the Agreement/Contract; the Performance and Payment Bond(s); the General Conditions; 

the Supplementary Conditions (including these Supplementary Conditions); the Specifications 

(written technical descriptions of material, equipment, construction systems, standards, and 

workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto); the 

Drawings (drawings that show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and furnished); 

all addenda that pertain to the Contract Documents; and all change orders. 

1.1.10. Contract Price - The moneys payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Contract 

Documents as stated in the Agreement/Contract. 

1.1.11. Contract Time - The number of days or the date stated in the Contract Documents for 

completion of the Work. 

1.1.12. Contractor - The person, firm, or corporation with whom or which the Owner enters into the 

Agreement/Contract. 

1.1.13. Effective Date of the Agreement/Contract - The date indicated in the Agreement/Contract on 

which the Agreement/Contract becomes effective, or if no such date is indicated in the 

Agreement/Contract, the date on which the Agreement/Contract is signed and delivered by the last of 

the two parties to sign and deliver the Agreement/Contract. 

1.1.14. Engineer - The person, firm, or corporation named as such in the Contract Documents. 

1.1.15. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) - A historically Black college or university or a 

business that is (a) certified as socially and economically disadvantaged by the Small Business 

Administration, (b) certified as an MBE by a state or Federal agency, or (c) an independent business 

concern which is at least 51-percent owned and controlled by minority group members. (A minority 

group member is an individual who is a citizen of the United States and one of the following: [i] 

Black American; [ii] Hispanic American [with origins from Puerto Rico, Mexico, Cuba, or South or 

Central America]; [iii] Native American [American Indian, Eskimo, Aleut, or native Hawaiian]; or 

[iv] Asian-Pacific American [with origins from Japan, China, the Philippines, Vietnam, Korea, 

Samoa, Guam, the U.S. Trust Territories of the Pacific, Northern Marianas, Laos, Cambodia, Taiwan, 

or the Indian Subcontinent].) 

1.1.16. Notice to Proceed - The written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date 

on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which the Contractor shall start to perform 

its obligations under the Contract Documents. 

1.1.17. Owner - The local government (municipality, county, district, or authority; or any agency 

thereof; or a combination of two or more of the foregoing acting jointly) with which the Florida 

Department of Environmental Protection may execute, or has executed, a State revolving fund loan 

agreement and for which the Work is to be provided. 




FDEP-5 

Revision 4 



1.1.18. Project - The total construction or facilities described in a State revolving fund loan 

agreement between the Florida Department of Environmental Protection and the Owner, of which the 

Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part. 

1.1.19. Subcontract - A direct contract between a subcontractor and the Contractor, or any other 

subcontractor at any tier, for the furnishing of goods (material and equipment) or the performance of 

services (including construction) necessary to complete the Work. 

1.1.20. Subcontractor - A person, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor, 

or any other subcontractor at any tier, for the furnishing of goods (material and equipment) or the 

performance of services (including construction) necessary to complete the Work. 

1.1.21. Successful Bidder - The lowest responsive, responsible bidder to whom or which the Owner 

intends to award the Agreement/Contract. 

1.1.22. Women's Business Enterprise (WBE) - A business that is (a) certified as a WBE by a state or 

Federal agency or (b) an independent business concern which is at least 51-percent owned and 

controlled/operated by women. (Determination of whether a business is at least 51-percent owned by 

women shall be made without regard to community property laws [e.g., an otherwise qualified WBE 

that is 51-percent owned by a married woman in a community property state will not be disqualified 

because the married woman's husband has a 50-percent interest in the married woman's share of the 

business; similarly, a business that is 51-percent owned by a married man and 49-percent owned by 

women will not become a qualified WBE by virtue of the married man's wife having a 50-percent 

interest in the married man's share of the business].) 

1.1.23. Work - The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof 

required to be performed and furnished under the Contract Documents; Work is the result of 

performing services, furnishing labor, furnishing material and equipment, and incorporating material 

and equipment into the construction as required by the Contract Documents. 

ARTICLE 2 - PRIVITY OF AGREEMENT/CONTRACT 

2.1. The Owner expects to finance this Agreement/Contract with assistance from the Florida 

Department of Environmental Protection, which administers a State revolving fund loan program 

supported in part with funds directly made available by grants from the United States Environmental 

Protection Agency. Neither the State of Florida nor the United States (nor any of their departments, 

agencies, or employees) will be a party to this Agreement/Contract or any lower-tier subcontract. 

ARTICLE 3 - PROCUREMENT REQUIREMENTS 

3.1. This Agreement/Contract and the Owner's solicitation and award of this Agreement/Contract are 

subject to requirements contained in Chapter 62-503 (Revolving Loan Program), Florida Administrative 

Code. 




FDEP-6 

Revision 4 



ARTICLE 4 - RESOLUTION OF PROTESTS AND CLAIMS/DISPUTES 

Resolution of Protests Concerning the Owner's Solicitation and/or Award of this 

Agreement/Contract: 

4.1. Protests concerning the Owner's solicitation and/or award of this Agreement/Contract must be filed 

in writing with the Owner to be considered. 

4.2. All timely written protests concerning the Owner's solicitation and/or award of this 

Agreement/Contract are to be resolved in accordance with the Owner's dispute resolution process. A 

copy of the ordinance(s), resolution(s), or written policy(policies) that set forth the Owner's dispute 

resolution process is included elsewhere in the Bidding Documents or is to be made available by the 

Owner upon request. 

4.3. Neither the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP) nor the United States 

Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) will become a party to, or have any role in resolving, 

protests concerning the Owner's solicitation and/or award of this Agreement/Contract. Protest decisions 

made by the Owner can not be appealed to the FDEP or the USEPA. 

Resolution of Claims and Disputes Between the Owner and the Contractor: 

4.4. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, all claims and disputes between the Owner 

and the Contractor arising out of, or relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach thereof are to be 

decided by arbitration (if the Owner and the Contractor mutually agree) or in a court of competent 

jurisdiction within the State of Florida. 

4.5. Neither the Florida Department of Environmental Protection nor the United States Environmental 

Protection Agency will become a party to, or have any role in resolving, claims and disputes between the 

Owner and the Contractor. 

ARTICLE 5 - CHANGES TO THE BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

5.1. All changes to the Bidding Documents made subsequent to the Florida Department of 

Environmental Protection's (FDEP's) acceptance of the Bidding Documents and prior to the opening of 

bids are to be documented via addendum(addenda) to the Bidding Documents; all changes to the Contract 

Documents made after the opening of bids are to be documented by change order(s) to the Contract 

Documents. The Owner shall submit all addenda and change orders to the FDEP. 

ARTICLE 6 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS; SUBMISSION OF BIDS; OPENING OF BIDS 

Advertisement for Bids: 

6.1. At a minimum, this Agreement/Contract is to be advertised for bids in local and statewide 

newspapers. 




FDEP-7 

Revision 4 



Submission of Bids: 

6.2. Bidders shall submit their bids at the place and by the deadline indicated elsewhere in the Bidding 

Documents. 

Opening of Bids: 

6.3. Bids are to be opened and read aloud publicly at the time and place indicated elsewhere in the 

Bidding Documents. 

ARTICLE 7 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 

Bid Guarantees: 

7.1. Each bidder's bid is to be accompanied by a bid guarantee made payable to the Owner in an 

amount at least equal to five percent of the bidder's maximum bid price and in the form of a certified 

check or bid bond. 

Performance and Payment Bond(s): 

7.2. The Contractor shall furnish a combined performance and payment bond in an amount at least 

equal to 100 percent of the Contract Price (or, if required elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the 

Contractor shall furnish separate performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to 

100 percent of the Contract Price) as security for the faithful performance and payment of all the 

Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This(these) bond(s) are to be delivered to the 

Owner by the Contractor along with the executed Agreement/Contract. The Owner shall forward a copy 

of this(these) bond(s) to the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. 

Insurance: 

7.3. The Owner and/or the Contractor (as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents) shall 

purchase and maintain, during the period of construction, such liability insurance as is appropriate for the 

Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims that may arise out of, or 

result from, the Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work (whether the Work is to be 

performed or furnished by the Contractor or any subcontractor at the Work site) and the Contractor's 

other obligations under the Contract Documents. This insurance is to include workers' compensation 

insurance, comprehensive general liability insurance, comprehensive automobile liability insurance, and 

contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's indemnification obligations and is to be 

written for not less than the limits of liability and coverages determined by the Owner or required by law, 

whichever is greater. 

7.4. The Owner and/or the Contractor (as required elsewhere in the Contract Documents) shall 

purchase and maintain, during the period of construction, property insurance upon the Work at the Work 

site in an amount equal to the full replacement cost of the Work or the full insurable value of the Work. 

This insurance is to include the interests of the Owner, the Contractor, and all subcontractors at the Work 

site (all of whom are to be listed as insureds or additional insured parties); is to insure against the perils 




FDEP-8 

Revision 4 



of fire and extended coverage; and is to include "all-risk" insurance for physical loss or damage due to 

theft,vandalism and malicious mischief, collapse, water damage, and/or all other risks against which 

coverage is obtainable. 

7.5. Before any Work at the Work site is started, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner certificates 

of insurance that the Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Paragraphs 7.3 

and 7.4 of this Article and other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Owner shall deliver to the 

Contractor certificates of insurance that the Owner is required to purchase and maintain in accordance 

with Paragraphs 7.3 and 7.4 of this Article and other provisions of the Contract Documents. 

ARTICLE 8 - AWARD OF AGREEMENT/CONTRACT 

8.1. If this Agreement/Contract is awarded, it is to be awarded to the lowest responsive, responsible 

bidder. A fixed-price (lump-sum or unit-price or both) agreement/contract is to be used. A clear 

explanation of the method of evaluating bids and the basis for awarding this Agreement/Contract are 

included elsewhere in the Bidding Documents. All bids may be rejected when in the best interest of the 

Owner. 

ARTICLE 9 - CONTRACT TIME AND NOTICE TO PROCEED 

Contract Time: 

9.1. The number of days within which, or the date by which, the Work is to be completed and ready for 

final payment (the Contract Time) is set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 

Notice to Proceed: 

9.2. The Owner shall give the Contractor a notice to proceed fixing the date on which the Contract 

Time will commence to run. The Owner shall forward a copy of this notice to proceed to the Florida 

Department of Environmental Protection. 

ARTICLE 10 - ITEMIZED CONSTRUCTION COST BREAKDOWN; CONSTRUCTION AND 

PAYMENT SCHEDULES 

10.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, within ten calendar days after the Effective Date of this 

Agreement/Contract, an itemized construction cost breakdown and construction and payment schedules. 

10.1.1. The itemized construction cost breakdown, or schedule of values, is to include quantities and 

prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and is to subdivide the Work into component parts in 

sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices are to 

include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 

10.1.2. The construction, or progress, schedule is to indicate the Contractor's estimated starting and 

completion dates for the various stages of the Work and is to show both the projected cost of Work 

completed and the projected percentage of Work completed versus Contract Time. 




FDEP-9 

Revision 4 



10.1.3. The payment schedule is to show the Contractor's projected progress and final payments 

cumulatively by month. 

ARTICLE 11 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 

11.1. The Owner shall furnish all lands and shall obtain all rights-of-ways and easements upon which 

the Work is to be performed and furnished. 

ARTICLE 12 - FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 

CONSTRUCTION PERMIT(S) 

12.1. The Owner shall obtain the appropriate Florida Department of Environmental Protection 

construction permit(s) required for the Work. 

ARTICLE 13 - ENGINEER 

13.1. The Owner shall employ a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida to oversee 

the Work. 

ARTICLE 14 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

14.1. The Contractor's applications for payment are to be accompanied by such certificates or 

documents as may be reasonably required. The Owner shall forward a copy of such certificates or 

documents as may be reasonably required to the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. 

ARTICLE 15 - ACCESS TO RECORDS 

15.1. Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Florida Department of Environmental Protection, 

and the United States Environmental Protection Agency shall have access to, for the purpose of 

inspection, any books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor that are pertinent to this 

Agreement/Contract. The Contractor shall retain all books, documents, papers, and records pertinent 

to this Agreement/Contract for a period of three years after receiving and accepting final payment 

under this Agreement/Contract. 

ARTICLE 16 - ACCESS TO WORK SITE(S) 

16.1. Authorized representatives of the Owner, the Florida Department of Environmental Protection 

(FDEP), and the United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) shall have access to the 

Work site(s) at any reasonable time. The Contractor shall cooperate (including making available 

working copies of documents and supplementary materials) during Work site inspections conducted by 

the Owner, the FDEP, or the USEPA. 




FDEP-10 

Revision 4 



NOTE: Articles 17, 18 19 and Appendix A only apply to Federal CAP Grant Projects. 

ARTICLE 17 - MINORITY AND WOMEN'S BUSINESS ENTERPRISES 

17.1. A goal of_____* percent of the Contract Price is established for Minority Business Enterprise 

(MBE) participation in the Work, and a goal of ______* percent of the Contract Price is established 

for Women's Business Enterprise (WBE) participation in the Work. If bidders or prospective 

contrators (including the Contractor) intend to let any lower-tier goods or services (including 

construction) subcontracts for any portion of the Work, they shall physically include these percentage 

goals for MBE and WBE participation in all solicitations for subcontracts and shall take affirmative 

steps to assure that MBEs and WBEs are utilized, when possible, as sources of goods and services. 

Affirmative steps are to include the following: (a) including small, minority, and women's businesses 

on solicitation lists; (b) assuring that small, minority, and women's businesses are solicited whenever 

they are potential sources; (c) dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into small tasks 

or quantities to permit maximum participation by small, minority, and women's businesses; (d) 

establishing delivery schedules, when requirements permit, that will encourage participation by small, 

minority, and women's businesses; and (e) using the services of the Small Business Administrative and 

the Office of Minority Business Enterprise of the United States Department of Commerce as 

appropriate. 

*The percentage goals for MBE and WBE participation are to be inserted by the Owner and are 

to be based upon the percentage goals that have been, or will be, stipulated in the State 

revolving fund loan agreement for the Owner's FDEP-assisted Project. 

17.2. Within ten calendar days after being notified of being the apparent Successful Bidder, the 

apparent Successful Bidder shall submit to the Owner documentation of the affirmative steps it has 

taken to utilize Minority and Women's Business Enterprises (MBEs and WBEs) in the Work and 

documentation of its intended use of MBEs and WBEs in the Work. The Owner shall keep this 

documentation on file and shall forward to the Florida Department of Environmental Protection a copy 

of the apparent Successful Bidder's documentation concerning its intended use of MBEs and WBEs in 

the Work. 

17.3. Minority and Women's Business Enterprise (MBE and WBE) participation in the Work is to be 

considered in the award of this Agreement/Contract. The Owner shall not execute this 

Agreement/Contract until the Florida Department of Environmental Protection has approved the extent 

of MBE and WBE participation in the Work. 

ARTICLE 18 - VIOLATING FACILITIES (SECTION 306 OF THE CLEAN AIR ACT, SECTION 

508 OF THE CLEAN WATER ACT, AND EXECUTIVE ORDER 11738) 

18.1. The Contractor, and all subcontractors at any tier, shall comply with all applicable standards, 

orders, or requirements issued under Section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857[h]), Section 

508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738 (Administration of the Clean Air 

Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act with Respect to Federal Contracts, Grants, or Loans), 

and 40 CFR Part 15, which prohibit the use, under nonexempt Federal contracts, grants, or loans, of 

facilities included on the United States Environmental Protection Agency's List of Violating Facilities. 




FDEP-11 

Revision 4 



18.2. In accordance with 40 CFR Part 15, if the price of this Agreement/Contract exceeds $100,000 

and/or if this Agreement/Contract is otherwise nonexempt from 40 CFR Part 15, the Contractor agrees 

to the following: 

18.2.1. the Contractor will not use any facility on the United States Environmental Protection 

Agency's List of Violating Facilities in the performance of this Agreement/Contract for the duration of 

time that the facility remains on the List; 

18.2.2. the Contractor will notify the Florida Department of Environmental Protection/United 

States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) if a facility it intends to use in the performance of 

this Agreement/Contract is on the USEPA's List of Violating Facilities or if it knows that a facility it 

intends to use in the performance of this Agreement/Contract has been recommended to be placed on 

the USEPA's List of Violating Facilities; and 

18.2.3. in the performance of this Agreement/Contract, the Contractor will comply with all 

requirements of the Clean Air Act and the Clean Water Act, including the requirements of Section 114 

of the Clean Air Act and Section 308 of the Clean Water Act, and all applicable clean air standards and 

clean water standards. 

18.3. If the Contractor, or any subcontractor at any tier, awards any lower-tier goods or services 

(including construction) subcontracts for any portion of the Work, it shall physically include in all such 

subcontracts the following provision: 

18.3.1. The Subcontractor shall comply with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements 

issued under Section 306 of the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 1857[h]), Section 508 of the Clean 

Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738 (Administration of the Clean Air Act and 

the Federal Water Pollution Control Act with Respect to Federal Contracts, Grants, or Loans), 

and 40 CFR Part 15, which prohibit the use, under nonexempt Federal contracts, grants, or 

loans, of facilities included on the United States Environmental Protection Agency's (USEPA's) 

List of Violating Facilities. In accordance with 40 CFR Part 15, if the price of this Subcontract 

exceeds $100,000 and/or if this Subcontract is otherwise nonexempt from 40 CFR Part 15, the 

Subcontractor agrees to the following: (a) the Subcontractor will not use any facility on the 

USEPA's List of Violating Facilities in the performance of this Subcontract for the duration of 

time that the facility remains on the List; (b) the Subcontractor will notify the Florida 

Department of Environmental Protection/USEPA if a facility it intends to use in the 

performance of this Subcontract is on the USEPA's List of Violating Facilities or if it knows 

that a facility it intends to use in the performance of this Subcontract has been recommended to 

be placed on the USEPA's List of Violating Facilities; and (c) in the performance of this 

Subcontract, the Subcontractor will comply with all requirements of the Clean Air Act and the 

Clean Water Act, including the requirements of Section 114 of the Clean Air Act and Section 

308 of the Clean Water Act, and all applicable clean air standards and clean water standards. 

In addition, if the Subcontractor awards any lower-tier goods or services (including 

construction) subcontracts under this Subcontract, the Subcontractor shall physically include 

this provision in all such subcontracts. 




FDEP-12 

Revision 4 



ARTICLE 19 - DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (EXECUTIVE ORDER 12549) 

19.1. If the price of this Agreement/Contract equals or exceeds $25,000, the Owner shall not award 

this Agreement/Contract, nor permit any lower-tier goods or services (including construction) 

subcontract with a price equaling or exceeding $25,000 to be awarded, to any party that is debarred or 

suspended or is otherwise excluded from, or ineligible for participation in, Federal assistance programs 

under Executive Order 12549 (Debarment and Suspension). 

19.2. The attention of all bidders or prospective contractors (including the Contractor) is directed to 

the certification/clause entitled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and 

Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transactions", which has been extracted from Appendix B 

to 40 CFR Part 32 and included as Appendix A to these Supplementary Conditions. The 

certification/clause entitled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and 

Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transactions" is applicable to this Agreement/Contract if 

the price of this Agreement/Contract equals or exceeds $25,000. 

19.3. If bidders or prospective contractors (including the Contractor), or any prospective 

subcontractors at any tier, intend to let any lower-tier goods or services (including construction) 

subcontracts for any portion of the Work, they shall physically include the certification/clause entitled 

"Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion - Lower Tier 

Covered Transactions", which is included as Appendix A to these Supplementary Conditions, in all 

lower-tier goods and services (including construction) subcontracts with a price equaling or exceeding 

$25,000 and in all solicitations for such subcontracts. 

ARTICLE 20 - EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 

20.1. If the price of this Agreement/Contract exceeds $10,000, the Contractor, and each construction 

subcontractor awarded a lower-tier construction subcontract with a price exceeding $10,000, shall 

comply with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 (Equal Employment Opportunity), as 

amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967, and as supplemented in United States 

Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR Part 60). 

20.2. The attention of all bidders or prospective contractors (including the Contractor) is directed to 

the following, all of which are applicable to this Agreement/Contract if the price of this 

Agreement/Contract exceeds $10,000: 

20.2.1. the "Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment 

Opportunity (Executive Order 11246)", which has been extracted from 41 CFR 60-4.2(d) and 

included as Appendix B to these Supplementary Conditions; 

20.2.2. the "Goals and Timetables for Minorities and Females", which are included as 

Appendix C to these Supplementary Conditions; 

20.2.3. the "Equal Opportunity Clause", which has been extracted from 41 CFR 60-1.4(b) and 

included as Appendix D to these Supplementary Conditions; 




FDEP-13 

Revision 4 



20.2.4. the "Notice to Be Posted", which has been extracted from 41 CFR 60-1.42(a) and 

included as Appendix E to these Supplementary Conditions; 

20.2.5. the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract 

Specifications (Executive Order 11246)", which have been extracted from 41 CFR 60-4.3(a) 

and included as Appendix F to these Supplementary Conditions; 

20.2.6. the "Certification of Compliance with 41 CFR 60-1.7: Reports and Other Required 

Information", which is required by 41 CFR 60-1.7(b) and is included as Appendix G to these 

Supplementary Conditions; and 

20.2.7. the "Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities", which is required by 41 CFR 60-1.8(b) 

and is included as Appendix H to these Supplementary Conditions. 

20.3. If bidders or prospective contractors (including the Contractor), or any prospective construction 

subcontractors at any tier, intend to let any lower-tier construction subcontracts for any portion of the 

Work, they shall physically include in all lower-tier construction subcontracts with a price exceeding 

$10,000 and in all solicitations for such subcontracts the "Notice of Requirement for Affirmative 

Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive Order 11246)", the "Goals and 

Timetables for Minorities and Females", the "Equal Opportunity Clause", the "Notice to Be Posted", 

the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications 

(Executive Order 11246)", the "Certification of Compliance with 41 CFR 60-1.7: Reports and Other 

Required Information", and the Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities", which are included as 

Appendices B through H to these Supplementary Conditions. 

20.4. If the price of this Agreement/Contract exceeds $10,000, all bidders shall complete and submit 

to the Owner, with their bids, the "Certification of Compliance with 41 CFR 60-1.7: Reports and Other 

Required Information", which is included as Appendix G to these Supplementary Conditions. In 

addition, if bidders (including the Contractor), or any prospective construction subcontractors at any 

tier, intend to let any lower-tier construction subcontracts for any portion of the Work, they shall 

obtain the "Certification of Compliance with 41 CFR 60-1.7: Reports and Other Required 

Information" from each prospective construction subcontractor that may be awarded a lower-tier 

construction subcontract with a price exceeding $10,000 and shall do so at the time bids or offers for 

each such subcontract are 

received or at the outset of negotiations for each such subcontract. 

20.5. If the price of this Agreement/Contract exceeds $10,000, the apparent Successful Bidder shall 

complete and submit to the Owner, within ten calendar days after being notified of being the apparent 

Successful Bidder, the "Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities", which is included as Appendix H to 

these Supplementary Conditions. In addition, if the Contractor, or any construction subcontractor at 

any tier, intends to let any lower-tier construction subcontracts for any portion of the Work, it shall 

obtain the "Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities" from each prospective construction 

subcontractor that will be awarded a lower-tier construction subcontract with a price exceeding 

$10,000 and shall do so before awarding each such subcontract. 




FDEP-14 

Revision 4 



20.6. If the price of this Agreement/Contract exceeds $10,000, the Owner shall give written notice to 

the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within ten working days of award 

of this Agreement/Contract. The notice is to include the name, address, and telephone number of the 

Contractor; the employer identification number of the Contractor; the dollar amount of this 

Agreement/Contract; the estimated starting and completion dates of this Agreement/Contract; the 

number of this Agreement/Contract; and the geographical area in which the Work is to be performed. 

If the price of this Agreement/Contract equals or exceeds $50,000 and if the Contractor has 50 or more 

employees, the Contractor shall file with the Florida Department of Environmental Protection 

(FDEP)/United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), within 30 calendar days after the 

award of this Agreement/Contract, a report on Standard Form 100 (EEO-1), which has been 

promulgated jointly by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, the Equal Employment 

Opportunity Commission, and Plans for Progress, unless the Contractor has submitted such a report 

within 12 months preceeding the date of award of this Agreement/Contract. In addition, the Contractor 

shall ensure that each construction subcontractor having 50 or more employees and a lower-tier 

construction subcontract with a price equaling or exceeding $50,000 also files with the FDEP/USEPA, 

within 30 calendar days after the award to it of the lower-tier construction subcontract, a report on 

Standard Form 100 (EEO-1) unless the construction subcontractor has submitted such a report within 

12 months preceding the date of award of the lower-tier construction subcontract. (Subsequent reports 

are to be submitted annually in accordance with 41 CFR 60-1.7(a) or at such other intervals as the 

Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs may require.) 




FDEP-15 

Revision 4 



NOTE: Articles 17, 18 19 and Appendix A only apply to Federal CAP Grant Projects. 

APPENDIX A TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND 

VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION - LOWER TIER COVERED TRANSACTIONS 

[Note: This certification/clause has been extracted from Appendix B to 

40 CFR Part 32 and is applicable to all FDEP-assisted goods and services (including construction) 

contracts and subcontracts with a price equaling or exceeding $25,000; this certification/clause is to be 

included in all FDEP-assisted goods and services (including construction) contracts and subcontracts 

with a price equaling or exceeding $25,000 and in all solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

Instructions for Certification 

1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the 

certification set out below. 

2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed 

when this transaction was entered into. If it is later determined that the prospective lower tier participant 

knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal 

Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available 

remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. 

3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which 

this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification 

was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. 

4. The terms "covered transaction", "debarred", "suspended", "ineligible", "lower tier covered 

transaction", "participant", "person", "primary covered transaction", "principal", "proposal", and 

"voluntarily excluded", as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage 

sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the person to which this 

proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations. 

5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed 

covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction 

with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation 

in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction 

originated. 

6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include 

this clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion 

- Lower Tier Covered Transactions", without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in 

all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions. 




FDEP-16 

Revision 4 



7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a 

lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from 

the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the 

method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but 

is not required to, check the Nonprocurement List. 

8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records 

in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information 

of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the 

ordinary course of business dealings. 

9. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a 

covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is 

suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition 

to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this 

transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment. 

Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary 

Exclusion - Lower Tier Covered Transactions 

(1) The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its 

principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily 

excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency. 

(2) Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this 

certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal. 

(3) The prospective lower-tier participant also certifies that it and its principals: 

(a) Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil 

judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with 

obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract 

under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State anti-trust statutes or commission of 

embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, 

or receiving stolen property; 

(b) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental 

entity (Federal, State or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (3)(a) 

of this certification; and 

(c) Have not within a three-year period preceding this proposal had one or more public transactions 

(Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default. Where the prospective lower-tier participant 

is unable to certify to any of the above, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this 

proposal. 




FDEP-17 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX B TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL 

EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 

[Note: This notice has been extracted from 41 CFR 60-4.2(d) and is applicable to all FDEP-assisted 

construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000; this notice is to be included in all 

FDEP-assisted construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 and in all 

solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

1. The Offeror's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard 

Federal Equal Employment Specifications" set forth herein. 

2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the 

Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on on all construction work in the covered area, are as 

follows: 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Timetables Goals for minority Goals for female 

participation for each participation in each 

trade 

trade 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Insert goals for 

Insert goals for 

each year. 

each year. 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or 

federally assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs construction work in a 

geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such 

geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor 

also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and nonfederally involved construction. 

The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be 

based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations 

required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours 

of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of 

the contract, and in each trade, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities 

and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees 

from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's 

goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. 

Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. 




FDEP-18 

Revision 4 



3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract 

Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of 

$10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The 

notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer 

identification number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated 

starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract is 

to be performed. 

4. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is 

_______________________________________________________________________________ 

(insert description of the geographical areas where the contract is to be performed giving the state, 

_______________________________________________________________________________ 

county and city, if any) 




FDEP-19 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX C TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


GOALS AND TIMETABLES FOR MINORITIES AND FEMALES 

[Note: These goals and timetables are the goals and timetables referred to in Paragraph 2 of the "Notice 

of Requirement for Affirmative Action to Ensure Equal Employment Opportunity (Executive Order 

11246)"; these goals and timetables are to be included in all FDEP-assisted construction contracts and 

subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 and in all solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

Appendix A 

The following goals and timetables for female utilization shall be included in all Federal and federally 

assisted construction contracts and subcontracts in excess of $10,000. The goals are applicable to the 

contractor's aggregate on-site construction workforce whether or not part of that workforce is 

performing work on a Federal or federally-assisted construction contract or subcontract. 

Area covered: Goals for Women apply nationwide. 

Goals and Timetables 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Timetable 

Goals (percent) 

Indefinite 6.9 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

Appendix B-80 

Until further notice, the following goals for minority utilization in each construction craft and trade shall 

be included in all Federal or federally assisted construction contracts and subcontracts in excess of 

$10,000 to be performed in the respective geographical areas. The goals are applicable to each 

nonexempt contractor's total onsite construction workforce, regardless of whether or not part of that 

workforce is performing work on a Federal, federally assisted or nonfederally related project, contract 

or subcontract. 

Construction contractors which are participating in an approved Hometown Plan (see 41 CFR 60-4.5) 

are required to comply with the goals of the Hometown Plan with regard to construction work they 

perform in the area covered by the Hometown Plan. With regard to all their other covered construction 

work, such contractors are required to comply with the applicable SMSA or EA goal contained in this 

Appendix B-80. 




FDEP-20 

Revision 4 



Economic Areas 

________________________________________________________________________________ 

State 

Goal (percent) 

________________________________________________________________________________ 

Florida 

041 Jacksonville, FL: 

SMSA Counties: 

2900 Gainesville, FL------------------------------------------------------------------20.6 

FL - Alachua 

3600 Jacksonville, FL-----------------------------------------------------------------21.8 

FL - Baker, Clay, Duval, Nassau, St. Johns 

Non-SMSA Counties----------------------------------------------------------------------22.2 

FL - Bradford, Columbia, Dixie, Gilchrist, 

Hamilton, LaFayette, Levy, Marion, Putnam, 

Suwannee, Union; GA - Brantley, Camden, 

Charlton, Glynn, Pierce, Ware 

042 Orlando - Melbourne - Daytona Beach, FL: 


2020 Daytona Beach, FL-------------------------------------------------------------15.7 

FL - Volusia 

4900 Melbourne - Titusville - Cocoa, FL-----------------------------------------10.7 

FL - Brevard 

5960 Orlando, FL----------------------------------------------------------------------15.5 

FL - Orange, Osceola, Seminole 


FL - Flagler, Lake, Sumter 

043 Miami - Fort Lauderdale, FL: 


2680 Fort Lauderdale - Hollywood, FL--------------------------------------------15.5 

FL - Broward 

5000 Miami, FL------------------------------------------------------------------------39.5 

FL - Dade 

8960 West Palm Beach - Boca Raton, FL-----------------------------------------22.4 

FL - Palm Beach 

Non-SMSA Counties---------------------------------------------------------------------30.4 

FL - Glades, Hendry, Indian River, Martin, 

Monroe, Okeechobee, St. Lucie 




FDEP-21 

Revision 4 



Economic Areas 

________________________________________________________________________________ 

State 

Goal (percent) 

________________________________________________________________________________ 

Florida - continued 

044 Tampa - St. Petersburg, FL: 


1140 Bradenton, FL-------------------------------------------------------------------15.9 

FL - Manatee 

2700 Fort Myers, FL------------------------------------------------------------------15.3 

FL - Lee 

3980 Lakeland - Winter Haven, FL-------------------------------------------------18.0 

FL - Polk 

7510 Sarasota, FL---------------------------------------------------------------------10.5 

FL - Sarasota 

8280 Tampa - St. Petersburg, FL---------------------------------------------------17.9 

FL - Hillsborough, Pasco, Pinellas 


FL - Charlotte, Citrus, Collier, DeSoto, 

Hardee, Hernando, Highlands 

045 Tallahassee, FL: 


8240 Tallahassee, FL-----------------------------------------------------------------24.3 

FL - Leon, Wakulla 

Non-SMSA Counties---------------------------------------------------------------------29.5 

FL - Calhoun, Franklin, Gadsden, Jackson, 

Jefferson, Liberty, Madison, Taylor 

046 Pensacola - Panama City, FL: 


6015 Panama City, FL---------------------------------------------------------------14.1 

FL - Bay 

6080 Pensacola, FL------------------------------------------------------------------18.3 

FL - Escambia, Santa Rosa 

Non-SMSA Counties--------------------------------------------------------------------15.4 

FL - Gulf, Holmes, Okaloosa, Walton, 

Washington 




FDEP-22 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX D TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE 

[Note: This clause has been extracted from 41 CFR 60-1.4(b) and is applicable to all FDEP-assisted 

construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000; this clause is to be included in 

all FDEP-assisted construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 and in all 

solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: 

(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of 

race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that 

applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their 

race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the 

following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; 

layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including 

apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and 

applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination 

clause. 

(2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the 

contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive considerations for employment without regard 

to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 

(3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a 

collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the 

said labor union or workers' representatives of the contractor's commitments under this section, and 

shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for 

employment. 

(4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, 

and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. 

(5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of 

September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, 

and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and the 

Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, 

and orders. 

(6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or 

with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or 

suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government 

contracts or federally assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in 

Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies 




FDEP-23 

Revision 4 



invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of 

the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. 




FDEP-24 

Revision 4 



(7) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the 

provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by 

rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 

11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or 

vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the 

administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for 

noncompliance: Provided, however, That in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is 

threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the 

administering agency the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect 

the interests of the United States. 




FDEP-25 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX E TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


NOTICE TO BE POSTED 

[Note: This notice has been extracted from 41 CFR 60-1.42(a) and is the notice referred to in Paragraphs (1) and 

(3) of the "Equal Opportunity Clause"; this notice is to be included in all FDEP-assisted construction contracts 

and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 and in all solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY IS THE LAW - DISCRIMINATION IS PROHIBITED 

BY THE CIVIL RIGHTS ACT OF 1964 AND BY EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 11246 

Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 - Administered by: 

THE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMMISSION 

Prohibits discrimination because of Race, Color, Religion, Sex, or National Origin by Employers with 75 or more 

employees, by Labor Organizations with a hiring hall of 75 or more members, by Employment Agencies, and by 

Joint Labor-Management Committees for Apprenticeship or Training. After July 1, 1967, employers and labor 

organizations with 50 or more employees or members will be covered; after July 1, 1968, those with 25 or more 

will be covered. 

ANY PERSON 

Who believes he or she has been discriminated against 

SHOULD CONTACT 

THE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY COMMISSION 

2401 E Street NW, Washington, D.C. 20506 

Executive Order No. 11246 - Administered by: 

THE OFFICE OF FEDERAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAMS 

Prohibits discrimination because of Race, Color, Religion, Sex, or National Origin, and requires affirmative 

action to ensure equality of opportunity in all aspects of employment. 

By all Federal Government Contractors and Subcontractors, and by Contractors Performing Work Under a 

Federally Assisted Construction Contract, regardless of the number of employees in either case. 

ANY PERSON 

Who believes he or she has been discriminated against 

SHOULD CONTACT 

THE OFFICE OF FEDERAL CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAMS 

U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210 




FDEP-26 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX F TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION 

CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246) 

[Note: These specifications have been extracted from 41 CFR 60-4.3(a) and are applicable to all 

FDEP-assisted construction contracts and subcontracts 

with a price exceeding $10,000; these specifications are to be included in all FDEP-assisted 

construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 and in all solicitations for such 

contracts and subcontracts.] 

1. As used in these specifications: 

a. "Covered area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this 

contract resulted; 

b. "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, United States 

Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority; 

c. "Employer identification number" means the Federal Social Security number used on the 

Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941. 

d. "Minority" includes: 

(i) Black (all persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups not of 

Hispanic origin); 

(ii) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American or 

other Spanish Culture or origin, regardless of race); 

(iii) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of 

the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and 

(iv) American Indian or Alaskan Native (all persons having origins in any of the original 

peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through 

membership and participation or community identification). 

2. Whenever the Contractor, or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work 

involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 

the provisions of these specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority 

and female participation and which is set forth in the solicitations from which this contract resulted. 

3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by 

the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association, its 

affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in 




FDEP-27 

Revision 4 



accordance with that Plan for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractors 

must be able to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such 

Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved Plan is individually 

required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause, and to make a good faith effort to 

achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith 

performance by other Contractors or Subcontractors toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse 

any covered Contractor's or Subcontractor's failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals 

and timetables. 

4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 

7a through p of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this contract 

resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and 

female utilization the Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in 

which it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction Contractors performing 

construction work in geographical areas where they do not have a Federal or federally assisted 

construction contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical area 

where the work is being performed. Goals are published periodically in the FEDERAL REGISTER in 

notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance 

Programs office or from Federal procurement contracting officers. The Contractor is expected to make 

substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals in each craft during the period specified. 

5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement, nor the failure by a union with 

whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement, to refer either minorities or women shall 

excuse the Contractor's obligations under these specifications, Executive Order 11246, or the 

regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. 

6. In order for the nonworking training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting 

the goals, such apprentices and trainees must be employed by the Contractor during the training 

period, and the Contractor must have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the 

completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees must be 

trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. 

7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. 

The evaluation of the Contractor's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort 

to achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully, and 

shall implement affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following: 

a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion 

at all sites, and in all facilities at which the Contractor's employees are assigned to work. The 

Contractor, where possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The 

Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and other on-site 

supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the Contractor's obligation to maintain such 

a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such 

sites or in such facilities. 




FDEP-28 

Revision 4 



. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide 

written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations 

when the Contractor or its unions have employment opportunities available, and maintain a 

record of the organizations' responses. 

c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of each minority 

and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a 

recruitment source or community organization and of what action was taken with respect to each 

such individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not 

referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the Contractor, this 

shall be documented in the file with the reason therefor, along with whatever additional actions 

the Contractor may have taken. 

d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions with which 

the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority 

person or woman sent by the Contractor, or when the Contractor has other information that the 

union referral process has impeded the Contractor's efforts to meet its obligations. 

e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the 

area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and 

apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the Contractor's employment needs, especially 

those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor. The Contractor shall 

provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under 7b above. 

f. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and 

training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO 

obligations; by including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by 

publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the policy with 

all management personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by 

posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location 

where construction work is performed. 

g. Review, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under 

these specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, 

termination or other employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite 

supervisory personnel such as Superintendents, General Foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of 

construction work at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the 

time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of 

the subject matter. 

h. Disseminate the Contractor's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the 

news media, specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written 

notification to and discussing the Contractor's EEO policy with other Contractors and 

Subcontractors with whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing business. 




FDEP-29 

Revision 4 



i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female and community 

organizations, to schools with minority and female students and to minority and female 

recruitment and training organizations serving the Contractor's recruitment area and employment 

needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for 

apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the Contractor shall send written 

notification to organizations such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, 

and tests to be used in the selection process. 

j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and 

women and, where reasonable, provide after school, summer and vacation employment to 

minority and female youth both on the site and in other areas of a Contractor's work force. 

k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 

41 CFR Part 60-3. 

l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female 

personnel for promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare 

for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities. 

m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments and other personnel 

practices, do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and 

employment related activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor's obligations under 

these specifications are being carried out. 

n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are nonsegregated except that separate or 

single-user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between 

the sexes. 

to 

o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from 

minority and female construction contractors and suppliers, including circulation of solicitations 

minority and female contractor associations and other business associations. 

p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisors' adherence to and performance under 

the Contractor's EEO policies and affirmative action obligations. 

8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations which assist in fulfilling one or 

more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through p). The efforts of a contractor association, 

joint contractor-union, contractor-community, or other similar group of which the contractor is a 

member and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a 

through p of these Specifications provided that the contractor actively participates in the group, makes 

every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women 

in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor's 

minority and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and 

timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions 

taken on behalf of the Contractor. The obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor's and failure 

of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor's noncompliance. 




FDEP-30 

Revision 4 



9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The 

Contractor, however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative 

action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. 

Consequently, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a particular group is 

employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the Contractor has achieved 

its goals for women generally, the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific 

minority group of women is underutilized). 

10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to 

discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 

11. The Contractor shall not enter into any Subcontract with any person or firm debarred from 

Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246. 

12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications 

and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination and cancellation of existing 

subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its 

implementing regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor 

who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and 

Executive Order 11246, as amended. 

13. The Contractor, in fulfilling its obligation under these specifications, shall implement specific 

affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these 

specifications, so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment 

opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the 

implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 

CFR 60-4.8. 

14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to 

ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions 

hereof as may be required by the Government and to keep records. Records shall at least include for 

each employee the name, address, telephone numbers, construction trade, union affiliation if any, 

employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., 

mechanic, apprentice trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in 

the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be 

maintained in an easily understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing 

records satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate records. 

15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which 

establish different standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local 

or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community 

Development Block Grant Program). 




FDEP-31 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX G TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH 41 CFR 60-1.7: REPORTS AND OTHER REQUIRED 

INFORMATION 

[Note: This certification is required by 41 CFR 60-1.7(b) and is applicable to all FDEP-assisted 

construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000; this certification is to be 

included in all FDEP-assisted construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 and 

in all solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

This certification relates to a construction contract proposed by _________________________, which 

(insert the name of the Owner) 

expects to finance the proposed construction contract with assistance from the Florida Department of 

Environmental Protection (which administers a State revolving fund loan program supported in part with 

funds directly made available by grants from the United States Environmental Protection Agency). I am 

the undersigned prospective construction contractor or subcontractor. I certify that: 

(1) I _____ have / _____ have not participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the 

Equal Opportunity Clause and 

(2) if I have participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal Opportunity 

Clause, I ____ have / _____ have not filed with the Joint Reporting Committee, the Director of 

the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, or the Equal Employment Opportunity 

Commission all reports due under the applicable filing requirements. 

I understand that, if I have participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to the Equal 

Opportunity Clause and have failed to file all reports due under the applicable filing requirements, I am 

not eligible, and will not be eligible, to have my bid or offer considered, or to enter into the proposed 

contract or subcontract, unless and until I make an arrangement regarding such reports that is satisfactory 

to the office where the reports are required to be filed. 

I agree that I will obtain identical certifications from prospective lower-tier construction subcontractors 

when I receive bids or offers or initiate negotiations for any lower-tier construction subcontracts with a 

price exceeding $10,000. I also agree that I will retain such certifications in my files. 

______________________________________________________ 

(Signature of Authorized Official) 

______________ 

(Date) 

__________________________________________________________________________ 

(Name and Title of Authorized Official [Print or Type]) 

___________________________________________________________________________ 

(Name of Prospective Construction Contractor or Subcontractor [Print or Type]) 




FDEP-32 

Revision 4 



__________________________________________________________________________________ 

(Address and Telephone Number of Prospective Construction Contractor or 

Subcontractor [Print or Type]) 

__________________________________________________________________________________ 

(Employer Identification Number of Prospective Construction Contractor or 

Subcontractor) 




FDEP-33 

Revision 4 



APPENDIX H TO THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 


CERTIFICATION OF NONSEGREGATED FACILITIES 

[Note: This certification is required by 41 CFR 60-1.8(b) and is applicable to all FDEP-assisted 

construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000; this certification is to be 

included in all FDEP-assisted construction contracts and subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000 

and in all solicitations for such contracts and subcontracts.] 

This certification relates to a construction contract proposed by _______________________________, 

(insert the name of the Owner) 

which expects to finance the proposed construction contract with assistance from the Florida 

Department of Environmental Protection (which administers a State revolving fund loan program 

supported in part with funds directly made available by grants from the United States Environmental 

Protection Agency). I am the undersigned prospective construction contractor or subcontractor. I 

certify that I do not and will not maintain any facilities I provide for my employees in a segregated 

manner and that I do not and will not permit my employees to perform their services at any locations 

under my control where segregated facilities are maintained. 

I agree that I will obtain identical certifications from prospective lower-tier construction subcontractors 

prior to the award of any lower-tier construction subcontracts with a price exceeding $10,000. I also 

agree that I will retain such certifications in my files. 

____________________________________________________ 

(Signature of Authorized Official) 

_______________ 

(Date) 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

(Name and Title of Authorized Official [Print or Type]) 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

(Name of Prospective Construction Contractor or Subcontractor [Print or Type]) 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

(Address and Telephone Number of Prospective Construction Contractor or Subcontractor [Print or 

Type]) 

___________________________________________________________________________________ 

(Employer Identification Number of Prospective Construction Contractor or Subcontractor) 




FDEP-34 

Revision 4 



SECTION 01004 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.01 The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing materials which meet the 

requirements indicated. For manufactured materials such as reinforcing steel, expansion joint 

materials, pipe, cement, miscellaneous steel, cast iron materials, bituminous concrete, etc., the 

Contractor will be required to furnish a manufacturer's certificate that the material meets the 

requirements specified for this project. 

1.02 The Engineer shall monitor all materials incorporated into the project and their placement by 

testing at the Contractor's expense. The Engineer does not guarantee the accuracy or validity of 

the data nor does the Engineer or Owner assume any responsibility for the Contractor's 

interpretation of the data. Materials or work which do not meet the specifications shall be removed 

or modified. 

1.03 All retesting for work rejected on the basis of the initial test results will be at the expense of the 

Contractor and the extent of the retesting shall be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer or 

Owner may require additional testing for failing tests and may require two passing retests. 

Acceptance will be made by the Engineer or Owner. 

1.04 The testing laboratory shall be approved by the Owner and shall perform all work in a professional 

manner. 

PART 2 – LABORATORY DUTIES AND LIMITS OF AUTHORITY 

2.01 Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor: Provide qualified personnel as required promptly on 

notice. 

2.02 Acquaint Engineer's personnel with testing procedures and with all special conditions encountered 

at the site. 

2.03 Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction methods: 

A. Comply with specified standards, ASTM and other recognized authorities. 

B. Ascertain compliance with contract requirements. 

2.04 Promptly notify the Engineer of irregularities or deficiencies of work, which are observed during 

performance of services. 

2.05 Promptly submit 3 copies of reports of observations and tests to the Engineer including but not 

limited to: 

A. Date issued 

B. Project title and number 

C. Testing laboratory name and address 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Testing Laboratory Services 01004 – 1 



D. Name and signature of technician 

E. Date of sampling 

F. Record of temperature and weather 

G. Date of test 

H. Identification of product and specification section 

I. Location of product and/or test 

J. Type of test 

K. Observations regarding compliance with contract documents 

2.06 Perform additional services ordered by the Engineer. 

2.07 Laboratory is not authorized to: 

A. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on contract requirements. 

B. Approve or accept any portion of work. 

C. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 

PART 3 – CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 

3.01 Furnish portland cement and/or bituminous concrete mix design together with the applicable 

design work sheets and data to meet or exceed contract requirements. 

3.02 Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to the work or to the manufacturer's 

operations. 

3.03 Provide to laboratory preliminary representative samples of materials to be tested in specified 

quantities. 

3.04 Furnish copies of mil test reports. 

3.05 Furnish verification of compliance with contract requirements for materials and equipment. 

3.06 Furnish casual labor and facilities: 

A. To provide access to work to be tested 

B. To obtain and handle samples at site 

C. To facilitate inspections and tests 

D. For laboratory's exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples. 




3.07 Notify Engineer 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for the assignment of personnel. 

3.08 Notify laboratory 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for the assignment of personnel. 

3.09 Correct work which is defective or which fails to conform to the contract documents. Corrective 

work shall not delay the project or the work of other Contractors. 

3.10 Pay all costs of retesting when test results indicate non-compliance with contract requirements. 

3.11 Patch all surfaces and areas disturbed by testing operations. 





SECTION 01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and other Division 1 Specification Sections, 

apply to this Section. 

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Project Identification: Project consists of the construction of an addition to the existing 

Customer Services building as well as minor alterations to the existing building along with 

related site improvements. The project also includes the demolition of the Human Resources 

Building. 

1. Project Location: Ellyson Industrial Park, Pensacola, Florida. 

2. Owner: Emerald Coast Utilities Authority, Escambia County, Florida. 

B. Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated as indicated on the Title Sheet of the 

drawings and cover of the Project Manual, were prepared for the Project by Hatch Mott 

MacDonald Florida, L.L.C., 5111 N. 12 th Avenue, Pensacola, Florida 32504. Tel: 850.484-6011, 

Fax: 850.484.8199. Project Manager: Tom Ruff; Project Architect: Finley Ray Skocdopole, AIA. 

C. The Work consists of the construction of approximately 37,400 square foot (heated & cooled 

space) of two-stories and alterations to the existing building as well as Civil work to the existing 

site. The Work includes, but is not limited to: 

1. Site work, which includes selective demolition, grading and paving, landscaping, 

relocation of existing trees, water, telephone, power, sewer and fire protection lines, all to 

5’-0” outside the building line. 

2. Building structure, including a concrete foundation system, with a second floor level slab 

above grade. Walkways are concrete. The parking areas are asphalt slabs on grade 

The project includes two (2) internal stairs and two elevators. 

3. Exterior building finishes include brick and stucco, impact rated exterior glazing in 

aluminum frames. Roofing system consists of a flat roof with a fiber reinforced Single Ply 

Membrane over lightweight insulating concrete. 

4. Interior construction includes gypsum wallboard applied to both CMU and to metal studs 

at varying locations. 

5. Interior floor finishes include porcelain tile, vinyl composition tile and carpet. Wall finishes 

consist of paint and ceramic tile, with some vinyl wall covering. Interior doors are to be 

wood or hollow metal in hollow metal frames. 

1.3 CONTRACT 

A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract. 

1.4 USE OF PREMISES 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Summary of Work 01010 – 1 

& Alterations to the Customer Service Bldg. 


A. General: Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner during alterations and new construction to 

provide safe access and operation of the existing building. The Owner retains the right to 

perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Summary of Work 01010 – 2 

& Alterations to the Customer Service Bldg. 


SECTION 01015 – ABBREVIATIONS & DEFINITIONS 

PART 1 – ABBREVIATIONS 

1.01 Wherever the following abbreviations or symbols are used, they are to be construed the same as 

the respective expressions represented: 

AASHTO.............................................. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 

ACI ......................................................................................................................American Concrete Institute 

AGC....................................................................................Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. 

ANSI ....................................................................................................American National Standards Institute 

APWA..................................................................................................... American Public Works Association 

ASTM ......................................................................................... American Society for Testing and Materials 

AWWA ................................................................................................... American Water Works Association 

BM ................................................................................................................................................Bench Mark 

C.C. or C/C............................................................................................................................Center to Center 

Cem.................................................................................................................................................... Cement 

CIP ........................................................................................................................................... Cast-iron Pipe 

C.L. or CL ......................................................................................................................................Center Line 

CMP ............................................................................................................................ Corrugated Metal Pipe 

CO ...................................................................................................................................................Clean Out 

Conc ..................................................................................................................................................Concrete 

Const ................................................................................................................................................Construct 

DMH ..........................................................................................................................................Drop Manhole 

D/W ...................................................................................................................................................Driveway 

ECUA ...................................................................................................... Escambia County Utilities Authority 

El. or Elev ......................................................................................................................................... Elevation 

Ex. or Exist ..........................................................................................................................................Existing 

F & C ................................................................................................................................... Frame and Cover 

FH................................................................................................................................................ Fire Hydrant 

FL .....................................................................................................................................................Flow Line 

Fl. El ........................................................................................................................................ Floor Elevation 

FS......................................................................................................................................... Finished Surface 

Galv ............................................................................................................................................... Galvanized 

GL................................................................................................................................................ Ground Line 

Gr .......................................................................................................................................................... Grade 

H............................................................................................................................................... Height or High 

HC .......................................................................................................................... House Connection Sewer 

Hor................................................................................................................................................... Horizontal 

ID............................................................................................................................................Inside Diameter 

Inv........................................................................................................................................................... Invert 

Lin.......................................................................................................................................................... Linear 

Long .............................................................................................................................................Longitudinal 

Max.................................................................................................................................................. Maximum 

MH..................................................................................................................................................... Manhole 

m ............................................................................................................................................ Meter or Middle 

Min...................................................................................................................................Minutes or Minimum 

Mon ...........................................................................................................................Monolithic or Monument 

OC ...................................................................................................................................................On Center 

OD ....................................................................................................................................... Outside Diameter 

PCC...................................................................................................................... Portland Cement Concrete 

Pl ............................................................................................................................................. Plasticity Index 

PL ...................................................................................................................... Property Line or Plastic Limit 

PP..................................................................................................................................................Power Pole 

ppm ....................................................................................................................................... Parts per Million 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Abbreviations and Definitions 01015 – 1 



Prop............................................................................................................................... Proposed or Property 

psf.............................................................................................................................Pounds per Square Foot 

psi............................................................................................................................. Pounds per Square Inch 

pvmt.................................................................................................................................................Pavement 

PVCP............................................................................................................................ Polyvinylchloride Pipe 

Q..................................................................................................................................................Rate of Flow 

R...........................................................................................................................................................Radius 

RC .................................................................................................................................. Reinforced Concrete 

RCP........................................................................................................................Reinforced Concrete Pipe 

Rdwy................................................................................................................................................. Roadway 

Ret. Wall...................................................................................................................................Retaining Wall 

R/W ............................................................................................................................................ Right-of-Way 

s.............................................................................................................................................................. Slope 

San ..................................................................................................................................................... Sanitary 

SCCP ................................................................................................................ Steel Cylinder Concrete Pipe 

SD ................................................................................................................................................Storm Drain 

Sdl ........................................................................................................................................................ Saddle 

Sect ..................................................................................................................................................... Section 

Spec ..........................................................................................................................................Specifications 

Sp. MH ..................................................................................................................................Special Manhole 

SS............................................................................................................................................Sanitary Sewer 

S.S. …………………………………………………………………………………….…Stainless Steel 

St ............................................................................................................................................................Street 

Sta ........................................................................................................................................................ Station 

Std .....................................................................................................................................................Standard 

TH.....................................................................................................................................................Test Hole 

UL.................................................................................................................. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 

V ..........................................................................................................................................................Velocity 

VC .............................................................................................................................................Vertical Curve 

VCP .....................................................................................................................................Vitrified Clay Pipe 

Vert...................................................................................................................................................... Vertical 

PART 2 – DEFINITIONS 

2.01 Architect: Hatch Mott MacDonald Florida LLC. (HMM) or its agent, who is responsible for the 

architectural design, acting directly or through duly authorized representatives 

2.02 Change Order: A written order to Contractor signed by HMM personnel and the Owner 

authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the contract price or 

contract time issued after execution of the agreement. 

2.03 Contractor: The person, firm, or corporation awarded the Contract to do the Work and that is 

performing work addressed in these specifications. 

2.04 Day: A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. 

2.05 Plans: The same definition as found in the General Conditions for The Drawings and which have 

been prepared by the Engineer, HMM or its consultants and approved by the Owner for the Work. 

2.06 Engineer: HMM or its agent, who is responsible for the engineering, acting directly or through duly 

authorized representatives. 

2.07 Field Order: A written order issued by HMM, which clarifies or interprets the contract documents. 




2.08 Inspector: The authorized representative of HMM for the Owner who is assigned to the project 

site or any part thereof. 

2.09 Modification: (a) A written amendment to the Contract Documents signed by both parties, (b) a 

change order, (c) a written clarification or interpretation issued by HMM or (d) a written order for a 

minor change or alteration in the work issued by HMM. A modification may only be issued after 

execution of the Agreement. 

2.10 Owner: The Emerald Coast Utilities Authority and its Board of Directors. 

2.11 Reference Specification, Test Methods, and Applicable Codes: All standard specifications and 

test methods of any society, association, or organization herein referred to are hereby made part 

of these Contract Documents the same as if written in full. (Any reference to a paragraph or 

subparagraph within a section shall include all general provisions of the section to which reference 

is made.) Reference to such standards refer to the latest published edition and issued as of the 

date of Invitation to Bid. Reference to local or state codes and laws shall mean the latest adopted 

and published codes as of the date the Contract Documents are permitted. 

2.12 Service Connections: Service connections shall be construed to mean all or any portion of the 

pipe, conduit, cable, or duct which connects a utility main or distribution line to a building, home, 

residence, or property. 

2.13 Shop Drawings: All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules, and other data which 

are prepared by Contractor, a sub-contractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor and which 

illustrate the equipment, material, or some portion of the work. 

2.14 Supplementary Conditions: Conditions which are written by the Owner for a specific project and 

which modify any section, Clause, or paragraph of the General Conditions. Additional 

Supplementary Conditions are Supplementary Conditions written by the Engineer and added to 

the Project Manual. 

2.15 Technical Specifications: Same as the definition for Specifications as found in the General 

Conditions. 

2.16 Subcontractor: An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with Contractor or with 

any other Subcontractor for the performance of any part of the Work at the site. 

2.17 Substantial Completion: The date as certified by HMM when the construction of the project or a 

specified part thereof is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the definition found in the 

General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Additional Supplementary 

Conditions; or if there be no such written certification, the date of Final Completion before the 

Final Payment is made by Owner. 

2.18 Supplementary Specifications: Specifications, which are written to modify any section or 

paragraph of the technical specifications of this document. 

2.19 Utility: Overhead or underground wires, pipe lines, conduits, ducts, or structures, operated and 

maintained in or across a public right-of-way or easement or private easement. 

A. Public Utility: Owned and operated by a municipality or another political subdivision of the 

State. 

B. Private Utility: Owned and operated by a private company or corporation. 

See the General Conditions for definitions of the following: The Contract Documents, The Contract; The 

Work, The Project, The Drawings, The Specifications, The Project Manual. See the Supplementary 




General Conditions or the Additional General Conditions for definitions of the following: As Shown or As 

Indicated, Provide, Product, Mockups, Intended Use. Other definitions of terms used in the Contract 

Documents are explained in the technical specifications.. 

Where an abbreviation, word, term, concept, or phrase is not defined, the meaning shall be as indicated in 

the “MEANS ILLUSTRATED CONSTRUCTION DICTIONARY”, Latest Edition, as published by R. S. 

Means Company, Inc., Kingston, MA 02364-0800. 





SECTION 01025 – PAYMENT & MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Schedule of values. 

2. Payment procedures. 

3. Modification procedures. 

4. Completion procedures. 

1.2 CONTRACT CONDITIONS 

A. See the conditions of the contract for additional requirements. 

B. Progress payment requests will be submitted to the Engineer by the 10 th day of each month 

for the preceding month’s activities. Contractor may submit Applications for Payment in 

accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be 

reviewed and approved by Engineer as provided in the General Conditions. 

C. The Engineer will act upon the contractor's application for payment within 10 calendar days 

after receipt. 

D. The Owner shall make progress payments on account of the contract price on the basis of 

Contractor's applications for payment as approved by Engineer, within 21 calendar days, via 

wire transfer, following receipt of approved request, during construction as provided below. 

All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the 

schedule of values provided for in paragraph 14.01 of the General Conditions. 

E. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to 90% 

of the Contractor's Work completed, and 90% of stored materials that have actually been 

paid and documented to the Engineer, less any reduction in payment as provided in 

Paragraph 14.02 of the General Conditions. The remaining amount will be retained by Owner 

as retainage on the total project until substantial completion is achieved, at which time 

retainage shall be reduced to 2%. Retainage shall not be withheld from the Contractor on 

Owner direct purchased materials if applicable. The Owner may, at its sole determination and 

pleasure, choose to reduce the amount of retainage withheld after 50% project completion. 

However, in no event shall retainage be reduced below 5% prior to substantial completion. 

F. No payment will be made for materials or equipment stored off site unless specifically 

approved in advance, in writing by the Owner. Submit copy of the Owner's agreement to pay 

for such materials and equipment with the application for payment covering such materials 

and equipment. 

G. Payments may be withheld if the contractor fails to make dated submittals within the time 

periods specified. 

H. Upon Final completion of the Work, including receipt of "As Built" drawings, Contractor's Final 

Affidavit, Warranty and settlement of all claims, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Final 

Contract Price. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Payment & Modification Procedures 01025 - 1 



1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Change Proposal Request: Any written request from the Owner or Engineer to the 

Contractor for a quotation, price, or breakdown on a change proposed but not ordered. 

B. Final Completion: The stage at which all incomplete and incorrect work has been completed 

or corrected in accordance with the contract documents. 

C. List of Incomplete Work: A comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected, 

prepared by the contractor for the purpose of obtaining certification of substantial completion. 

This list is also referred to as a "punchlist." 

D. Modifications: Written amendments to the contract signed by both the Owner and the 

contractor, change orders, construction change directives, and written orders for a minor 

change in the work issued by the Engineer. 

E. Schedule of Values: A detailed breakdown of the contract sum into individual cost items, 

which will serve as the basis for evaluation of applications for progress payments during 

construction. 

F. Substantial Completion: The time at which the work, or a portion of the work which the 

Owner agrees to accept separately, is sufficiently complete in accordance with the contract 

documents so that the Owner can occupy or use the work for its intended purpose. 

G. Time and Material Work: Work which will be paid for on the basis of the actual cost of the 

work, including materials, labor, equipment, and other costs as defined elsewhere, as 

documented by detailed records. This basis is also referred to using the terms "cost-plus," 

"cost of the work," "force account," and similar terms. 

1.4 SUBMITTALS 

A. Schedule of Values: First application for payment will not be reviewed without schedule of 

values. 

1. Submit in size not larger than 8-1/2 by 11 inches. 

2. Submit 3 copies. 

3. Identify with: 

a. Project name. 

b. Project number. 

c. Engineer's name. 

d. Owner's name. 

e. Contractor's name and address. 

f. Submittal date. 

B. Applications for Progress Payments: Submit sufficiently in advance of date established for 

the progress payment to allow for the processing indicated. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 




PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Prepare a schedule of values prior to the first application for payment. 

B. Schedule of Values: Break costs down into line items which will be comparable with line 

items in applications for payment. 

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with portions of the contract 

documents which identify units or subdivisions of work; provide cross-referencing if 

necessary to clarify. 

a. Specifically, correlate with the bid form and project manual table of contents 

as applicable. 

2. Divide major subcontracts into individual cost items. 

3. Where applications for payment are likely to include products purchased or 

fabricated but not yet installed, provide individual line items for material cost, 

installation cost, and other applicable phases of completion. 

4. Show the following as separate line items: 

a. Project Management and Administration. 

5. Include in each line item its proportional share of overhead and profit. 

6. Include the following information for each line item, arranged in columns: 

a. Item name. 

b. Applicable specification section. 

c. Dollar value, rounded off to the nearest whole dollar (with the total equal to 

the contract sum). 

d. Proportion of the contract sum represented by this item, to the nearest 

one-hundredth percent (with the total adjusted to 100 percent). 

7. Provide the following supporting data for each line item: 

a. Subcontractor's name. 

b. Manufacturer or fabricator's name. 

c. Supplier's name. 

C. Submit schedule of values within 10 days after Owner Notice to Proceed. 

D. The Engineer will notify the contractor if schedule is not satisfactory; revise and resubmit 

acceptable schedule. 

E. Submit a revised schedule of values when modifications change the contract sum or change 

individual line items. 

1. Make each modification a new line item. 

2. Show the following information for each line item: 

a. All information required for original submittal. 

b. Identification of modifications which have affected its value. 

3. Submit prior to next application for payment. 

3.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Application for Payment Forms: Use Application and Certificate for Payment provided as part 

of these specifications. 




B. Preparation of Applications for Payment: Complete form entirely. 

1. Make current application consistent with previous applications, certificates for 

payment, and payments made. 

2. Base application on current schedule of values and contractor's construction 

schedule. 

3. Include amounts of modifications issued before the end of the construction period 

covered by the application. 

4. Include signature by person authorized by the contractor to sign legal documents. 

5. Notarize each copy. 

6. Submit in 3 copies. 

7. Attach waivers of lien. 

8. Attach revised schedule of values, if changes have occurred, unless application 

forms already show entire schedule of values. 

9. Attach copy of the Owner's agreement to pay for materials and equipment stored off 

site, and any other supporting documentation required by the Owner or the contract 

documents. 

10. Also attach: 

a. Receipts for bond payments. 

b. Progress report. 

C. Provide the following information with every application for payment which involves work 

completed on a time and material basis: 

1. Detailed records of work done, including: 

a. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 

b. Time records and wage rates paid. 

c. Invoices and receipts for products. 

2. Provide similar detailed records for subcontracts. 

D. Transmit application for payment with a transmittal form itemizing supporting documents 

attached. 

1. Transmit to the Engineer. 

3.3 WAIVERS OF LIEN 

A. Submit, with each application for payment, waivers of lien from every entity who performed 

work during the period covered by the previous application for payment, and who may be 

legally entitled to file a mechanic's or other lien against the work. 

B. Waiver of Lien Forms: Use forms acceptable to the Owner. 

3.4 FIRST PAYMENT PROCEDURE 

A. The first application for payment will not be reviewed until the following submittals have been 

received: 

1. Certificates of insurance. 

2. Performance and payment bonds. 

3. Schedule of values. 

4. List of subcontractors, principal suppliers, and fabricators. 

5. Contractor's construction schedule. 

6. Submittal schedule. 

7. Quality control activities schedule. 

8. Schedule of products. 

9. Unit price schedule. 




10. Names of the Contractor's principal staff assigned to the project. 

11. Names of the Contractor's principal consultants. 

12. Copies of building permit and other authorizations from governing authorities. 

13. First progress report. 

14. All submittals specified to occur prior to first application for payment or prior to first 

payment. 

B. The Contractor will submit to the Owner the necessary bank account information for 

payments to be deposited via wire transfer within 10 days of Owner’s Notice to Proceed. 

3.5 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 

A. Designate a single individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be 

responsible for informing others of changes to the work. 

B. Changes in cost resulting from modifications shall include only those costs specified 

elsewhere in the contract documents. 

C. When requested in writing, the Contractor shall provide sufficient information for evaluation of 

proposed changes within 14 days. 

D. Provide the following information for every change proposal request: 

1. The amount of change in the contract sum, if any. 

2. The amount of change in the contract time, if any, with explanation. 

3. Cost breakdown, using schedule of values line items, separated into material and 

labor costs, additions and deletions, and with overhead and profit handled in the 

same manner as specified for the schedule of values. 

4. The period of time within which the proposed changes in contract sum or time will be 

valid. 

5. A statement describing the effect the change may have on the work of other prime 

contractors. 

6. Quantities and unit costs of products, labor, and equipment. 

7. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 

8. Overhead and profit. 

E. When changes are performed on a time and material basis, identify the applicable 

modification on the application for payment. 

F. Provide the following information with every claim for additional costs: 

1. Origin and date of claim. 

2. Detailed records as specified for time and material work. 

3. Separate accounting of overhead costs. 

4. Separate accounting of equipment rental costs. 

G. The contractor may propose changes. 

1. Do not use change order form. 

2. Provide the information required for change proposal requests. 

3. Describe reasons for change. 

4. Document proposed substitutions as specified elsewhere. 

3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES 

A. Request for inspection and application for payment may coincide. 




B. The Engineer will perform one inspection for substantial completion, upon request of the 

contractor. 

1. If the Engineer is unable to issue the certificate of substantial completion because 

the work is not considered to be substantially complete, the contractor shall pay all 

subsequent inspection costs, including compensation for the Engineer's services and 

expenses. 

2. When issuance of several certificates of substantial completion for portions of the 

work is authorized by the Owner, the above provisions apply separately to each 

separate portion. 

C. Do not submit request for inspection for substantial completion until the following activities 

have been completed: 

1. Delivery of maintenance materials and tools. 

2. Demonstration of all equipment and systems. 

3. Instruction of the Owner's personnel. 

4. Removal of temporary facilities. 

5. Final cleaning. 

6. Final property survey. 

7. Final extermination. 

8. The Owner has been informed of necessary procedures for changing over insurance 

coverage. 

9. The Owner has been informed of procedures for changing over operation, 

maintenance, security, etc. 

10. The Owner has received occupancy and operating permits from authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

11. All activities specified to occur prior to substantial completion. 

D. Do not submit request for inspection for substantial completion until the following submittals 

have been completed: 

1. List of incomplete work (punch list). 

2. Startup reports. 

3. Final testing, adjusting, and balancing reports. 

4. Demonstration reports. 

5. Instruction reports. 

6. Warranties. 

7. Maintenance agreements. 

8. Operation and maintenance data. 

9. Final progress photographs. 

10. Project record documents. 

11. Keying records 

12. All submittals specified to occur prior to substantial completion. 

E. Submit the following with application for payment following substantial completion: 

1. Contractor's affidavit of release of liens. 

2. Meter readings of all utilities services for which the contractor has been paying. 

3. Request for reduction or release of retainage. 

4. Consent of surety to reduction in or partial release of retainage. 

5. Final list of incomplete work. 

6. Other data required by the contract documents. 

3.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES 

A. Request for final inspection and final application for payment may coincide. 




B. The Engineer will perform one inspection for final completion, upon request of the contractor. 

1. Submit the following with request for inspection: 

a. Previous inspection lists indicating completion of all items. 

b. If any items cannot be completed, obtain prior approval of such delay. 

2. If the Engineer is unable to issue the certificate for final payment because the work is 

not complete, the contractor shall pay all subsequent inspection costs, including 

compensation for the Engineer's services and expenses. 

C. Do not submit request for final inspection until the following activities have been completed: 

1. Completion of all work, except those items agreed upon by the Owner. 

2. Paving marking and traffic control signage have been completed. 

3. All activities specified to occur between substantial completion and final completion. 

D. Submit the following with the final application for payment: 

1. Certified copy of the previous list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that 

each has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 

2. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the contract sum. 

3. Consent of surety to final payment. 

4. Final liquidated damages statement. 

5. Meter readings of all utilities services for which the contractor has been paying after 

substantial completion. 

6. Certification that financial obligations to governing authorities and public utilities have 

been fulfilled. 

7. Description of unsettled claims. 

8. Certificates of insurance for all coverages specified to commence at final completion. 

9. Other data required by the contract documents. 





SECTION 01090 – REFERENCES 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 


A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 

B. "Approved": When used to convey Engineer's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, 

and requests, "approved" is limited to Engineer's duties and responsibilities as stated in the 

Conditions of the Contract. 

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Engineer. Other terms including "requested," 

"authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as 

"directed." 

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on 

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," 

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." 

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having 

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control 

performance of the Work. 

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, 

installation, and similar operations. 

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, 

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, 

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site 

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which 

Project is to be built. 

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent 

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if 

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards 

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, 

unless otherwise indicated. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition References 01090 – 1 



C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with 

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not 

bound with the Contract Documents. 

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain 

copies directly from publication source. 

D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and 

acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the 

recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone 

numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and 

up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (202) 272-0080 

Available from Access Board 

www.access-board.gov 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (888) 293-6498 

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1530 

www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr 

CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement (601) 634-2355 

Available from Army Corps of Engineers 

Waterways Experiment Station 

www.wes.army.mil 

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point 

www.dodssp.daps.mil 

DSCC 

FED-STD 

Defense Supply Center Columbus 

(See FS) 

Federal Standard 

(See FS) 

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 



Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 

www.apps.fss.gsa.gov/pub/fedspecs/index.cfm 

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 

www.nibs.org 

FTMS 

MIL 

MS MIL 

Federal Test Method Standard 

(See FS) 

See MILSPEC 

See MILSPEC 

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257 




OSHA 



Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

Available from U.S. Department of Labor 

www.osha.gov 

(904) 232-2895 

UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 

Available from Access Board (202) 272-5434 

www.access-board.gov 

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale 

Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & 

Professional Associations of the U.S." 

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to 

be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (202) 862-5100 

www.aluminum.org 

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 

www.aaadm.com 

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 

www.aabchq.com 

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 

www.aamanet.org 

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 

Transportation Officials 

www.aashto.org 

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 

www.aatcc.org 

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 

www.abma-dc.org 

ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International (248) 848-3700 

www.aci-int.org 

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 

www.concrete-pipe.org 

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 

www.aeic.org 

AFPA American Forest & Paper Association 

(See AF&PA) 




AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 

AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 

www.aga.org 

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

AHA American Hardboard Association (847) 934-8800 

www.hardboard.org 

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 

www.aham.org 

AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 

www.asphaltinstitute.org 

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 

www.steel.org 

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 

www.aitc-glulam.org 

ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (800) 395-2522 

www.alca.org (703) 736-9666 

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 

www.alsc.org 

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 

www.amca.org 

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts (505) 522-1437 

www.aosaseed.com 

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 

www.apawood.org 

APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 

www.archprecast.org 

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 

www.api.org 

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 

www.ari.org 




ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 

www.asphaltroofing.org 

ASCA Architectural Spray Coaters Association (856) 848-6120 

www.ascassoc.com 

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 

Air-Conditioning Engineers 

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 

(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (212) 591-7722 

www.asme.org 

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 

www.asse-plumbing.org 

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 

(American Society for Testing and Materials International) 

www.astm.org 

AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 

(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) 

www.awci.org 

AWCMA 

American Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(See WCSC) 

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 

www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (817) 326-6300 

www.awpa.com 

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 

www.buildershardware.com 

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 

www.bia.org 

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's 

Association International) 

www.bifma.com 

CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 

www.carpetcushion.org 




CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures (573) 341-4471 

www.umr.edu/~ccfss 

CDA Copper Development Association Inc. (800) 232-3282 

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 

CEA Canadian Electricity Association (514) 866-6121 

www.canelect.ca 

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com 

CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 

www.cganet.com 

CGSB Canadian General Standards Board (819) 956-0425 

www.pwgsc.gc.ca/cgsb 

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 

www.cisca.org 

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 

www.cispi.org 

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 

www.chainlinkinfo.org 

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 

www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 

CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 

www.crsi.org 

CSA CSA International (800) 463-6727 

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 

www.csa-international.org 

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 

www.cedarbureau.org 

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) 

www.cti.org 

DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (901) 388-6640 

www.dipra.org 




DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 

www.dhi.org 

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 

www.eia.org 

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 

www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 

www.ejma.org 

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 

FCI Fluid Controls Institute (216) 241-7333 

www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org 

FGMA 

FM 

Flat Glass Marketing Association 

(See GANA) 

Factory Mutual System 

(See FMG) 

FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 

(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) 

www.fmglobal.com 

FRSA 

Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors 

Association, Inc. 

www.floridaroof.com 

(407) 671-3772 

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 

www.fluidsealing.com 

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 52 951 5146905 

www.fscoax.org 

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 

www.gypsum.org 

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 

(Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) 

www.glasswebsite.com 

GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute (215) 895-2343 

www.drexel.edu/gri 

GTA Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of 

North America 

(See GANA) 

HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 

www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 




HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 

www.gamanet.org 

HMMA 

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 

(See NAAMM) 

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 

www.hpva.org 

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 

www.hpwhite.com 

IAS 

International Approval Services 

(See CSA) 

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 

www.icea.net 

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 

www.icri.org 

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 

www.iec.ch 

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 

www.ieee.org 

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 

www.iesna.org 

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.igcc.org 

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) (613) 233-1510 

www.igmaonline.org 

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 

www.iliai.com 

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (702) 567-8150 

www.issfa.net 

ITS Intertek Testing Services (800) 345-3851 

www.itsglobal.com (607) 753-6711 

IWS 

Insect Screening Weavers Association 

(Now defunct) 

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 

www.kcma.org 

LMA Laminating Materials Association (201) 664-2700 

www.lma.org 

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 

www.lightning.org (847) 577-7200 




LSGA 

Laminated Safety Glass Association 

(See GANA) 

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 

www.mbma.com 

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association (847) 480-9138 

www.maplefloor.org 

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 

www.metalframingmfg.org 

MH 

Material Handling Industry of America 

(See MHIA) 

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 

www.marble-institute.com 

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 

www.paintinfo.com 

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 

Fittings Industry Inc. 

www.mss-hq.com 

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 

www.naamm.org 

NAAMM 

North American Association of Mirror Manufacturers 

(See GANA) 

NACE NACE International (281) 228-6200 

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) 

www.nace.org 

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 

www.nadca.com 

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) (703) 684-0084 

www.naima.org 

NAMI National Accreditation and Management Institute, Inc. (304) 258-5100 

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 

www.nbgqa.com 

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 

www.ncma.org 

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 

www.ncpi.org 




NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 

www.ncta.com 

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 

www.nebb.org 

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 

www.necanet.org 

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 

www.nelma.org 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 

www.nema.org 

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 

www.netaworld.org 

NFPA NFPA International (800) 344-3555 

(National Fire Protection Association International) (617) 770-3000 

www.nfpa.org 

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 

www.nfrc.org 

NGA National Glass Association (703) 442-4890 

www.glass.org 

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 

www.nlga.org 

NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 

www.nofma.org 

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 

www.nsf.org 

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 

NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. (800) 323-9736 

www.ntma.com (703) 779-1022 

NTRMA 

National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association 

(See RTI) 




NWWDA 

National Wood Window and Door Association 

(See WDMA) 

OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (800) 966-5253 

www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 

www.pci.org 

PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 

www.pdca.com (703) 359-0826 

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 

www.pdionline.org (508) 230-3516 

PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 

www.pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu 

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 

www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 

RFCI 

Resilient Floor Covering Institute 

www.rfci.com 

Contact by mail 

only 

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 

www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 

RTI Roof Tile Institute (541) 689-0366 

(Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers 

Association) 

www.ntrma.org 

SAE SAE International (724) 776-4841 

www.sae.org 

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 462-1930 

www.sdi.org 

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 

www.steeldoor.org 

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 

www.sefalabfurn.com 

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.sgcc.org 

SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 

www.siaonline.org 

SIGMA 

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 

(See IGMA) 

SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 

www.steeljoist.org 




SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 

National Association 

www.smacna.org 

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 

www.smpte.org 

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics 

Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) 

www.sprayfoam.org 

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 

www.spib.org 

SPI/SPFD 

Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. (The) 

Spray Polyurethane Foam Division 

(See SPFA) 

SPRI SPRI (781) 647-7026 

(Single Ply Roofing Institute) 

www.spri.org 

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 

www.steeltank.com 

SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 

www.steelwindows.com 

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 

www.swrionline.org 

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 

www.tileusa.com 

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 

Industries Alliance 

www.tiaonline.org 

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 

www.masonrysociety.org 

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (608) 833-5900 

www.tpinst.org 

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 

www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 705-9898 




UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 704-4050 

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 

www.uni-bell.org 

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 

www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 

WCMA 

Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(See WCSC) 

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 661-4261 

Association) 

www.windowcoverings.org 

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 

Door Association) 

www.wdma.com 

WIC Woodwork Institute of California (916) 372-9943 

www.wicnet.org 

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 

www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 

www.wsrca.com (650) 548-0112 

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 

www.wwpa.org 

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

Names, telephone numbers, and Web-site addresses are subject to change and are believed to 

be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (708) 799-2300 

www.bocai.org 

CABO 

Council of American Building Officials 

(See ICC) 

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical (909) 595-8449 

Officials (The) 

www.iapmo.org 




ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (800) 284-4406 

www.icbo.org (562) 699-0541 

ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 

www.icbo.org/ICBO_ES/ 

ICC International Code Council, Inc. (703) 931-4533 

(Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) 

www.intlcode.org 

SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (205) 591-1853 

www.sbcci.org 







SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Phased construction. 

2. Work by Owner. 

3. Work under separate contracts. 

4. Access to site. 

5. Coordination with occupants. 

6. Work restrictions. 

1.2 PHASED CONSTRUCTION 

The Contractor shall install the temporary sanitary sewer system for the Human Resources 

building as shown on the civil drawings prior to demolition of the existing sanitary sewer facilities 

located in area of excavation for the Customer Services Addition. 

1.3 WORK BY OWNER 

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering 

with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this 

Contract with work performed by Owner. 

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. 

Those operations may be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 

1. The Owner may install the network switches and UPSs for the VOIP Phone System prior 

to substantial completion. 

1.4 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS 

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried 

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. 

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. 

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award a separate contract for the following equipment installation 

at Project site. Those operations may be conducted simultaneously with work under this 

Contract. 

1. A separate contractor may install equipment for the VOIP Phone System prior to 

substantial completion. 

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE 

A. General: Contractor shall coordinate use of Project site for construction operations during 

construction period. 

B. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as 

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section. 

C. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb 

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 

1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises 

clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. 

Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. 




Summary 

01100 - 1

a. Either the existing Customer Services public entrance, or the new Atrium entrance 

to be constructed, shall remain open to the public throughout the duration of the 

Project. 

b. The Contractor shall maintain ECUA staff access to the existing Human Resources 

building until demolition is either authorized or provided by the Owner. 

c. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 75 paved parking spaces for the 

Owner’s use during the duration of the Contract. 

d. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of 

materials and equipment on-site. 

D. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction 

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused 

by construction operations. 

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS 

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, 

with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction 

operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to 

interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used 

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used 

facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's 

operations. 

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to 

place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to Substantial Completion 

of the Work. Such placement of equipment shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS 

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or 

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary 

utility services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. 

C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and 

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. 

D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of 

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. 

E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the 

existing building is not permitted. 

F. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project 

site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. 

PARTS 2 and 3 - (Not Used) 





Summary 

01100 - 2

SECTION 01200 – PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION AND PROCEDURES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Progress documentation requirements: 

a. Contractor's construction schedule. 

b. Progress reports. 

c. Progress photographs. 

2. Progress procedures: 

a. Progress meetings. 

B. Contract time is indicated elsewhere. 


A. Contractor's CPM Construction Schedule. 

1. Submit within 30 days after notice to proceed. 

2. Submit revised schedule with application for payment. 

B. Progress Reports: Submit with each application for payment. 

C. Progress Photographs: Submit with each application for payment. 

D. Minutes of Progress Meetings. 

E. Project Video: Submit pre-construction video within 60 days after notice to proceed and postconstruction 

video prior to final pay request. 

1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Schedules - General: 

1. Provide legend of symbols and abbreviations for each schedule. 

2. Use the same terminology as that used in the contract documents. 

3. When transparencies are submitted, use only media which will not fade or lose 

contrast over time. 

4. When opaque copies are submitted, submit a minimum of 3 copies. 

B. Bar Charts: 

1. Provide individual horizontal bars representing the duration of each major activity. 

2. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities. 

3. Show activities in proper sequence. 

4. Show percentage of completion of each activity. 

5. Include cost bar at top of chart, showing estimated and actual costs of work 

performed at the date of each application for payment. 

6. Use vertical lines to mark the time scale at not more than one week intervals. 

7. Prepare on reproducible transparency. 

8. Use sheets of sufficient number and width to show the full schedule clearly. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Progress Documentation and Procedures 01200 – 1 



C. Reports - General: 

1. Submit a minimum of 3 copies. 

D. Photographs: Full color digital 

1. Format: JPEG or TIFF 

2. Copy on DVD 

3. Provide 2 photos of each view. 

4. Mounting: 

a. Identify each DVD with: 

(1) Project name. 

(2) Engineer's name. 

(3) Contractor's name. 

(4) Photographer's name and address. 

b. Identify each file folder with project name and date taken. 

(1) Photo date. 

(2) Position and direction from which photo was taken. 

E. Video: Full color digital 

1. Three copies of pre-construction and post construction on DVD. 

2. These records will be utilized to determine the pre-existing condition of the roadway, 

driveways, fences, trees, landscaping and other improvements within the right-ofway. 

The contractor is cautioned to use care to include all existing landscaping, and 

previous damage to roadways, driveways and private or public property. 

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 

1.5 COORDINATION 

A. In preparation of schedules, take into account the time allowed or required for the engineer's 

administrative procedures. 



3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Prepare and submit a construction schedule. 

B. Provide construction schedule in the form of bar charts: 

1. Where related activities must be performed in sequence, show relationship 

graphically. 

2. Indicate activities separately for: 

a. Each story. 

b. Each separate building. 

3. Incorporate the submittal schedule specified elsewhere. 




4. Incorporate the quality control activities schedule specified elsewhere. 

5. Show dates of: 

a. Each activity that influences the construction time. 

b. Pre-construction meeting. 

c. Specified pre-installation meetings. 

d. Quality control activities which involve long lead time or long elapsed time. 

e. Ordering dates for products requiring long lead time. 

f. All submittals required. 

g. Completion of structure. 

h. Completion of permanent enclosure. 

i. Completion of mechanical work. 

j. Completion of electrical work. 

k. Instruction of the owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of 

equipment and systems. 

l. Substantial and final completion, with time frames for the engineer's 

completion procedures. 

6. Show dates required for: 

a. Selection of products to be furnished under an allowance. 

b. Approval of mock-ups required for approval of products. 

7. In developing the schedule take into account: 

a. Phased completion. 

b. Site limitations. 

c. Weather, including seasonal changes. 

d. Need for temporary heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning. 

C. The Engineer will notify the contractor if schedule is not satisfactory; revise and resubmit. 

1. Resubmit within 7 days. 

D. Make and distribute copies of schedule to the engineer, to the owner, to subcontractors, and 

to other entities whose work will be influenced by schedule dates. 

1. Hang a copy of the schedule up in each field office or meeting room. 

E. Update the schedule whenever changes occur or are made, or when new information is 

received, but not less often than at the same intervals at which applications for payment are 

made. 

1. Indicate changes made since last issue; show actual dates for activities completed. 

2. Submit updated schedule with application for payment. 

3. Issue updated schedule with report of meeting at which revisions are made. 

4. Issue updated schedule in same manner as original schedule. 

5. Narrative summary of all changes in the network. 

3.2 PROGRESS REPORTS 

A. Progress Reports: Prepare a narrative report describing the general state of completion of 

the work and describing in detail the following: 

1. Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule, and corrective actions 

taken or proposed. 

2. Actual and potential problems. 

3. Status of change order work. 

4. Effect of delays, problems, and changes on the schedules of other prime 

contractors. 

5. Outstanding change proposal requests. 




6. Status of corrective work ordered by the engineer. 

B. Progress Photographs: 

1. Take 12 photos of site before start of construction. 

2. Take a minimum of 12 photos for each submission. 

3. Take photos not more than one week prior to submittal of application for payment. 

4. Take photos from positions chosen to show the current status of completion and 

progress since previous photos were taken. 

3.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS 

A. Schedule and conduct periodic progress meetings during construction period. 

1. Have meetings once a month in the week just prior to submission of application for 

payment. 

2. Notify the engineer and the owner at least one week in advance of date of meeting; 

the engineer and the owner may attend. 

B. The following are required to attend: 

1. Project superintendent. 

2. Major subcontractors and suppliers. 

3. Others who have an interest in the agenda. 

C. Prepare and distribute agenda prior to meetings; cover the following topics when applicable: 

1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 

2. Status of submittals and impending submittals. 

3. Off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 

4. Actual progress of activities in relation to the schedule. 

5. Actual and anticipated delays, their impact on the schedule, and corrective actions 

taken or proposed. 

6. Actual and potential problems. 

7. Status of change order work. 

8. Effect of proposed changes on schedule and coordination. 

9. Status of corrective work ordered by the engineer. 

10. Progress expected to be made during the next period. 

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within 5 days to the Architect, Engineer, to the Owner, 

to all participants, and to all entities affected by decisions made. 





SECTION 01210 – ALLOWANCES 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 

1. Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have 

been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual 

materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for 

evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. 

B. Lump sum allowances for the following are to be included on the Contractor’s Proposal form 

Section 00005: 

1. Electrical Service as shown on the Drawings to be provided by Gulf Power Company and 

as described in Section 00011, paragraph 3.06. 

2. Fee for Building Permit Fee to be issued by Escambia County Building Inspections 

Division and the EPA as described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.07. Note: The County 

will require separate permits for the Pavilion, Walkway Cover and Fencing. 

3. Office Furniture as described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.08. 

4. Human Resources Building hazardous material removal as indicated in Appendix “C” and 

described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.10. 

1.2 SELECTION AND PURCHASE 

A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final 

selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be 

completed to avoid delaying the Work. 

B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. 

Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work. 

C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 


A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form 

specified for Change Orders. 

B. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for 

use in fulfillment of each allowance. 

C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of 

the Work. 


A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to 

coordinate installation. 

1.5 LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Allowances 01210 – 1 


HMM 239903 / ECUA CS141E

A. Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials selected by 

Architect under allowance and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site. 

B. Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, 

installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials selected by 

Architect under allowance shall be included as part of the Contract Sum and not part of the 

allowance. 



3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return 

damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 

3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and 

installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with 

related work. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Allowances 01210 – 2 


HMM 239903 / ECUA CS141E

SECTION 01230 – ALTERNATES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 


A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined 

in the bidding requirements that may be deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to 

accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the 

products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the 

Agreement. 

2. The credit for each alternate is the net deduction from the Contract Sum. No other 

adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 

1.4 PROCEDURES 

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate 

work of the alternate into Project. 

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar 

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part 

of alternate. 

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, 

of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred 

for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. 

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. 

Alternates shall only be accepted in the order in which they are listed in the Schedule. 

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. 



3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Alternates 01230 – 1 


HMM 239903/ECUA CIP No.CS141E

A. Alternate No. D1: Fencing at Courtyard. 

1. Delete the Brick Pilasters and Aluminum Fencing with Gates at the perimeter of the 

Courtyard as shown on the Drawings and described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.13. 

B. Alternate No.D2: Courtyard Pavilion and Concrete Slab as shown on the Drawings and 

described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.14. 

1. Delete the Pavilion and Concrete Slab as shown on the Drawings. Alternate shall include 

the piping associated with the wall-mounted drinking fountain. 

C. Alternate No. D3: Walkway Cover adjacent to Courtyard. 

1. Delete the Walkway Cover and attached exterior lighting as shown on the Drawings and 

as described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.15. The concrete sidewalk beneath the 

walkway cover is not a part of this alternate. 

2. Sod shall be provided in this area as a part of the Base Bid if this alternate is accepted. 

D. Alternate No. D4: Delete the demolition of the existing Human Resources and Training Building 

No. 942. 

1. Delete the demolition of the building as specified in Section 02221 of the Project Manual 

and described in Section 00011, Paragraph 3.16. If this alternate is accepted, demolition 

will be provided by the Owner no later than ninety (90) days prior to substantial 

completion. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Alternates 01230 – 2 



SECTION 01300 – SUBMITTALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preparing and processing of submittals for review and action. 

2. Preparing and processing of informational submittals. 

B. Submit the following for the Engineer's review and action: 

1. Shop drawings. 

2. Structural design information required by the contract documents. 

3. Product data. 

4. Samples. 

5. Structural design calculations. 

6. Submittals indicated as "for approval." 

7. Submittals for which procedures are not defined elsewhere. 

C. Submit the following as informational submittals: 

1. Certificates. 

2. Reports. 

3. Qualification statements for manufacturers/installers. 

D. Specific submittals are described in individual sections. 

E. Do not commence work which requires review of any submittals until receipt of returned 

submittals with an acceptable action. 

F. Do not allow submittals without an acceptable action marking to be used for the project. 

G. Submit all submittals to the engineer. 

H. Do not submit substitute items that have not been approved by means of the procedure 

specified elsewhere. 

I. Do not include requests for substitution (either direct or indirect) on submittals; comply with 

procedures for substitutions specified elsewhere. 


A. Shop Drawings: See General Conditions. 

1. Shop drawings also include: 

a. Product data specifically prepared for this project. 

b. Shop or plant inspection and test reports, when made on specific materials, 

products, or systems to be used in the work. 

B. Product Data: See General Conditions. 

1. Product data submittals also include: 

a. Performance curves, when issued by the manufacturer for all products of 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Submittals 01300 – 1 



that type. 

b. Selection data showing standard colors. 

c. Wiring diagrams, when standard for all products of that type. 

C. Samples: See General Conditions. 

D. Informational Submittals: Submittals identified in the contract documents as to be submitted 

for information only. 

1.3 FORM OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Sheets Larger Than 8-1/2 by 14 Inches: 

1. Maximum sheet size: 36 by 48 inches. 

a. Exception: Full size pattern or template drawings. 

2. Number of copies: 

a. Submittals for review: 

(1) 5 copies of blue- or black-line prints. 

(2) All but 1 copy will be returned. 

B. Small Sheets or Pages: 

1. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2 by 11 inches. 

2. Maximum sheet size for opaque copies: 8-1/2 by 14 inches. 

3. Number of copies: 

a. Opaque copies: 

(1) For review: 5 copies. 

(a) 1 copy will be retained. 

(2) Informational submittals: 2 copies. 

C. Samples: 2 sets of each. 

1. 1 set will be returned. 

D. If additional sets are needed by other entities involved in work represented by the samples, 

submit with original submittal. 

E. Copies in excess of the number requested will not be returned. 

F. Provide additional copies for project record documents. 

1.4 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Coordinate submittals and activities that must be performed in sequence, so that the 

engineer has enough information to properly review the submittals. 

B. Coordinate submittals of different types for the same product or system so that the engineer 

has enough information to properly review each submittal. 






3.1 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Transmit each submittal at or before the time indicated on the approved schedule of 

submittals. 

1. Prepare and submit for approval a schedule showing the required dates of submittal 

of all submittals. 

2. Organize the schedule by the applicable specification section number. 

3. Submit within 30 days after commencement of the work. 

4. Revise and resubmit the schedule for approval when requested. 

B. Deliver each submittal requiring approval in time to allow for adequate review and processing 

time, including re-submittals if necessary; failure of the contractor in this respect will not be 

considered as grounds for an extension of the contract time. 

C. Deliver each informational submittal prior to start of the work involved, unless the submittal is 

of a type which cannot be prepared until after completion of the work; submit promptly. 

D. If a submittal must be processed within a certain time in order to maintain the progress of the 

work, state so clearly on the submittal. In no case shall the Engineer be provided less than 

14 calendar days for review of any submittal. Contractor shall schedule the timing of 

submittals accordingly. 

E. If a submittal must be delayed for coordination with other submittals not yet submitted, the 

engineer may at his option either return the submittal with no action or notify the contractor of 

the other submittals which must be received before the submittal can be reviewed. 

3.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES - GENERAL 

A. Contractor Review: Sign each copy of each submittal certifying compliance with the 

requirements of the contract documents. 

B. Notify the Engineer, in writing and at time of submittal, of all points upon which the submittal 

does not conform to the requirements of the contract documents, if any. 

C. Preparation of Submittals: 

1. Label each copy of each submittal, with the following information: 


b. Date of submittal. 

c. Contractor's name and address. 

d. Engineer's name and address. 

e. Subcontractor's name and address. 

f. Supplier's name and address. 

g. Manufacturer's name. 

h. Specification section where the submittal is specified. 

i. Numbers of applicable drawings and details. 

j. Other necessary identifying information. 

k. Indicate whether manufacturer or other source is listed on the owner's 

preferred vendor list. 

2. Pack submittals suitably for shipment. 

3. Submittals to receive engineer's action marking: Provide blank space on the label or 

on the submittal itself for action marking; 3 inches wide by 4 inches high. 




D. Transmittal of Submittals: 

1. Submittals will be accepted from the contractor only. Submittals received from other 

entities will be returned without review or action. 

2. Submittals received without a transmittal form will be returned without review or 

action. 

3. Fill out a separate transmittal form for each submittal; also include the following: 

a. Other relevant information. 

b. Requests for additional information. 

3.3 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Content: Include the following information: 

1. Dimensions, at accurate scale. 

2. All field measurements that have been taken, at accurate scale. 

3. Names of specific products and materials used. 

4. Details, identified by contract document sheet and detail numbers. 

5. Show compliance with the specific standards referenced. 

6. Coordination requirements; show relationship to adjacent or critical work. 

7. Name of preparing firm. 

B. Preparation: 

1. Reproductions of contract documents are not acceptable as shop drawings. 

2. Identify as indicated for all submittals. 

3. Space for engineer's action marking shall be adjacent to the title block. 

3.4 PRODUCT DATA 

A. Submit all product data submittals for each system or unit of work as one submittal. 

B. When product data submittals are prepared specifically for this project (in the absence of 

standard printed information) submit such information as shop drawings and not as product 

data submittals. 

C. Content: 

1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed data sheets. 

2. Identify the particular product being submitted; submit only pertinent pages. 

3. Show compliance with properties specified. 

4. Identify which options and accessories are applicable. 

5. Include recommendations for application and use. 

6. Show compliance with the specific standards referenced. 

7. Show compliance with specified testing agency listings; show the limitations of their 

labels or seals, if any. 

8. Identify dimensions which have been verified by field measurement. 

9. Show special coordination requirements for the product. 

3.5 REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Submittals for approval will be reviewed, marked with appropriate action, and returned. 

B. Informational submittals: Submittals will be reviewed. 

C. Number of Engineer Reviews: The Engineer's review of Shop Drawings and Samples 




submitted by the Contractor in accordance with this Section and Section 00015 

Subsection 6.17 shall be reviewed without expense to the Contractor for the original 

submittal and first resubmittal, in response to the Engineer’s review of the original 

submittal, only. However, beginning with the second resubmittal, and for each 

subsequent resubmittal thereafter, the Contractor shall pay the cost of the Engineer's 

review. Payment shall be made in the form of a check, made payable to the Engineer in 

the amount of $500.00 and submitted with each required resubmittal. Second and 

subsequent resubmittals made without payment shall be returned to the Contractor 

without review and marked as incomplete. 

3.6 RETURN, RESUBMITTAL, AND DISTRIBUTION 

A. Submittals will be available at the office of the engineer for pick up upon review and action. 

The engineer's office will notify the contractor when submittals are ready. 

B. Perform re-submittals in the same manner as original submittals; indicate all changes other 

than those requested by the engineer. 

C. Distribution: 

1. Make extra copies for operation and maintenance data submittals, as required. 





SECTION 01400 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and 

quality control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or 

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the 

Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in 

the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also 

cover production of standard products. 

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control 

procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, 

Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 

C. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during 

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed 

construction complies with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after 

execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. 

Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. 

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes, materials and 

assemblies. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to 

review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. 

D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing 

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 


A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate 

their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on 

the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Quality Requirements 01400 – 1 


HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP No.CS141E

B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

5. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

6. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

7. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. 

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, 

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee 

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for 

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated 

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient 

production capacity to produce required units. 

B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of 

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of 

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for 

this Project. 

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling 

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar 

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to 

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering 

services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for 

installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this 

Project in material, design, and extent. 

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing 

and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests 

and inspections to be performed. 

G. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each 

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using 

materials indicated for the completed Work: 

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by 

Architect. 

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be 

constructed. 

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for 

judging the completed Work. 

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 




1.6 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, 

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing 

agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are 

engaged to perform. 

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work 

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. 

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services 

specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires 

testing or inspecting will be performed. 

2. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a 

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

3. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract 

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 

4. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, 

when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service 

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including 

service connections. Report results in writing. 

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for 

construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established 

by the Contract Documents. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of 

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the 

Work during performance of its services. 

2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected 

work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol 

service through Contractor. 

4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or 

approve or accept any portion of the Work. 

5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and 

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify 

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the 

following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and 

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 

4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 

5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing 

agency. 




6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project 

site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance 

and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and 

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 



3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair 

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of 

these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas 

in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 

responsibility for quality-control services. 





SECTION 01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary 

utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Water service and distribution. 

2. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 

3. Electric power service. 

4. Telephone service. 

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Project identification and temporary signs. 

2. Waste disposal facilities. 

3. Field offices. 

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Stormwater control. 

2. Tree and plant protection. 

3. Site enclosure fence. 

1.2 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Engineer 

and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and 

facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Owner's construction forces. 

2. Engineer. 

3. Testing agencies. 

4. Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Sewer Service: Provided by ECUA 

1. Contractor shall furnish and install the connection to the ECUA sewer system, subject to 

ECUA approval. 

C. Water Service: Provided by ECUA and will be metered for documentation purposes. Contractor 

shall furnish and install an ECUA approved RPZ backflow preventer on all water services. 

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, 

for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 


A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary 

utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 

2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for 

temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each 

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Temporary Facilities and Controls 01500 – 1 



C. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. 

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines 

and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use 

of temporary service to use of permanent service. 

1. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall 

assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent 

service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of 

previously assigned responsibilities. 

B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by 

all parties engaged in the Work: 

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 

2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 

C. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume 

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its 

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned 

responsibilities. 

D. Owner Parking Requirements: The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 75 paved parking 

spaces for the Owner’s use during the duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall provide 

accessible temporary access from parking to both the Human Resources and Customer 

Services buildings. 

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the 

dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time 

frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to 

be inadequate. Include the following: 

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 

2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 

3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 

4. Waste handling procedures. 

5. Other dust-control measures 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable 

condition may be used if approved by Engineer. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric 

fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line 

posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. 

Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. 

C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 

D. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting." 

E. Water: Potable. 

F. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flamespread 

rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. 




G. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches 

2.2 EQUIPMENT 

A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. 

B. Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; 

heated and air conditioned; on foundations with anchoring in accordance with applicable 

building codes. 

C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or 

combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar 

nonabsorbent material. 

D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, 

including paper cup supply. 

E. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 

120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset 

button, and pilot light. 

F. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for 

surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be 

nonmetallic sheathed cable. 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference 

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as 

required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use 

of completed permanent facilities. 

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to 

existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder 

with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company 

recommendations. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be 

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 

2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is 

available, provide trucked-in services. 

3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements 

cannot be used for that purpose. 

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for 

construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before 

use. 

1. Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site. 

2. As soon as water is required at each level, extend service to form a temporary water- and 

fire-protection standpipe. Provide distribution piping. Space outlets so water can be 

reached with a 100-foot (30-m) hose. Provide one hose at each outlet. 




C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. 

Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and 

maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar 

disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste 

containers for disposal of used material. 

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide 

separate facilities for male and female personnel. 

3. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units. 

D. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution 

system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. 

Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault 

interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. 

1. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used. 

2. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to 

damage. 

E. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and 

equipment. 

1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if 

single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not 

exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 

F. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for 

common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate 

telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. 

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: 

a. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional 

occupant or pair of occupants. 

b. Provide a dedicated telephone line for answering machine, facsimile machine and 

computer with modem in field office. 

c. Provide one of the telephones for Engineer and Owner's use. 

2. At each telephone, post a list of police, fire, emergency services and essential public 

utilities telephone numbers. 

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. General: Comply with the following: 

1. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction 

and support facilities for easy access. 

2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial 

Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use 

permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. 

B. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in 

sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to 

Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. Provide temporary, directional signs 

for construction personnel, Owner, and public visitors. 

1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. 

Comply with general information indicated on the drawing title sheet. 

2. Construct signs of exterior-type GradeB -B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in 

sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated 

wood or steel. 




3. Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over 

exterior primer. 

C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle 

waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or 

unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 1 Section 

"Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 

1. Rolloffs and waste containers: Contractor is required to obtain service from Owner’s 

sanitation department and contractor will be responsible for all fees and charges. 

2. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, 

for each type of waste material to be deposited. 

D. Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weather tight, air-conditioned field office for 

use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to 

accommodate required office personnel and meetings of five (5) persons at Project site. Keep 

office clean and orderly. 

E. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, 

provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial 

Completion. 

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around 

excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater 

from heavy rains. 

B. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install portable chain-link 

enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project 

site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a 

manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by 

entrance gates. 

1. Set fence posts into concrete bases. 

2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and 

other construction operations. 

3. Use existing fence materials to the extent possible. 

4. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized 

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. 

C. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and 

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be 

removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 

1. Either the existing Customer Service public entrance, or the Atrium entrance to be 

constructed, shall remain open to the public throughout the duration of the Project. 

2. The Contractor shall maintain ECUA staff access to the existing Human Resources 

Building until demolition is either authorized or provided by the Owner. 

E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in 

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and 

similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate 

temporary enclosures. 




F. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration 

and to separate areas occupied by Owner and public from fumes and noise. 

1. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. 

Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up 

the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardanttreated 

plywood. 

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with 

not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in 

vestibule. 

b. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by 

authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated 

assemblies. 

c. Protect air-handling equipment. 

d. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 

G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types 

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with 

NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and 

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from 

damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 

1. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. 

Protect from damage during excavation operations. 

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as 

available do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to 

permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has 

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than 

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may 

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, 

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. 

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during 

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Closeout Procedures." 





SECTION 01524 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 




Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 

1. Salvaging nonhazardous building and site demolition waste. 

2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition waste. 

3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 


A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting 

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes 

packaging. 

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or 

selective demolition operations. 

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, 

recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in 

preparation for reuse. 

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in 

another facility. 

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent 

incorporation into the Work. 

1.4 PERFORMANCE GOALS 

A. Salvage/Recycle Goals: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous 

demolition waste as possible including the following materials: 

1. Building & Site Demolition Waste: 

a. Asphaltic concrete paving. 

b. Concrete. 

c. Concrete reinforcing steel. 

d. Mechanical equipment. 

e. Electrical devices. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Construction Waste Management 01524 – 1 




A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for 

commencement of the Work 

B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit 

three copies of report. Include report for demolition waste. with the following information: 

1. Material category. 

2. Generation point of waste. 

3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 

4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 

5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 

6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 

7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total 

waste. 

C. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable 

waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight 

tickets, receipts, and invoices. 

D. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills 

and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, 

and invoices. 

E. Qualification Data: refrigerant recovery technician. 

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for 

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that 

recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician 

and date refrigerant was recovered. 


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification 

program. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and 

cost/benefit analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure 

throughout waste management plan. 

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of building demolition and siteclearing 

waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for 

estimates. 

C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, 

or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each 

type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation 

procedures. 




1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this 

Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the 

Work. 

2. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled 

materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

3. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include 

name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 

4. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating 

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated 

location on Project site where materials separation will be located. 



3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 

A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Owner. Provide handling, 

containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste 

management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 

1. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, 

termination, and removal requirements. 

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible 

for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. 

Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. 

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management 

procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal 

return. 

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review 

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. 

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure 

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and 

used facilities. 

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that 

are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, or sold. 

2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust 

and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE 

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: NONE 

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: NONE. 

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: NONE 

D. Doors and Hardware: NONE. 




3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE, GENERAL 

A. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for 

recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. 

B. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. 

Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they 

are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at 

each container and bin. 

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials 

if found. 

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, 

grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of 

remaining trees. 

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 

5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or 

processor. 

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE 

A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. 

B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. 

1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size. 

C. Masonry: 

1. Crush masonry and screen to comply with Division 2 Section “Earthwork”. 

D. Wood Materials: NONE. 

E. Metals: Separate metals by type. 

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 

2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. 

F. Gypsum Board: NONE. 

G. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: NONE. 

H. Carpet and Pad: NONE. 

I. Equipment: Separate HVAC units. 

J. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, 

hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. 

K. Lighting Fixtures: NONE. 

L. Electrical Devices: Separate meters. 




M. Conduit: NONE. 

N. Site-Clearing Wastes: NONE. 

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE 

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove 

waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of 

accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces 

and areas. 

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 





SECTION 01600 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for 

use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on 

products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. 


A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or 

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," 

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or 

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product 

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or 

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new 

products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal 

process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities 

related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, 

appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. 

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and 

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other 

designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of 

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. The product of two additional 

manufacturer’s are named to permit other choices. 

D. Florida Building Code Building 2007: The building code referred to in this Project Manual, or 

“the code”. 

1.4 LOCAL PRODUCT APPROVAL 

A. For local product approval of exterior building products or systems of construction, such items 

shall demonstrate compliance with the structural windload requirements of the Florida Building 

Code Building 2006 through one of the following methods: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Product Requirements 01600 – 1 



1. A certification mark, listing, or label from a commission approved certification agency 

indicating that the product complies with the code; 

2. A test report from a commission approved testing laboratory indicating that the product 

tested complies with the code; 

3. A product-evaluation report based upon testing, comparative or rational analysis, or a 

combination thereof, from a commission-approved product evaluation entity which 

indicates that the product evaluated complies with the code. 

4. A product-evaluation report or certification based upon testing or rational analysis, or a 

combination thereof, developed and signed and sealed by a Florida professional 

engineer, which indicates that the product complies with the code. Certification shall be 

independent from the product manufacturer. 

5. A statewide product approval issued by the Florida Building Commission; or 

6. Designation of compliance with a prescriptive, material standard adopted by the 

commission by rule s. 553.842(15). 


A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names 

of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names and, in the 

case of exterior items, the required Florida code approval number for each product. 

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals 

Schedule. 

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: 

a. Specification Section number and title. 

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. 

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. 

d. Manufacturer's name and address. 

e. Supplier's name and address. 

f. Installer's name and address. 

g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. 

h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery 

date. 

i. Required Florida product approval number. 

3. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt 

of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product 

selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack 

of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract 

Documents. 

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product 

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and 

title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, 

as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to 

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate 

contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of 

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as 




performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and 

requirements indicated. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 

installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test 

results for compliance with requirements indicated. 

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for 

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed 

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall 

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided 

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's 

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. 

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in 

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently 

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce 

indicated results. 

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. 

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 

15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or 

documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. 

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed 

substitution within time allocated, except products without a Florida product 

approval number. 

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify 

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section 

number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. 

Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product 

request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information 

or documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." 

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable 

product request within time allocated, except for products requiring a Florida 

product approval number. 

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously 

selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 




1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods 

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible 

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, 

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that 

are or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original 

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for 

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to 

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight 

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of 

installation and concealment. 

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, 

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 

1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other 

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on 

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual 

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to 

Owner. 

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract 

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide 

more rights for Owner. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and 

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and 

properly executed. 

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a 

written document using appropriate form properly executed. 




3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular 

requirements for submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, 

that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items 

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are 

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used 

successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make 

selection. 

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is 

Architect's. 

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications 

establish "salient characteristics" of products.. 

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or 

equal" or "or approved equal" or "or equivalent," comply with provisions in Part 2 

"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the 

named product that complies with requirements. 

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, 

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and 

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a 

product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and 

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies 

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for 

consideration of an unnamed product. 

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a 

product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies 

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for 

consideration of an unnamed product. 

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional 

requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the 

specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" 

Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of 

manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other 

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, 

and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions 




in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the 

other named manufacturers. 

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established 

Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's 

sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other 

specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" 

Article for proposal of product. 

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected 

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that 

complies with other specified requirements. 

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of 

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, 

density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium 

items. 

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, 

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or 

texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium 

items. 

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the 

Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at 

discretion of Architect. 

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following 

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return 

requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy 

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner 

must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect 

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and 

similar considerations. 

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce 

indicated results. 

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having 

jurisdiction, including required product approval number. 

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has 

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible 

with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 




A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the 

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will 

return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract 

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the 

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the 

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 

6. Submittal of State of Florida product approval number. 






SECTION 01700 – EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Construction layout. 

2. Field engineering and surveying. 

3. General installation of materials. 

4. Coordination of Owner-installed materials. 

5. Progress cleaning. 

6. Starting and adjusting. 

7. Protection of installed construction. 

8. Correction of the Work. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project 

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and 

levels, and final cleaning. 


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A Professional Land Surveyor who is legally qualified to practice 

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying 

services of the kind indicated. 




A. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction 

indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the 

existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of 

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical, 

telephone, CATV and fiber optic services. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities 

serving Project site. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Execution Requirements 01700 – 1 




A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or 

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide 

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. 

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck 

measurements before installing the work. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before 

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 

Work. 

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown 

diagrammatically on Drawings. 

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for 

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Engineer. Include a 

detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the 

Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation." 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on 

Drawings, in relation to the project plans and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are 

discovered, notify Engineer promptly. 

B. General: Engage a Land Surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of 

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain 

required dimensions. 

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 

4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 

5. Notify Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable 

tolerances. 

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out proposed project improvements, including pavements, 

grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. 

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and 

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name 

and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log 

available for reference by Engineer. 

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING 

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference 

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control 

points during construction operations. 




1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written 

approval of Engineer. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points 

promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to 

Engineer before proceeding. 

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base 

replacements on the original survey control points. 

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, 

every 1200 L.F. referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities 

having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record 

Documents. 

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide 

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked 

construction to its original condition. 

3.5 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and 

elevation, as indicated. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in 

applications indicated. 

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. 

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. 

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or 

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. 

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 

F. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered 

hazardous. 

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED WORK 

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by 

Owner's construction forces. 

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for 

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually 

agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences 

in actual construction progress. 

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation 

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend 

preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the 

Work depend on Owner's construction. 




3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate 

progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce 

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and 

debris. 

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the 

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for 

proper execution of the Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written 

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials 

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning 

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed 

surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from 

damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. 

H. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing 

waste materials down sewers or into waterways shall not be permitted. 

I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining 

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from 

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 

J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through 

the remainder of the construction period. 

K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 

construction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise 

deleterious exposure during the construction period. 

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove 

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper 

operation. 




C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to 

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification 

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK 

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and 

finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." 

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up 

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. 

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. 

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired 

without visible evidence of repair. 

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components 

that cannot be repaired. 





SECTION 01731 – CUTTING AND PATCHING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. 

B. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to 

cutting and patching individual parts of the Work and to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration 

Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction. 


A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of 

other Work. 

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after 

installation of other Work. 


A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least ten (10) days 

before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include 

the following information: 

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate 

why they cannot be avoided. 

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to 

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's 

appearance and other significant visual elements. 

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 

5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting 

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated 

and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will 

be disrupted. 

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to 

structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of 

reinforcement with original structure. 

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and 

patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of 

unsatisfactory work. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Cutting and Patching 01731 – 1 



A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change 

their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a 

manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased 

maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following: 

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 

2. Air or smoke barriers. 

3. Fire-suppression systems. 

4. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 

5. Control systems. 

6. Communication systems. 

7. Conveying systems. 

8. Electrical wiring systems. 

9. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. 

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components 

in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity 

to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or 

safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following: 

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 

2. Membranes and flashings. 

3. Exterior store front or curtainwall construction. 

4. Equipment supports. 

5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 

6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual 

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or 

in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's 

aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a 

visually unsatisfactory manner. 

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, and if required by Architect, meet at 

Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical 

trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve 

potential conflicts before proceeding. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or 

damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to 

void existing warranties. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use 

materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 




1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when 

installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. 



A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to 

be performed. 

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, 

including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been 

corrected. 


A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. 

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be 

exposed during cutting and patching operations. 

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage 

to adjoining areas. 

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems 

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before 

cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 

3.3 PERFORMANCE 

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and 

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance 

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their 

original condition. 

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar 

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or 

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply 

with original Installer's written recommendations. 

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not 

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size 

required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover 

openings when not in use. 

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 

3. For Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a 

diamond-core drill. 

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections 

where required by cutting and patching operations. 




5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be 

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent 

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations 

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as 

possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Sections. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to 

demonstrate integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish 

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of 

patching and refinishing. 

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing 

materials. 

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area 

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even 

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall 

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and 

appearance. 

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint 

coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface 

containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent 

surfaces. 

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane 

surface of uniform appearance. 

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a 

weathertight condition. 

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely 

remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 





SECTION 01732 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Contractor shall coordinate with ECUA prior to any selective demolition in the existing Customer 

Services Building. 

B. Section Includes: 

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of the existing Customer Services building. 

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless 

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent 

damage, and deliver to Owner. 

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, 

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid 

delays. 

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed 

by selective demolition operations. 


A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures 

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate 

proposed locations and construction of barriers. 

B. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Selective Demolition 01732 – 1 



1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. 

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far 

as practical. 

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items: 

a. Furniture. 

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding 

with selective demolition. 

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the 

Work. 

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify 

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate 

contract. 

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against 

damage during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 


2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 



A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition 

operations where applicable. 

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not 

guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. 

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of 

selective demolition required. 

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended 

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. 

Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 




E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction 

photographs or videotapes. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and 

protect them against damage. 

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, 

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems 

serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide 

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain 

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC 

systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap 

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 

b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 

c. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and 

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and 

make equipment operational. 

d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug 

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal 

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other 

adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent 

injury to people and damage to adjacent facilities to remain. 

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area 

and to and from occupied portions of building. 

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of 

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage 

and damage to structure and interior areas. 

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are 

exposed during selective demolition operations. 

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling 

specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new 

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of 

governing regulations and as follows: 




1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete 

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting 

members on the next lower level. 

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use 

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and 

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to 

remain. 

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring 

existing finished surfaces. 

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At 

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of 

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable 

fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and 

promptly dispose of off-site. 

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid 

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to 

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 

9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." 

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS 

A. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and 

remove. 

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be[ recycled,] reused, salvaged, reinstalled, 

or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project 

site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 



3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will 

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste 

Management." 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 

3.7 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition 

operations began. 





SECTION 01770 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Project Record Documents. 

3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 

4. Warranties. 

5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 

6. Final cleaning. 

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial 

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on 

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

3. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. 

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final 

Completion, complete the following: 

1. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance 

requirements. 

2. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 

3. Instruct Owner or its authorized Representative in operation, adjustment, and 

maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and 

area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction 

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 

Use CSI Form 14.1A. 

1. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, 

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 

2. Include the following information at the top of each page: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Closeout Procedures 01770 – 1 




1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. General: Refer to Specification Section 01800, Project Record Documents for additional 

information. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to 

Project Record Documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours. 

B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of black-line white prints of Contract Drawings 

and Shop Drawings to Owner. 

1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that 

shown originally. Require individual or entity that obtained record data, whether 

individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up 

Record Prints. 

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be 

readily identified and recorded later. 

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. 

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup 

before enclosing concealed installations. 

d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing 

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are 

marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 

2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish 

between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 

3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted 

from original Drawings. 

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate 

numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 

5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD 

DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with 

durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 

C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other 

Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual 

performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for 

continued use and reference. 

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 

A. Requirements are covered under Section 01782 of these specifications. 

1.8 WARRANTIES 

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of the 

Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is 

indicated. 

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 

Project Manual. 

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, 

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch 

paper. 




2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark 

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or 

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone 

number of Installer. 

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," 

Project name, and name of Contractor. 

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or 

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially 

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 


3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 

A. Instruction: Instruct Owner or authorized Representative on procedures to adjust, operate, and 

maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 

1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 

2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed times. For equipment that requires seasonal 

operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 

3. Schedule training with Owner allowing at least seven days' advanced notice. 

4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of 

instruction, and course content. 

B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for 

each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification 

Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include 

instruction for the following: 

1. System design and operational philosophy. 

2. Review of documentation. 

3. Operations. 

4. Adjustments. 

5. Troubleshooting. 

6. Maintenance. 

7. Repair. 

3.2 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply 

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution 

regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each 

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and 

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions. 




1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification 

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, 

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and 

other foreign substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other 

foreign deposits. 

c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 

Project site. 

d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, 

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural 

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original 

condition. 

e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; 

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 

h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. 

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. 

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 

Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

i. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or 

that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

(1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical 

nameplates. 

k. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. 

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign 

substances. 

l. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains 

resulting from water exposure. 

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed 

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during 

construction. 

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. 

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and 

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply 

with requirements for new fixtures. 

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or 

excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous 

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose 

lawfully. 





SECTION 01782 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and 

maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 

2. Emergency manuals. 

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes; 

systems and equipment. 


A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular 

interaction. 

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 


A. Initial Submittal: Submit two (2) draft copies of each manual at least fifteen (15) days before 

requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and 

maintenance directory. Engineer will review and return one copy of draft and mark whether 

general scope and content of manual are acceptable. 

B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least fifteen (15) days before 

final inspection. Engineer will return copy with comments within fifteen (15) days after final 

inspection. 

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit six (6) 

copies of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Engineer's 

comments. 


A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more 

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information 

furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. 


2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Operation and Maintenance Data 01782 – 1 



A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 

1. List of documents. 

2. List of systems. 

3. List of equipment. 

4. Table of contents. 

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation 

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. 

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For 

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and 

maintenance manual. 

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, 

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the 

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to 

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building 

Systems." 

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL 

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for 

each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a 

system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 

1. Title page. 

2. Table of contents. 

3. Manual contents. 

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of Owner. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 

6. Names and addresses of Architect and project Engineer’s, including Consultants . 

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to 

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project 

Manual. 

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to 

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each 

volume of the set. 

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by 

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, 

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 

1. Binders: Three inch (3”) max. thickness, Heavy-duty, metal post-binder for three (3) hole 

system, ¼ inch hard vinyl-covered both front and back of each binder, with post-binders 

in necessary lengths to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; 




with clear plastic and metal sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with 

pockets mounted inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize 

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference 

other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper 

operation or maintenance of equipment or system. 

b. Identify each binder on front and on spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. 

Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each 

tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of 

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification 

Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic 

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and 

use as foldouts. 

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled 

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in 

manual, insert word processed (typewritten) pages indicating drawing titles, 

descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 

6. Only original vendor information (no copies or faxes) shall be accepted. 

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 

1. Type of emergency. 

2. Emergency instructions. 

3. Emergency procedures. 

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include 

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 

1. Fire. 

2. Gas leak. 

3. Water leak. 

4. Power failure. 

5. Water outage. 

6. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, 

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for 

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. 

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Instructions on stopping. 

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 




2.4 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in 

individual Specification Sections and the following information: 

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 

3. Operating standards. 

4. Operating procedures. 

5. Operating logs. 

6. Wiring diagrams. 

7. Control diagrams. 

8. Piped system diagrams. 

9. Precautions against improper use. 

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Startup procedures. 

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

4. Regulation and control procedures. 

5. Instructions on stopping. 

6. Normal shutdown instructions. 

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls 

as installed. 

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for 

identification. 

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. 

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and 

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and 

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and 

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference 

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 




C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 

5. Repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and 

related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include 

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, 

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance 

service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, 

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each 

product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance 

service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation 

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly 

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential 

maintenance procedures: 

1. Test and inspection instructions. 

2. Troubleshooting guide. 

3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. 




E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of 

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine 

maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, 

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording 

maintenance. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with 

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local 

sources of maintenance materials and related services. 

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and 

telephone number of service agent. 

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that 

provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures 

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies 

indicated. 

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care 

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance 

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment 

not part of a system. 

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information 

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an 

instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. 

3. All Operation and Maintenance Manuals should be accompanied by a CD-ROM 

containing the information in a single Adobe Acrobat portable document format (.pdf) file, 

in the latest available version. 

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include 

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each 

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a 

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. 

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and 

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment 

or systems. 




F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the 

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence 

and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings 

to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance 

manuals. 

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section 

"Project Record Documents." 

G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and 

maintenance documentation. 





SECTION 01800 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Project record documents consisting of: 

a. Contractor’s Working Record Drawings. 

b. PLS-Certified As-Built Drawings 

c. Record project manual (specifications). 

d. Record Submittals: 

(1) Shop drawings. 

(2) Product data. 

(3) Samples. 


A. Project Record Documents: Submit within 30 days of substantial completion, but prior to final 

completion. 

1. Working Record drawings: 

a. Submit single comprehensive original marked-up print set. 

b. Set shall include all drawings, whether changed or not. 

2. Certified As-Built Record Drawings: 

a. Submit BOTH PLS signed and sealed paper copy AND electronic format. 

Electronic format shall be .dwg - AutoCAD release 2005 and Portable 

Document Format (.pdf). 

3. Record Project Manual (Specifications): 

a. Submit single comprehensive original marked-up set. 

b. Set shall include all specifications, whether changed or not. 



3.1 MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Do not use record documents of any type for construction purposes. 

B. Maintain record documents in a secure location at the site while providing for access by the 

contractor and the Engineer during normal working hours; store in a fire-resistant room or 

container outside of normal working hours. 

C. Record information as soon as possible after it is obtained. 

D. Assign a person responsible for maintaining record documents. Submit to Engineer the 

name of the responsible person. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Project Record Documents 01800 – 1 



E. Record the following types of information on all applicable record documents: 

1. Dimensional changes. 

2. New and revised details. 

3. Depths of foundations. 

4. Locations and depths of underground utilities. 

5. Actual routings of piping and conduits. 

6. Revisions to electrical circuits. 

7. Actual equipment locations. 

8. Sizes and routings of ducts. 

9. Locations of utilities concealed in construction. 

10. Particulars on concealed products which will not be easy to identify later. 

11. Changes made by modifications to the contract; note identification numbers if 

applicable. 

12. New information or unknown existing conditions, which may be useful to the Owner, 

but which was not shown in either the contract documents or submittals. 

3.2 WORKING RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Maintain a complete set of the contract drawings, marked to show changes. The contractor 

will maintain “Working" drawings throughout the progress of the work. Drawings shall be a 

“living” record of all approved changes to the construction documents as the work 

progresses. Additionally, drawings shall include both horizontal and vertical references with 

three (3) tie dimensions to visible permanent physical features for all building corners, 

structures, laterals, valves and pipe appurtenances, and location of water mains and force 

mains with respect to the centerline of adjacent roads with depth below grade 

B. The contractor shall maintain on the jobsite and provide upon request accurate and current 

"Working" information as the job progresses. 

C. Where the actual work differs from that shown on the drawings, mark this set to show the 

actual work. 

1. Mark location of concealed items before they are covered by other work. 

2. Mark either record contract drawings or shop drawings, whichever are best suited to 

show the change. 

3. Where changes are marked on record shop drawings, mark cross-reference on the 

applicable contract drawing and attach copy of shop drawing to contract drawing with 

minimum of 4 staples. 

D. When the contractor is required by a provision of a modification to prepare a new drawing, 

rather than revise existing drawings, obtain instructions from the Engineer as to the drawing 

scale and information required. 

E. Keep drawings in labeled, bound sets. 

1. Mark with red pencil. 

2. Mark work of separate contracts with different colors of pencils. 

3. Incorporate new drawings into existing sets, as they are issued. 

F. Prepare a single complete set of contract drawings with all record changes marked. 

G. The Engineer will make the original contract drawings available to the contractor for printing 

transparencies. 




H. Where record drawings are also required as part of operation and maintenance data 

submittals, make copies from the original record drawing set. 

3.3 CERTIFIED AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Contractor shall provide Architect/Engineer with “As-Built” drawings prepared and certified by 

a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. “As-Built” drawings shall 

comply with Statutory minimum technical standards and be of the same horizontal and 

vertical Engineering scale(s) as the contract documents. 

B. All measurements shall be located in both horizontal state plane coordinates and NGVD in 

accordance with Statutory MTS to the nearest 0.01 ft horizontally and 0.1 ft vertically. 

C. “As-Built” drawings shall be complete, include all contractor’s field measurements and notes 

from “Working” drawings, include all changes made during the course of construction as well 

as Professional Surveyor’s measurements to accurately represent the entire final constructed 

project. 

D. Electronic files of construction drawings will be provided for contractor’s use. 

E. Contractor shall locate the following at minimum: all doors, and other openings; roof peaks; 

stack peaks; corners of buildings and other structures; all floor slab and elevations; all buried 

pipe fittings, appurtenances or changes in pipe direction; locations of externally installed 

equipment; limits of fencing and gates. 

3.4 RECORD PROJECT MANUAL 

A. The contractor will maintain “Working" specifications throughout the progress of the work. 

Specifications shall be a “living” record of all approved changes to the construction 

documents as the work progresses. 

B 

The contractor shall maintain on the jobsite and provide upon request accurate and current 

"Working" information as the job progresses. Maintain a complete copy of the project manual, 

marked to show changes. 

C. Where the actual work differs from that shown in the project manual, mark the record copy to 

show the actual work. 

1. Include a copy of each approved change to the contract. 

2. In addition to the types of information required on all record documents, record the 

following types of information: 

a. Product options taken, when the specification allows more than one. 

b. Product substitutions. 

c. Proprietary name and model number of actual products furnished, for each 

product, material, and item of equipment specified. 

d. Name of the supplier and installer, for each product for which neither a 

product data submittal nor a maintenance data submittal was specified. 

3.5 RECORD SUBMITTALS 

A. The Contractor shall maintain on the jobsite and provide upon request a complete set of all 

Approved Submittals as the job progresses. 

1. Maintain submittals in cardboard file boxes, labeled to show contents. 

2. Sort submittals by applicable specification section and file in order of submittal 




identification number. 

B. Record Shop Drawings: Record the types of information specified for all record documents. 

1. Mark changes on record shop drawings only when contract drawing would not be 

capable of showing the change clearly or completely. 

2. Mark changes in manner specified for record drawings. 

C. Record Product Data Submittals: Record the types of information specified for all record 

documents. 

1. In addition, record the following types of information: 

a. Changes in the products as delivered to the site. 

b. Changes in manufacturer's instructions or recommendations for installation. 

D. Record Coordination Drawings: Record the types of information required for all record 

documents. 

1. Mark up in the manner specified for record drawings. 

3.6 TRANSMITTAL TO ARCHITECT/ENGINEER 

A. Collect, organize, label, and package ready for reference. 

1. Provide cardboard file boxes for submittals. 

2. Provide cardboard drawing tubes with end caps for drawings 

3. Bind print sets with durable paper covers. 

4. Label each document (and each sheet of drawings) with "PROJECT RECORD 

DOCUMENTS - prepared by _____" [insert the contractor's name], and the date of 

preparation. 

5. Provide CD/DVD of electronic drawing files. 





SECTION 02102 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING 


1.01 General Description of Work 

A. Clearing and grubbing on project site of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, logs, 

rubbish and other objectionable matter within limits described in specifications or as 

shown on plans. 

B. Clearing and grubbing shall be in advance of grading and trenching operations except 

that in cuts over 3 feet in depth, grubbing may be done simultaneously with excavation, 

provided objectionable matter is removed as specified. 

C. Offsite disposal of all debris resulting from clearing and grubbing work in accordance with 

all construction debris, land cleaning and solid waste disposal regulations. 

1.02 Protection of Adjacent Work: 

Protect existing improvements, adjacent property, utilities and other facilities, and trees and 

plants, which are not to be removed from injury or damage. 

1.03 Protection from Erosion 

A. Install and maintain soil erosion and sediment control and storm water pollution 

prevention plan (SWPP) devices throughout the contract duration, especially prior to and 

after major rainfall events. 

B. Contractor shall protect all disturbed areas from erosions. 

C. Repair any areas damaged by erosion. 

D. Clean erosion sediment from affected areas. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.01 Materials: 

Provide materials required to perform work as specified. 


3.01 Clearing 

A. Clear all areas covered by dikes, roads, structures and embankments within project limits 

unless otherwise shown in plans. 

B. Remove all saplings, brush, down-timber and debris unless shown or directed otherwise. 

3.02 Grubbing 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Clearing & Grubbing 2102 – 1 



A. Trees, stumps, root systems, rocks and other obstructions shall be removed when they 

fall within the project’s construction installation limits. 

B. Blasting not permitted. 

3.03 Removal of Debris and Cleanup 

A. Burn as permitted by regulating agencies or the Engineer and Owner as work progresses. 

B. Unguarded fires will not be permitted. 

C. Permits will be obtained, as required, for necessary burning or debris disposal sites. 

D. Dispose of all waste materials not burned by removal from site. 

E. Materials cleared and grubbed shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be his 

responsibility for proper disposal, in accordance with all regulatory requirements. 

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 

4.01 Clearing and Grubbing 

A. Clearing and grubbing shall be measured for payment either in acres or by lump sum only 

for areas indicated on the plans, or as provided in the proposal and contract. 

B. When not listed as a separate contract pay item, clearing and grubbing shall be 

considered, as incidental work, and the cost thereof shall be included in such contract pay 

items as are provided in the proposal contract. 

C. Compensation, whether by contract pay item or incidental work will be for furnishing all 

materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals required for the work, all in accordance 

with the plans and these specifications. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Clearing & Grubbing 2102 – 2 



SECTION 02200 – EARTHWORK 


1.01 SCOPE: The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools and 

equipment necessary to complete the earthwork shown on the drawings and specified herein, 

including rough grading. 

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 

A. Bidders shall examine the site of the work and make their own determination of the character 

of materials and the conditions to be encountered on the work, and their proposal shall be 

based upon their own investigations. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall be held 

responsible for variations found to exist between any soils data, which may be included for 

information only, and actual field conditions that develop through the period of construction. 

B. Underground structures and utilities shown on the drawings are located according to the best 

available records. However, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to acquaint himself with 

all information and to locate all underground structures and utilities in order to avoid conflict 

with existing facilities. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall be held responsible for the 

inaccuracies or omissions in the location or grade of facilities of this type. 

C. Where actual conflicts are unavoidable, work shall be performed so as to cause as little 

interference as possible with the service rendered by the facility disturbed. Facilities or 

structures damaged in the prosecution of the work shall be repaired immediately at the 

Contractor's expense, in conformance with the best standard practice, to the satisfaction of 

the owner and to the extent required, including replacement. 

D. Benchmarks and other reference points shall be carefully maintained and, if disturbed or 

destroyed by the Contractor, shall be replaced by a Professional Surveyor registered to 

practice in the State of Florida, to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no additional cost to 

the Owner. Location of benchmarks and other reference points not shown on the drawings 

but used during construction shall be recorded on the Contractor's "as-builts" of the Contract 

Drawings. 

E. On paved surfaces, the Contractor shall not use or operate tractors, bulldozers, or other 

power operated equipment, which would damage such surfaces. All surfaces, which have 

been damaged by the Contractor's operations, shall be restored to a condition at least equal 

to that in which they were found immediately before work was begun. Suitable materials and 

methods as determined by the Engineer shall be used for such restoration. 

F. Core building data, including groundwater elevations or conditions, existing piping, and 

structure locations as appended to these specifications and indicated on the drawings, are 

presented only as information that is available which indicates certain conditions found and 

limited to the exact locations and on the dates indicated. The inclusion of such data shall not 

be interpreted as an indication of conditions that may actually be encountered through the 

period of construction. 


2.01 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Earthwork 02200 – 1 



A. Topsoil suitable for final grading operations shall be stripped and stockpiled in for reuse. 

Unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a manner satisfactory 

to the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 

B. The Owner reserves the right to claim and use for his own benefit all excess spoil material. 

2.02 GRADING 

A. Grade all areas as indicated. Fill shall be brought to finish grades shown and shall be graded 

to drain water away from structures as required. 

B. Overall Area Grading for Which No Grades are Indicated: 

Within the limits of construction and outer limits of clearing and grubbing, all holes and other 

depressions shall be filled, all mounds and ridges cut down, and the area brought to 

sufficiently uniform control so that the Owner's subsequent mowing operation will not be 

hindered by irregular terrain. This work shall be done regardless of whether the irregularities 

were the result of the Contractor's operations or originally existed. 

2.03 EXCESS MATERIAL: 

A. Excess excavated material suitable for reuse as backfill, shall be immediately disposed of by 

the Contractor on site as directed by the Engineer or Owner, and at no additional cost to the 

Owner. Material shall be spread and graded in such a manner as to drain properly and not 

disturb existing drainage conditions. 

B. Excess excavated material not suitable as reuse for backfill shall be immediately removed 

from the site and disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 

2.04 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL: If unsuitable material is encountered, the Contractor shall immediately 

notify the Engineer. The Engineer shall arrange for an independent soils testing firm to define the 

limits of and quantify the unsuitable material to be removed and replaced. Contractor shall be 

responsible for the removal, disposal and replacement of unsuitable material. Wet materials will not 

be considered unsuitable and it is the Contractor's responsibility to dry suitable materials as 

necessary for use at the site. Testing fees, if any, shall be paid by the Construction Manager. 

2.05 DUST CONTROL: Dust control, if arises, will be the contractors responsibility. If, in the opinion of the 

Owner or the Engineer, it is necessary to control dust from time to time during the progress of the 

work, the Contractor shall use water trucks and/or furnish and spread calcium chloride at the site of 

the work as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 

2.05 SILTATION AND EROSION: The Contractor shall take steps and make suitable provisions to 

minimize siltation and erosion which may result from, or as a result of, his operations during the 

course of construction of this project. All siltation and erosion control shall be in strict accordance with 

applicable local, state, and federal requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing all 

erosion control barriers upon stabilization and completion of the work. 

The site contractor shall be responsible for submitting a National Pollution Discharge Elimination 

System (NPDES) permit, certification statement and the appropriate fee 48-hours prior to beginning 

construction. The Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan is provided in the Civil Site Plans. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Earthwork 02200 – 2 



SECTION 02210 – GRASSING 


1.01 Related Documents 

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply 

to work of this Section. 

1.02 Description of Work 

Extent of grassing work is as specified or shown on the construction plans. Sodded areas disturbed 

during construction shall be re-sodded to match existing grass species. All other areas disturbed 

during construction operations shall be seeded, unless noted otherwise on plans. 

1.03 Quality Assurance 

All seed used shall be labeled in accordance with U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and 

Regulations under the Federal Seed Act in effect on the date of invitation for bids. All seed shall be 

furnished in sealed standard containers, unless exception is granted in writing by the Owner. Seed, 

which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage, shall not be used. 

Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened containers, each bearing the 

manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Any fertilizer, which becomes cake or otherwise damaged, 

making it unsuitable for use, shall not be used. Seed, fertilizer and other grassing materials shall be 

stored under cover and protected from damage, which would make then unacceptable for use. 

1.04 Submittals 

Approvals except those required for field installations, field applications, or field tests shall be obtained 

before delivery of materials or equipment to the project. The results of laboratory tests performed on 

the topsoil material shall be submitted. The reports shall include the pH level, the amount of organic 

matter, and available phosphoric acid and potash of the soil intended for use in the work. Certificate 

of conformance will be required for the following: 

A. Grass seed and sod shall be certified by registered, certified seed association or a registered 

testing laboratory not more than ten months prior to seeding. 

B. Sprigs 

C. Fertilizer 

D. Lime 

E. Mulching 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS: 

2.01 Soil Amendments 

A. Lime 

Ground limestone (Dolomite) shall contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates, and 

shall be ground to such a fineness that 50 percent will pass a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent 

will pass a 20-mesh sieve. 

B. Fertilizer 

Fertilizer shall be 16-16-16 formulation. The nitrogen shall be 60% urea-formaldehyde form. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Grassing 02210 – 1 



Fertilizer shall conform to the applicable State Fertilizer laws and shall be granulated so that 

80 percent is held on a 16-mesh screen, uniform in composition, dry and free-flowing. 

C. Mulch 

Clean hay or fresh straw mulch. 

2.02 Grass Materials 

A. Grass Seed 

Federal Specifications JJJ-S-18 and shall satisfy the following requirements: 

Seed Pure Seed Hard Seed Weed Seed 

Argentine Bahia 85% 15% .25% 

(Paspalum notatum) 

Seed failing to meet the purity or germination requirements by not more than twenty-five 

percent may be used, but the quantity shall be increased to yield the required rate of pure live 

seed. Seed failing to meet the weed seed requirements shall not be used. 

B. Sod 

Sod shall comply with the requirements of Section 981-2 Sod of the 2007 Edition of the 

FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 


3.01 Grading 

Areas to be grassed shall be graded to remove depressions, undulations, and irregularities in the 

surface before grassing. 

3.02 Tillage 

The area to be grassed shall be thoroughly tilled to a depth of four inches using a plow and disc 

harrow or rotary tilling machinery until a suitable bed has been prepared and no clods or clumps 

remain larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 

3.03 Application of Lime 

The pH of the soil shall be determined. If the pH is below 5.0, sufficient lime shall be added to provide 

a pH between 5.5 and 6.5. The lime shall be thoroughly incorporated into the top three to four inches 

of the soil. Lime and fertilizer may be applied in one operation. 

3.04 Application of Fertilizer 

Fertilizer shall be applied at the rate of 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet and shall be thoroughly 

incorporated into the top three to four inches of soil. 

3.05 Planting Seeds 

All areas disturbed during construction shall be seeded as specified herein. Immediately before 

seeds are sown and after fertilizer and lime are applied, the ground shall be scarified as necessary 

and shall be raked until the surface is smooth, friable, and of uniformly fine texture. Areas to be 

grassed shall be seeded evenly with a mechanical spreader, raked lightly, rolled with a 200-pound 

roller, and watered with a fine spray. 




A. Seed shall be applied at the following rate: 

Seed 

Argentine Bahia Grass 

(paspalum notatum) 

Rate of Application 

6 lbs./1000 sq. ft. 

260 lbs./acre 

B. Seeded areas shall be mulched at the rate of not less than 1-1/2" loose measurement over all 

seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. Mulch shall be cut into 

the soil with equipment capable of cutting the mulch uniformly into the soil. Mulching shall be 

done within 24 hours of the time seeding is completed. 

3.06 Rolling 

After seeding and mulching, a cultipacker, traffic roller, or other suitable equipment shall be used for 

rolling the grassed areas. Areas shall then be watered with a fine spray. 

3.07 Winter and Temporary Cover 

All areas to be grassed shall be protected against erosion at all times. For protection during winter 

months (November 1st through March 31st) Italian rye grass shall be planted at the rate of four 

pounds per 1,000 square feet on all areas which are not protected by established, permanent grass. 

3.08 Sodding 

Soil preparation, sod placement and maintenance shall be in accordance with Section 575 of the 

2007 Edition of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 

3.09 Clean-up 

All excess soil, excess grass materials, stones, and other waste shall be removed from the site daily 

and not allowed to accumulate. 

3.10 Maintenance 

Maintenance shall begin immediately following the last operation of grassing and continue until final 

acceptance. Maintenance shall include watering, mowing, replanting, and all other work necessary to 

produce a uniform stand of grass. Grassing will be considered for final acceptance when the 

permanent grass is healthy and growing on 97 percent of the area with no bare areas larger than 12 

inches square. 

3.11 Acceptance 

The Contractor shall submit to the Owner two copies of a written request for final acceptance of the 

grassing work. The request shall be submitted at least ten days prior to the anticipated date of 

acceptance. The condition of the grass will be noted, the Contractor will be notified if maintenance is 

to continue. 





SECTION 02215 – EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION 


1.01 DESCRIPTION: This section includes materials, testing, and installation of earthwork for 

excavations, fills and embankments for structures, pavements, rights-of-way, and sites and trench 

excavating, backfilling, and compacting for underground pipelines and appurtenant structures. All 

excavation and backfill for utilities shall be in accordance with any geotechnical engineering report 

included with these specifications. 

1.02 STANDARDS: 

A. Determine the density of soil in place by the sand cone method, ASTM D1556, by nuclear 

methods, ASTM D2922; or by the rubber balloon method, ASTM D2167. 

B. Determine laboratory options moisture-density relations of cohesive soils by ASTM D1557 

(modified Proctor). 

C. Sample backfill materials by ASTM D75. 

D. For cohesive soils, "relative density" is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the inplace 

dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 (modified 

Proctor). 

E. Determine the relative density of cohesionless soils by ASTM D2049. 

1.03 DEFINITIONS: 

A. Subgrade: The undisturbed material immediately below the bottom of an excavation, below 

an area of fill, or below a structure. 

B. Excavation: Removal of earth or buried material, either temporarily or permanently, as 

specified or as necessary for construction of the project. 

C. Over-excavation: Excavation exceeding that specified or shown on the plans. 

D. Backfill: Earth material placed permanently in an excavated area. 

E. Fill: Earth material placed permanently above the existing grade. 

F. Borrow: Earth material brought from off the site to be used as fill or backfill. 

G. Structural Backfill: Backfill placed beneath structures and in overexcavated areas. 

H. Structures: Buildings, foundations, and other man-made, stationary features above or below 

ground. 


2.01 BACKFILL AND FILL 

A. For Structures: Backfill and fill shall be clean soils that is free from clayballs contain no more 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Excavation, Backfill 02215 – 1 


and Compaction 


than 10% by weight passing the No. 200 sieve. The gradation of this granular material shall 

be such as to achieve the specified compaction. 

B. In the event there is insufficient satisfactory material from the excavation to meet the 

requirements for backfill or fill material, obtain borrow which meets the requirements for 

backfill material from sources secured by the Contractor. 

2.02 STRUCTURAL BACKFILL: Structural backfill shall be free from clay balls and shall conform to ASTM 

D1241, Type I, Gradation B. 

2.03 WATER FOR COMPACTION: Water shall be free of acid, alkali, or organic materials and shall have 

a pH of 7.0 to 9.0. Provide all water needed for earthwork. Provide temporary piping, valves, and 

trucks to convey water from the source to the point of use. Provide any meters required if the water is 

taken from a public water system. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION: 

3.01 DEWATERING: Provide and operate equipment adequate to keep excavations free of water. 

Dewater subgrade to a minimum of 3 feet below the bottom of the excavation. Remove water during 

periods when concrete is being deposited, during the placing of backfill, and for proper inspection 

and/or testing of the exposed subgrade. These provisions shall apply during the noon hour as well as 

overnight. Do not drain trench water through the pipeline under construction. Avoid settlement or 

damage to adjacent property. Dispose of water in a manner that will not damage adjacent property or 

interfere with normal drainage. When dewatering open excavations, dewater from outside the 

structural limits and from a point below the bottom of the excavation. Obtain and comply with all 

required discharge permits from appropriate regulatory authorities. 

3.02 EXCAVATION: 

A. Excavate to the elevations shown on the drawings, to the bottom elevations of the slabs, 

structures, and foundations or the bottom of the roadway sub-base (top of sub-base if only to 

be compacted), whichever is the lowest elevation. 

B. Perform all excavation regardless of the type, nature, or condition of the material 

encountered to accomplish the construction. 

C. After the excavation has been completed, the Owner or his representative will observe the 

exposed subgrade to determine the need for any additional excavation. It is intended that 

additional excavation be conducted in all areas within the influence of the structure where 

unacceptable subgrade removal of all such unacceptable material that exists directly beneath 

the hole or structure for the full width of the hole or structure and to a depth required to reach 

suitable foundation material. Refill the over-excavated areas with structural backfill. No 

payment will be made by the Owner for over-excavation of wet subgrade materials. It shall 

be the Contractor's responsibility to dry wet subgrade materials as necessary for proper 

compaction and stabilization. 

D. Do not carry excavation for footings, slabs or conduits deeper than the elevations shown on 

the plans. Backfill over-excavations below the elevations shown to the proper elevation with 

compacted structural backfill material. Correct cuts below grade by similarly cutting adjoining 

areas and creating a smooth transition. 

E. The Contractor will not receive any additional payment for over-excavation or refill material 

used for his convenience or which is not authorized by the Owner or his representative. 





F. The Contractor shall acquaint himself with existing conditions and locate all structures and 

utilities within the project area in order to avoid conflicts. 

G. Protect any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings or other underground structures 

encountered in trenching/excavating/backfilling from damage or displacement. Replace any 

pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings or other structures disturbed during construction. 

H. Contact all utility companies with underground utilities in the project area and obtain their 

assistance in locating facilities prior to excavation. 

I. Excavate sufficiently in advance of pipe laying to discover obstructions in time to modify 

alignment, if necessary, to avoid the obstruction. The Owner or his representative must 

review and approve such alignment modifications before they are encountered. 

3.03 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE PRIOR TO PLACING FOUNDATIONS: Excavate and shape 

subgrade to line, grade, and cross section. Remove soft material encountered and replace with 

structural backfill. Fill holes and depressions to the required line, grade, and cross sections with 

structural backfill. The finished subgrade shall be within a tolerance of ± 0.08 feet of the grade and 

cross section shown, smooth and free from irregularities, and at the specified relative density. 

3.04 PREPARATION FOR PLACING FILL OR BACKFILL: 

A. Remove loosened and disturbed materials at the subgrade. 

B. Remove form materials and trash before placing any fill or backfill. Obtain the specified 

compressive strength and finish of concrete work before backfilling. 

C. Do not operate earthmoving or excavation equipment within five feet of existing structures or 

newly completed structures. Place and compact fill or backfill adjacent to concrete walls with 

hand-operated tampers or other equipment that will not damage the structure. 

D. Fill or backfill around water-holding basins and channels only after specified leakage tests 

have been conducted. 

3.05 COMPACTION: 

A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, areas outside pipe trenches must meet 

the following compaction requirements. 

1. Structural Backfill: 98% relative density in 6-inch maximum layers. 

2. Sub-grade Underfill or Backfill: 95% relative density to a depth of 12 inches. 

3. Sub-grade Under Structural Backfill or Structures: 95% relative density to a depth of 

24 inches. 

4. Backfill or Fill Under Pavement: 98% relative density in 12-inch maximum layers. 

5. All Other Areas: 95% relative density in 12-inch maximum layers. 

B. Compact by using methods acceptable to the Engineer (powered tampers, vibrators, etc.). 

Flooding or puddling with water to consolidate backfill is not acceptable, except where sand is 

encountered and the specified density can be obtained using this method. 

C. During the compacting operations, maintain material within ± 2% of optimum moisture. 

Aerate material containing excessive moisture by blading, disking, or harrowing to hasten the 

drying process. 





3.06 STRUCTURAL BACKFILL: Place structural backfill where specified and in over-excavation areas, to 

the lines and grades shown or specified. Compact each layer. Stop structural backfill at least 6 

inches below finished grade in all areas where topsoil is to be replaced. Moisten material as 

necessary to aid compaction. 

3.07 SITE WORK 

A. Shape the surface of earthwork to conform to lines, grades and cross sections that existed 

prior to beginning work or as shown on the drawings, within 1/10 of a foot. Round tops of 

banks to circular curves to not less than a 6-foot radius. Neatly and smoothly trim rounded 

surfaces. Do not over-excavate and backfill to achieve the proper grade. 

B. Remove excess, unsuitable, or cleared material resulting from the facility installation from the 

work site and dispose of at locations secured by the Contractor. 

3.08 DRAINAGE, EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION: Maintain all existing drainage patterns and control 

run-off from the construction area to prevent erosion, sedimentation, or flooding due to the 

construction. 

3.09 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY 

A. Protect the trunks of trees adjacent to this work by enclosure with padding or wood. Operate 

excavating machinery and cranes with care to prevent damage to trees, particularly to 

overhanging branches and limbs. 

B. Do not cut branches, limbs and roots unless they are within six inches of the facility under 

construction. Make all necessary cuts smoothly and neatly without splitting or crushing. 

Neatly trim and cover the tree with healing paint at all cut or damaged portions. 

C. Do not cut or operate on paved surfaces any equipment with treads or wheels which will cut 

or otherwise damage paved surfaces. Provide adequate protective measures to avoid 

damages to the paved surfaces. 

3.10 TESTING 

A. Field density tests will be made in locations reviewed by the Owner, normally in each vertical 

layer, and using the following approximate spacing. 

1. Under structures, pavements, and slabs, one per 2500 square feet with at least two 

per structure or area. 

2. In trenches, one every 300 feet in continuous trenches under pavements or future 

pavements plus one at each intersection or one every 500 feet in continuous 

trenches not under pavements. 

B. If any field density tests are below the specified relative density, re-compact or re-excavate, 

re-backfill and re-compact the area until the specific density is obtained. Make a minimum of 

two field density tests per recompacted and/or re-excavated area, but do not exceed the 

spacing specified above. 






SECTION 02220 – BUILDING DEMOLITION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Demolition and removal of the Human Resources building and related site elements such 

as transformer, mechanical, etc., and as indicated on the Drawings. 

2. Refer to Section 01230 – Alternates in the Project Manual for Work in this Section. 

3. Abandoning in-place below-grade construction. 

4. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning in-place site utilities. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless 

indicated to be removed and salvaged. 

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and 

their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to 

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified refrigerant recovery technician. 

B. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 

1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 

2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 

3. Shutoff and capping of utility services. 

C. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for 

recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that 

recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician 

and date refrigerant was recovered. 


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification 

program. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Building Demolition 02220 – 1 



C. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 

D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be demolished. 

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structures. 

3. Review and finalize building demolition schedule and verify availability of demolition 

personel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

4. Review and finalize protection requirements. 

5. Review procedures for noise control and dust control. 


A. Building to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. 

B. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished. 

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner 

as far as practical. 

2. Before building demolition, Owner will remove any salvagable items. 

C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the 

Work. 

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 

2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; 

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner 

under a separate contract. 

D. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted. 


A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on-site operations. 

B. The Contractor shall maintain ECUA staff access to the existing Human Resources Building 

until demolition is either authorized or provided by the Owner. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS[ (Not Used)] 

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS 

A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 


3.1 DEMOLITION CONTRACTOR 


A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations. 




B. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building 

demolition operations. 


A. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and 

regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition. 

B. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving 

buildings and structures to be demolished. 

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 

2. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal 

remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of 

authorities having jurisdiction. Remove all pipe or conduit within five-feet of the new 

stormwater pipe to be installed as indicated on the civil drawings. 

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural 

support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction 

being demolished. 

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. 

3.4 PROTECTION 

A. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition 

operations. 

1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless 

authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to 

Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 

a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of 

service is required during changeover. 

B. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as fences where required by 

authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

1. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 

2. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip 

line of groups of trees to remain. 

3.5 DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods 

required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain 

portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 

2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 8 hours after flame cutting operations. 

3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 

4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to 

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 




B. Engineering Surveys: During demolition, perform surveys to detect hazards that may result 

from building demolition activities. 

C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 

3.6 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS 

A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower 

level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing 

supporting members on the next lower level. 

B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will 

convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize 

ground impact and dust generation. 

C. Below- Grade Construction: Abandon foundation walls and other below-grade construction. Cut 

below-grade construction 24-inches below grade. 

D. Existing Utilities: Abandon existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. Cut utilities 24- 

inches below grade. Remove existing utilities located within five-feet of new stormwater line to 

be installed as indicated on the civil drawings. 

3.7 SITE RESTORATION 

A. Below- Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building 

demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in 

Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 

B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free 

from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades 

and new grades. 

3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPAapproved 

landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. See Division 1 Section 

"Construction Waste Management" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 



B. Do not burn demolished materials. 

3.9 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition 

operations began. 

1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport. 








SECTION 02221 – TRENCH EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND COMPACTION 


1.01 General Description of Work: 

A. Excavation, shoring, dewatering, pipe bedding, trench backfill, compaction, grading and 

cleanup of all pipeline trenching for the project. 

B. All work must be done in accordance with these specifications and the safety 

requirements of the State and OSHA standards. 

1.02 Job Conditions: 

A. Accept site in condition existing during Contract time frame. 

B. Groundwater/surface water found or created during construction are conditions of the 

Contract and responsibility of Contractor. 


2.01 Pipe Bedding and Backfill: 

A. Determination of source of materials for bedding and backfill shall be responsibility of 

Contractor, but use of such materials shall be subject to approval of Engineer. 

B. Pipe bedding shall be angular material. 

2.02 Sand Bedding Backfill: 

(Where specified, on the plans or directed by the Engineer or Owner) 

Use sand or fine aggregate as specified in the project manual Special Conditions with source of 

material subject to approval of Engineering. 

2.03 Cradling Rock: 

Use crushed rock or stone with 70-100% passing 1" sieve and no more than 50% passing 3/4" 

sieve. 

2.04 Controlled Density Fill: 

A. Use high slump mixture of Portland cement, fly ash and fine aggregate in accordance with 

Section 121 of the 2007 Edition of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge 

Construction for excavatable or non-excavatable fill, as required. 

B. Provide mixture with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 70 psi (excavatable) or 

125 psi (non-excavatable) with no measurable shrinkage or surface settlement. 

2.05 Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing: 

A. Use sound timber or structural steel. 

Emergency Operations Support Building Trench Excavation, Backfill & Compaction 02221 – 1 



B. Use shapes and sizes as designed and required. 

C. Designed by a licensed professional engineer for the project area for live and dead loads 

and groundwater conditions. 


3.01 General 

A. Dewatering: 

1. Prevent surface water from flowing into open or proposed areas of excavation. 

2. Provide equipment for handling surface and ground water encountered as 

required to maintain a dry excavation until completion of backfilling and testing. 

Obtain FDEP approval of proposed method of dewatering. 

3. No sanitary sewer shall be used for disposal of trench water. 

4. Soil erosion and sediment control and storm water pollution prevention plan 

devices to be installed and maintained throughout dewatering operation, 

especially prior to and after major rainfall events. 

B. Protection of Existing Utilities: 

1. Notify all utilities of location and schedule of work. 

2. Locations and elevations of utilities shown on plans are to be considered 

approximate only. Notify utility and Engineer of conflicts between existing and 

proposed facilities. 

3. Repair, relay or replace existing utilities damaged, destroyed or disrupted during 

work. Unless specified otherwise, replacement will be at the Contractor's 

expense. 

C. Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing: 

1. Provide as necessary, to hold walls of excavation, prevent damage to adjacent 

structures, and to protect workmen and property. 

2. Leave sheeting and shoring in place where removal might cause damage to work 

or as otherwise indicated on drawings. 

3. When moveable trench shield is used below spring line of pipe, it shall be lifted 

prior to any forward movement to avoid pipe displacement. 

D. Changes in Grade: 

1. Minor adjustments to grades may be made from plan grades to suit unforeseen 

construction conflicts or conditions with approval from Engineer. 

2. No additional compensation will be made for such minor changes. 

3.02 Excavation and Trenching 

A. General: 

1. Method of excavation at Contractor's option. 

2. The Contractor will use caution when excavating under tree roots and under and 

around structures and utilities. Excavate by hand when necessary. 

3. Stockpile and replace topsoil equal to pre-existing depth for surface restoration in 

grassed or agricultural areas where specified or shown on plans. 

B. Trench Characteristics: 

1. Depth: 




As indicated for pipe installation to lines and grades required with proper 

allowance for thickness of pipe and type of bedding specified or indicated. 

2. Width: 

a. Keep width of trench as narrow as possible and yet provide adequate 

room for backfilling and jointing. 

b. Maximum trench width of 30-inch or pipe O.D. plus 18 inches where soil 

conditions permit. 

3. Provide bell holes for each pipe joint where pipe bears on undisturbed earth. 

4. Trench bottom shall be free of large stones and other foreign material. 

3.03 Organic or Unstable Materials: 

A. Stop work and notify Engineer. 

B. Perform remedial work as directed. 

C. If material is judged unsuitable and removal is authorized, remove and replace with trench 

stabilizing material as directed by Engineer. 

3.04 Rock Excavation: 

A. Excavate any rock to maintain minimum 6-inch clearance around pipe. 

B. Dispose of rock material not suitable for backfill as directed by Engineer. 

C. Use of explosives not permitted without prior written authorization from Owner and 

Engineer. 

D. Provide Special Hazard Insurance covering liability for blasting operations. 

3.05 Bedding: 

A. Place after bottom of trench has been excavated to proper depth and grade. 

B. Place, compact and shape bedding material to conform to barrel of pipe to insure 

continuous firm bedding for fill length of pipe. 

C. Provide bedding as described in following table unless indicated otherwise on Plans or in 

Special Conditions. 

Pipe Material: 

Minimum Bedding Class: 

1. Ductile Iron Pipe ANSI/AWW C600 Type 3 

2. Flexible Pipe Soil Class III Uni-bell “Handbook of PVC 

Pipe” Tables 10.9 and 10.10 

See standard plan details. 

3.06 Trench Backfill: 

A. Use excavated material backfill unless otherwise specified or directed. 

B. Use suitable backfill for all trenches within 5 feet of buildings and beneath walks, parking 

areas, paved streets or existing exposed utilities. 

C. Initial Backfill: 




1. Place after pipe has been bedded and checked for alignment, grade and internal 

obstructions. 

2. Carry out in accordance with pipe manufacturers and ANSI/AWWA C600 

requirements after authorization to cover pipe has been given. 

3. Allow no more than 300 feet of trench to be open at one time. 

4. Do not backfill until concrete or mortar has sufficiently cured. 

5. Record location of connections, appurtenances and unrecorded conflicts and 

utilities before backfilling. 

6. Place by hand and hand tamp in approximately 4-inch layers, under, around and 

over pipe joints and fittings, to not less than 12 inches above top of pipe. 

7. Uniformly backfill and compact on both sides of pipe to prevent displacement. 

8. Place adequate depth of compacted backfill above pipe envelope before using 

heavy compacting equipment. 

D. Subsequent Backfill: 

1. Place backfill into trench at an angle so that impact on installed pipe is minimized. 

2. Compaction of all backfill material shall be performed in a manner that shall not 

crack, crush, and/or cause the installed pipe to be moved from the established 

grade and/or alignment. 

3. Area under pavement and walks or within buildings shall be mechanically 

compacted to the top of the subgrade in 6-inch lifts to a minimum of Standard 

Proctor Density, required by the city, county or state agency having jurisdiction of 

the roadway and pavement. 

4. Areas not subject to vehicular traffic shall be backfilled and compacted in layers 

not more than 12 inches in depth, to a minimum 90% Standard Proctor Density 

5. Compaction method at discretion of Contractor, unless in the Engineer's opinion, 

compaction method presents potential damage to pipe. 

6. Mound excavated materials no greater than 6 inches in open areas only. 

7. Fill upper portion of trench with topsoil or wetlands soils as specified in the project 

manual or detailed on the plans. 

8. No secured/unprotected trench shall be open overnight. 

E. Controlled Density Fill: 

1. Use where shown on plans. 

2. Provide suitable forms to limit volume of controlled density fill material. 

3. Protect exposed utility lines during placement. 

4. Place material in accordance with suppliers' written recommendations unless 

directed otherwise by Engineer. 

3.07 Sidewalk, Pavement and Curb Removal: 

A. Cut and remove bituminous and concrete pavements, curbs and sidewalks prior to 

excavation of the trenches. Width of the pavement or brick pavement cut shall be at least 

one foot wider than the required width of the trench at ground surface. Haul pavement 

and concrete materials from the site to disposal site secured by Contractor. Do not use 

for trench backfill. 

3.08 Excess Material: 

A. Dispose of waste excess excavated material as directed by Engineer. 




3.09 Testing: 

A. Payment of laboratory soils tests will be the responsibility of Contractor. 

B. Standard Proctor Density: Every 200 L.F. of roadway, minimum. 

1. ASTM D698. 

C. In Place Density: Every 1000 L.F. in unpaved areas, or as directed by the Engineer. 

1. ASTM D1556 (Sand Cone) 

2. ASTM D2167 (Balloon) 

3. ASTM D3017 (Nuclear) 





SECTION 02280 – SOIL TREATMENT 


1.1 SUMMARY: 

A. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new 

construction. 

B. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS: 

Contract Closeout Submittals: 

A. Project record documents: 

1. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has been 

applied in accordance with applicable governing regulations and in accordance with 

this specification. 

2. Incorporate into the certificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual 

application locations and, for each location, noting methods and rates of application 

and including typical sections or details where necessary for clarity. 

B. Maintenance Agreement. 

C. Warranty. 

D. Evidence of Surety bond guaranteeing the fulfillment of warranty and maintenance 

agreement obligations of installer, and details of coverage using the same language as the 

bond itself. 

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Installer Qualifications: A company installing products of this section and whose installations 

have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a period of 5 years. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the sate in which the project is 

located. 

2. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations. 

1.4 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT: 

A. Special Warranty: 

1. Submit installer’s warranty against infestation of treated areas. 

2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the 

owner may have under the contract documents. 

3. Warranty period: 5 years. 

B. Installer’s Maintenance Agreement: 

1. Agreement shall include not less than the following: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Soil Treatment 02280 – 1 



a. Not less than annual re-inspection. 

b. Re-treatment of affected areas where active or previous infestation is 

discovered. 

2. Pay for the initial period of the agreement, terminating one year after the date of 

substantial completion of the project. 

3. Identify the renewal fee of the agreement and the number of years for which the 

renewal fee will remain fixed. 

C. Correction during the period in which the warranty or the maintenance agreement is in force 

shall include not less than the following: 

1. Re-treatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered. 

2. Repairing, patching, removing, and reinstalling of building materials and soil 

materials when necessary to facilitate re-treatment following infestation. 

3. Restoration, repair, or replacement of building materials (including permanent 

fixture) that become damaged by subterranean termites. 

D. Installer shall be covered by a surety bond guaranteeing the fulfillment of warranty and 

maintenance agreement obligations of installer. 


TERMITICIDE: 

2.1 Registered with the United States Environmental Protection agency (EPA) for use as a termiticide 

under conditions of use prevailing at the project site. 

2.2 Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with local 

governing authorities, as applicable of ruse as a termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the 

project site. 


3.1 APPLICATION: 

A. Apply termiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

B. Apply termiticide at the maximum recommended application rates for the respective areas to 

be treated and methods of treatment used. 

C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated. 

D. Schedule treatment of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to 

the soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent 

construction. 

3.2 CLEANING: 

A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer’s 

instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces, should contamination occur. 




B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not pressurepreservative 

treated, and debris. Do not allow non-pressure-preservative treated wood to 

contact with or remain proximate to soil. 





SECTION 02500 – SITE DRAINAGE 


1.01 SCOPE: The work under this section includes the furnishing of all labor material and equipment 

required to provide proper drainage of the site. 

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 

A. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are based on concrete pipe with a coefficient of roughness 

based on Florida Department of Transportation Standards. 

B. All workmanship, materials, equipment and installation shall be in accordance with the 

applicable portions of the Florida Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for 

Road and Bridge Construction, 2007, and referred to hereinafter as Standard Specification. 

The specific sections of the above mentioned specifications which are applicable are listed 

below. 

PART 2 – MATERIALS 

2.01 CONCRETE PIPE: 

A. Pipe: Concrete pipe for culverts shall conform to Section 449 of the Standard Specifications. 

All pipes shall be Class III unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 

B. Sealing Joints: The joints of new pipe shall be sealed by use of round rubber gaskets as 

provided in Paragraph 430-7 of the Standard Specifications. All joints to be wrapped with 

non-woven filter fabric. 

2.02 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES: Structures, including mitered end sections, shall be used where shown 

on the drawings and constructed in accordance with the details shown. Concrete shall be in 

accordance with Division 3. 

2.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE: (Not Used) 

2.04 POLYETHYLENE CORRUGATED PIPE: 

A. Drainage pipe may be high density polyethylene corrugated exterior/smooth interior pipe in 

sizes 4 inches through 12 inches. Sizes 4 inches through 10 inches shall conform to 

AASHTO M252, Type S. Sizes 12 inches through 60 inches shall conform to AASHTO 

M294, Type S. 

B. Virgin Material for pipe and fitting production shall be high density polyethylene conforming 

with the minimum requirements of cell classification 424420c for 4 inch through 10 inch 

diameters, or 435400C for 12 inches through 60 inch diameters, as defined and described in 

the latest version of ASTM D3350, except that carbon black should not exceed 5%. The 12 

inches through 60 inch virgin pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligamentstress 

(NCLS) test as specified in Section 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306, 

respectively. Minimum conveyance factor shall be a Manning "n" value of 0.012. Acceptable 

manufacturer shall be N-12 ST IB polyethylene pipe, as manufactured by Advanced Drainage 

Systems, Inc., or approved equal. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Site Drainage 02500 – 1 



C. Couplings and Fittings: Coupling bands shall cover at least one full corrugation on each 

section of pipe. When gasketed coupling bands are required, the gasket shall be made of 

polyisoprene meeting the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe 

manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free 

from debris. A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket 

and bell during assembly. 12 inch through 60 inch diameters shall have a reinforced bell with 

a bell tolerance device. The bell tolerance device shall be installed by the manufacturer. 

All coupling bands shall meet or exceed the soil-tightness requirement of the AASHTO 

Standard Specification for Highway Bridges, Section 23, Paragraph 23.3.1.5.4(e). Pipe 

fittings shall conform to AASHTO M294. 

2.05 MANHOLES: 

A. Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast reinforced concrete, of depth indicated 

with provision for rubber gasket joints. 

Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for 

walls and base riser section, and having a separate base slab or base section with integral 

floor. 

1. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide 

depth indicated. 

2. Top Section: Eccentric cone type, unless concentric cone or flat-slab-top type is 

indicated. Top of cone to match grade rings. 

3. Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9 inches total 

thickness and match 24-inch diameter frame and cover. 

4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 

5. Steps: Cast into base, riser, and top sections sidewall at 12-to 16-inch intervals. 

6. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting 

to base section. 

7. Channel and Bench: Concrete. 

B. Cast-in-Place Manholes: Reinforced concrete of dimensions and with appurtenances 

indicated. 

1. Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete. 


3. Steps: Cast into sidewall at 12- to 16-inch intervals. 

C. Manhole Steps: Wide enough for an adult to place both feet on one step and designed to 

prevent lateral slippage off the step. 

Material: Steel-reinforced plastic. 

D. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, heavy-duty, ductile iron, 

24-inch inside diameter by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 

26-inch-diameter cover, indented top design, with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover. 

2.06 CATCH BASINS: 

A. Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 or ASTM C 858, precast reinforced concrete, 

of depth indicated. Sections shall have provision for rubber gasket joints. Base section slab 

shall have minimum thickness of 6 inches. 

1. Base Section: Base riser section and separate base slab, or base riser section with 

integral floor. 




2. Riser Sections: Sections shall be of lengths to provide depth indicated. 

3. Top Section: Type to match FDOT configuration detailed. 

4. Grade Rings: Provide 2 or 3 reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9 inches total 

thickness, as necessary. 

5. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber. 

6. Steps: Cast into riser sidewall at 12- to 16-inch intervals. 

7. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting 

to base section. 


B. Cast-in-Place Catch Basins: Reinforced concrete of dimensions and with appurtenances 

indicated. 

1. Bottom, Walls, and Top: Reinforced concrete. 


C. Catch Basin Steps: Wide enough for an adult to place both feet on one step and designed to 

prevent lateral slippage off the step. 

Material: Steel-reinforced plastic. 

D. Catch Basin Frames and Grates: Per FDOT Standard Frame and Grates. 

E. Curb Inlets: Precast concrete, brick, or other materials, of dimensions conforming to 

standards of appropriate governing authority. 

2.07 OUTFALLS: General: Construct of reinforced concrete pipe, mitered end section, toewalls, and rip 

rap, as indicated. 

2.08 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT: 

A. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3,000 psi. 

Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 

1. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 

2. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 

3. Water: Potable. 

B. Reinforcement: Steel conforming to the following: 

1. Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded wire fabric, plain. 

2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. 

C. Forms: 

1. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable paneltype 

materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces 

without distortion or defects. Material shall be of size and strength to resist 

movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment 

until removal. 

2. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a 

maximum of 350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, 

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent 

treatments of concrete surfaces. Release agent to be within allowable volatile limits 

according to applicable local, state and federal codes. 

2.09 MASONRY: Bricks for accessories shall be hard common clay brick. Mortar shall be one part 




Portland cement and three parts masonry sand to which shall be added lime putty in the amount of 

50% of the volume of cement. Special commercial mortar mixes may be used if approved by the 

Engineer. All masonry materials shall conform to the latest applicable ASTM specifications. Set all 

masonry units in full beds of mortar, with full joints and strike all joints flush. Masonry reinforcements 

shall be galvanized Dur-O-Wal, or approved equal, and shall be installed at every other bed joint. 

2.10 CURING MATERIALS: 

A. Conform to TT-C-800, with 30-percent minimum solids content. 

B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per 

sq. yard, complying with AASHTO M-182, Class 2. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C-171. 

1. Waterproof paper 

2. Polyethylene film 

3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet 

D. Clear Solvent-Borne Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: This is a solvent-borne 

membrane-forming curing compound. Revise to Type II and verify manufacturer's products 

when a white pigmented curing compound is required. Do not use if waterborne low-VOC 

emissions compounds are required. ASTM C-309, Type I, Class A or B, wax free. 

E. Clear Waterborne Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: 

1. This is a waterborne membrane-forming curing compound. Use when low VOC 

emissions are required. ASTM C-309, Type I, Class B. 

2. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 

mg per liter. 

F. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete 

surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 


3.01 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED STORMWATER SYSTEMS: 

A 

Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation, throughout 

the length of the pipe. 

B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be 

laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. 

C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig 

bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve the bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing 

of the pipe barrel on the foundation. 

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: 

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate the general 

location and arrangement of the underground stormwater system piping. Location and 

arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install the piping 

as indicated, to the extent practical. 




B. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with 

unbroken continuity of invert, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. Place bell ends of 

piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves and couplings in accordance with 

manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation 

requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. The 

pipe shall be carefully examined for defects and the inside cleaned. After placing pipe in the 

ditch, the ends shall be wiped free from all dirt, sand and foreign material. All pipe and joints 

shall be made, handled, and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's 

recommendations and instructions. A copy of the installation manual shall be furnished to 

the Engineer prior to placing pipe on the job site. 

1. Pipe Association "Concrete Pipe Field Manual", unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Place concrete pipe with elliptical reinforcing so that the reference lines indicating top 

of pipe are not more than 5 degrees from vertical plane through longitudinal axis of 

pipe. 

C. Use manholes or catch basins for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated. 

Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. 

The Engineer shall be notified at least 24 hours before the pouring of any concrete is to be 

started, and such pouring shall not be started until the reinforcement has been approved as 

placed. 

D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or material of pipes 

and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of piping in the direction of flow is 

prohibited. 

E. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope per plans. 

F. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, by 

tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. 

3.03 MANHOLES: 

A. General: Install manholes complete with accessories as indicated. Form continuous 

concrete or split pipe section channel and benches between inlets and outlet. Set tops of 

frames and covers flush with finish surface where manholes occur in pavements. Elsewhere, 

set tops 3 inches above finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Place precast concrete manhole sections as indicated, and install in accordance with 

ASTM C 891. 

C. Construct cast-in-place manholes as indicated. 

D. Provide rubber joint gasket complying with ASTM C 443 at joints of sections. 

E. Apply bituminous mastic coating at joints of sections. 

3.04 CATCH BASINS: 

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. 

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 

3.05 OUTFALLS: Construct outfalls of reinforced concrete which will attain 28-day compressive strength 




of not less than 3000 psi. 

3.06 TAP CONNECTIONS: 

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so that finished work will 

conform as nearly as practicable to the requirements specified for new work. 

B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section 

of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch 

overlap, with not less than 6 inches of 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete. 

C. Make branch connections from side into existing 15 to 18-inch piping by removing section of 

existing pipe and installing wye fitting into existing piping. Encase entire wye with not less 

than 6 inches of 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete. 

D. Make branch connections from side into existing 24-inch or larger piping or to underground 

structures by cutting opening into existing unit sufficiently large to allow 3 inches of concrete 

to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe 

or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise 

indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of 

concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from 

connection to undisturbed ground. 

1. Provide concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, 


2. Use epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and 

piping materials. 

E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while 

making tap connections. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material that may 

accumulate. 

3.07 CLOSING ABANDONED STORMWATER SYSTEMS: 

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping that is indicated to 

remain in place. Provide sufficiently strong closures to withstand hydrostatic or earth 

pressure that may result after ends of abandoned utilities have been closed. 

1. Close open ends of concrete pipe or structures with not less than 8-inch-thick brick 

masonry bulkheads. 

2. Close open ends of other piping with plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods 

suitable for size and type of material being closed. Wood plugs are not acceptable. 

B. Abandoned Structures: Remove structure and close open ends of the remaining piping or 

remove top of structure down to not less than 3 feet below final grade; fill structure with stone, 

rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt, to within 1 foot of top of structure remaining, and fill with 

concrete. 

3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 

A. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local authorities having 

jurisdiction. All sampling and testing shall be conducted by a testing laboratory under the 

direction of a Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Florida, at the contractor's 

expense. Submit test results directly to the Engineer. The following tests shall be taken: 




1. 28-day compressive test of concrete, minimum of three test cylinders per 50 cubic 

yards of concrete poured. 

2. Air content, minimum one test for each day's pour. 

3. Slump test, minimum one test for each day's pour. 

4. Contractor shall replace materials removed for testing purposes. 

5. Should any work or materials fail to meet the requirements set forth in the plans and 

specifications, contractor shall pay for retesting of same. 

B. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as 

work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 

1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 

2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops. 

3. Flush piping between manholes, to remove collected debris. 

C. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage 

has occurred. 

D. Make inspections after pipe between manholes has been installed, cleaned and 

approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at completion of project. Each section 

of pipe between structures is to show from either end on examination, a full circle of light. 

Each appurtenance to the system shall be of the specified size and form, to neatly and 

substantially constructed, with the top set permanently to exact position and grade. 

If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration, or other defects, 

correct such defects and reinspect. All repairs shown necessary by the inspections are to be 

made, broken or cracked pipe replaced, all deposits removed and the pipe left true to line 

and grade as herein specified, or shown on the plans, entirely clean and free from 

abnormalities and ready for use. 

E. Limits of Infiltration and Methods of Testing: The allowable limit of groundwater infiltration for 

the entire system of new stormwater systems or any one trunk, or interceptor shall be in 

complete accordance with ASTM C425-71T and shall not exceed a limit of infiltration equal to 

0.2 gal/inch diameter/hour/100 linear feet of pipe. 

1. The test will be made by measuring the infiltrated flow of water over a measuring 

weir set up in the invert of the sewer, or by an alternate method approved by the 

Engineer, a known distance from a temporary bulkhead or other limiting point of 

infiltration. After the sewer or sewers have been pumped out, and normal conditions 

prevail, tests shall be started. 

2. Tests shall be run continuously for a period of not less than three (3) hours, with weir 

readings taken at 20 minute intervals. The tests shall be made by the Contractor. 

The Engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance. Where infiltration occurs in 

excess of the specified amount, the defective pipe or joints shall be located and 

repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot be 

located, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove and reconstruct as much 

of the original work as necessary to obtain a sewer within allowable infiltration limits 

upon such retesting as necessary. 

F. Clean-up: Before final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall clean ditches, shape 

shoulders and restore all disturbed areas, including street crossings, grass plots, to as good 

as condition as existed before work started. All trenches shall be leveled and loose material 

removed from pavement gutters, sidewalks, pipe lines, and inlet sediment traps, employing 

hand labor, if necessary. 

3.09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT: No additional payment shall be made for the work hereinbefore 

specified. The Contractor's unit price or lump sum bid as set forth in the PROPOSAL shall constitute 




full compensation for the work involved for each item. 





SECTION 02512 - BASE COURSE 


1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of base course work is shown on drawings. 

1.3 SUBMITTALS: Material Certificates: Provide copies of material certificates signed by material 

producer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds specified 

requirements. 

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS: 

A. Sand-clay base course may be placed when air temperature is above 30F (-1C) and rising. 

B. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 


MATERIALS: 

2.1 General: Use locally available materials and gradations which exhibit a satisfactory record of previous 

installations. 

2.2 Base Course: Materials for the sand-clay base shall meet the requirements of Section 912 of the 

FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction dated 1991. 

2.3 Base Course: Materials for the lime rock base shall meet the requirements of Section 200 of the 

FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction dated 1991. 


3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION: 

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility that the finished roadbed section meets the bearing value 

requirements, regardless of the quantity of stabilizing materials necessary to be added. After 

the roadbed grading operations have been substantially completed, the Contractor shall 

make his own determination as to the quantity (if any) of stabilizing material, of the type 

selected by him, necessary for compliance with the bearing value requirements. 

B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying 

herbicide treatment or prime coat. 

C. Proof roll prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional 

compaction. 

D. Do not begin base work until deficient subgrade areas have been corrected and are ready to 

receive base. Dry wet subgrade materials as necessary to meet material optimum moisture 

content and achieve required compaction. 

E. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of not less than 0.15 gallons per square yard over compacted 

Emergency Operations Support Building Base Course 02512-1 


HMM 239903/ ECUA CIP No. CS141E

subgrade. Apply material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long 

as necessary to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. 

3.2 PLACING BASE: Place base course as directed in Section 200 and 240 of FDOT Standard 

Specifications. Place inaccessible and small areas by hand. Place each course to required grade, 

cross-section, and compacted thickness, as indicated on plans. 

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 

A. General: Test in-place base courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and 

surface smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by 

Engineer. 

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness will not be acceptable if exceeding following 

allowable variation from required thickness: 

C. Base Course: ½", plus or minus. 

D. Surface Smoothness: The finished surface of the base course shall be checked with a 

templet cut to the required crown and with a 15-foot straightedge laid parallel to the centerline 

of the road. All irregularities greater than 1/4" shall be corrected by scarifying, and removing 

or adding base material as may be required, after which the entire area shall be recompacted 

to meet the specified density requirements. 

E. Compaction: Sand-clay base shall be compacted to a minimum density of 98% of maximum 

density as determined by (AASHTO T-180). Soil-cement base (if any) shall be compacted to 

a minimum density of 95% of (AASHTO T-180). All test results are to be submitted to the 

Engineer prior to beginning paving operations. 

F. Frequency of Field Density Test: One test per 300 linear feet of roadway or every 750 square 

yards of paved area. 

END OF SECTION 

Emergency Operations Support Building Base Course 02512-2 


HMM 239903/ ECUA CIP No. CS141E

SECTION 02513 – ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING 


1.01 Related Documents: 

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special 

Conditions, FDOT “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction”, 2007 edition, and 

city, county and FDOT permit requirements, apply to work of this section. 

1.02 Description of Work: 

A. Extent of asphalt concrete paving work is shown on drawings. 

B. Prepared aggregate base is specified in earthwork and appropriate base sections. 

C. Saw-cutting edges of existing pavement are specified in site clearing section. 

1.03 Submittals: 

A. Contractor Certification: 

Provide a copy of the contractor’s current FDOT “Certificate of Qualification” for work 

class ratings 5, 7, and 9, or equivalent certification from a county, state or federal 

highway agency. 

B. Material Certificates: 

Provide copies of materials certificates signed by material producer and Contractor, 

certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. 

1.04 Quality Assurance: 

Comply with FDOT “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction”, 2007 edition” 

and city, county and FDOT permit requirements, if more stringent than herein specified. 

1.05 Site Conditions: 

A. Weather Limitations: Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50 

deg. F (10 deg. C), and when temperature has not been below 35 deg. F (1 deg. C) for 

12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet or contains an 

excess of moisture. 

B. Construct asphalt concrete surface course when atmospheric temperature is above 40 

deg. F (4 deg. C), and when base is dry. Base course may be placed when air 

temperature is above 30 deg.F (-1 deg.C) and rising. 

C. Grade Control: Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. 


2.01 Materials: 

A. General: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Asphalt Concrete Paving 02513 – 1 



Use locally available materials and gradations which exhibit a satisfactory record of 

previous installations. 

B. Base Course Aggregate: 

Sound, angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag, sand, stone or slag 

screenings. Uncrushed gravel may be used in base course mixture if required to suit 

local material availability. 

C. Surface Course Aggregate: 

Crushed stone, crushed gravel, crushed slag, and sharp-edged natural sand. Sand 

prepared from stone, blast-furnace slag, or gravel, or combinations thereof may be used 

if required to suit local material availability. 

D. Mineral Filler: 

Limerock dust, portland cement, slag dust, hydrated lime, or any other or other inert 

material in accordance with F.D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge 

Construction, 2007 edition, Section 917. 

E. Prime Coat: 

Cut-back asphalt Grade, RC-70 or RC-250. In accordance with F.D.O.T. Standard 

Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2007 Edition, Section 300-2.1. 

F. Tack Coat: 

RA-500 Tack coat in accordance with F.D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Road and 

Bridge Construction, 2007 edition, Section 300-2.3 

G. Herbicide: 

Treatment: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental 

Protection Agency. Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which 

may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

2. Manufacturers: 

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the 

following: 

a. Allied Chemical Corp. 

b. Achem Products, Inc. 

c. Ciba-Geigy Corp. 

d. Dow Chemical U.S.A. 

e. E.I. DuPont De Nemours & Co., Inc. 

f. FMC Corp. 

g. Thompson-Hayward Chemical Co. 

h. U.S. Borax and Chemical Corp. 

H. Traffic Paint striping and markings: FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge 


I. Thermoplastic striping and markings: FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge 



3.01 Surface Preparation: 




A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying 

herbicide treatment or prime coat. 

B. Proof roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring 

additional compaction. 

C. Notify Engineer of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until deficient 

subbase areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 

D. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with 

manufacturer's recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, 

dry subbase prior to application of prime coat. 

E. Prime Coat: Apply at rate of 0.30 to 0.50 gal. per sq. yd., over compacted base. Apply 

material to penetrate and seal, but not flood, surface. Cure and dry as long as necessary 

to attain penetration and evaporation of volatile. 

F. Tack Coat: Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphalt or portland 

cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphalt concrete pavement. 

Distribute at rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. per sq. yd. of surface. 

G. Allow to dry until at proper condition to receive paving. 

H. Exercise care in applying bituminous materials to avoid smearing of adjoining concrete 

surfaces. Remove and clean damaged surfaces. 

3.02 Plant Mix Asphaltic Surface Course: 

A. General: 

This item shall consist of a wearing surface constructed of asphaltic concrete on a 

prepared base, in accordance with the plans and specifications. 

B. Materials: 

The materials and construction methods shall comply with those set forth for Superpave 

Type SP-12.5 Asphaltic Concrete FDOT Standard Specifications, 2007 edition, Section 

330 and 334. 

C. Thickness: 

The thickness of the surface shall be as shown on the construction plans. This 

requirement shall be checked by cores and where a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, 

the Contractor shall be required to correct the deficiency either by replacing the full 

thickness or overlaying the area to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 

3.03 Placing Mix: 

A. General: 

Place asphalt concrete mixture on prepared surface, spread and strike-off. Spread 

mixture at minimum temperature of 225 deg.F (107 deg.C). Place inaccessible and small 

areas by hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section, and compacted 

thickness. 

B. Paver Placing: 

Place in strips not less than 10' wide, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. After first 

strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap 




previous strips. Complete base course for a section before placing surface course. 

C. Joints: 

Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days' work, to 

ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints to have same texture, 

density and smoothness as other sections of asphalt concrete course. Clean contact 

surfaces and apply tack coat. 

3.04 Rolling: 

A. General: 

Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 

Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas 

inaccessible to rollers. 

B. Breakdown Rolling: 

Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside 

edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening 

and filling, if required, with hot material. 

C. Second Rolling: 

Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second 

rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. 

D. Finish Rolling: 

Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. 

Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum 

density. 

E. Patching: 

Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. 

Cut-out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to 

maximum surface density and smoothness. 

F. Protection: 

After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and 

hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough 

not to become marked. 

3.05 Traffic and Lane Markings: 

A. Preparation: 

Prior to pavement striping, fully clean and prepare the existing pavement surface. Install 

and maintain all required traffic control and safety devices and flagmen in compliance 

with the USDOT/FHA MUTCD, 2003 edition. 

B. Installation: 

1. General: 

Install pavement striping and markings of a color, location and type as existed 

prior to the construction of this project, as directed by applicable FDOT Standard 

Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2007 edition, Sections 710 and 

711. 




3.06 Field Quality Control: 

A. General: 

Test in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements for thickness 

and surface smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed 

by Engineer. Contractor to replace asphalt removed for testing purposes. 

B. Should any work or materials fail to meet the requirements set forth in the plans and 

specifications, Contractor shall pay for retesting of same. 

C. A minimum of four cores and density test shall be made. Engineer shall determine 

location of cores and test. 

D. Thickness: 

In-place compacted thickness will not be acceptable if exceeding following allowable 

variation from required thickness: 

1. Base Course: ½", plus or minus. 

2. Surface Course: 1/4", plus or minus. 

E. Surface Smoothness: 

Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using 10' 

straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to centerline of paved area. 

Surfaces will not be acceptable if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness. 

F. Base Course Surface: 

1/4". 

G. Wearing Course Surface: 

3/16". 

H. Crowned Surfaces: 

Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable 

variance from template, 1/4". 

Check surface areas at intervals as directed by Engineer. 





SECTION 02556 – WATER DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE LINES 


1.01 General Description Of Work Covered 

A. The contractor shall furnish and install all pipes, fittings, structures and accessories 

required for water distribution and/or service lines in accordance with the requirements of 

the Construction Plans and related Contract Documents. 

B. The water meter will be Owner furnished and Contractor installed. 

C. All Tap and Impact Fees will be provided by the Owner. 


A. AWWA Standards 

Construction materials and methods shall comply with the requirements of the latest 

published edition of American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards. Applicable 

standards include, but may not be limited to, the following: 

1 AWWA C104 Cement Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 

2 AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other 

Liquids 

3 AWWA C110, 

C110a 

Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings, 2-inch through 48-inch for Water 

and Other Liquids 

4 AWWA C111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 

5 AWWA C151 Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Mold or Sand Lined 

Molds, for Water or Other Liquids 

6 AWWA C153 Ductile Iron Compact Fittings, 3-inch through 12-inch for Water and 

Other Liquids 

7 AWWA C502 Fire Hydrants 

8 AWWA C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves 

9 AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants 

10 AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Main and Appurtenances 

11 AWWA C605 Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 

and Fittings for Water 

12 AWWA C651 Disinfection of Water Mains 

13 AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings 

14 AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch for 

Water 

15 AWWA C901 Polyethylene Pressure Pipe and Tubing 1/2-inch through 3-inch 

16 AWWA C907 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Fittings, 4-inch through 8-inch 

B. ASTM Standards 

In addition, construction materials and methods shall also comply with the requirements 

of the latest published editions of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

Standards, and the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61. 

PART 2 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

2.01 General: 

All pipe, fittings and accessories shall be new, and shall be suitable and rated for potable water 

use. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Water Distribution & Service Lines 02556 – 1 



2.02 Delivery, Storage, And Handling: 

Certificates of Compliance with the Specifications shall be required for all materials used on the 

Project. All materials shall be protected during transportation, storage, handling, and installation 

to avoid physical damage. All materials shall be stored to prevent physical deterioration due to 

sun and weather. The ECUA reserves the right to reject material, which in any way does not meet 

the requirements of these Specifications. 

2.03 Water Mains 

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) 

PVC pipe shall meet AWWA Standard C900 or C905, or ASTM Standard D2241, with 

minimum designations per Table 2.3.1 below. PVC pipe shall be provided with push-on 

or insert-lock-type joints with the bell integrally cast into the pipe. PVC pipe shall be 

installed with elastomeric gaskets meeting ASTM Standard F477. 

Standard 

AWWA C900 

AWWA C905 

ASTM D2241 

Nominal 

Size 

4-inch thru 

12-inch 


36-inch 


3-inch 

TABLE 2.3.1 - PVC PIPE STANDARDS 

Dimension 

Ratio 

OD 

Pressure 

Class (psi) 

Pressure 

Rating (psi) 

DR25 CI 100 (165)* 

DR25 CI (100)* 165 

SDR26 IP (95)* 160 

*Pressure class and rating designations shown in parentheses are nominal 

designations. 

1. Markings 

PVC pipe shall be marked to indicate the following: 

a. Nominal Pipe Size and OD Base 

b. Material Code Designation 

c. Dimension Ratio 

d. Pressure Class or Pressure Rating 

e. Manufacturer's Name or Trademark 

f. National Sanitation Foundation Approved Marking 

g. Appropriate AWWA or ASTM Standard Number 

2. Color- Coding 

PVC water pipe shall be color-coded blue in accordance with AWWA Standards 

and FDEP Rule 62-555.321(21)(b)3., F.A.C. If blue pigmented pipe is not 

available, white pipe may be substituted subject to the approval of the Director of 

Engineering or his designee. White pipe used for potable water shall be marked 

with 3 blue stripes (1/2 inch wide) in permanent ink along the entire length and 

evenly spaced around the pipe circumference with the word WATER in 3/4-inch 

letters every 21 inches along each stripe. 

B. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP) 

Ductile iron pipe shall meet AWWA Standard C151 and pressure class based on Table 

2.3.2 below for design operating pressures of up to 150 psig, installed in Class 2 

Trenching conditions. Increase pressure class or bedding class as required by AWWA 

C151 for surface loads greater than indicated above or operating pressures greater than 

150 psi. DIP shall be constructed with push-on joints using rubber gaskets in accordance 

with AWWA Standard C111. Other methods of joint construction, such as mechanical, 

flanged, or ball-and-socket, may be required in special applications as appropriate. DIP 




shall be lined in accordance with AWWA Standard C104, unless otherwise specified and 

approved. 

TABLE 2.3.2 - DI PRESSURE CLASSES 

Diameter Class Max. Depth of Bury 

3-inch & 4-inch 350 32 feet 



14-inch thru 20-inch 250 10 feet 

24-inch thru 64-inch 200 8 feet 

1. Markings 

Each ductile iron pipe section shall be marked to indicate the weight class or 

nominal thickness, and casting period. The manufacturer's mark, country where 

cast, year in which the pipe was produced, and the letters DI or DUCTILE shall be 

cast or stamped on the pipe. All required markings shall be clear and legible, and 

all cast marks shall be on or near the bell. All letters and numerals on pipe sizes 

14-inch and larger shall be not less than 0.5-inch in height. 

All DIP and fittings shall be color coded blue in accordance with FDEP Rule 62- 

555.321(21)(b)3., F.A.C. 

2. Soil Corrosion Protection Encasement 

When required, DIP shall be encased in plastic sheet material in accordance with 

AWWA Standard C105 as stated on project plans/specifications if applicable. 

C. Polyethylene Pipe (PE) 

The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular 

weight, high-density polyethylene pipe and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III C, 

Class C, Category 5, p34). Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as 

referenced in ASTM D 3350 - latest edition. All pipe resin shall be manufactured by the 

same company that manufactures the pipe itself in accordance with these specifications 

to insure complete resin compatibility and total product accountability. The fittings shall 

be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification 

equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of 

polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same 

manufacturer as the pipe being supplied. 

[THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK] 




TABLE 2.3.3 - TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF PE PIPE 

Property Test Method Unit Value 

Density ASTM D1505 gms/cc 0.957 

Melt Flow ASTM D 1238 gms/ 1.5 

(190/21.60) 10 min. 

Environmental Stress Cracking Resistance 

Condition A, B & C, F 0 ASTM D1693 hrs. >5000 

Compressed Ring, F 0 Proposed ASTM hrs. >5000 

Tensile Strength, Ultimate ASTM D 638 psi 5000 

Type IV Specimen 

(2”/min.) 

Tensile Strength, Yield ASTM D 638 psi 3500 


(2”/min.) 

Elongation at Break 

ASTM D 638 

% >600 


(2”/min.) 

Impact Strength 

ASTM D 256 ft.lbs./inch >12 

Specimen Thickness 0.125 inch 

Method A 

notch 

Vicat Softening Temperature ASTM D 1525 ºF 257 

Brittleness Temperature ASTM D 746 ºF

The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the 

physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take 

random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 

3. Rejection 

Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the 

requirements of this specification. 

4. Pipe Dimensions 

Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal DIPS (Ductile Iron 

Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. Pipe shall have a SDR (Standard 

Dimension Ratio) of 11 unless otherwise specified. 

5. Color- Coding 

HDPE water pipe shall be color-coded with blue striping or have an integral, 

extruded blue coating in accordance with FDEP Rule 62-555.321(21)(b)3., F.A.C. 

D. Alternate Pipe Materials 

ECUA may consider other pipe materials as appropriate for the needs of the Project. 

Alternate pipe materials identified during design and approved for use on the Project shall 

be noted on the Construction Plans, and a detailed Technical Specification shall be 

prepared and included in the Contract Documents. 

2.04 Water Main Appurtenances 

A. Water Main Fittings 

Water main fittings shall include Tees, Wyes, Bends, Reducers, and other appurtenances 

commonly used in pipe construction. Fittings shall meet AWWA Standard C110 or C153 

with pressure ratings of not less than that specified for adjacent pipe. Fittings shall be 

constructed with mechanical joints, unless otherwise specified, and shall be supplied 

complete with low alloy bolts and nuts, EPR gaskets and other necessary parts required 

for field assembly. Fittings shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA 

Standard C104/A21.4. 

1. Pipe Couplings 

Pipe couplings shall be solid sleeve type with mechanical joints at each end 

containing a compression gasket. Couplings shall be ductile iron, 12 inches 

minimum in length, with low alloy bolts and nuts, and EPR gaskets. Rings and 

gaskets shall be sized to conform exactly to the requirements of the pipe 

manufacturer. 

2. Pipe Cut-in Sleeves 

Cut-in sleeves shall be solid ductile iron, one end plain for insertion to female 

fitting, the other end flanged mechanical joint, furnished with loose attaching 

flange and fastener, nominal length of 20-21 inches. Specify pipe main size and 

type of pipe fabrication. 

Approved Manufacturers 

Manufacturer Model Application 

Clow F-1220 for centrifugally cast or sand cast pipe (special) 

Clow F-3459 for all classes of centrifugally cast pipe 




Union Foundry 21-4520 

21-4610 

24-4800 

MJ X PE 

FLG X PE 

MJ X FLG 

Clow F-3459 for all classes of centrifugally cast pipe 

Others as approved by ECUA in writing. 

3. Repair Clamps 

Repair clamps shall not be used in the installation of new pipe except with the 

written permission of the Engineer. Repair clamps shall be full circle and 

selected based on Table 2.4.1.3 below. 

TABLE 2.4.1.3 - REPAIR CLAMP SIZES 

Pipe Diameter 

Maximum Sections 

Up to 12-inch Single Section 

14-inch to 24-inch Double Section 

26-inch and above 

Triple Section 

Repair clamps shall be composed of stainless steel bands and bolts, DI lugs and 

full gridded virgin EPR compounded gasket. 

Repair clamps shall be sized so that the OD of the existing pipe being repaired 

falls within the designated range for the clamp size. Repair clamps shall have 

ample length to give full gasketing at both ends. 


Manufacturer 

Model 

Ford 

F1, FS1 (all SS), Fordflex (SS-DI Lugs) 

Smith Blair 

2XX* 

JCM 101,102,103,104,131,132,133,134 

Mueller 520, 530 


*XX: See Mfr.’s catalog to complete model numbers by size. 

4. Pipe Restraints 

Joint restraints shall be used in conjunction with all water line pipe, fittings and 

appurtenances. Joint restraints shall be used on pipe and fittings in each 

direction in accordance with ECUA Standard Detail D-43 and D-44. Restraints 

shall have set or anchor screws used to secure body to pipe with torque limit 

break away head design. Stainless steel all-thread tie rods may be used at 

flanges with permission of the Engineer. 


Manufacturer 

Model 

Ebaa Iron Works MegaLug Series 1100, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3600, 

6500 

Ford UNI-Flange UAI, UBI, UI, 1300, 1340, 1390, 1400 

JCM Industries Sur-Grip Restrainers No. 620, 621 


5. Expansion Joints 

Expansion joint fittings shall be used where specified on the Construction Plans. 

They shall be of the rigid or flexible type as specified, and manufactured of ductile 

iron in accordance with 2.4.1 above. They shall be capable of expanding or 




contracting to the extent shown on the plans, but in no case less than 4-inch 

axially, and designed to prevent separation beyond the maximum extension 

without the use of external tie rods. 

Fittings shall be flanged or provided with restrained mechanical joints, individually 

pressure tested to a minimum of 350 psi against their own restraints, and 

internally coated on all exposed surfaces with a minimum of 15 mils. of fusion 

bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C213. They shall be capable of deflecting 

not less than 15º by means of an integral ball at each joint in the case of flexible 

types. 


Type Manufacturer Model 

Rigid EBAA Iron, Inc. EX-TEND 200 

Flexible EBAA Iron, Inc. Flex-Tend 


6. Tapping Sleeves 

Tapping sleeves shall be designed for a working pressure of 200 psig without 

leakage. Tapping sleeves shall be stainless steel. The outlet branch connection 

shall have a recessed flanged face for connection of tapping valve with standard 

dimensions in accordance with Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS) 

SP-60. A complete set of neoprene or other elastomer gaskets shall be 

furnished. Sleeves shall be furnished to fit cast iron, cement-asbestos, or Class 

160 or C900/905 PVC pipe with side connection as shown on plans or 

specifications in standard pipe sizes of 4-inch X 4-inch through 16-inch X 12-inch. 

Sleeves shall be furnished with all necessary installation parts such as 

mechanical joint loose flange ends, bolts, fasteners, seals and gaskets. Refer to 

Section 2.4.1.6 for Tapping Valve requirements. 


Manufacturer Main Material Model 

Clow CI & C900 PVC F-5205 

Class 50, 100, 150, 200 

10-inch & 12-inch Class 50, 100 

F-5207 4 

F-5205 

American Darling 

CI & C900 PVC 

CI & CA 

2800C 

2800A 

Ford 

FAST A 

Mueller 

CI, DI - 4-inch - 12-inch 

CA - 4-inch - 8-inch 

CI Class C & D - 10-inch - 14-inch 

CA - 4-inch-12-inch 

H615 

H615 

H616 

H619 

JCM Industries 432 

Smith-Blair 662 

Others as approved by ECUA in writing 

Note: To specify exact fitting when ordering, state line diameter and line 

material. 

7. Pipe Hangers and Supports 

Hangers and supports shall be in compliance with Federal Specification WW-H- 

171E, or MSS SP-69, or UL listed. Materials of construction shall be in 

accordance with the requirements outlined in Table 2.4.1.7 below. 




TABLE 2.4.1.7 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION 

Part I.D. 

Material 

Clamps 

Steel - Epoxy Coated or Galvanized 

Cast Iron – Galvanized 

Malleable Iron 

Hanger Rods 

Steel - Electro Galvanized 

Steel - Stainless 304 

Roller Bases/Roller Stands Cast Iron 

Fasteners/Fittings 

Galvanized Steel 

Stainless 

Hanger Rod Inserts Steel: Cadmium Plated 

Steel: Galvanized 

Universal Concrete Insert - Cast Iron - Galvanized 

Rod Attachments 

Clevis - Forged Steel 

Turnbuckle: 1) Forged Steel, 2) Malleable Iron 

Sockets, Eye Nuts, Extension - Malleable Iron 

Roller Bases/Roller Stands Cast Iron 

Rollers 

Steel or Iron Core, Insulated from Structure 


Manufacturer Part I.D. Model No. 

Utility Pipe Products Clevis Hanger 590 

Socket Clamp 224 

246 

Concrete Inserts: 

CB-Universal 

Screen Insert 

Rod Attachments: 

Eye Nut 

Forged Clevis 

Forged Turnbuckle 

Carbon Steel 

Couplings 

Socket Eye 

Extension 

Pipe Rolls: 

Adjustable Swivel 

Adjustable Steel Yoke 




282 

152 

290 

299 

230 

233 

136 

110R 

157 

174 

181 

Pipe Roll with Base 274 

Pipe Roll and Plate 277 


B. Valves 

All valves shall be manufactured in accordance with the current appropriate AWWA 

Standard and shall be NSF approved for use in potable water. 

1. Resilient Seated Gate Valves 

Resilient seated gate valves shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with 

the current AWWA Standards. The basic design of the gate valves shall have an 

iron body, elastomer encapsulated iron disc, bronze stem and operating nuts with

non-rising stem design. Valves 16-inches and larger shall be equipped with right 

angle gears (bevel gearing) for horizontal installation, and shall be equipped with 

rollers, tracks and scrapers. 

The valve working pressure for all sizes shall be a minimum of 200 psig with a 

test pressure of 400 psig. 

a. General Materials and Construction 

Valves shall open counterclockwise with a 2-inch square iron operating 

nut secured to the valve stem by a corrosion resistant nut to threads on 

the valve stem. The valve stem shall be made of high tensile strength 

bronze and shall be of one-piece construction sealed by O-Rings. The 

thrust collar shall be secured in place by a stuffing box or bonnet cover 

with a thrust washer located above the thrust collar. Valve construction 

shall be so that upper O-Rings can be replaced with the valve in service. 

The disc shall be cast iron encapsulated with an elastomer material 

bonded in accordance with ASTM D429 and shall be secured to the 

threaded stem by a bronze nut. The disc shall affect a seal that is 

bubble-tight at 200 psig. 

b. Body - Disc - Bonnet - Operating Nut Material 

Cast iron construction in accordance with current AWWA Standard C509; 

(or) Cast ductile iron construction in accordance with current AWWA 

Standard C515 and AWWA Standard C153. 

c. Corrosion Resistant Coatings 

All interior and exterior cast iron surfaces shall be coated with fusion 

bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA Standard C550. 

d. Body Sizing 

Valve body length shall be per ANSI Standard B16.2 for the type of end 

connections specified. In the full open position, the valve internal bore 

shall be smooth and obstruction-free without cavities or projections that 

could accumulate solids. The internal cross-sectional area of the valve 

shall be approximately equal to the nominal cross-sectional area for 

Schedule 40 PVC pipe of the same nominal internal diameter. 

e. End Connections 

Valves shall be furnished with mechanical joint end connections, 

complete with flange kits, unless otherwise specified on the plans or 

purchase order. 

When flanged ends are specified they shall be flat face nominal 125# 

ANSI B16.1 Standard with bolt holes straddling the vertical center line. 






VALVE BODY CONNECTIONS 

TAPPING 

VALVE 

Manufacturer MJ x MJ MJ x FLG FLG x FLG MJ x SF 

American 4-inch - 12- 4-inch - 12- 

4-inch - 12-inch 

Darling inch inch 

(Cast Iron) CSR-80X CSR-80X CSR-80X No. 862 

Specify Ends 

16-inch - 24-inch* 

(Ductile Iron) 

4-inch – 24-inch 

Clow 

(Cast Iron) 

2-inch - 12- 

inch 

F6100 

Series 2500 (See Manufacturer's Catalog) 

4-inch - 12- 4-inch – 12- 

inch inch 

F-6106 F-6102 


F-6114 

Kennedy 

(Cast Iron) 

M & H 

(Cast Iron) 

3-inch - 12- 

inch 

F-1571- 

XNRS 

4-inch - 12- 

inch 

S-4067-01 

3-inch - 12- 

inch 

F-1572- 

XNRS 

3-inch - 12- 

inch 

F-1561- 

XNRS 

4-inch - 12- 

inch 

S-4067 


F-5093* 


F-950X 


H-667 

200 PSI 


H-667 

150 PSI 

Others as approved by ECUA in writing - Cast iron or ductile iron construction. 

*Metal seated only, specify bypass if required 

14-inch and larger valves specify special appurtenances. 

f. Horizontal Valve 

Horizontal gate valves shall be furnished with a bevel-gear operator with 

2” operating nut. 

2. Resilient Seated Tapping (Gate) Valves 

Resilient seated gate valves shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with 

the current AWWA Standard C509 or C515. The basic design of the gate valves 

shall have a cast iron body, elastomer encapsulated cast iron disc, bronze stem 

and operating nuts with non-rising stem design. The valve working pressure shall 

be a minimum of 200 psig with a test pressure of 400 psig. 

a. Materials and Construction 

Valves shall open counterclockwise with a 2-inch square iron operating 

nut secured to the valve stem by a corrosion resistant nut to threads on 

the valve stem. The valve stem shall be made of high tensile strength 

bronze and shall be of one piece construction sealed by O-Rings. The 

thrust collar shall be secured in place by a stuffing box or bonnet cover 

with a thrust washer located above the thrust collar. Valve construction 

shall be so that upper O-Rings can be replaced with the valve in service. 

The disc shall be iron encapsulated with an elastomer material bonded in 




accordance with ASTM D429 and shall be secured to the threaded stem 

by a bronze nut. The disk shall affect a seal that is bubble-tight at 200 

psig. 

b. Corrosion Resistant Coatings 

All interior and exterior cast iron surfaces shall be coated with fusion 

bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA Standard C-550 

c. Body Sizing 

Valve body length shall be per ANSI Standard B16.1 for tapping valves. 

Tapping valves shall conform to Specification AWWA C509, latest 

revision, covering gate valves except as modified for passage and 

clearance of tapping machine cutters. The opening through the valve 

shall be at least 1/4-inch larger than nominal valve diameter. Tapping 

valves shall allow full size shell cutters to be used. 

d. End Connections 

Valves shall be furnished with one end of the body with projecting face 

flange in accordance with specification MSS SP-60 for tapping 

valve/saddle connections to bolt to a standard tapping sleeve and the 

other end for mechanical joint. 


See Section 2.4.2.1 above. 

3. Valve Boxes 

Valve boxes shall be provided for all direct buried valves. Use nominal 6-inch 

cast-iron sliding-type pipe shaft with cover and base casting. The box top shall 

be set at finished grade and encased with a concrete ring in unpaved areas. Each 

valve box shall be furnished with a drop-in cover marked “WATER.” See ECUA 

Standard Detail D-34. 

C. Line Stops 

Line stops are to be used where specified to temporarily stop water line water flow without 

depressurizing the entire line. The line stop parts and installation equipment are to be 

rated at a minimum of 150 psig working pressure unless otherwise specified. 

1. Materials and Construction 

Tapping saddles shall have 360º clamping on the main. Main sizes 4-inch to 8- 

inch to be fabricated of 304 Stainless Steel; 10-inch and greater to be fabricated 

Carbon Steel with epoxy coating. All bolts and fasteners are to be 304 Stainless 

Steel, and the saddle shall be installed with Buna-N or neoprene rubber full facing 

gasket. 

The stopping device attaching nozzle to be vendor’s standard with connecting 

threads or flange face, and the nozzle I.D. to be machine with a shelf to provide a 

position stop for the closure plug. 

The closure plug is to be fabricated carbon steel, ductile iron, or malleable iron 

with at least one Buna-N or neoprene O-Ring seal on the outside diameter. 

2. Corrosion Resistant Coatings 




Non-stainless steel permanently installed parts to have manufacturer’s standard 

red or black water base epoxy coating. 

3. Connection 

Tapping saddle shall be fabricated with dimensions to fit on concrete, steel, CA, 

PVC, CI, DI main as specified. 

4. Installation 

Temporary line stops shall only be installed by vendor personnel or contractor 

personnel trained and certified for stop by the vendor. 

Approved Manufacturers (Main Sizes 3/4-inch to 42-inch) 

Manufacturer 

Contact 

Hydra-Stop, Inc. Phone: 800-538-7867 

FAX: 708-389-5125 

International Piping Services Co. Phone: 708-343-1333 

(IPSCO) 

FAX: 708-343-1435 

JCM 440 Phone: 800-527-8482 

FAX: 800-874-9524 


D. Location Aids 

All new water main and service line installations shall include an approved method for 

locating lines from the ground surface after completion. 

1. Tracer Wire 

Tracer wire for water lines shall be minimum 12-gauge copper with blue PVC 

insulation. Tracer wire systems shall be electrically continuous covering all mains 

and services within the project. Wire-to-wire connectors shall be made with 

silicone-filled wire nuts. Wire-to-appurtenance attachments shall be made with 

lug-type terminals. Wire shall be secured to the top of each pipe joint with nylon 

ties or PVC tape placed on 10-foot intervals. Wire shall be secured to pipe with 

blue colored PVC Tape. 

Approved Manufacturers (Tracer Wire Silicone-filled Wire Nut Connectors) 

Manufacturer 

Ideal Industries 

King Technology, Inc. 


Model 

Twister® DB Plus 

Failsafe 

2. Pipeline Markers 

Markers shall be of a passive electronic type that reflects a signal back to an 

electronic hand-held transmitter/detector. Electronic components shall be 

enclosed in a blue waterproof polyethylene housing. Markers shall have a 

different response frequency for each service line type. 

Markers shall be ScotchMark products manufactured by 3M Telecom Systems 

Group, Austin, Texas. Alternate manufacturers by ECUA in writing. 

Application 

Usable 

Depth 

Dimension/ 

Configuration Service Model 

Near Surface 2 feet 3½”L X 5/8” Cylinder Water 1434 

Medium Depth 4 feet 4” Ball Water 1403 




Deep 6 feet 8” X 1” Thick Disc Water 1257 

2.05 Hydrants And Flushing Equipment 

A. Fire Hydrants 

Fire Hydrants shall be current design in compliance with the AWWA Standard C502, with 

rated working pressure of 200 psig. The basic design of the fire hydrant shall be of the 

dry barrel type of breakaway traffic design. 

1. Hydrant Construction 

The hydrant inlet connection shall be 6-inch mechanical joint type complete with 

flange kit. 

The hydrant shall be designed with a traffic breakaway feature incorporating a 

flanged design using breakable bolts and breakaway shaft coupling. Split ring 

retainer-type breakaway design with pinch bolts is not acceptable. The hydrant 

design shall allow the upper barrel to be rotated 360 degrees in order to assure 

proper nozzle orientation. 

The drain valve shall assure quick and complete drainage of the hydrant and the 

drain hole shall be bushed with bronze if passing through cast iron. The drain 

valve sealing facing shall be made of Buna N, nylon or urethane. If the valve top 

plate comes in contact with the bronze seat ring to facilitate draining of the 

hydrant, the valve top plate shall be made of bronze. 

2. Main Hydrant Valve 

The main hydrant valve shall be compression type, opening counterclockwise 

against system pressure and closing clockwise with system pressure. The main 

valve connection opening shall not be less than 5¼-inches. The main valve shall 

have a resilient seat. 

The hydrant shall be designed such that the operating threads on the stem are 

prevented from coming in contact with potable water and shall be enclosed in an 

operating chamber and sealed by O-Rings at the top and bottom of the chamber. 

The chamber shall be constructed for grease or oil lubrication with an installed 

grease fitting for maintenance. 

The operating nut shall be 1½-inches in size and pentagon in shape and of onepiece 

construction. 

The hydrant shall have one 4½-inch pumper nozzle, and two 2½-inch pumper 

nozzles having National Standard Hose coupling threads. The nozzles shall be 

field replaceable utilizing either a threaded or quarter-turn fitting with an O-Ring 

seal. 

3. Operation and Maintenance Features 

The hydrant shall not incorporate parts requiring field adjustment for proper 

operation. 




The hydrant shall be designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the 

hydrant through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant. 

Removal of the working parts of the hydrant shall be accomplished by use of a 

seat. Hydrants requiring other special tools to perform removal of interior parts 

will not be accepted. 

4. Materials 

All operating parts including operating nut, hold-down nut, drain ring and seat ring 

shall be bronze. The valve seat ring shall thread into a bronze insert or drain ring 

to provide bronze-to-bronze seating. Breakaway stem coupling is to have bronze 

or stainless steel bolts or pins. 

5. Markings 

The fire hydrant shall have permanent markings identifying the manufacturer by 

name, initials or insignia, the size of the main valve opening, and the year of 

manufacture. 


Manufacturer 

Kennedy 81-A 

Mueller 

A423 

American Darling 

B84B 

Clow 

Medallion 

M & H 

129T 


Model No 

B. Fire Hydrant Appurtenances 

1. Extension Kits 

When specified, hydrants shall be installed using original manufacturer hydrant 

extension kits as necessary to position the hydrant breakaway above finish grade 

per ECUA Standard Detail D-35. 

Stand extension shall be in standard lengths of 12, 24, 36, 48, and 60 inches. 

2. Hydrant Connectors 

Hydrant connector spools shall be ductile iron per AWWA C151 used for 

connection between the hydrant and lead valve, and shall incorporate joint 

restraints. One end of the connector spool shall have swivel flange. See ECUA 

Standard Detail D-35. 

a. Standard hydrant connector sizes shall be as follows: 

1. 6-inch X 12-inch long 





b. Hydrant Offset Connectors 

When a connector between the hydrant and lead valve specified to adjust 

hydrant height or to offset the hydrant from the valve, an offset connector 




shall be used. Material to be ductile iron per AWWA C153/ANSIA2153. 

Sizes shall be as follows: 

1. 6-inch X 18-inch long with 6-inch offset 



C. Flushing Hydrants 


Manufacturer 

Straight Hydrant 

Connector 

Offset 

Connector 

Assured Flow Sales, Inc. N/A GRADELOK 

Clow N/A 


Flushing hydrants shall be current design and in general compliance with AWWA 

Standard C502, with rated working pressure of 200 psig. 

1. Hydrant Construction 

Flushing hydrants shall meet the requirements of Section 2.5.1, except 

breakaway feature is not required. 

2. Main Valve 

Generally the same as Section 2.5.1, except main valve opening shall be not less 

than 2-1/8 inches and the flushing hydrant shall have one (1) 2½-inch nozzle 

having national standard hose coupling threads. 

3. Operation and Maintenance Features 

Unless otherwise specified, the hydrant bury length shall be 36 inches. The bury 

length is the distance measured to the nearest 1/2 foot, from the bottom of the 

connecting pipe to the ground line of the hydrant. 

4. Materials 

All operating parts including operating nut, hold-down nut, drain ring and seat ring 

shall be bronze. The valve seat ring shall thread into a bronze insert or drain ring 

to provide bronze-to-bronze seating. 

5. Markings 

Flushing hydrant markings shall meet the requirements of Section 2.5.1 for fire 

hydrants. 


Manufacturer 

Model 

Clow F-4764 

M & H Style 33 

Mueller A-411 


2.06 Water Service Lines 




A. Polyethylene (PE) - Tubing 

Polyethylene service tubing for water supply shall conform to AWWA C901. PE 

tubing dimensions shall conform to ASTM D2737 with Copper Tubing OD base. Refer to 

Section 2.3.3 for service lines greater than 2 inches in diameter. 

1. Materials 

PE tubing material shall conform to ASTM D3350, Standard Code PE 3408. 

2. Pressure Rating 

PE tubing shall be Pressure Class 200 psi with a minimum working pressure of 

150 psig, and comply with ASTM D1598, D1599, D1693, D3350 and AWWA 901. 

Dimensions and acceptable standard sizes 

TABLE 2.6.1 - PE TUBING DIMENSIONS (DR9) 

NOM OD WALL ID 

1 1.125 .137 .851 

1½ 1.625 .200 1.225 

2 2.125 .250 1.625 

3. Markings 

a. Nominal Size 

b. Standard PE Code: 3408 

c. Tubing: DR-9 

d. Pressure Class: PC200 

e. Manufacturer's Name or Trademark 

f. Blue Markings and Stripes 


Manufacturer 

Phillips 


Model 

Driscopipe 5100 Ultra-line 

B. Copper Water Service Tubing 

Copper water service tubing shall be Type K suitable for underground potable water 

services. Tracer wire is not required with copper tubing. 

1. Material 

Tubing is to be supplied in conformance with ASTM B88 for dimension and 

materials. 

2. Pressure Rating 

Test Pressure: 200 PSIG 

Operating Pressure: 150 PSIG 

TABLE 2.6.2 - COPPER WATER TUBING DIMENSIONS (ASTM B88) 

Size 

(inches) 

Nominal 

OD 

Wall 

Thickness 

1 1.125 .065 

1½ 1.625 .072 

2 2.125 .083 




3. Pipe Markings 

a. Nominal Size 

b. Type K 

c. ASTM B88 

d. Manufacturer’s name or logo 

e. NSF seal 

2.07 Service Line Appurtenances 

A. Fittings and Valves 

Fittings and valves shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C-800 and be listed 

and approved by NSF for underground use in potable water service. 

1. Material 

Fitting and valve bodies, plugs, and compression nuts shall be bronze, copper 

alloy No. C83600 and meet chemical and mechanical requirements of ASTM B62 

or ASTM B584. 

Component parts such as fasteners, seals, and packings may be of other 

materials selected for adequate endurance, corrosion resistance and strength in 

accordance with AWWA C800. 

2. Pressure 

Fittings and valves shall be high pressure type for maximum allowable pressure 

of 150 PSIG, nominal operating pressure 100 PSIG. 

3. Thread Specifications 

Fittings and valves shall be of materials and fabricated in accordance with 

appropriate specification: 

TABLE 2.7.1 - THREAD SPECIFICATIONS 

Thread Type 


Unified Inch ANSI/ASME B1.1 

General Purpose Pipe 

ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 

Dryseal 

ANSI/ASME B1.20.3 

Fittings and valves shall be marked as appropriate with the following information: 

manufacturer’s name or logo; pressure rating; direction of flow; and size. 

Pack Joint Couplings - Acceptable Manufacturers 

Type Manufacturer Model 

Joint Couplings 

Copper or Plastic 

Tube X MPT 

Ford 

Mueller 

C84-XX 

H-15428-X 


Tube X FPT 

Ford 

Mueller 

C14-XX 

H-15451-X 


Ford 

C44-XX 

Tube to Tube 

Female Copper Pipe 

(replaces flare nut) 

X Copper or Plastic Tubing 

Mueller 

Ford 

Mueller 

H-15403-X 

CO4-XX 

H-15071-X 


[X, XX: See Mfr.’s catalog to complete model numbers by size] 




4. Tapping Saddles 

Tapping saddles shall be either bronze or cast or ductile iron with shop coat. 

Saddles used to tap Class 160 PVC pipe shall be designed with mechanical 

features or stops to prevent over- tightening. 

a. Saddle Sizes 

1. Main Pipe: 2-inch - 16-inch 

2. Tapping valve connections: 1-inch, 1½-inch, 2-inch 

Acceptable Manufacturers 

Manufacturer Application Model 

Ford 1-inch tap on PVC/steel OD pipe S-70 and S-90 

1 -inch tap on DI and CI Pipe F-101 and F-202 

Mueller H-105 

Smith Blair 313 


5. Water Tubing Couplings 

Water tubing couplings in sizes 1-inch, 1½-inch, and 2-inch only shall be bronze 

compression-type, inlet and outlet for PE or copper tubing. Crimp-type couplings 

are not acceptable. 


Manufacturer 

Model 

Ford 

C44-XX* 

Mueller 

H-15403-XX* 



6. Meter Couplings 

Meter couplings shall be bronze and sized as appropriate to accommodate the 

relevant meter. Inlet shall have male pipe thread. 

B. Service Line Valves 


Manufacturer 

Model 

Ford 

C84-XX* 

Mueller 

H-15428-XX* 



1. Corporation Stops 

Corporation stops shall be brass, high-pressure class, ball type, with inlet taper 

CC thread. Outlet shall be compression-type for PE or copper tubing. 

Corporation stops shall be sized for 1-inch, 1½-inch or 2-inch tubing as 

appropriate. 


Manufacturer 

Model 




Ford 

Mueller 


F-1000 and FB-1000 

300, Ball-type 

2. Curb Stops 

Curb stops shall be brass, high pressure, ball-type with locking wings. Inlet shall 

be compression-type for PE tubing. Outlet shall be female iron pipe threads. 

Curb stops shall be sized for 1-inch, 1½-inch or 2-inch tubing as appropriate. 


Ford1 

Manufacturer Size Model 

-inch 

1½-inch 

2-inch 

B41 - 444W 

B41 - 666 

B41 - 727 


2.08 Backflow Prevention Devices 

Backflow prevention devices shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C506, and shall 

also be approved by ASSE and/or approved by NSF for use in potable water systems with a 

maximum continuous operating pressure of 150 psig, and capable of sustaining a hydrostatic test 

pressure of 300 psig. 

A. Materials and Construction 

The body shall be cast iron with hot dip galvanized coating or fusion bonded epoxy on the 

interior and exterior, or cast bronze with a maximum lead content 5%. Working parts and 

springs shall be bronze or stainless steel; valve discs shall be sili cone rubber; 

diaphragms shall be fabric reinforced neoprene, and O-rings shall be Buna-N, neoprene, 

or silicone rubber. Check valve enclosures shall be glass-filled nylon or Teflon, or bronze 

or stainless steel. Other working parts shall be bronze or stainless steel. 

B. Double-check Device 

Double-check backflow preventers shall have two independent check valve assemblies. 

The body may consist of one or more castings, and shall be equipped with ports and 

valves as necessary to allow testing in place. 

C. Reduced Pressure Principle Device 

Reduced pressure principle backflow preventers shall have two independent check valves 

with an intermediate relief valve incorporating a pressure diaphragm valve assembly that 

maintains a minimum 2 psig differential pressure across the assembly. 

D. End Connections 

Devices shall be manufactured with standard female pipe thread, size 3/4-inch, 

1-1/2-inch, or standard ANSI B16.2 125# flanged, sizes 2-inch and greater. 

1-inch, 

E. Appurtenances 

All back flow devices shall be provided and installed as a complete assembly with all 

necessary fittings to enable testing in place. Tapped test ports shall be fitted with test 

petcocks in each body cavity. Inlet and outlet gate or ball valve shall be of the same line 

size as that of the body. 






Type Device 

Manufacturer Double Check Double Check Detector Reduced Pressure 

Ames 

2000 DCA OSY 

2000 DCA NRS 

3000 DCDA OSY 

3000 DCDA NRS 

4000 RP OSY 

4000 RP NRS 

2000 DCA OSY Epoxy 

2000 DCA NRS Epoxy 

3000 DCDA OSY Epoxy 

3000 DCDA NRS Epoxy 

Febco 

850 NRS 

850 OSY 

860 NRS 

860 OSY 

Watts 709 OS&Y/BV 709 DDC 909 

Hersey 

3/4” - 2” FDC 

3” - 10” No. 2 


909 DDC (Detector) 

3” - 10” DDC II 3/4” - 2” FRP II 

2½” - 10” 6CM 

2.09 Meter Box Assemblies 

Meter box assemblies for 5/8-inch meters shall be cast iron open bottom per ASTM A-48 with cast 

iron lid with ECUA imprint. The box assembly shall include a ball valve with locking nuts, pack 

joint coupling for copper or PE tubing with expansion connection and gaskets as needed. Meter 

box and cover for meters 2-inch and larger shall be constructed in accordance with ECUA 

Standard Details D-25 and D-26. 


Manufacturer Model Meter Size 

Ford 

G148-133 (Modified) w/ 1” pack joint 5/8” 

for copper or PE Tubing 



3.01 General 

The contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials as required to install all pipes, 

valves, fittings, and other appurtenances as indicated on the construction plans or as specified in 

the contract documents. 

3.02 Potable Water Line Separation From Gravity Sanitary Sewer, Force Main And Stormwater Lines 

(FDEP Rule 62-555.314(1) & (2), F.A.C.) 

A. When a gravity sewer line, force main or storm water line must cross under a water line 

with less than 12-inch vertical clearance, one of the following methods may be used. 




1. Fully encase sewer line with a minimum of 4 inches of concrete (2500 psi) for a 

minimum distance of 10 feet either side of the point of crossing, which must be at 

least 5 feet from a water line joint. If the crossing is other than at right angles, 

increase the length of encasement so that the end of the encasement will be at 

least 12 feet from a water line joint. 

2. Use equally rated pressure pipe for the sewer lines with no joints closer than 12 

feet apart and at least 6-inch vertical clearance. 

3. Install sewer pipe into at least a 20-foot section of steel casing (casing I.D. slightly 

larger than sewer pipe bell O.D.) and center over crossing so that end of casing 

will be at least 12 feet from water line joint. Seal the ends of the casing with nonshrink 

grout. Refer to Section 2224 – Pipe Boring, Drilling and Jacking, for casing 

and boring requirements. 

B. When a gravity sewer or storm water line must cross over a potable water line, regardless 

of clearance, because the water line cannot be relayed above the line, use method 2 or 3 

in subsection A. Concrete encasement will not be allowed. 

C. When a sanitary or stormwater force main must cross under a potable water line with less 

than an 12-inch vertical clearance, or over the water line, use a higher rated pressure pipe 

as in method 2 or 3 in subsection A. 

D. When the water line being crossed in A, B or C is a house or building service lateral, 2- 

inch or smaller and the service lateral is a continuous piece of PE DR9 or copper tubing, 

then the above rules do not apply; but locate so that the distance to a sewer or force main 

joint is as great as possible. 

E. When a potable water line runs parallel to: 

1. And less than 3 feet from a stormwater gravity or pressure pipe. 

2. And less than 6 feet from a wastewater gravity or pressure pipe. 

3. And less than 10 feet from an onsite septic system. 

F. The non-potable water pipeline shall be constructed of AWWA C-150 DIP: 

1. 4” – 12” Class 350 

2. 14” – 24” Class 256 

3. 30”+ Class 150. 

G. The potable or non-potable pipeline shall have welded, fused or mechanically restrained 

joints. 

H. The potable or non-potable pipeline shall be inside a welded steel casing pipe, or 

concrete encased as per Part 3.2A. 

3.03 Pipe Installation 

The contractor shall utilize equipment and methods in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s 

requirements and sound construction practices to insure pipe installation to line and grade as 

indicated. 

A. Trench Excavation 




Refer to Section 2221: Trench Excavation Backfill and Compaction. Maintain minimum of 

30 inches and maximum of 36 inches of cover below finished grade unless shown 

otherwise on the construction plans. 

B. Alignment 

Pipe shall be installed along the alignment indicated by the construction plans. 

Accomplish horizontal and vertical changes in alignment of pipe with bends or other 

appropriate fittings. Limit joint deflection as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 

C. Pipe Preparation 

The contractor shall clean the interior of all pipes, fittings, and joints prior to installation. 

Pipes shall be inspected for defects prior to installation. Damaged pipe shall be rejected 

and removed from the project. 

D. Pipe Installation 

Install pipe only when weather and trench conditions are suitable. Do not lay pipe in 

water. Join pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Provide initial backfill or anchoring as necessary to prevent displacement and preserve 

alignment after establishing final position. 

Encase water pipe in steel casing or use ductile iron pipe when crossing under pipe, 

conduit, or structure when a 6-inch separation distance cannot be maintained. This 

protection shall extend a minimum of 5 feet beyond crossed structure. (See Section 

2556.3.2.D for Sanitary Sewer Lines.) 

E. Protection 

Prevent the introduction of foreign matter into the pipe at all times. Close open ends of 

pipe with water tight fitting closures or plugs. Do not let water fill trench, but include 

provisions to prevent flotation should water control measures prove inadequate. Remove 

water, sand, mud and other undesirable materials from trench before removal of pipe 

closure piece. 

F. Cutting 

PVC or PE pipe shall be cut in a neat workmanlike manner, and the spigot end shall be 

beveled per manufacturer's recommendation. Ductile iron pipe shall be cut in 

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not allow excessive heat to 

develop. Smooth and bevel cut end as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Use of pipe 

with damaged lining is unacceptable. 

G. Service Lines 

Service lines shall be constructed where shown on plans and in accordance with ECUA 

Standard Detail Drawing D-21. 

H. Closure Pieces 

Closure pieces shall only be used where called for on plans, or with written permission of 

the ECUA. Closure may be accomplished with sleeve coupling as long as its length is 

such that gaskets are not less than 3 inches from pipe ends. 

I. Restraints and Thrust Blocking 

Mechanical joint restraints shall be furnished and installed for all water line fittings and 

appurtenances. Reference ECUA Standard Drawing D-44. Restraints and thrust blocks 

shall also be installed for 45º and 90º bends, tapping sleeves, tees and main dead ends. 

Reference ECUA Standard Drawings D-43 and D-44. 




3.04 Appurtenance Installation 

A. Valves 

Valves shall be installed with operating stems vertical when installation is direct burial. 

Valves shall be installed on a suitable bearing surface so as to prevent vertical 

displacement. 

B. Valve Boxes 

Valve boxes shall be centered on the valve. The earth shall be compacted around each 

valve box to a distance of 4 feet on all sides of box, or to undisturbed trench face if less 

than 4 feet. An 18-inch diameter by 4-inch thick collar shall be constructed and sloped to 

direct water away from the valve box. In lieu of the constructed collar, a 24-inch by 4-inch 

thick pre-cast, sloped, concrete collar may be used. 

C. Tracer Wire 

Tracer wire shall be installed on all new water mains and on water service lines installed 

in conjunction with new water mains. The tracer wire shall be placed directly above the 

pipe and electrically continuous throughout the project. Tracer wire shall be secured to 

the pipe with PVC tape the same color as the wire insulation, at a maximum of 10-feet on 

center between tapings. The tracer wire shall be brought to the ground surface at each 

valve location in accordance with ECUA Standard Detail D-34. Splices and/or 

connections in the tracer wire shall be installed with silicone-filled wire nuts designed for 

direct burial. 

3.05 Fire Hydrant Flushing Equipment Installation 

A. Hydrants 

Hydrants shall be installed in accordance with ECUA Standard Detail D-35. 

B. Flush Stands and Valves 

Flush stands shall be installed as shown on ECUA Standard Detail D-41, depending on 

line size. 

3.06 Service Line Installation 

A. General 

The contractor shall install individual services with tracer wire from the new main to a 

convenient point on the right-of-way or property line for each house, building or unit that is 

to be served through an ECUA meter. This section will deal with service line tubing 2- 

inches in diameter and smaller, to serve 5/8-inch, 1-inch, 1-1/2-inch, and 2-inch meters. 

The installation of service lines for 3-inch meters and larger shall be in accordance with 

the requirements for water main installation. (See Section 3.3) 

B. Service Line Connections 

Service lines shall be installed in accordance with ECUA Standard Detail D-21. Tubing 

shall be installed in one continuous length from corporation stop to curb stop with no 

intermediate fittings. Service lines damaged after initial installation but before acceptance 

may be repaired by means of a single splice, except that no repair fittings will be 

permitted under any paving. The tap location shall be not less than 10 feet from any 

sanitary sewer joint with less than 18 inches vertical clearance. Potable water taps shall 

be made with a tapping machine designed for the pipe material being tapped. Other 




makes of tapping machine may be used upon prior approval of the ECUA Inspector or 

Engineer. 

3.07 Taps On Pressurized Lines 

The contractor shall perform taps on pressurized lines for the installation of pipes other than 

service lines of 2-inch and smaller PE tubing in accordance with these requirements: 

A. Materials 

All materials used for taps on pressurized lines shall meet the requirements of these 

specifications. Tapping sleeves shall be properly sized for the pipe being tapped. (See 

Sec. 2.4.1.6) Resilient seated tapping valves shall be furnished with special end 

connections. (See Sec. 2.4.2.2) All other material used to accomplish the tap shall meet 

the standards set forth by the AWWA for potable water construction. 

B. Procedure 

The contractor shall notify the ECUA Inspector three working days in advance of work. 

The contractor shall in the presence of an ECUA inspector: 

1. Expose the existing pipe at the location shown on the plans, and clean the 

section of the pipe to receive the tapping sleeve. 

2. Check the tapping sleeve and valve for defects and make sure the gate fully 

retracts in the valve to allow the shell cutter free passage. 

3. Assemble the tapping sleeve on the pipe, then install the tapping valve. 

4. Hydrostatically pressure test the tapping sleeve and valve after it has been 

assembled on the water main using the test plug on the sleeve. The test shall be 

150 psi minimum. The duration of the test shall be 15 minutes. 

5. Pour a thrust block behind the tapping sleeve sufficient to withstand the pressure 

of the new line. Also, provide a concrete pad sufficient to support the weight of 

the sleeve, valve, and tapping machine. Refer to Section 3.3.9 and ECUA 

Standard Detail D-43. Concrete shall be in place a minimum of 24 hours prior to 

testing the main installation. 

6. Assemble an approved tapping machine and proceed to make the necessary cut 

in accordance with the recommendation of the tapping machine manufacturer. 

Approved tapping machines shall be: 

a. In good working condition. 

b. Designed for and have a cutting bit for the pipe material to be cut. 

c. Equipped with a depth of cut gauge. 

d. Designed to capture the coupon. 

e. Equipped with the manufacture’s recommended diameter shell cutter for 

the tap to be made. 

f. Tapping machine power head to be hydraulic or pneumatic drive; use of 

electric motor drives expressly prohibited. 

g. Tapping maching shall be disinfected prior to each use for potable water 

taps. 





Nominal 

Main Size 

Tapping Valve ID 

AWWA 


Tapping Machine Shell Cutter OD 

2-inch 2 1/8-inch 1½ -inch 

3-inch 3 1/8-inch 2½-inch 






14-inch 14 1/4-inch Per Manufacturer’s Recommendation. 

16-inch 16 1/4-inch Contractor shall submit shop drawings 

18-inch 18 1/4-inch for valves and tapping machine for 

20-inch 20 1/4-inch approval, prior to use. Per 

24-inch 24 1/4-inch Manufacturer’s Recommendation. 

7. Tap coupon shall be given to the ECUA Inspector. If the coupon is lost in 

the main, contractor shall, at his expense, dismantle main to retrieve the 

coupon. Main will be reassembled, pressure tested and bacteriological 

tests retaken as required at contractor’s expense. 

PART 4 – ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS 

4.01 Inspection 

Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be inspected to ascertain that valves, fittings, 

fire hydrants, flush hydrants, etc. are located in conformance with the plans, and confirm that all 

‘as-built’ measurements have been accurately taken. The ECUA Inspector shall observe all 

appropriate activities related to properly placing the line in service including flushing, pressure and 

leakage testing, disinfection, and bacteriological sampling. Final connections and testing of fire 

hydrants shall be accomplished after final clearance of lines. Tracer wire shall be tested for 

continuity by the contractor with the ECUA Inspector present. The contractor, with the ECUA 

Inspector, shall make sure all main valves and hydrant valves are open. 

4.02 Flushing 

All newly installed water lines shall be flushed with potable water to remove any sediment, solids 

and/or foreign matter prior to testing. ECUA will make water available to the contractor. Flushing 

shall be conducted at a sufficient velocity to clear the pipe. Discharge of flushing water must be 

through a 2-inch diameter pipe (or larger) and must be controlled so as not to cause any property 

damage. Flush water source connection shall incorporate backflow preventor when required by 

the ECUA Inspector or Engineer. 

4.03 Pressure/Leakage Test 




A. General 

All newly installed water lines and appurtenances shall be pressure/leak tested to assure 

the strength of materials and quality of workmanship of the installation. Testing shall be 

conducted in accordance with ECUA Standard Detail D-12 and the requirements of 

AWWA Manual 23 for PVC and other flexible pipe or AWWA C600 for Ductile Iron Pipe. 

Leakage testing may be conducted concurrently with the pressure test. 

B. Procedure 

Contractor shall notify the ECUA Inspector three ECUA working days prior to a scheduled 

test. Tests are to be conducted in segments not to exceed three thousand (3,000) feet of 

pipe. Water in the new line shall be pumped up to a pressure of 150 psi minimum. This 

pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of one (1) hour by pumping a quantifiable 

amount of water into the line and record the amount of water added during the test period. 

This represents the leakage. 

Pressure/leakage tests shall be deemed acceptable when leakage does not exceed that 

determined by the following formula: 

L = SD P 

133200 

(or 11.65 gpd/mi/inch/dia) 

or 

or 

L = ND P 

7400 

L = ND P 

6600 

for DI pipe 18' lengths 

for PVC pipe 20' lengths 

where: 

L = Maximum leakage, in gallons per hour. 

S = Length of pipe under test, in feet. 

N = Number of pipe joints in segment under test. 

D = Nominal internal diameter of pipe, in inches. 

P = Average actual leakage test pressure, psig. 

Record all data for submission with as-built plans. 

An ECUA Construction Inspector shall be present during test. 

Refit and replace all pipe not meeting the leakage requirements. Repair clamps are not 

permitted. 

Repair all visible leaks regardless of the amount of leakage. 

When a satisfactory pressure/leakage test has been completed, reduce the pressure at or 

below normal line pressure, and continue on with line disinfection. 

4.04 Disinfection 

A. General 

The contractor shall provide all equipment, materials and testing apparatus required to 

perform disinfection in accordance with AWWA 651, ECUA Standard Detail D-12, or as 

modified herein. 

B. Procedure 

1. Prior to beginning disinfection, the contractor shall submit information to the 

engineer for approval of proposed materials and methods. ECUA will determine 




the number and location of all sampling points. Temporary sampling taps may be 

required consisting of a corporation cock with copper tube. 

2. Add chlorine to attain an initial concentration of 25 mg/l chlorine with 10 mg/l 

remaining after 24 hours. 

a. Initial concentration is to be obtained by mixing proper amount of HTH 

granules (65% Cl) into auxiliary tank, then pump/meter into regulated flow 

into or through the pipe section. 

b. Alternate methods of disinfection by use of granular or tablet forms of 

chlorine will not be allowed. The “SLUG” method as described in AWWA 

651 will not be allowed. 

c. Check the chlorine concentration at all sampling points after the line has 

been filled and air expelled. 

d. Check residual chlorine concentration at the end of 24 hours to confirm 

that 10 ppm (minimum) is present. 

C. ECUA shall supply water for testing from the nearest available source. Flush main until 

chlorine concentration is 2 mg/l or less prior to taking bacteriological samples. Contractor 

shall provide a backflow preventor device as required by the ECUA Inspector or Engineer. 

1. Check concentration at all sample point locations. 

2. Disposal of chlorinated water shall be the contractor’s responsibility and shall be 

done without damage to public or private property or surface waters of the United 

States or Florida. Chlorinated water disposal shall meet all State, Federal and 

local regulations. 

D. Contact ECUA for collection of samples. Two (2) satisfactory bacterial sample sets taken 

24 hours apart must meet State requirements before placing the main into service. 

E. Repeat flushing and disinfection procedure should initial disinfection fail to yield 

acceptable bacteriological results at no additional cost to the Owner. 

4.05 Other Connections 

After new system piping has been satisfactorily tested and cleared for use, make any approved 

additional connections to the pre-existing distribution system. Exercise care in making connection 

and disinfect as needed. When total system is approved for use, an ECUA Inspector shall verify 

that the contractor has opened all interior valves as required. Valves connecting new installations 

to ECUA’s existing distribution system shall then be opened by an ECUA Inspector. 

4.06 Testing Fire Hydrants 

All newly installed fire hydrants shall be flow tested by ECUA prior to final acceptance in 

accordance with established procedures. (Refer to AWWA-M17 and AWWA C502.) Static Leak 

Test of hydrant shall be done in conjunction with Section 4.3 with hydrant valve open. 

Hydrant flow tests not meeting the minimum requirements of ECUA’s Design Standards shall be 

immediately reported to the Engineer-of-Record. The system shall not be placed into service until 

the system meets the minimum requirements. 





SECTION 02570 – SANITARY SEWERS 


1.01 Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere 

A. Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting: Section 2221. 

B. Pipe Boring and Jacking: Section 2224. 

1.02 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling 

A. Store materials to prevent physical damage. 

B. Protect materials during transportation and installation to avoid physical damage. 

1.03 General Description of Work Covered 

A. Furnish and install all sewer pipe, fittings and structures, and accessories required for 

sanitary sewer construction as indicated. 

B. All Tap and Impact fees will provided by the Owner. 


Comply with latest published editions of American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

Standards: 

A. ASTM C478 - Concrete Pipe Manholes. 

B. ASTM D1784 - Rigid Poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (vinyl 

chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 

C. ASTM D2321 - Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer 

Pipe. 

D. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 

E. ASTM D3212 - Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 

F. ASTM D3034 Type PSM - PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings 4” through 15”. 

G. ASTM F679 – PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings 18” through 27”. 

PART 2 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 

2.01 General Requirements 

A. Pipe furnished shall be PVC for sanitary sewer construction unless shown otherwise on 

plans or bid forms. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Sanitary Sewers 02570 – 1 



B. All pipes shall be marked in accordance with applicable standard specification under 

which pipe is manufactured unless otherwise specified. 

2.02 Delivery, Storage and Handling 

Certificates of Compliance with the Specifications shall be required for all materials used on the 

Project. All materials shall be protected during transportation, storage, handling, and installation 

to avoid physical deterioration due to sun and weather. The ECUA reserves the right to reject 

material, which in any way does not meet the requirements of these Specifications. 

2.03 Sewer Mains 

A. Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe (PVC) 

1. Comply with ASTM D3034 or F679 for pipe using material conforming to ASTM 

D1784 for pipe and fittings. 

2. Use single elastomeric gasket push-on joints complying with ASTM D3212. 

3. Provide pipe and fittings with minimum SDR-35 dimension ratio. 

4. SDR 35 shall be used for service laterals. 

5. Pipe shall be color coded by one of the following methods: 

a. 3 green stripes (½ inch high) with permanent ink along the entire length, 

evenly spaced around the pipe, with the word "Sewer" in ¾-inch letters 

every 21 inches along each stripe. 

b. Use pipe pigment to color code pipe green. 

B. HDPE Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe 

1. Acceptable for lines 20 inches in diameter and larger. 

2. Use pipe to comply with ASTM C14/AASHTO M86 (Latest Edition). 

3. Use joints per ASTM C433 (Latest Edition). 

4. Pipe shall be lined with embedded HDPE liner such as AGRU “Sure Grip,” GSE 

“Stud Liner” or Engineer approved equivalent. 

5. Pipe shall be color coded by one of the following methods: 

a. 3 green stripes (½ inch high) with permanent ink along the entire length 

with ¾-inch letters every 21 inches along each stripe designating 

"Sewer". 

2.04 Structures and Pipe Accessories 

A. Fittings 

1. Fittings shall be allowed only on service laterals and drop manholes. 

2. Fittings shall equal or exceed quality and strength of pipe. 

3. Wyes shall be long bell type. 

B. Manholes & Sections 

1. Construction shall be precast reinforced concrete capable of sustaining an H-20 

loading. 

2. Manholes shall be constructed in accordance with ASTM C-478, using Type II or 

Type III Portland Cement. 

3. Use Xypex, Kim Krystol or Engineer approved equal waterproofing admixture for 

all precast reinforced concrete manholes & sections. 

4. Leakage shall not exceed 1 gallon per day per vertical foot of manhole. 

5. Manholes shall have a minimum I.D. of 48 inches, unless otherwise noted on 

plans. 




6. Base section shall be monolithic to a point 6" above the crown of the incoming 

pipe with minimum thick bottom section and 5" wall section and made in 

accordance with ASTM C-478. 

7. Pipe holes shall be properly located and either cast in place with appropriate boot 

or required shape, or core drilled after concrete has set. Minor field adjustments 

may be made with approval of Engineer and Owner. The invert of the lowest pipe 

shall be a minimum of 4" above the inside floor of the base section. 

8. Cone (top) sections shall be eccentric narrowing from 48" to 24" I.D., unless 

otherwise noted on plans. 

9. Flat top sections shall be used in place of cone sections for manholes less than 5 

feet deep. The access hole shall be offset to allow easy access to steps (if used) 

and shall be reinforced to support an H-20 loading. 

10. Shallow manholes less then 3 feet deep shall be constructed according to ECUA 

detail drawing. 

11. The joints between sections shall be one of the following: 

a. Lap joint design with the upper lip inside and suitably shaped to 

accommodate a bitumastic joint sealer, 

b. Rubber "O" ring gasket. 

12. Pipe to manhole seals shall be made utilizing one of the following or approved 

equivalents: 

a. Kore-N-Seal or, Lock-Joint, with stainless steel bands and screws. 

b. A-LOK. 

13. Brick manholes shall only be used with consent of ECUA. 

C. Manhole Accessories 

1. Manhole Lid and Cover 

a. Gray cast iron, with nominal opening of 24 inches. 

b. Cover shall be embossed with "SANITARY SEWER" as shown on detail 

drawings. 

c. The lifting holes shall not extend through cover. 

d. Use Vulcan Model VM-37, USF 170E or approved equivalent for lids not 

requiring bolting features. 

e. Use Vulcan Model VM-360WT or approved equivalent for bolted covers. 

f. Use Vulcan Model VM-50 or approved equivalent for specified flood 

areas. 

g. Use Certain Teed RE 85 R3 FD with Anti-theft locking key (RE 80 K9 FD) 

for lids requiring locking features. 

h. Rain Guard Covers 

2. Manhole Coating 

a. Apply two coats of a foundation coating or approved equivalent to the 

exterior. 

b. All manholes shall be lined with an ECUA approved HDPE or 

polypropylene liner. Additional manholes shall be lined if required by 

ECUA. Other liners may be installed if approved by ECUA in writing. 

c. Manholes housing force main air release valves shall be lined with an 

ECUA approved HDPE liner. Other liners may be installed if approved by 

ECUA in writing. 

3. Steps 

a. Shall be embedded in the concrete by the manhole manufacturer at 12” 

on center spacing from the top of the manhole cone to bench. 

b. Steps shall be grade 60 steel bar reinforced ABS plastic, with non-slip 

rungs, guaranteed for use in sewers. 

4. Exterior Joint Sealant Membrane 




a. A 9-inch minimum width joint sealant membrane shall be applied to all 

extension joints below the top cone or flat top section. The membrane 

shall be capable of sealing manhole joints against groundwater and sand 

infiltration. Use “Wrapid Seal Manhole Encapsulation System” by CCI 

Pipeline or Engineer approved equivalent. 


3.01 General 

Provide all labor, equipment and materials and install all pipe, fitting, specials and appurtenances 

as indicated or specified. 

3.02 Pipe Installation 

A. Handling 

1. Handle and store pipe in a manner to insure installation in sound and undamaged 

condition, and in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s requirements. 

a. Do not drop, bump, roll or drag. 

b. Use slings, lifting lugs, hooks and other devices designed to protect pipe, 

joint elements, and coatings. 

2. Ship, move and store with provisions to prevent movement or shock contact with 

adjacent units. 

3. Handle with equipment capable of work with adequate factor of safety against 

overturning or other unsafe procedures. 

B. Installation 

1. Utilize equipment, methods, and materials insuring installation to lines and grades 

as indicated. 

a. Do not lay on blocks unless pipe is to receive total concrete encasement. 

b. Use calibrated laser or minimum of 3 batter boards for control of line and 

grade. 

2. Install pipe of size, material, strength class, and joint type with embedment shown 

for plan location. 

3. Insofar as possible, commence laying at downstream end of line and install pipe 

with bell ends in direction of laying (upstream). Sewer pipe shall have spigot 

ends in direction of flow. Obtain approval for deviations therefrom. 

4. Clean interior of all pipe, fittings and joints prior to installation. Exclude entrance 

of foreign matter during discontinuance of installation. 

a. Close open ends of pipe with watertight plugs at the end of each 

workday. 

b. Do not let water enter trench. Pipe shall be laid in a dry trench. Include 

provisions to prevent pipe flotation and displacement should water control 

measures prove inadequate. 

c. Remove water, sand, mud and other undesirable materials from trench 

before removal of end cap or plugs. 

5. Inspect pipe prior to installation to determine if any pipe defects are present. 

6. Brace or anchor as required to prevent displacement after establishing final 

position. 

7. Perform only when weather and trench conditions are suitable. 

8. Observe extra precaution when hazardous atmospheres might be encountered, 

especially when connecting to existing, active sanitary sewers. 




9. Separation of Sanitary Sewer Lines and Potable Water Lines. (FDEP Rule 62- 

555.314 (1) & (2), F.A.C.) See details in contract plans and Section 2556, Part 3.2 

of this project manual. 

10. Auger or jack casing in place where shown on plans. 

11. Maintain minimum of 30 inches of cover unless shown on the plans or directed by 

Engineer. 

12. Encase sewer pipe in steel casing or use ductile iron pipe when crossing under 

pipe, conduit, or structure of 24 inches in diameter or greater when a 6-inch 

separation distance cannot be maintained. This protection shall extend a 

minimum of 5 feet beyond crossed structure. 

C. Jointing: General Requirements 

1. Perform in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

2. Clean and lubricate all joint and gasket surfaces with lubricant recommended. 

3. Utilize methods and equipment capable of fully homing or making up joints 

without damage. 

4. Check joint opening and deflection for specification limits. 

D. Closure Pieces 

1. Connect two segments of pipelines or a pipeline segment and existing structure 

with short sections of pipe fabricated for the purpose. 

2. Observe specifications regarding location of joints, type of joints and pipe 

materials and strength classifications. 

E. Temporary Plugs 

1. Furnish, install and secure water tight, temporary plugs at all ends of the work at 

the end of each work day, or after laying each pipe section, if there is a delay in 

installing the next pipe section. 

2. Furnish, install and secure water tight temporary plugs at each end of work for 

removal by others when completed ahead of adjacent contract or where 

indicated. 

3. Remove from pipe laid under separate or prior contract in order to complete pipe 

connection when work by other contractor is finished prior to work at connection 

point under this contract. 

F. Permanent Plugs 

1. Use test plugs as manufactured by pipe supplier, or 

2. Fabricate by Contractor of substantially same construction. 

3. Must be watertight against heads up to 20 feet of water. 

4. Secure in place in a manner to facilitate removal when required to connect pipe. 

3.03 Manhole Installation 

A. Precast Bases 

1. Place on 12-inch layer of compacted sand, gravel or sandy material as approved 

by Engineer. 

2. Base shall be leveled prior to installation of manhole sections. 

B. Cast In Place Bases 

1. Cast on 12-inch layer of compacted sand, gravel or sandy material as approved 

by Engineer. 

2. Manhole bases and channel inverts may be constructed integrally. 




C. Manhole Sections 

1. Use precast sections unless cast-in-place manholes approved by Engineer. 

2. Precast sections may be installed after base concrete has attained 75% of design 

strength. 

3. Full circumference seals between manhole sections shall use one of the following 

or approved equivalent: 

a. Bitumastic Seal (Kent No. 2, Ram Neck) 

b. Rubber "O" ring gasket 

4. For the joint sealant membrane, the surface must be smooth, clean, dry, and free 

of voids, loose aggregate, dirt or other matter that will hinder the adhesion of the 

membrane. A primer shall be used in accordance with the accommodations of 

the membrane manufacturer. 

D. Invert Channels 

1. Form invert channel as indicated. 

2. Alternate invert and shelf may be constructed of mortar over concrete fill with 

approval of Engineer. 

3. Make changes in direction of flow with smooth curves of as large a radius as size 

of manhole permits. 

4. Make changes in size and grade smoothly and uniformly. 

5. Slope shelf of manhole adjacent to channels, toward the channels, and rough 

broom finish to provide a non-slip surface. 

6. Finish channel bottom smoothly without roughness, irregularity, or pockets. 

7. On straight through single pipe manholes, half sections of same pipe may be 

used with mortar and concrete with approval of Engineer. 

8. Precast inverts in base sections are acceptable with approval from ECUA 

Engineering Department. 

E. Pipe Connection Into Manholes 

1. Make watertight. 

2. Use specified pipe to manhole seals or other as approved by ECUA. 

F. Field applied coatings shall be applied after Engineer's approval of structure. 

3.04 Service Connections 

A. Service lines shall be located in accordance with requirements in the ECUA Code. Refer 

to the Code for clarification of availability of facilities and responsibilities of customer for 

the installation of service lines. 

B. Install service connections to each residential lot or individual business lot or property, or 

as directed by Engineer. 

C. Services wyes: install long bell type wyes, 4-inch branch diameter unless shown 

otherwise on plans. See ECUA standard detail, "Typical Service Connection". 

D. Risers: may be used with wyes for service connections where invert of sewer is 7 feet or 

more below ground surface or where shown on plans. Terminate each connection as 

shown on plans or as directed by Engineer. Glued 45 degree bends may be used on end 

of lateral, within grassy, or unpaved, areas. 

E. Glue cap on end of stub out. 

F. Backfill trench only after recording exact location and depth of service connection. 




G. Street crossings shall have a minimum of 2 feet of cover to subgrade unless approved by 

Engineer. 

H. Drive a ½-inch metal rebar adjacent to each service connection, with top of post 1 foot 

below ground surface. 

3.05 Connection of Service Lines and Sewer System Facilities 

A. Existing Service Lines and New Sewer Main: 

Connect existing sanitary service lines, which cross new sewer line through equal sized 

wye. 

B. New Service Line Connections to Existing Manholes: 

1. Insert new sewer pipe flush with inside of manhole. 

2. Connect new lines to existing manholes. Seal new pipe in place to be watertight. 

3. Reconstruct manhole channel and shelf to suit new connection. 

4. All debris to be removed. 

C. Connections to Existing Sewer 

1. Build new manhole around existing sewer. 

2. Break out existing sewer inside of manhole and construct channel and shelf to 

suit new connection. 

PART 4 – ACCEPTANCE 

4.01 Acceptance Tests for Sewer Pipelines and Manholes 

A. Infiltration Testing 

1. General 

a. Maximum infiltration for each section of sewer pipe shall not exceed 25 

gal/mile/day/inch of pipe diameter. 

b. Infiltration, ex-filtration or air test may be used to prove compliance with 

infiltration requirement. 

c. Acceptance of air test or ex-filtration results will not preclude rejection of 

work if infiltration is measured and exceeds limitation. 

d. Maximum infiltration for each manhole shall not exceed 1 gallon per 

vertical foot per 24 hours. 

e. All tests to be witnessed by ECUA. 

2. Air Test 

a. Furnish all facilities required including: 

1) Necessary piping connections. 

2) Test pumping equipment. 

3) Pressure gauges or manometers. 

4) Bulkheads. 

5) All miscellaneous items required. 

b. Obtain approval from Engineer of equipment and methods proposed for 

use. 

c. Test pipe in sections determined by Contractor and approved by 

Engineer. 




d. Plug ends of line and cap or plug all connections to withstand internal test 

pressures. 

e. Introduce low-pressure air until internal air pressure is 4.0 psi greater 

than the average back pressure of ground water above the pipe. (Add 

0.43 psi for each vertical foot of ground water over the top of pipe.) 

f. Allow two minutes for air pressure to stabilize. 

g. Time required for pressure to decrease from 3.5 to 2.5 psi greater than 

average back pressure of any ground water above pipe shall not be less 

than time in following table for given diameters. 

Pipe Diameter 

(Inches) Minutes 

6 3.0 

8 4.0 

10 5.0 

12 5.5 

15 7.0 

18 8.5 

21 10.0 

24 11.5 

27 12.75 

30 14.0 

36 17.0 

h. Repeat test as necessary after all leaks and defects have been repaired. 

B. Ex-filtration Test 

1. Furnish all facilities required to plug pipe sections and fill with water to attain a 

minimum elevation of water in upstream manhole two feet higher than top of pipe 

in line being tested, or two feet above existing ground water in trench, whichever 

is higher elevation. 

2. Maintain water level in manhole at start of test period for one hour. 

3. Water added to maintain level (water lost) shall not exceed the following 

amounts: 

a. 8" pipe – 0.63 gallon per 100 feet. 

b. 10" pipe – 0.79 gallon per 100 feet. 

c. 12" pipe – 0.95 gallon per 100 feet. 

d. 15" pipe – 1.19 gallon per 100 feet. 

e. 18" pipe – 1.42 gallon per 100 feet. 

f. 21" pipe – 1.66 gallon per 100 feet. 

g. 24" pipe – 1.90 gallon per 100 feet. 

C. Infiltration Test 

Allowable leakage may be increased by 5% for each foot of head above water 

elevation indicated above. 

1. May be used in lieu of air test or ex-filtration test if contractor can prove that 

ground water conditions are such that crown of pipe is covered with not less than 

two feet of water at highest point in section being tested. The test head shall be 

maintained for not less than 24 hours before a weir measurement is made. 

2. Infiltration shall be measured with weir at manhole and shall not exceed amounts 

stated in paragraph B., Ex-filtration Test, number 3. 

3. Engineer will require ex-filtration or air test if contractor cannot prove to 

satisfaction of Engineer that ground water conditions are satisfactory. 








SECTION 02826 – ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Decorative aluminum fences. 

2. Swing gates. 

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For gates. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to 

other work. 

C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified. 

1. Provide Samples 12 inches in length for linear materials. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2/D1.2M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 


2.1 ALUMINUM 

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability 

properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form 

required. 

B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5. 

C. Tubing: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. 

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 6061-T6. 

E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 , Alloy 6061-T6. 

2.2 STEEL AND IRON 

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50, with G90 coating. 

B. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Ornamental Metal Fences & Gates 02826 – 1 



2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy 

welded. 

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be 

welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items. 

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in 

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 

3000 psi , 3-inch slump, and 1-inch maximum aggregate size. 

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying 

with ASTM C 1107 and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. 

2.4 DECORATIVE ALUMINUM FENCES 

A. Decorative Aluminum Fences: Fences made from aluminum extrusions. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

a. Alumi-Guard, Inc. 

b. Merchants Metals; a division of MMI Products, Inc. 

c. Royal Aluminum and Steel, Inc. 

B. Posts: Square extruded tubes. 

1. Line and End Posts: 3 by 3 inches with 0.125-inch wall thickness. 

2. Swing Gate Posts: 3 by 3 inches with 0.250-inch wall thickness. 

C. Rails: Extruded-aluminum channels, 1 by 1 inch , with 0.10-inch- thick top wall and 0.07-inch 

thick sidewalls. 

D. Pickets: Extruded-aluminum tubes, 5/8 inch square, with 0.050-inch wall thickness. 

1. Terminate tops of pickets at top rail for flush top. 

2. Picket Spacing: 4 inches clear, maximum. 

E. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard tamperproof, corrosion-resistant, color-coated fasteners 

matching fence components with resilient polymer washers. 

F. Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by fastening pickets to rails. 

1. Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for fastening to posts in field. 

2. Drill clips for fasteners before finishing. 

G. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, 

some undercutting and pinholes okay. 

H. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. 

2.5 SWING GATES 




A. Gate Configuration: Single leaf and Double leaf. 

B. Gate Frame Height: 60 inches. 

C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated. 

D. Aluminum Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square extruded-aluminum tubes 2 

by 2 inches with 0.25-inch wall thickness. 

E. Frame Corner Construction: assembled with corner fittings and 5/16-inch- diameter, adjustable 

truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or wider. 

F. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails. 

G. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each 

gate leaf more than 5 feet wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of 

gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from 

both sides of gate. 

H. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use. 

1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing. 

2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron. 

I. Exit Hardware: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, Type 1 (rim exit device), with push pad actuating bar, 

suitable for exterior use. Provide at 4-foot wide gate adjacent to covered walkway. 

1. Function: 04 - Entrance by trim when latch bolt is released by key or set in a retracted 

position by key. 

2. Mounting Channel: Bent-plate channel formed from 1/8-inch- thick, aluminum plate. 

Channel spans gate frame. Exit device is mounted on channel web, recessed between 

flanges, with flanges extending 1/8 inch beyond push pad surface. 

J. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #2 - completely sanded joint, 

some undercutting and pinholes okay. 

K. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip 

galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated. For hardware items, 

hot-dip galvanize to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

L. Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating. 

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 

2 mils . Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion 

coating, and applying and baking finish. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 






A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site 

clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting 


B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by 

Architect. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn 

sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments. 

3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION 

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails to posts. 

C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate 

holes to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 24 inches 

plus 3 inches for each foot or fraction of a foot that fence height exceeds 4 feet . 

D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil. 

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in 

position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. 

2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Protect 

aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter. 

a. Concealed Concrete: Top 2 inches below grade to allow covering with surface 

material. Slope top surface of concrete to drain water away from post. 

3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 6 inches of specified excavation depth, but 

not closer than 3 inches to bottom of concrete. 

4. Space posts uniformly at as indicated on the Drawings 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive 

deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire 

operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without 

forcing or binding. 

B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 





SECTION 02905 – TRANSPLANTING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes transplanting non-nursery-grown trees by tree spade or digging and boxing. 


A. General: See definitions in ANSI A300 (Part 6) and in ANSI Z60.1 pertaining to field-grown 

trees, except as otherwise defined in this Section. 

B. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk as measured by [a diameter tape] [or] [the average of the smallest 

and largest diameters] at a height 6 inches above the root flair for trees up to, and including, 4- 

inch size at this height; and as measured at a height of 12 inches above the root flair for trees 

larger than 4-inch size. 

C. Caliper (DBH): Diameter breast height; diameter of a trunk as measured by [a diameter tape] 

[or] [the average of the smallest and largest diameters] at a height 54 inches above the ground 

line[ for trees with caliper of 8 inches or greater as measured at a height of 12 inches above the 

root flair]. 

D. Root-Ball Depth: Measured from bottom of trunk flare to the bottom of root ball. 

E. Root-Ball Width: Measured horizontally across the root ball with an approximately circular form 

or the least dimension for non-round root balls, not necessarily centered on the tree trunk[, but 

within tolerance according to ANSI Z60.1]. 

F. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the tree's stem or trunk where the 

stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the 

stem or trunk. 

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review methods and procedures related to transplanting work include, but are not limited 

to, the following: 

a. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment, and 

unimpeded access needed to make progress and avoid delays. 

b. Tree and plant protection. 

c. Tree maintenance. 

d. Arborist's responsibilities. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Transplanting 02905 – 1 



1. Weed-control barriers. 

2. Proprietary Root-Ball-Stabilization Device: One unit. 

3. Slow-Release Watering Device: One unit of each size required. 

C. Pruning Schedule: Written schedule prepared by arborist detailing scope and extent of pruning 

each tree in preparation for and subsequent to transplanting. 

1. Species and size of plant. 

2. Location on site plan. Include unique identifier for each. 

3. Reason for pruning. 

4. Seasonal limitations on pruning. 

5. Preparatory Pruning: Time schedule and description of preparatory pruning to be 

performed. 

a. Indicate time in months preceding the extraction of the tree. 

b. Indicate diameter of root ball and depth of root pruning for each tree. 

6. Description of root and crown pruning during and subsequent to transplanting. 

7. Description of maintenance following pruning. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified tree-service firm and arborist. 

B. Certification: From arborist, certifying that transplanted trees have been protected during 

construction and that trees were promptly and properly treated and repaired when damaged. 

C. Maintenance Recommendations: From arborist, recommended procedures to be established 

by Owner for care and protection of trees after completing the Work. 

1. Submit before completing the Work. 

D. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees indicated to be transplanted, which 

establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by 

construction activities. 

1. Use sufficiently detailed color photographs or video recordings. Color shall accurately 

depict hue condition of foliage and bark. 

2. Include drawings and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of 

each tree designated to be transplanted. 

E. Tree-Transplanting Program: Submit before work begins. 

F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 

G. Tree-maintenance reports. 


A. Tree-Service Firm Qualifications: An experienced landscaping contractor or tree-moving firm 

that has successfully completed transplanting work similar to that required for this Project and 

that will assign an experienced, qualified arborist to Project site during execution of the Work. 

1. Arborist Qualifications: Licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located. 

B. Tree-Transplanting Program: Prepare a written plan by arborist for transplanting trees for the 

whole Project, including each phase or process, tree maintenance, and protection of 




surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail the materials, methods, and 

equipment to be used for each phase of the transplanting work. 

1. Include transplanting times appropriate for each species at the Project location unless 

otherwise indicated on Drawings or directed by arborist. 

2. Include a transplanting schedule for each species to be transplanted, coordinated with 

the Project schedule. 

3. Include site plans clearly marked to show tree-moving routes from extraction to planting 

locations. Indicate proposed equipment, weight, and turning radii. 

4. Show details of temporary protective barriers where needed. 

5. Include diagrams showing clearances to utility lines and other encumbrances along route. 

6. Include care and maintenance provisions and eventual removal of tree stabilization. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing 

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance 

with state and federal laws if applicable. 

B. Bulk Materials: 

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, 

or on existing turf areas or trees. 

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, 

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, 

water conveyance systems, or walkways. 

3. Accompany each delivery with appropriate certificates. 

C. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, 

and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees in such a manner as to 

destroy their natural shape. 

D. Completely cover foliage when transporting trees while they are in foliage. 

E. Handle trees by root ball. Do not drop trees. 

F. Move trees after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If 

planting is delayed more than six hours after moving, set trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, 

filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify final grade elevations and final locations of trees and construction 

contiguous with trees by field measurements before proceeding with transplanting work. 

Perform transplanting only after finish grades are established. 

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with transplanting only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be 

obtained. Do not transplant during excessively wet or frozen conditions. Apply products during 

favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty 

requirements. 

C. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Perform transplanting before planting turf areas unless 

otherwise indicated. 




1. When transplanting after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair 

damage caused by transplanting operations. 

D. Coordination with Planting Beds: Perform transplanting before planting bedded areas unless 


1. When transplanting after planting bedded areas, protect bedding plants, and promptly 

repair damage caused by transplanting operations. 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. Installer's Special Warranty: Tree-service firm agrees to repair or replace trees and related 

materials that fail within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of 

adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond 

Contractor's control. 

b. Death and unsatisfactory growth is defined as more than 25 percent dead or in an 

unhealthy condition or failure to meet general performance requirements at end of 

warranty period. 

c. Structural failures including trees falling or blowing over. 

d. Faulty performance of materials and devices related to tree plantings including tree 

stabilization. 

2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: 

a. Trees: 12 months. 

3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: 

a. Remove dead trees and trees with unsatisfactory growth at end of warranty period; 

replace when directed. 

b. A limit of one replacement of each tree will be required except for losses or 

replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. 

c. Replace materials and devices related to tree plantings. 

d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for 

replaced trees. 

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide tree maintenance by skilled employees of tree-service firm 

and as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after preparatory pruning and 

continue until plantings are healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance 

period below. 

1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From tree-service firm to Owner, in the form of a standard 

yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is 

concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for 

future renewal options. 


2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 




A. General Performance: Transplanted trees shall be healthy and resume vigorous growth within 

one year of transplanting without dieback due to defective extracting, handling, planting, 

maintenance, or other defects in the Work. 

2.2 PLANTING MATERIALS 

A. Backfill Soil: Excavated soil mixed with planting soil of suitable moisture content and granular 

texture for placing and compacting in planting pit around tree, and free of stones, roots, plants, 

sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, 

cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 

1. Mixture: Well-blended mix of two parts excavated soil to one part planting soil. 



A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and 

sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from 

construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross transplanting 

areas. 

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by arborist, listing conditions detrimental to 

transplanting work and tree protection and health. 

C. Proceed with transplanting only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, other facilities, turf areas, and other plants 

and planting areas from damage caused by transplanting operations. 

B. Locate and clearly identify trees for transplanting. Flag each tree at 54 inches above the 

ground. 

C. Lay out individual transplant locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline 

areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Architect's acceptance of layout before 

transplanting. Make minor adjustments as required. 

D. Apply antidesiccant to trees uniformly, using power spray to provide an adequate film over 

trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during extracting, 

handling, and transportation. 

1. If deciduous trees are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant before extracting and 

again two weeks after transplanting. 

E. Wrap trees with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from 

wind and other damage during extracting, handling, and transporting. 

3.3 PREPARATORY PRUNING 

A. Root Pruning: Perform preparatory root pruning under direction of arborist as far in advance of 

extracting each tree as the Project Schedule allows. 




1. Dig exploratory pits or trench by hand around perimeter of tree at indicated root-ball width 

to determine locations of main lateral roots. 

2. Dig trench by hand or with tree spade around perimeter of tree at indicated root-ball width 

to the depth of the root system. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, 

tears, or pulls roots. 

3. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as 

required to bend and redirect them without breaking. 

4. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil to expose roots with minimal damage to root 

system. 

5. Cut exposed roots manually with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or 

slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 

6. Do not paint or apply sealants on cut root ends. 

7. Backfill trench with excavated soil. 

B. Crown Pruning (Tip Pruning): 

1. Do not perform preparatory crown pruning (tip pruning). 

2. Perform preparatory crown pruning as directed by arborist. Follow procedures as 

specified in "Crown Pruning" Article. 

3.4 EXCAVATION AND PLANTING EQUIPMENT 

A. Tree Spade: Track-mounted mechanized tree mover; sized according to manufacturer's size 

recommendation for each tree being transplanted. 

3.5 EXCAVATING PLANTING PITS 

A. General: Excavate under supervision of the arborist. 

1. Excavate planting pits or trenches with sides sloping. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving 

center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from 

center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil. 

Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 

2. Excavate approximately two times as wide as root ball. 

3. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected until replanting trees. 

B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil. 

C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees are 

encountered in excavations. 

1. Hardpan Layer: Drill 6-inch- diameter holes, 24 inches apart, into free-draining strata or 

to a depth of 10 feet , whichever is less, and backfill with free-draining material. 

D. Seepage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage into treeplanting 

pits. 

E. Drainage: Fill planting pit or trench with [6 inches ] of water and time the 

infiltration rate of the soil. If the drainage rate is less than [0.25 inch ] per 

hour, notify Architect to determine need for subsurface drainage. 

F. Saline or Sodic Soils: Completely fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before 

positioning trees. 

3.6 EXTRACTING TREES 




A. General: Extract trees under supervision of the arborist. 

B. Orientation Marking: Mark the north side of each tree with non-permanent paint before 

extracting. 

C. Digging: 

1. Dig and clear a pit by hand or with tree spade to the depth of the root system. Do not use 

a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. 

2. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil to expose roots with minimal damage to root 

system. 

3. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as 

required to bend and redirect them without breaking. 

4. Cut exposed roots manually with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or 

slant the cuts. Do not paint or apply sealants on cut root ends. 

5. Construct box tight against root system sides and bottom as pit is dug. Brace and 

support box to prevent breaking of root ball. 

6. Temporarily support and protect exposed roots from damage until they are permanently 

redirected and covered with soil. Cover roots with burlap and keep them moist until 

planted. 

D. Extracting with Tree Spade: Use the same tree spade to extract the tree as will be used to 

transport and plant the tree. 

1. Do not use tree spade to move trees larger than the manufacturer's maximum size 

recommendation for the tree spade being used. 

2. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a 

solid ball of earth. 

3.7 PLANTING 

A. Planting Standard: Perform planting according to ANSI A300 (Part 6) unless otherwise 

indicated. 

B. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball. If root flare is not visible, 

remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the 

trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size 

requirements. 

C. Ensure that root flare is visible after planting. 

D. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. Do not paint or apply sealants on cut 

root ends. 

E. Orientation: Position the tree so that its north side, marked before extracting, is facing north in 

its new location. 

1. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air 

pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before 

placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 

2. Redirect exposed root ends downward in backfill areas where possible. Hand-expose 

roots as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately 

adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots 

approximately 3 inches back from new construction and as required for root pruning. 

3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in 

amounts recommended by arborist. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 

mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 




4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. 

F. Planting with Tree Spade: Use the same tree spade for planting as was used to extract and 

transport the tree. Do not use tree spade for trees larger than the manufacturer's maximum 

size recommendation for the tree spade being used. 

G. Slopes: When planting on slopes, set the tree so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with 

the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the 

surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 

3.8 CROWN PRUNING 

A. Prune branches as directed by arborist. 

1. Prune to remove only injured, broken, dying, or dead branches. Do not prune for shape. 

2. Do not remove or reduce living branches to compensate for root loss caused by cutting 

root system or to improve natural tree form. 

3. Pruning Standards: Perform pruning according to ANSI A300 (Part 1). 

B. Unless otherwise directed by arborist and acceptable to Architect, do not cut tree leaders. 

C. Cut branches with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop. 

D. Do not paint or apply sealants to wounds. 

E. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by arborist. 

3.9 TREE STABILIZATION 

A. Trunk Stabilization by Upright Staking and Tying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless 

otherwise indicated on Drawings or directed by arborist. 

1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a 

minimum of three stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom 

of backfilled excavation and to extend one-third of trunk height above grade. Set stakes 

vertical and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 

2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough 

slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. 

3. Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie 

webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of 

tree. 

B. Trunk Stabilization by Staking and Guying: Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise 

indicated on Drawings or directed by arborist. 

1. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method: Install no fewer than three guys spaced 

equally around tree. 

a. Securely attach guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. Adjust spacing to 

avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire 

and tighten securely. 

b. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at 

least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten 

securely. 




C. Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new 

planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or directed by arborist. 

3.10 TREE MAINTENANCE 

A. Perform tree maintenance as recommended by arborist. Maintain arborist observation of 

transplanting work. 

B. Maintain trees by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting 

saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical 

position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. 

Treat as required to keep trees free of insects and disease. 

C. Fill areas of soil subsidence with backfill soil. Replenish mulch materials damaged or lost in 

areas of subsidence. 

D. Apply treatments as required to keep tree materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and 

pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to 

minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such 

as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents. 

E. Pesticide Application: Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control 

agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written instructions. 

Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify 

Owner before each application is performed. 

1. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply in accordance with 

manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply to seeded areas. 

2. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to 

treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

3.11 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT 

A. General: Repair or replace transplanted trees and other plants indicated to remain or be 

relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner recommended by the 

arborist and approved by Architect. 

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 

2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours according to 

arborist's written instructions. 

3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, 

as determined by Architect. 

B. Remove and replace trees that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy 

condition before the end of the corrections period or are damaged during construction 

operations that Architect determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern. 

3.12 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION 




A. During transplanting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly 

condition. 

B. Protect trees from damage due to transplanting operations and operations of other contractors 

and trades. Maintain protection during transplanting and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or 

replace damaged plantings. 

C. After planting and before Substantial Completion, remove tags, markings, tie tape, labels, wire, 

burlap, and other debris from transplanted trees, planting areas, and Project site. 

3.13 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS 

A. Except for materials indicated to be recycled, remove surplus soil, excess excavated material, 

waste materials, displaced plants, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's 

property. 

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile 

or spread soil as directed by Architect. 

1. Except for materials indicated to be retained on Owner's property or recycled, remove 

excess excavated material, waste materials, displaced plants, trash, and debris, and 

legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 





SECTION 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Description of scope and intent: 

1. Contractor to provide all material, labor, and tools required to complete the installation of 

specified system. 

2. Any omission of reference to items required to complete the full operational and functional 

system specified in the section does not relieve the contractor of the obligation to provide 

same. 

3. To provide installation of all items, including delivery, dispersing to the proper locations within 

the building, and affixing in place. 

4. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in their craft who will perform their work 

in a professional manner and will leave the premises safe, orderly and clean. 

5. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section 

6. Contractor is responsible for coordination of work included in this specification with all other 

specification sections related to furnishing of all materials, labor, permits, fees and services 

necessary for completion of work in this section. 


1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 

2. Formwork accessories. 

3. Form stripping. 

4. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. 

5. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete for the following: 

a. Foundations, footings. 

b. Slabs on grade. 

c. Supported slabs. 

d. Foundation walls. 

e. Building frame members. 

f. Equipment pads and bases. 

g. Reinforced masonry. 

6. Concrete curing. 

7. Shoring and Reshoring. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Special concrete finishes: Elsewhere in Division 3. 

2. Joint sealers: Division 7. 

1.2 REFERENCES 

Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the Contract Documents or of 

governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent. All referenced standards refer to the 

edition in force at the time these plans and specifications are issued. 

A. AASHTO M 182 -- Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf; American 

Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. 

B. ACI 117 -- Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American Concrete 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Cast In Place Concrete 03300 – 1 



Institute. 

C. ACI 201.2R -- Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute. 

D. ACI 207.1R – Mass Concrete, American Concrete Institute 

E. ACI 207.2R – Effect of Restraint, Volume Change, and Reinforcement on Cracking of Mass 

Concrete, American Concrete Institute 

F. ACI 207.4R – Cooling and Insulating Systems for Mass Concrete 

G. ACI 211.1 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass 

Concrete; American Concrete Institute. 

H. ACI 224R – Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures, American Concrete Institute 

I. ACI 232.1R – Use of Raw or Processed Natural Pozzolans in Concrete, American Concrete Institute 

J. ACI 232.2R – Use of Fly Ash in Concrete, American Concrete Institute 

K. ACI 301 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute. 

L. ACI 302.1R -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute. 

M. ACI 304R -- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete 

Institute. 

N. ACI 305R -- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute. 

O. ACI 306R -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute. 

P. ACI 308R – Guide to Curing Concrete, American Concrete Institute 

Q. ACI 309R – Guide to Consolidation of Concrete, American Concrete Institute 

R. ACI 318 -- Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete Institute. 

S. ACI 350/350R – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and 

Commentary, American Concrete Institute 

T. ACI SP-66 -- ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute. 

U. ASTM A 185 -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete 

Reinforcement. 

V. ASTM A 615 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 

Reinforcement. 

W. ASTM C 31 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 

X. ASTM C 33 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 

Y. ASTM C 39 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 

Z. ASTM C 42 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of 

Concrete. 




AA. 

BB. 

CC. 

DD. 

EE. 

FF. 

GG. 

HH. 

II. 

JJ. 

KK. 

LL. 

MM. 

NN. 

OO. 

PP. 

QQ. 

RR. 

SS. 

TT. 

ASTM C 94 -- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 

ASTM C 143 -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 

ASTM C 150 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 

ASTM C 171 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 

ASTM C 172 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 

ASTM C 173 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric 

Method. 

ASTM C 231 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure 

Method. 

ASTM C 260 -- Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 

ASTM C 494 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 

ASTM C 618 -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for 

Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 

ASTM C 685 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous 

Mixing. 

ASTM C 881 -- Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 

ASTM C 1059 -- Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. 

ASTM C 1107 -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 

ASTM D 1751 -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving 

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 

ASTM D 1752 -- Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint 

Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 

ASTM E 154 -- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth 

under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 

ASTM E 329 -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of 

Materials Used in Construction. 

CRSI -- Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 

FBC, Building -- Florida Building Code, Building 


A. Unexposed Finish: A general-use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed 

concrete concealed from view after completion of construction. 

B. Exposed Finish: A general-use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view except 

those indicated to receive textured finish, and including surfaces which may receive a paint coating 

(if any). 




C. Textured Finish: An exposed architectural finish achieved by means of form liners or special 

construction of the formwork. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 

1. Formwork accessories. 

2. Form liners. 

3. Concrete admixtures. 

4. Grout. 

5. Bonding compound. 

6. Epoxy bonding system. 

B. Aggregates: Submit test reports showing compliance with specified quality and gradation. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following: 

1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, 

arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices. 

a. Show construction joints. 

b. Include details of reinforcement at openings through concrete structures. 

c. Include elevations of reinforcement in walls. 

d. Show stirrup spacing. 

e. Concrete embedments. 

2. Shoring and reshoring for elevated concrete placement shall include: 

a. Location, size, and type of all shoring members. 

b. Location, size, and type of all reshoring members. 

c. Location, size, and type of all mud sills, blocking, temporary lateral bracing and other 

accessories necessary to safely support and brace the structure during construction. 

d. Prepare shop drawings under seal of professional structural engineer registered in the 

state in which the project is located. 

D. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance 

requirements specified: 

1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations begin. 

Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been selected. 

a. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results, and 

graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr). 

b. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete. 

c. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required. 

2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified. 

3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all 

materials furnished under this section conform to specifications. 

4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that chloride 

content complies with specified requirements. 

5. Certifications: Submit mill test certificates for all reinforcing steel furnished under this 

section, showing physical and chemical analysis. 

6. Placement schedule: Submit concrete placement schedule prior to start of any concrete 

placement operations. Include location of all joints indicated on drawings, plus anticipated 

construction joints. 

7. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 

8. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures. 

9. Mass Concrete: Submit description of planned protective measures. 





A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the 

contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent: 

1. ACI 350/350R 

2. ACI 301. 

3. ACI 318. 

4. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 

B. Testing Agency Services: 

1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the engineer 

to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance. 

a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements. 

C. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project. 


A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, 

and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings. 

1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation of 

dirt or rust. 

B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weather tight location. Maintain accurate records of shipment 

and use. 

C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or other 

aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile. 

D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation. 


A. Cold-Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306. 

1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the engineer of planned protective 

measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures, and insulating 

blankets. 

B. Hot-Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R. 


measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement 

during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing, shading, and windbreaks. 

C. Mass Concrete: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 207.1R. 


measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during mixing, placement, 

curing, forms, height of lifts (max 10ft), and monitoring. 


2.1 FORMWORK 




A. Facing Materials: 

1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound 

concrete. 

2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain-free final 

appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength to 

resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances, and as 

follows: 

a. Custom form liner: see Architectural drawings. 

3. Textured finish concrete: Materials or linings as indicated on the drawings, or as required to 

match architect's control sample. 

B. Formwork Accessories: 

1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or prevent 

subsequent application of concrete coatings. 

2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or other 

type which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from surface of concrete when forms 

are removed, leaving not more than a 1-inch-diameter hole in concrete surface. 

3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible. 

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS 

A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise 

indicated: 

1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 

B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold-drawn steel, plain. 

C. Reinforcing Accessories: 

1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier. 

2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". 

a. Class 1 (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to weather. 

b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed surfaces 

which will be exposed to view but not to weather. 

c. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of 

concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be cast 

against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted. 

d. Plastic chairs shall not be used. 

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows: 

1. Type I, except where other type is specifically required below or noted elsewhere in the 

Contract Documents. 

a. Type II shall be used for moderate sulfate resistance, retaining walls and exposed 

concrete not included in Type V below and when hot weather concreting is required. 

b. Type III shall be used for high early strength and when cold weather concreting is 

required. 

c. Type IV shall be used for low heat of hydration when mass concreting is required. 

d. Type V shall be used for high sulfate resistance and in all environmental (includes all 

wet well surfaces) and all liquid retaining structures. 




B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F. 

C. Water: Potable. 

D. Aggregates: 

1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33. 

a. Class 5M. 

b. Gradation as specified below under mix design. 

E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride ions by 

weight of cement are prohibited. 

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with other mix 

components. 

1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract 

documents, will be among those considered acceptable: 

a. "Air Mix"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

b. "Sika-Aer"; Sika Corporation. 

c. "Micro-Air"; Master Builders, Inc. 

d. "Darex AEA"; W. R. Grace & Co. 

G. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 



a. "Pozzolith Retarder"; Master Builders, Inc. 

b. "Eucon Retarder 75"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

c. "Daratard-17"; W. R. Grace & Co. 

d. "PSI-R Plus"; Cormix Construction Chemicals. 

e. "Plastiment"; Sika Corporation. 

f. "Protard"; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). 

H. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E. 



a. "Accelguard 80"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

b. "Pozzutec 20"; Master Builders, Inc. 

c. "Gilco Accelerator"; Cormix Construction Chemicals. 

I. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G. 



a. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem-100"; W. R. Grace & Co. 

b. "PSP Superplasticizer"; Master Builders, Inc. (former Conchem product). 

c. "Sikament 300"; Sika Corporation. 

d. "Eucon 37"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

e. "PSI Super"; Cormix Construction Chemicals. 

f. "Rheobuild"; Master Builders, Inc. 

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES 




A. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, reference: 

1. Provide as specified under Section 07265, Underslab Vapor Protection. 

B. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107. 

1. Type: Provide nonmetallic type only. 



a. Nonmetallic type: 

(1) "Masterflow 928"; Master Builders, Inc. 

(2) "Sonogrout 14k"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 

(3) "Euco N-S Grout"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

(4) "Supreme"; Cormix Construction Chemicals. 

(5) "Five Star Grout"; Five Star Products, Inc. 

C. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth. 

D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows: 

1. Curing paper. 

2. Polyethylene film. 

3. White burlap-polyethylene sheeting. 

E. Bonding Compound: Non-redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type II. 



a. "Everbond"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 

b. "Flex-Con"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

F. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project conditions. 



a. "Concresive LPL"; Master Builders, Inc. 

b. "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod"; Sika Corporation. 

c. "Euco #452 Epoxy System"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

G. Expansion Joint Filler: 

1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751. 

2. Sponge rubber type: ASTM D 1752, Type I. 

3. Cork type: ASTM D 1752, Type II. 

4. Self-expanding cork type: ASTM D 1752, Type III. 

H. Waterstops: Made of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and of subzero grade, Plastigrip, Type W-6 as 

manufactured by Progress Unlimited, Inc. or approved equivalent. 

1. Minimum 4”x3/16” or as specified on the drawings. 

2. Produced from a compound, the base resin of which shall be virgin PVC. 

3. Minimum Properties: 

a. 2000 psi minimum tensile strength, ASTM D412-51T 

b. 350% minimum elongation, ASTM D412-51T 

c. -35 degrees F minimum low temperature brittleness, ASTM D746-57T 

d. 65-75 shore ‘A’ durometer hardness, ASTM D676-59T 

e. 0.15 maximum water absorption, ASTM D570-59T 

4. Field Splicing: 




a. Butt splices shall be fused welded using a thermostatically controlled Teflon PVC 

Waterstop iron at the Manufacturer’s recommended temperature 

b. Lapping, gluing or use of adhesives shall not be permitted. 

c. Provide factory made waterstop fabrications for all changes of directions, 

intersections, and transitions leaving only butt joint splicing for the field. 

5. Center waterstop in the joint and secure in correct position. 

6. Use ribbed center bulb for all moving joints. Use dumbbell for all non movement joints. 

7. Always place the center bulb in the center of the expansion joint. Do not embed the center 

bulb in concrete. 

8. Vibrate concrete around waterstops thoroughly to prevent honeycombing and to ensure 

contact between concrete and waterstop. 

2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN 

A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the engineer. 

B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1. 

C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on the 

basis of trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion mixes accordingly. Employ an 

independent testing agency acceptable to the engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix 

design. 

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mix to produce an average strength at 28 day as indicated on the 

drawings. 

E. Fly Ash: 

1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the Portland cement with fly ash up to a 

maximum of 25 percent by weight of cement plus fly ash. 

F. Admixtures: 

1. Air-entraining admixture: Add at rate to achieve specified air content. 

a. Do not use in slabs-on-grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer of 

topping recommends use over air-entrained concrete. 

2. Water-reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed at 

ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F. 

3. Water-reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed 

at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. 

4. High-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement and 

workability. 

5. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved. 

G. Design mix to meet or exceed each requirement specified. Where more than one criterion is 

specified, the most stringent shall apply. For example, a minimum cement content or maximum 

water-cement ratio might result in strengths greater than the minimum specified; likewise, a greater 

cement content or lower water-cement ratio may be required in order to achieve the required 

strength. 

1. Specified compressive strength f'(c) (ASTM C 39): As noted 

2. Maximum water-cement ratio by weight: 

a. 0.4 for below grade concrete exposed to earth, concrete located in wet wells, and 

concrete toppings subject to vehicular traffic 

b. 0.45 for all other concrete 

3. Maximum slump: As recommended in ACI 211.1. 

4. Gradation of coarse aggregate: ASTM C 33 standard gradation with maximum nominal size 




of 3/4 inches. 

5. Total air content (ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231): 5 percent. 

6. Maximum water soluble chloride ion content shall not exceed percent by weight of cement by 

0.10. 

H. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may submit 

for engineer's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when circumstances 

such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur. Include laboratory 

test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests. 

2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD 

A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above that specified will be permitted for 1 batch in 5 

consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used, provided 

proper placing and consolidation is obtained. 

1. If slump upon arrival at the site is lower than 1 inch below the value specified, one addition of 

water in accordance with ASTM C 94 will be permitted to bring slump within tolerance, 

provided that: 

a. A positive means is available to measure the amount of water added at the site. 

b. The specified (or approved) maximum water-cement ratio is not exceeded. 

c. Not more than 45 minutes have elapsed since batching. 

B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of that specified will be allowed for 

field measurements. 

C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances. 

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. On-Site Equipment: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer, in 

compliance with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch minimum of 1-1/2 minutes and maximum of 5 

minutes before discharging concrete. Clean thoroughly at end of day and before changing concrete 

type. 

B. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of ASTM C 

94. 

1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 75 

minutes. 

2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 


3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION 

A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The 

contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its timely 

removal. 

B. Earth Forms: Hand-trim bottoms and sides of earth forms to profiles indicated on the drawings. 

Remove loose dirt before placing concrete. 

C. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to concrete 




surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until concrete is 

adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits. 

D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by contract 

documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for necessary 

openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required. 

1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete. 

a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions. 

2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and corners at exposed locations, unless specifically 

indicated otherwise on the drawings. 

3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and 

located accurately. Securely support items built into forms; provide additional bracing at 

openings and discontinuities in formwork. 

4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most 

inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight-fitting panels designed to minimize 

appearance of joints in finished concrete work. 

E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117, unless 

more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings. 

F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory-applied nonabsorptive liner or 

field-applied form coating. If field-applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and recondition 

formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is unacceptable. 

3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION 

A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material as recommended by 

manufacturer.. 

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified. 

B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which 

adversely affect bond with concrete. 

C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for 

protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Provide 

Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do not field-bend 

partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved. 

1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with or 

penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not permitted. 

2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than one 

full mesh. Offset end laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice laps with 

tie wire. 

D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If construction 

joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will have least impact on 

appearance, as acceptable to the engineer. 




1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep. 

2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints, 

unless details specifically indicate otherwise. 

3. Provide waterstop in all joints below grade exposed to earth, wet wells, and all other elements 

exposed to water, sludge, etc. 

B. Isolation Joints: Construct isolation joints in slabs poured on grade at points of contact with vertical 

components, such as foundation walls and column pedestals. Install expansion joint filler to full 

concrete depth. Recess top edge of filler 1/8 inch where joints are unsealed. 

C. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints where indicated. Install expansion joint filler to full 

depth of concrete. Recess edge of filler to depth indicated to receive joint sealant (and backer rod 

where necessary) specified in Division 7. 

D. Control Joints: Construct contraction joints in slabs poured on grade to form panels of sizes 

indicated on drawings, but not more than 20 feet apart in either direction. 

1. Saw cuts: Form control joints by means of saw cuts one-fourth the depth of the slab, 

performed as soon as possible after slab finishing without dislodging aggregate. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or supported 

by cast-in-place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from suppliers of 

items to be embedded. 

1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to 

achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces. 

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during 

inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete. 

B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items to 

be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed. 

1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form coatings 

are not used. 

C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows: 

1. Concreting should be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and 

flows readily into spaces between reinforcement. 

2. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints. 

3. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be 

placed in a continuous operation. 

4. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation. 

5. Concrete shall be worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of 

forms. 

6. The following shall be prohibited from use: 

a. Partially hardened concrete. 

b. Contaminated concrete. 

c. Re-tempered concrete. 

d. Re-mixed concrete after initial set has occurred. 

D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but in no 




event greater than 24 inches. 

1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly placed 

concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed concrete to 

ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together. 

2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of coarse 

aggregates. 

3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally. 

E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned 

construction joints. 

1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items, using 

internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable to 

engineer. 

2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull 

floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until finishing 

operations are commenced. 

F. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures are 

expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before 

concrete has cured. 

1. Do not use frozen or ice-laden materials. 

2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates. 

G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient temperature 

before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or when 

combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that the rate of 

evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per square foot per 

hour. 

1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions. 

2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection of 

poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation. 

3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing concrete. 

H. Mass Concrete Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 207.1R when any volume of 

concrete with dimensions large enough to require that measures be taken to cope with generation of 

heat from hydration of the cement and attendant volume change to minimize cracking. 

1. When the minimum dimension of the concrete exceeds 36 inches and the ratio of volume of 

concrete to the surface area is greater than 12 inches, provide for mass concrete. 

2. Lifts shall not exceed 10ft. 

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 

1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete, cutting 

perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area 

immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar. 

2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete in 

materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white and 

normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly and 

strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 

B. Textured Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas to match pattern created by form 




construction or form liners. 

C. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins or 

other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height. 

D. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections completely 

removed and smoothed. 

1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces no later than 24 hours after form removal. 

a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other 

abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved. 

b. Do not apply separate grout mixture. 

2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls, 

horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed 

surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless 

otherwise specifically indicated. 

3.8 FINISHING SLABS 

A. Finishing Operations - General: 

1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement. 

2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R. 

3. Screeding: Strike off to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify 

conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic. 

4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water appears 

to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and correct surface 

tolerances. 

5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has disappeared 

and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch indentation or weight of 

power floats without damaging flatness. 

6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete, to 

consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and correct 

surface tolerances. 

B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the architect before application. 

1. Apply final finishes in the locations indicated on the drawings. 

C. Float Finish: As specified above. 

D. Broomed Float Finish: After floating and when water sheen has practically disappeared, apply 

uniform transverse corrugations approximately 1/16 inch deep, without tearing surface. 

E. Slab Surface Tolerances: 

1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains. 

2. Floated finishes: Depressions between high spots shall not exceed 5/16 inch under a 10-foot 

straightedge. 

F. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerance 

specified. Repair defects as follows: 

1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days. 

2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low areas 

and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent concrete. 

3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 

not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove 




defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply bonding 

compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent concrete. 

4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in 

diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry pack 

while bonding compound is still active: 

a. Dry-pack mix: One part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough 

water as required for handling and placing. 

b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and matching 

surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely. 

3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. General: 

1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold or hot 

temperatures until concrete has cured. 

2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service 

conditions and type of applied finish in each case. 

B. Curing Period: 

1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes. 

2. Not less than 4 days for high early strength concrete using Type III cement. 

C. Curing Temperature: 

1. Concrete shall be maintained above 50 o F and in moist condition during the entire curing 

period. 

D. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing 

period. 

1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun. 

2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of the 

applicable methods specified. 

E. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry. 

2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the following: 

a. Water ponding. 

b. Water-saturated sand. 

c. Water-fog spray. 

d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints. 

3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has 

dried. 

a. Moisture-retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal with 

waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with same 

tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete surface. Secure 

to avoid displacement. 

(1) Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab. 

(2) Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view when in 

service. 

4. Continue final curing to end of curing period. 

F. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period. 




G. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air in 

excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective 

measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface. 

3.10 SHORES AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Comply with recommendations of ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory 

construction. 

B. Low-Rise Construction: Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures 4 stories or less in height. 

C. Reshoring: Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence, to avoid damage to partly cured 

concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support work without excessive stress or 

deflection. 

D. Provide as a package, shoring and reshoring drawings prepared by or under the direct supervision 

of a specialty engineer registered in the State the project is located. 

3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Non-Load-Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be 

damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be removed 

after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing and protection 

operations after form removal. 

B. Load-Bearing Formwork: Do not remove shoring and forms supporting weight of concrete, such as 

beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, until concrete has attained at least the 

specified compressive strength f'(c) and until the contractor has determined that the actual 

compressive strength attained is adequate to support the weight of the concrete and superimposed 

loads. 

C. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, and longer if required, until 

concrete has attained at least the specified compressive strength f'(c) and until the contractor has 

determined that the actual compressive strength attained is adequate to support the weight of the 

concrete and superimposed loads. 

D. Keep supports in place until heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. 

E. Test field-cured specimens to determine potential compressive strength of concrete for specific 

locations. 

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 

A. Fill-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades after 

such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing construction, using same mix 

and curing methods. 

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as 

indicated on drawings. Set anchor bolts at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates 

of equipment manufacturer. 

1. Grout base plates and foundations as indicated with nonshrink grout. 

2. Use nonmetallic grout for exposed conditions, unless otherwise indicated. 




C. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry where indicated on drawings 

and as scheduled. 

3.13 CONCRETE REPAIRS 

A. General: Repairs due to poor workmanship shall be made by the contractor at the contractor’s 

expense and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to repair procedure being implicated. 

B. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application. 

C. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the engineer for method and procedure, using 

epoxy bonding systems. The engineer's approval is required for repair methods using materials 

other than those specified. 

3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Testing Agency Services: Employ, at Contractor’s expense, an independent testing agency 

acceptable to the owner and engineer to perform the specified tests and other services required for 

quality assurance as listed below. 

B. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. 

1. Take samples at point of discharge. 

2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein at 

point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same frequency 

at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used for acceptance 

of concrete. 

C. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency 

changes. 

1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94. 

D. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength test 

performed on air-entrained concrete. 

E. Concrete Temperature: 

1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below. 

2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above. 

3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made. 

F. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39. 

1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each 

compressive strength test required. 

2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as-delivered concrete: 

a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. 

b. Minimum frequency: 

(1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each 

concrete class. 

(2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each 

day's pour of each concrete class. 

(3) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength tests for 

a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from not less than 

5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than 5. 




(4) One set for the first and last truck for each day of concrete placement. 

c. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is required. 

d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless 

other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens. If 

one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the test 

result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such evidence, 

discard the test result and inform the engineer. 

e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required. 

f. Strength potential of as-delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of the 

following criteria are met: 

(1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by more 

than 500 psi. 

(2) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds specified 

compressive strength f'c. 

3. Testing for evaluation of field curing: 

a. Frequency: 1 field set of specimens per strength acceptance test. 

b. Mold specimens from same sample used for strength acceptance tests. Field-cure, 

and test at same age as for strength acceptance tests. 

c. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action when 

strength results for field-cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test values for 

companion laboratory-cured specimens. 

4. Removal of forms or supports: Mold additional specimens and field-cure with concrete 

represented; test to determine strength of concrete at proposed time of form or support 

removal. 

G. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to engineer and contractor within 24 

hours of test. 

1. Test reports shall contain the following data: 

a. Project name, number, and other identification. 

b. Name of concrete testing agency. 

c. Date and time of sampling. 

d. Concrete type and class. 

e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work. 

f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods. 

2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at 

engineer's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various 

locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for 

acceptance or rejection. 

3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in-place concrete as directed by the 

engineer when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete characteristics 

have not been attained. 

a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or 

tests as directed. 

b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable concrete 

has been verified. 





SECTION 03310 – CONCRETE SEALER 


1.1 SUMMARY 





system specified in the section does not relieve the contractor of the obligation to 

provide same. 

3. To provide installation of all items, including delivery, dispersing to the proper locations 

within the building, and affixing in place. 

4. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in their craft who will perform their 

work in a professional manner and will leave the premises safe, orderly and clean. 



6. Contractor is responsible for coordination of work included in this specification with all 

other specification sections related to furnishing of all materials, labor, permits, fees and 

services necessary for completion of work in this section. 

7. In the event of a conflict between the design drawings, referenced standards and these 

Specifications, the more stringent shall govern unless directed otherwise by the Architect. 

Contractor shall strictly adhere to OSHA requirements and local codes or those of any 

regulatory agency or body with jurisdiction 

B. This Section includes the following: 

1. Sealing for Concrete slabs with traffic. 


A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement (concrete) alone or in combination with one or more 

of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated 

blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. 

B. See Section 3300, “Concrete” for curing of slabs prior to application of concrete sealer. 


A. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs Project personnel qualified as ACIcertified 

Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete 

Flatwork Technician. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 

and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Concrete Sealer 03310 – 1 



1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing 

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing 

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency 

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - 

Grade II. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, product that may be 

incorporated into the Work is Sonneborn Acryseal HS by BASF, or equivalent product by 

an equivalent manufacturer. 

2. The use of other products, suitable for traffic, shall meet the requirements of this Section 

and of Section 3300, “Concrete” in regards to a clear, water-based urethane protective 

coating for use as a sealer for a horizontal concrete substrate with a coefficient of friction 

as required by Florida Building Code Building 2007. 


3.1 CONCRETE SEALING 

A. Prepare horizontal concrete surface to receive sealer as recommended by sealer manufacturer. 

1. All concrete surfaces shall be fully cured 

2. Prepare surface by mechanical means to provide a profile. 

3. Use abrasive shot blasting, sand blasting, or grinding with specialty equipment to prepare 

surface. Preclean by chemical means before using mechanical means. 

B. Apply two coats uniformly to clean dry floors and slabs indicated. 

C. Use a continuous operation for each coat, by soft bristle brush or a ¼ inch nap roller according 

to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not spray. 

D. Apply only when surface temperature is above 40 degrees F. 

E. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat 

process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair 

damage during curing period. 

F. Allow a minimum of 2 to 4 hours before applying second coat. 

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and 

inspections and to submit reports. Inspections shall take place whenever sealer is being 

applied to concrete. 




B. Inspections: 

1. Confirm sealing procedures and adherence to manufacturer’s recommendations and 

these specifications. 

2. Verify full coverage of areas to receive concrete sealer. 

3. Inspection results shall be reported in writing to Architect and Contractor within 8 hours of 

inspection. Reports shall contain Project identification name and number, date of 

inspection, name of inspector and inspecting agency, results of inspections. 

4. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

5. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not 

comply with the Contract Documents. 





SECTION 03521 - LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes cast-in-place cellular lightweight insulating concrete application to a prepared 

surfaced. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include mixing and application instructions 

for each type of lightweight insulating concrete. 

B. Design Mixtures: For each lightweight insulating concrete mix. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. 

B. Product Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer: 

1. Cementitious materials. 

2. Foaming agents. 

C. Material Test Reports: For lightweight aggregates, from a qualified testing agency, indicating 

compliance with requirements. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An Installer who employs and retains, throughout the project, 

supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 

1. A firm that has been evaluated by UL and found to comply with requirements of the 

National Roof Deck Contractors Association Lightweight Insulating Concrete Roof Deck 

Contractors (LWIC) Accreditation Program. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to 

ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 

C. FM Approvals Listing: Provide lightweight insulating concrete evaluated by FM Approvals as 

part of a roof assembly and listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible 

construction, as applicable. 


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk 

containers. 

B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage. 

C. Do not use cement that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Lightweight Insulating Concrete 03521 – 1 




A. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete unless ambient temperature is at least 40 deg F 

and rising. 

B. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete during rain or snow or on surfaces covered with 

standing water, snow, or ice. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. 

B. Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869. 

C. Water: Clean, potable. 

D. Joint Filler: ASTM C 612, Class 2, glass-fiber type; compressing to one-half thickness under 

load of 25 psi. 

E. Molded-Polystryrene Board: ASTM C 578, Type I, 0.90-lb/cu. Ft. minimum density. 

1. Provide units with keying slots of approximately 3 percent of the board’s gross surface area. 

2.2 DESIGN MIXTURES 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of lightweight insulating concrete by 

laboratory trial batch method or by field-test data method. For trial batch method, use a 

qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs. 

1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of portland cement by weight. 

B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or 

cementitious material permitted by ACI 301 . 

2.3 CELLULAR LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 

A. Produce cellular lightweight insulating concrete with the following minimum physical properties 

using cementitious materials, air-producing liquid-foaming agents, and the minimum amount of 

water necessary to produce a workable mix. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 

a. Celcore Incorporated. 

b. Elastizell Corporation of America. 

c. Siplast. 

2. As-Cast Unit Weight: 45 lb/cu. ft. at point of placement, when tested according to 

ASTM C 138/C 138M. 

3. Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 30 to 39 lb/cu. ft. , when tested according to ASTM C 495. 

4. Compressive Strength: Minimum 300 psi , when tested according to ASTM C 495. 





3.1 MIXING AND PLACING 

A. Mix and place lightweight insulating concrete according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mixture and loss of air content. 

B. Deposit and screed lightweight insulating concrete in a continuous operation until an entire 

panel or section of roof area is completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or 

floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated. 

C. Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface in condition to 

receive subsequent roofing system. 

D. Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than three days, 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. If ambient temperature falls below 32 deg F, protect lightweight insulating concrete from 

freezing and maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after placement. 

F. Perform pours in a minimum of two lifts allowing overnight drying to prevent water accumulation 

under LWC. Refer to manufacturer’s written recommendations. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample 

materials, perform field tests and inspections, and prepare test reports. 

B. Testing of samples of lightweight insulating concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172, except 

as modified by ASTM C 495, shall be performed according to the following requirements: 

1. Determine as-cast unit weight during each hour of placement, according to 

ASTM C 138/C 138M. 

2. Determine oven-dry unit weight and compressive strength according to ASTM C 495. 

Make a set of at least six molds for each day's placement, but not less than one set of 

molds for each 5000 sq. ft. of roof area. 

3. Perform additional tests when test results indicate that as-cast unit weight, oven-dry unit 

weight, compressive strength, or other requirements have not been met. 

3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK 

a. Retest cast-in-place lightweight insulating concrete for oven-dry unit weight and 

compressive strength. 

A. Refinish, or remove and replace, lightweight insulating concrete if surfaces are excessively 

scaled or too rough to receive roofing according to roofing membrane manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Remove and replace lightweight insulating concrete that fails to comply with requirements. 





SECTION 04230 – REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Contractor to provide all material, labor, and tools required to complete the installation 

of specified system. 

2. Any omission of reference to items required to complete the full operational and 

functional system specified in the section does not relieve the contractor of the 

obligation to provide same. 



4. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in their craft that will perform their 








Specifications, the more stringent shall govern unless directed otherwise by the 

Architect or Engineer. Contractor shall strictly adhere to OSHA requirements and local 

codes or those of any regulatory agency or body with jurisdiction. 

B. Section includes: 

1. Plain concrete masonry units (CMU) not exposed to view. 

2. Mortar and grout for plain CMU. 

3. Reinforcing steel, anchorage, and accessories for plain CMU. 

C. Refer to Division 3, Cast-in-Place Concrete for grout mix designs and testing and Division 4, 

Unit Masonry Assemblies for decorative CMU, face brick and related items for masonry 

exposed to view. 

1.2 REFERENCES: 


governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent. All referenced standards refer to 

the edition in force at the time these plans and specifications are issued. 

A. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 -- Specifications for Masonry Structures; American Concrete 

Institute, American Society of Civil Engineers, and The Masonry Society. 

B. ACI SP-66 -- ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute. 

C. ASTM A 82 -- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 

D. ASTM A 615 – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete 

Reinforcement 

E. ASTM A 951 – Masonry Joint Reinforcement 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Reinforced Unit Masonry 04230 – 1 



F. ASTM C 90 -- Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 

G. ASTM C 129 -- Standard Specification for Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 

H. ASTM C 140 -- Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 

I. ASTM C 144 -- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 

J. ASTM C 150 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 

K. ASTM C 270 -- Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 

L. ASTM C 404 -- Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 

M. ASTM C 476 -- Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 

N. ASTM C 780 -- Standard Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars 

for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 

O. ASTM D 226 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing 

and Waterproofing. 

P. ASTM E 119 -- Standard Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 

Q. NCMA TEK 8-2A -- Removal of Stains from Concrete Masonry. 


A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 


A. Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product 

specified; submit published data from manufacturers indicating compliance with 

requirements. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following: 

1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI 530 and 530.1 and ACI SP-66. Include bar 

schedules, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of reinforcement splices, and the 

following: 

a. Control Joints. 

b. Elevations of reinforcement in all load bearing and shear walls. 

c. Openings and details of reinforcement around openings. Coordinate sizes and 

locations with mechanical, electrical, and architectural drawings. 

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test 

results of the following for compliance with requirements indicated: 

1. Each type of masonry unit required. 

a. Include size-variation data, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified 

tolerances. 

b. Prism test results. 




c. Mortar properties. 

d. Grout compressive strength. 

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items 

complies with requirements: 

1. Each type of masonry unit required. 

a. Include size-variation data, verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified 

tolerances. 

2. Each cement product required for mortar and grout, including name of manufacturer, 

brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. 

3. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. 

4. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. 

5. Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory. 

F. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be 

used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 


A. At contractor’s expense, all reinforced masonry wall construction shall be inspected by an 

engineer licensed in the state the project is located or a certified independent testing agency 

with a minimum of 5 years experience for such inspections. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1093 to conduct the testing indicated, as 

documented according to ASTM E 548. 

C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture 

and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through 

one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. 

D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, 

including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious 

component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 

E. Pre-construction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform 

the following pre-construction testing: 

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, using Prism 

Test Method per ASTM E 447. 

2. Mortar properties shall be tested per ASTM C 780. 

F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to 

those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and 

inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as 


G. Sample Panel: Provide a sample panel a minimum 10 feet long and 8 feet tall prior to 

beginning masonry work for review by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. Acceptance of 

panel by all parties is required prior to beginning masonry work for the project. 


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an 




enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If 

units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 

B. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and 

emptying into dispensing silo. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on 

elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with 

weatherproof cover. 

C. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of 

dirt and oil. 


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with 

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when 

construction is not in progress. 

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in 

place. 

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, 

secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold 

cover in place. 

3. Secure weather protection in place with weights or by use of temporary fasteners. 

B. Loading Protection: Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and 

concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left 

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with 

such masonry. 

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings 

spread on ground and over wall surface. 

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted 

and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from 

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. 

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not lay masonry units when outside air temperature is 

below 40 degrees F. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or 

frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by 

frost or by freezing conditions. 

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 

deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days 

after completing cleaning. 

2. Grouted Construction: On any day when minimum anticipated nighttime temperature is 

32 degrees F or less, in addition to complying with general procedures above, heat 

grout materials to 90 degrees F to produce in-place grout temperature of not less than 

70 degrees F at end of work day. Retain protective blankets or enclose for not less 

than 48 hours. 

a. Period of protection may be reduced to 24 hours when Type III Portland cement is 

used for grout. 

3. Water: Do not heat water for mortar or grout to more than 160 degrees F. 




E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity 

conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial 

shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. 

1. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater 

than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set 

masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. 


2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, 

bonding, and other special conditions. 

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose. 

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: 

1. Weight Classification: light weight 

2. Provide Type II, non-moisture-controlled units. 

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: 

a. 4 inches nominal; 3-5/8 inches actual. 

b. 8 inches nominal; 7-5/8 inches actual. 

c. 12 inches nominal; 11-5/8 inches actual. 

4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Where units are to be left exposed, provide color and texture matching the range 

represented by Architect's sample. 

2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather 

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color 

indicated. 

B. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement complying with 

ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207. 

C. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate 

graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

F. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with 

concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 

G. Water: Potable. 

2.3 MASONRY REINFORCEMENT 




A. Reinforcing Bars: As specified in Division 3. 

B. Joint Reinforcement: 

1. Load Bearing and Shear Walls: Standard Ladder Type 

2. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 ga. 

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 ga. 

5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units at all 

corners and intersections. 

2.4 Non-Load Bearing Walls: Standard Truss Type 

1. Hot-dip galvanized, carbon -steel wire for both interior and exterior walls. 

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 ga. 

3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 ga. 

4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units at all 

corners and intersections. 

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL 

A. General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials 

that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. 

C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60, commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated by 

hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication. 

D. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366 cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet 

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153. 

E. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 

2.6 BENT WIRE TIES 

A. General: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. Z-shaped ties 

with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long may be used for 

masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal. 

1. Where coursing between wythes does not align, use adjustable ties composed of 2 

parts; 1 with pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches. 

B. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 

2.7 ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO CONCRETE 

A. General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist 

tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 

1. Anchor Section: Dovetail anchor section formed from 0.0528-inch- thick, steel sheet, 

galvanized after fabrication 

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, 

made from 0.25-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 




2.8 RIGID ANCHORS 

A. General: Fabricate from steel bars as follows: 

1. 1½ inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 28 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches. 

2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153. 

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Sealant and Backer Rod: As specified in Division 7. 

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, 

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 

C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning 

masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed 

from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

1. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars 

indicated. 

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS 

A. Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing 

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry 

without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for 

intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, 

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless 


1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 

2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of 

weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. 

B. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced ASTM Standards. 

C. Pre-blended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a pre-blended 

mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend 

ingredients before delivering to Project site. 

D. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 , Proportion Specification. 

1. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type S. 

2. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S. 

3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; 

for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other 

applications where another type is not indicated, use Type S. 

4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, use Type N. 

E. Grout: ASTM C476; provide consistency required at time of placement to fill completely all 

spaces indicated to be grouted: 

1. Use fine grout in spaces less than 2 inches in least horizontal dimension. 




2. Use coarse grout in spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension. 

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 

1. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of 

piping connections. 


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full 

thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units 

of widths indicated. 

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other 

Sections of the Specifications. 

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing 

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the 

opening. 

D. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut 

units as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where 

possible, use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry 

before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, 

where possible, cut edges concealed. 

1. Do not use wet cutting techniques with concrete unit masonry. 

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and 

textures. 

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 

F. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Before placing metal masonry accessories, remove loose 

rust, dirt, and other coatings. 

G. Grout solid all voids and cavities below grade. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES 

A. General: Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and 

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 

nor 1/2 inch maximum. 




3.4 SAMPLE PANEL 

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼ 

inch in 10 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, 

do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from 

bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thickness by more 

than 1/8 inch. 

6. For plan lines, horizontal construction tolerances for related portions of columns, walls, 

and partitions shall not exceed 1/2 inch in 32 feet or more. 

A. A minimum 10 feet long by 8 feet high, sample panel shall be provided prior beginning 

masonry work for review by the Owner, Architect and Contractor. The Sample may or may 

not be part of the building. If part of the building, locate such that access to it for 

approval/rejection of future work can be established and in inconspicuous area. The sample 

panel shall include reinforcement as well as show workmanship, coursing, bonding, 

thickness of tooling of joints, range of unit texture and color, and mortar color. Acceptance 

of panel by all parties is required prior to beginning masonry work for the project. Once 

accepted, the sample panel will be used as the standard for acceptance of all CMU 

components on the project. The sample panel shall be protected at all times and shall not 

be removed from the project until the Owner accepts the building. 

3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint 

thickness and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. 

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at 

other locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do 

not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

1. One – half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses 

above and below. 

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not 

less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use 

units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half 

running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean 

exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove 

loose masonry units and mortar before laying fresh masonry. 

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other 

Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

F. Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise 




indicated. 

G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, 

beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof 

structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, 

slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above 

approaches final position. 

2. At fire-rated partitions, install fire stopping in joint between top of partition and underside 

of structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Firestopping." 

3.6 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 

1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 

2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, 

and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 

3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, 

including areas under cells. 

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the 

joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other 

than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 

3.7 BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY 

A. Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together. 

B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, 


1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated 

"L" units as well as masonry bonding. 

C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at 

juncture, bond walls together as follows: 

1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units. 

3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length 

of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 

1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 

2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and 

extending 24 inches beyond openings. 

B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise 

indicated. 




C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" 

sections. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at 

returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 

3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 

A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to 

comply with the following: 

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural 

member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid 

materials. 

2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry 

joints and attached to structure. 

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches 

o.c. horizontally. 

3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in 

related items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement 

joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. 

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 

1. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. 

Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. 

3.11 LINTELS 

A. Install masonry or concrete lintels where indicated. 

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Reinforcement: Refer to plans for reinforcing requirements. 

3.12 INSTALLING REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY 

A. Preparation: Clean reinforcement bars of loose rust; do not use bars which have rusted 

excessively or which have bends or kinks not shown on drawings. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Provide vertical spacing as indicated, but not less than 48" on 

center. Secure reinforcement accurately at locations indicated and to avoid displacement; 

minimum spacing between bars or to masonry surfaces shall be bar diameter or 1/4 inch for 

fine grout and 1/2 inch for coarse grout, whichever is greater. 

C. Splicing: Provide lapped splices of minimum size indicated or permitted by governing code 

at locations shown; other methods or locations must be approved by the architect. 

D. Formwork: Construct formwork where required for temporary support of reinforced masonry, 

bracing as required to maintain proper shape during placement and curing of grout and 

adequately tight to avoid grout leakage. 

E. Mortar Joints: Where reinforcement other than prefabricated joint reinforcement is required 




in mortar joints, adjust joint thickness to provide not less than 1/4 inch of mortar between 

reinforcement and masonry surfaces. 

F. Reinforced Hollow Unit Masonry: Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities to be 

grouted. Keep cavities clear of mortar, including bed area of first course, to provide 

minimum clear dimension indicated, to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for 

vertical reinforcement bars, and to provide direct grout contact with supporting surfaces. 

1. At bond beams or other horizontally reinforced masonry, provide special masonry units 

or saw units to accommodate reinforcement. 

2. Contractor option: Fill all cores with grout in lieu of closing core spaces below bond 

beams and providing mortar bedding of masonry cross webs. 

3.13 GROUTING 

A. Contractor's Option: Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, subject to other 

limitations of the contract documents. 

1. Do not use high-lift grouting in any situation in which fine grout must be used because 

of dimensional constraints. 

B. Low-Lift Grouting of Hollow Unit Masonry- Comply with the requirements of ACI530.1/ASTM 

6/TMS 602 and as follows: 

1. Maintain minimum dimension of 2 inches and minimum area of 6 square inches in cells 

to be grouted. Extend vertical reinforcement above pour height as required for splicing. 

2. Lay masonry units to maximum pour height, not to exceed 5 feet. 

3. Place grout continuously, and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pour for more 

than one hour. Terminate each pour 1 to 1-1/2 inches below top course, except at tops 

of walls. 

4. Stop vertical pours 1-1/2 inches below bond beam locations; place reinforcement and 

pour bond beams to interlock with vertical cores. 

C. High-Lift Grouting of Hollow Unit Masonry- Comply with the requirements of ACI530.1/ASTM 

6/TMS 602 and as follows: 

1. Limit high-lift grouting to cores with minimum dimension of 3 inches and minimum core 

area of 9 square inches. Provide clean out holes at bottom of each core to be grouted, 

and as indicated. 

2. Construct masonry to full height of maximum grout pour specified, prior to placing grout. 

Unless otherwise indicated, limit grout placement for hollow concrete masonry unit walls 

to vertical dimensions as follows: 

a. Maximum grout lift: 4 feet. 

b. Maximum grout pour: 24 feet. 

3. Support vertical reinforcing at intervals of not more than 10 feet or 192 bar diameters, 

whichever is less, and install horizontal reinforcement as masonry is laid. 

4. Clean grout spaces before grouting masonry, eliminating dirt, dust, loose pieces of 

masonry, mortar droppings, and other foreign materials. Clean reinforcement and 

adjust to proper position. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes with 

matching masonry units, and brace closures to resist grout pressures. 

5. Do not pour grout until mortar has cured sufficiently to withstand grout pressure. 

6. Pump grout into prepared cavities, unless architect has approved alternative methods; 

consolidate each lift immediately, but avoid damage to previous grout pours. Do not 

allow more than one hour between lifts of a single pour. 

a. Place grout for spanning elements in a single, continuous pour. 

b. Bond beams which fall below top of a pour may be filled with grout as masonry is 




constructed, stopping at least one inch short of vertical cores to be grouted so 

vertical pours will interlock with bond beam. 

7. Extend reinforcement beyond pour dimensions for splicing when additional pours are 

required; in such situations, stop pour 1 to 1-1/2 inches below top course. 

3.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE & INSPECTION PROGRAM 

A. Testing Agency Services: Employ, at contractor’s expense, an independent testing agency 

acceptable to the owner and architect to perform specified tests and other services required 

for quality assurance as listed below. 

B. Prism Test: Provide according to ASTM standards during construction for each 5000 ft 2 of 

wall area or portion thereof. Prepare 1 set of prisms for testing at 7 days and 1 set for 

testing at 28 days. Verify f’m called for in the contract documents prior to construction. 

C. Mortar properties will be tested in accordance with ASTM C270 & field evaluated in 

accordance with ASTM C780. Provide two samples consisting of three specimens for each 

2500 ft 2 of wall area. Also samples shall be taken when there is any change in the mix 

proportions, materials used, or in the mixing method. Field tested specimens shall meet or 

exceed a 28 day compressive strength of 1500 psi in accordance with ASTM C1019. Verify 

proportions of materials in mortar as delivered to the site. 

D. Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength for each 5000 ft 2 of masonry wall 

surface. Verify proportions of materials in grout as delivered to the site. Field mix grout shall 

be tested for each day’s mixing operation. 

E. Minimum Inspection: From the beginning of masonry construction, the following shall be 

verified to ensure compliance. Maintain accurate records on site with sufficient detail to 

prove that the masonry has been inspected prior to and during construction in accordance 

with the contract documents. Provide final written certification signed and sealed by a 

registered engineer in the state the project is located. 

Continuous inspections means inspector on site 100% of time during the task being 

performed. 

Inspection Task 

Frequency of Inspection 

Continuous 

during task 

listed 

Periodically 

during task 

listed. 

1. Compliance with the approved submittals X 

2. Proportions of site-prepared mortar and grout X 

3. Placement of masonry units and construction of mortar joints. X 

4. Size and location of reinforcement including hooks and lap 

splices. 

5. Size and location of connectors, anchors, and embeds X 

6. Grout space prior to grouting. X 

7. Placement of grout and slump. X 

8. Size and location of structural elements. X 

9. Specified grade and type of reinforcement. X 




X

10. Protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 

40 o F) or hot weather (temperature above 90 o F). 

11, Welding of reinforcing. X 

12. Preparation of any required grout specimens, mortar specimens 

and/or prisms 

13. Locations and requirements of duct, pipe, and conduit 

penetrations. 

14. Control joint and/or expansion joint locations and requirements. X 

15. Construction Tolerances X 

X 

X 

X 

3.15 TEMPORARY BRACING 

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary bracing for all CMU walls as 

required during construction. 

B. Walls that fail structurally or by overturning due to inadequate bracing shall be replaced at 

Contractor’s expense. Other damage resulting from such failure shall be repaired or 

replaced at Contractor’s expense. 

C. Cracks in CMU walls resulting from inadequate bracing shall be repaired at Contractor’s 

expense. 

D. Masonry walls exposed to high winds during construction shall not be built higher than ten 

(10) times their thickness unless adequately braced or until provisions are made for prompt 

installation of the permanent bracing at the floor or roof areas. 

3.16 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise 

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; 

install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and 

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent 

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove 

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape 

hoes or chisels. 

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for 

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before 

proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 

3. Protect adjacent stone and non masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering 

them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking 

tape. 

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by 

rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's 

written instructions. 




6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to 

type of stain on exposed surfaces. 

3.17 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 

A. Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. 

At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. 

B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, 

waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material 

as fill is placed. 

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of 

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." 

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. 

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, 

as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 





SECTION 04720 – CAST STONE 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Cast stone trim continuous accent band. 


A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual 

components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include 

dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 

1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. 

C. Samples for Verification: 

1. Color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches long in size. 

2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used 

on Project. 

D. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according 

to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those 

indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. 

1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute or has on file and follows 

a written quality-control plan approved by Architect that includes all elements of the Cast 

Stone Institute's "Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection." 


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice 

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction 

requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but not less than 7 days 

after completing cleaning. 

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Cast Stone 04720 – 1 




2.1 CAST STONE UNITS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Architectural Concrete Company, Inc. 

2. ConArt, Inc. 

3. Miller Precast, Inc. 

B. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp method. 

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory 

testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364, or are 

made from cast stone that has a history of successful resistance to freezing and thawing. 

C. Fabricate units with sharp arris and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all 

exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Fabrication Tolerances: 

1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 

2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the 

length of unit or 1/8 inch , whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch . 

3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch , whichever is 

greater. 

E. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. 

F. Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana 

limestone to match existing building. 

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather 


indicated. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, 

Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Colored Cement Product: Packaged blend made from portland cement and lime and mortar 

pigments, all complying with specified requirements and containing no other ingredients. 

1. Formulate blend as required to produce color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected 

from manufacturer's standard colors. 

2. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 

3. Products: 

a. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix: 

1) Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime. 

2) Lafarge North America Inc.; Eaglebond. 




E. Water: Potable. 

3) Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Custom Color Portland/Lime Cement. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M, and 

hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

2.4 MORTAR MIXES 

A. Comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for mortar mixes. 

B. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, waterrepellent 

agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. 

2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cementand lime. 

C. Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 

1. For setting mortar, use Type S. 

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. 


3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR 

A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges 

and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 

1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to 

secure units in place. 

B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. 

C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. If not indicated, set units with joints 3/8 inch wide. 

2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 

3. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 

4. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. 

D. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch . 

Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next 

layer. 




E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 

thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Provide pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar 

and other rigid materials. 

1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. 

G. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated 

to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

1. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints 

before applying sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet , 1/4 inch in 20 feet , or 1/2 inch 

maximum. 

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet , 1/4 inch in 20 feet , or 1/2 inch 

maximum. 

C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or onefourth 

of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with 

adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch , 

except due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved 

Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 

B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying 

with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 

1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 



2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison 

purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with 

cleaning of cast stone. 

3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid 

strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 

4. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA 

Technical Notes No. 20. 





SECTION 04810 – UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 

1. Decorative concrete masonry units (Smooth faced, colored CMU). 

2. Face brick. 

3. Mortar and grout. 

4. Reinforcing steel. 

5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 

6. Ties and anchors. 

7. Embedded flashing (see Section 7270 for thru wall flashings specified as a component of 

Air & Vapor Barrier Systems.) 

8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 

9. NOTE: Provide 3000 additional Face Brick, purchase and delivery, to be installed by the 

CWRF contractor at miscellaneous site locations. 


A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 



B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 

1. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. 

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.” 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 

1. Decorative concrete masonry units, in the form of small-scale units. 

2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 

3. Colored mortar. 

4. Weep holes/vents. 

D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with 

manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, 

source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix 

proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes 

approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are 

specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Unit Masonry Assemblies 04810 – 1 



E. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with 

requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. 

Provide for each type and size of the following: 

1. Masonry units. 

a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. 

b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within 

specified tolerances. 

c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to 

ASTM C 67. 

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 

3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

5. Reinforcing bars. 

6. Joint reinforcement. 

7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 

F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of 

ingredients. 

1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property 

specification. 

2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with 

compressive strength requirement. 

G. Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be 

used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for 

testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and 

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one 

source from a single manufacturer for each product required. 

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including 

color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and 

from one source or producer for each aggregate. 

D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those 

of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and 

inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction. 

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 

2. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches by full thickness, 

including face and backup wythes and accessories. 

a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in each exterior wall mockup. 

b. Include lower corner of window openingat upper corner of exterior wall mockup. 

Make opening approximately 12 inches wide by 16 inches high. 




c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch length in corner of exterior wall 

mockup approximately 16 inches down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch length 

of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). 

3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 

4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 

5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of 

mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities 

of workmanship. 

a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities 

specifically approved by Architect in writing. 

b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract 

Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved 

by Architect in writing. 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an 

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If 

units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not 

use cementitious materials that have become damp. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and 

contamination avoided. 

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and 

emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on 

elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with 

weatherproof cover. 

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt 

and oil. 


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with 

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when 

construction is not in progress. 

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 

3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left 

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such 

masonry. 

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading 

coverings on ground and over wall surface. 

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 




3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and 

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from 

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. 

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice 

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by 

frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained 

in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after 

completing cleaning. 

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 



A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 

2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 

manufacturers specified. 

2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to 

exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the 

standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified 

dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair 

the quality of completed masonry. 

2.4 BRICK 

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose 

unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces 

finished. 

2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate 

special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and 

lintels. 

3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on 

exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 

4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in 

sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 




B. Face Brick Type 1: ASTM C 216, Grade SW Type FBS. 

1. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per 

ASTM C 67. 

2. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated 

"not effloresced." 

3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-9/16 inches wide by 3-9/16 inches high by 15-9/16 inches 

long and. Brick for soldier coursing and caps at brick fence pilasters and walkway cover 

columns: 3-9/16 inches wide by 3-9/16 inches high by 11-9/16 inches long. 

4. Color and Texture: Red with matte finish to match existing building. 

5. Available Products:For bidding purposes, as equal to Mountain Red as manufacturered 

by Interstate Brick, or an equal by other manufacturers. 

C. Face Brick Type 2: UBC Standard 21-1, Grade SW Type FBS 

1. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 

67. 

2. Efflorescence: Provice brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated 

“not effloresced”. 

3. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-1/2 inches to 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 

inches long. 

4. Available Products: For bidding purposes, as equal to Colonial Gray Smooth as 

manufactured by Caroline Ceramics Brick Company, or an equal by other manufacturers. 

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather 


indicated. 

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, 

Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 

1. Products subject to compliance with requirements. 

a. Lafarge North America Inc. ; Grey. 

b. Magnolia; Masons Mix. 

c. Georgia Materials; Citadel Grey. 

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or 

crushed stone. 

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with 

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of 

composition indicated. 

1. Available Products: 

a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. 

b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. 

c. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA. 




H. Water: Potable. 

2.6 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 

5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W2.8 or 0.188-inch diameter. 

6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 

7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single 

pair of side rods. 

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS 

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from 

materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B- 

2 coating. 

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through 

veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 

90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer. 

C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors 

1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and 

compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood 

or metal studs, and as follows: 

a. Wire-Type Anchor: Bent wire anchor section with an eye to receive the wire tie. 

Wire tie has a vertical leg that slips into the eye of anchor section and allows 

vertical adjustment. Both sections are made from 3/16-inch, hot-dip galvanized 

wire. 

2. Products: 

a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Ladder Style #270 ML. 

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Dovetail slot #305 with #315 and Vee Byna Tic. 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS 

A. Postinstalled Anchors: Provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors, with capability 

to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in solid or 

grouted unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as 

determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

1. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, 

Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 

2. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and 

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Alloy Group 1 or 4) 

for bolts and nuts; ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316, for anchors. 




2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS 

A. Section 07270 – Air & Vapor Barrier Systems for thru wall flashings. 

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of 

head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from 

manufacturer's standard. 

1. Available Products: 

a Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. 

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS 

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing 

mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without 

discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use 

by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 

1. Available Manufacturers: 

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 

b. EaCo Chem, Inc. 

c. ProSoCo, Inc. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental 

to performance of work. 

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual 

locations of piping connections. 



A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness 

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths 

indicated. 

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. 

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing 

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. 




D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous 

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, 

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut 

units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and 

textures. 

1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 

F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per 

minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet 

at time of laying. 

G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 

1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and 

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet , 1/4 

inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary 

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 

1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint 

thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 

5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 

1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 

1/8 inch. 

6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more 

than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for 

warpage of units. 

7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line 

by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. 

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint 

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. 

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other 

locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in 

running bond and bond pattern indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4- 

inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less 

than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with 

less than nominal 4- inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in 

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive 

mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh 

masonry. 




E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. 

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal 

lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 

H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, 

lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof 

structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure 

above. 

2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells 

of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to 

provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 

48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, 

or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches 

final position. 

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay concrete masonry units as follows: 

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on 

footings. 

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on 

footings where cells are not grouted. 

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient 

mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head 

joints. 

C. Set cast-stone trim units in full bed of mortar with full vertical joints. Fill dowel, anchor, and 

similar holes. 

1. Clean soiled surfaces with fiber brush and soap powder and rinse thoroughly with clear 

water. 

2. Allow cleaned surfaces to dry before setting. 

3. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar. 

D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 

thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than 

paint), unless otherwise indicated. 

3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 




A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch 

on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 

inches. 

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and 

extending 12 inches beyond openings. 

a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. 

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, 

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 

3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS 

A. Anchor masonry veneers to concrete and masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to 

comply with the following requirements: 

1. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space 

between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 

2. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and 

down. 

3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. 

horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional 

anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around 

perimeter. 

3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. 

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane 

wall or partition movement. 

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 

1. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is 

complete for application of sealant. 

3.8 LINTELS 

A. Install steel lintels where indicated. 

B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 

3.9 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS 




A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, 

other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf 

angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. 

B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could 

puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on 

sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal 

penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing 

manufacturer. 

2. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind 

veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked 

under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). 

3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry 

at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up 

not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 

4. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is 

completed. 

C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be 

built into masonry. 

D. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above 

embedded flashing and as follows: 

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 

2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 

3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support 

reinforced masonry elements during construction. 

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as 

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, 

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of 

reinforced masonry. 

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened 

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on 

them during construction. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough 

strength to resist grout pressure. 

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout 

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 


A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and 

prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform 

inspections. 




1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, 

sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 

3.12 PARGING 

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a total 

thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to ensure full 

bond to subsequent coat. 

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface 

variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. 

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise 

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install 

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and 

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent 

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, 

where indicated. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove 

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 



2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for 

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding 

with cleaning of masonry. 

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering 

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking 

tape. 

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by 

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 

20. 

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's 


7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to 

type of stain on exposed surfaces. 





SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 


1.1 SUMMARY 






same. 









necessary for completion of work in this Section. 

7. In the event of a conflict between the Design Drawings, referenced standards and these 

Specifications, the more stringent shall govern unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 


regulatory agency or body with jurisdiction. 


1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code and 

as indicated on the drawings. 

2. Fabrication and erection of architecturally exposed structural steel (AESS). 

3. Welding. 

4. Shop painting. 

C. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 

1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete. 

2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry. 

D. Related Sections: 

1. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 

2. Steel decking: Elsewhere in Division 5. 

3. Miscellaneous metal fabrications: Elsewhere in Division 5. 




edition in force at the time these plans and specifications are issued. 

A. ASTM A 36 – Standard Specification for Structural Steel 

B. ASTM A 6 – General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for 

Structural Use 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Structural Steel 05120 – 1 



C. ASTM A 123 -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel 

Products 

D. ASTM A 307-- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile 

Strength 

E. ASTM A 325-- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi 

Minimum Tensile Strength 

F. ASTM A 500-- Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel 

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes 

G. ASTM A 786 – Rolled Steel Floor Plates 

H. ASTM A 992 – Specification for Structural Steel Shapes 

I. ASTM C 1107-- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink) 

J. ASTM E 94 -- Standard Guide for Radiographic Testing 

K. ASTM E 142-- Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing 

L. ASTM E 164-- Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments 

M. ASTM E 165-- Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination 

N. ASTM E 709-- Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Examination 

O. ASTM F 959-- Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators 

for Use with Structural Fasteners 

P. AWS D1.1-- Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society 

Q. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel 

Construction, Inc. (AISC) 

R. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design; 

American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC) 

S. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; Research Council on 

Structural Connections; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC) 

T. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures 

Painting Council (SSPC) 


A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in 2.1 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and 

Bridges," and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the structural 

framing. 

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, and 




kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown. 

1. Not all connections are detailed; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise 

indicated. Contact the Architect promptly to verify design of members or connections in any 

situation where design requirements are unclear. 


A. Product Data: Producer's or manufacturer's information for products as follows, including 

sufficient data to show compliance with specified requirements: 

1. Mill test reports for each type of structural steel furnished. 

2. Test reports for high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers, including chemical analysis, tensile 

strength tests, and hardness tests. 

3. Test reports for direct tension indicators. 

4. Specifications for primer paint, including manufacturer's data on chemical composition, 

adhesion of spray fireproofing, and dry film thickness per applied coat. 

5. Specifications for non-shrink grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location, type, 

and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made in the 

field. 

1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS) welding 

symbols. 

2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others. 

3. Prepare shop drawings under the seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the 

state in which the project is located. 

4. The fabricator is specifically responsible for the adequacy of any connections designed by 

the fabricator to performance standards established in the contract documents. Approval 

by the Engineer of shop drawings shall not relieve the fabricator of this responsibility, 

despite wording to the contrary in paragraph 4.2.1 of the AISC Code. 

C. Test Reports: Submit test reports for all specified tests of connections. 

D. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified under 

American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. 

E. Surveys: Certified copies of specified surveys, showing locations of all critical elements and 

deviations from data shown on contract documents. 


A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in 

accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular 

requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following: 

1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 

2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic 

Design," with Commentary and Supplements. 

3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

C. Testing and Inspection Agency: Engage an independent testing and inspection agency acceptable 

to the owner to perform testing, inspect and evaluate connections, and prepare test reports. 

1. Correct deficiencies in the structural steel work identified by the testing and inspection 




agency at no additional expense to the owner. Subsequent tests to confirm the adequacy 

of corrected work will be at the Contractor's expense. 


A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of work. 

Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection. 

1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work in 

time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation. 

B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If 

temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using 

platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection. 


2.1 STEEL MATERIALS 

A. AESS Materials - General: For members which will be exposed in the finished work and have 

been identified as AESS on the drawings, provide only materials which are free of surface 

blemishes such as pitting, roller marks, rolled trade names, and surface roughness. 

B. Structural Steel Members (refer to plans for locations indicated): 

1. Wide flanges and WT sections: ASTM A992, Fy=50 ksi 

2. Channels, angles, plates, and miscellaneous steel: ASTM A36, Fy=36 ksi 

3. 316 Stainless Steel: ASTM A484, ASTM A276, Fy=30 ksi 

4. Structural Tubing, Cold-Formed: ASTM A500, Fy=46 ksi 

5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, Fy=35 ksi 

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washers. 

D. Bolts and Nuts: 

1. Carbon Steel: ASTM A307, Grade A 

2. High Strength Steel: ASTM A325, Type 1, plain (medium carbon steel) 

3. Stainless Steel: ASTM F593, ASTM F594 

4. AESS: Provide hexagonal bolt heads and nuts at all exposed connections. 

E. Hardened Washers: ASTM F436, ASTM A240 (for stainless). 

1. Dimensional requirements shall meet ANSI B18.22.1, Type A Plain 

F. Direct Tension Indicators: At contractor's option, provide either load indicator washers complying 

with ASTM F 959 or snap-off high-strength bolts certified to provide the minimum fastener tension 

in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" at all 

connections requiring high-strength bolts. 

G. Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grades 1010 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished 

carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. Minimum Yield Strength = 50 ksi. Test Shear connectors in 

accordance with AWS. All studs shall be a minimum ¾” diameter unless otherwise noted. 





A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS D1.1, Types as follows: 

1. E70XX. 

B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying with 

ASTM C 1107, and as follows: 

1. Natural aggregate (nonmetallic) type. 



a. "Masterflow 928"; Master Builders, Inc. 

b. "Sonogrout 14k"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 

c. "Euco N-S Grout"; The Euclid Chemical Company. 

d. "Supreme"; Cormix Construction Chemicals. 

e. "Five Star Grout"; Five Star Products, Inc. 

C. Shop Primer: Provide fabricator’s standardprimer unless otherwise noted in Section 09900. 

2.3 FABRICATION 

A. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate and 

assemble to maximum degree possible. 

1. AESS: Comply with requirements of AISC Code for architecturally exposed structural steel. 

a. Appearance: Cut, fit, and assemble units with exposed surfaces smooth, square, 

and free from cutting marks, shear distortion, burrs, and nicks. 

b. Tolerances: As specified in AISC Code for AESS, unless more stringent 

requirements are indicated on the drawings. 

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine. 

1. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded. 

C. Connections: 

1. Shop connections: As indicated on the drawings. 

2. Field connections: As indicated on the drawings. 

3. Bolts: High-strength steel bolts, except as otherwise indicated. 

a. Bolting: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using 

ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 

4. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of 

welds, including appearance. 

a. Built-up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will 

maintain proper alignment of finished section. 

b. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment to be employed 

will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface bleed of back-side welding on 

exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. 

(1) Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. 

(2) Grind flush butt welds. 

(3) Dress all exposed welds. 

D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which must transmit loads in 

bearing. 

E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right angles 

to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. 




1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others. 

2.4 SHOP COATING - GALVANIZING 

Refer to Section 09900, but at a minimum: 

A. Galvanize the following items: 

1. All structural steel exposed to weather and as indicated on drawings. 

B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean members to be galvanized, removing loose rust and mill scale. 

C. Galvanizing: Perform galvanizing after fabrication in accordance with requirements of ASTM A 

123. 

2.5 SHOP COATING – PAINT 

Refer to Section 09900, but at a minimum: 

A. Shop prime all steel members, except: 

1. Galvanized steel members. 

2. Steel members embedded in concrete or mortar. 

3. Do not paint the following surfaces: 

a. Machined or milled surfaces. 

b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds. 

c. Faying surfaces of bolted connections. 

d. Beams supporting the Second Level which require fireproofing per Specification 

Section 07811. 

B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose mill 

scale, dirt, oil, and grease. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows: 

1. Power tool or blast cleaning: SSPC SP-3, -5, -6, or -10. 

C. Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with 

instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less 

than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of 2.0 mils. 

2.6 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Testing and Inspection: 

1. General: Provide access to testing and inspection agency so that specified testing and 

inspection can be safely accomplished. 

2. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC 

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts," except test not less 

than the following number of bolts in each bolted connection: All slip critical connections as 

noted SC on drawings. 

3. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop-fabricated welds as follows: 

a. Visually inspect all welds. 

b. Inspect 100. percent of full penetration welds, using test method as follows: 

(1) Radiographic testing (ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142). 

c. Inspect 20 percent of fillet welds, using one of the following test methods: 




(1) Radiographic Testing (ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142). 

(2) Magnetic Particle Inspection (ASTM E 709). 

(3) Ultrasonic Testing (ASTM E 164). 

(4) Liquid Penetrant Inspection (ASTM E 165). 



A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions for erection of structural steel and verify 

that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been adjusted 

with the architect's agreement. 

1. Surveys: Conduct verification surveys by a professional engineer or land surveyor 

registered in the state in which the project is located. 


A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements 

required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove such 

temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel framing is 

fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads. 

3.3 ERECTION 

A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications. 

1. AESS: Comply with erection requirements of AISC Code dealing with architecturally 

exposed structural steel. 

B. Assembly: 

1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances 

established in AISC Code, before making final connections. 

2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member. 

a. Thermal cutting of secondary members may be permitted by the architect upon 

request, but only when members involved are not loaded. 

C. Columns and Bearing Surfaces: 

1. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Slightly roughen concrete and 

masonry surfaces to improve bond. 

2. Set base and bearing plates accurately, using metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts as 

required. 

3. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that structure is plumb, grout solidly between 

plates and bearing surfaces. 

a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout. 

D. Bolting: 

1. Carbon steel bolts: Use only for temporary bracing during erection, unless otherwise 

specifically permitted by contract documents. 

2. High-strength bolts: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints 

Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." 




E. Welding: 

1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or when 

surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind. 

2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field-welded construction. 

a. AESS: Verify that weld sizes, erection sequence, and equipment to be employed will 

limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Surface bleed of back-side welding on 

exposed surfaces is not acceptable. 

(1) Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. 

(2) Grind flush butt welds. 

(3) Dress all exposed welds. 

(4) Remove erection bolts, plug-weld bolt holes, and grind smooth. 

F. Touch-up Painting: As soon as possible after erection of primed structural steel, clean painted 

areas which have been abraded or otherwise damaged by welding, bolting, or other field 

operations. Apply touch-up paint matching shop coating by brush or spray to all damaged paint 

areas, achieving a minimum final thickness of 1.5 mils. 


A. Testing and Inspection: 

1. General: Provide access to testing and inspection agency so that specified testing and 

inspection can be safely accomplished. 

2. Field-bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC 

"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts," except test not less 

than the following number of bolts in each bolted connection: All slip critcal connnections 

as noted SC on the drawings. 

3. Field-welded connections: Inspect and test field-fabricated welds as follows: 

a. Visually inspect all field welds. 

4. Composite shear connectors: Shear connectors shall be inspected and tested in 

accordance with AWS D1.1 after installation. After bending test studs, all studs shall be 

pinged. All shear connectors failing inspection and testing shall be replaced and re-tested. 





SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Contractor to provide all material, labor, and tools required to complete the 

installation of specified system. 


functional system specified in the section does not relieve the contractor of the 

obligation to provide same. 

3. To provide installation of all items, including delivery, dispersing to the proper 

locations within the building, and affixing in place. 

4. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in their craft who will perform 

their work in a professional manner and will leave the premises safe, orderly and 

clean. 

5. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this 

Section. 

6. Contractor is responsible for coordination of work included in this specification 

with all other specification sections related to furnishing of all materials, labor, 

permits, fees and services necessary for completion of work in this Section. 

7. In the event of a conflict between the Design Drawings, referenced standards and 

these Specifications, the more stringent shall govern unless directed otherwise by 

the Engineer. Contractor shall strictly adhere to OSHA requirements and local 

codes or those of any regulatory agency or body with jurisdiction. 


1. K-series open web steel joists. 

2. Bracing. 

C. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section: 

1. Bearing plates. 

2. Anchor bolts. 

D. Related Sections: 

1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 

2. Metal decking: Elsewhere in Division 5. 


Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the Contract Documents or 

of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent. All referenced standards refer 

to the edition in force at the time these plans and specifications are issued. 

A. AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code--Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. 

B. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 -- Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; 

Steel Joist Institute; July 1987. 

C. Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Steel Joists 05210 – 1 



Girders; Steel Joist Institute (SJI); 1992. 


A. Provide joist system which is designed and fabricated to comply with requirements of the 

contract documents and which strictly conforms to material, manufacturing, and erection 

requirements of the Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and 

Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (referred to hereinafter as SJI 

"Specifications"). 

1. Wind Uplift and Shear: Design joists, joist to joist connections, and joist to 

structure connections to comply with wind criteria requirements indicated in the 

structural drawings 


A. Product Data: Submit for each distinct type of joist required and for accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Drawings for fabrication and erection of joists; include plans, elevations, 

and large scale details of typical sections, special connections, joining, and accessories. 

1. Show location and spacing of joists; indicate mark number and type. 

2. Prepare shop drawings under the seal of a professional structural engineer 

registered in the state in which the project is located. 

3. Show bridging. 

4. Provide design calculations prepared by a professional structural engineer 

registered in the State in which the project is located. 

C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following: 

1. SJI certification of joist characteristics. 

2. Manufacturers' certification of joist characteristics. 

3. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 


A. Field Welder Qualification: Qualify welding procedures and each welder in accordance 

with the American Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code -- Steel (AWS D1.1)." 

B. Testing: Engage an independent testing agency acceptable to the owner to perform 

specified quality control procedures and to prepare reports. 

1. Only AWS-certified welding inspectors shall inspect and evaluate welds. 


A. Strictly conform to requirements of SJI Technical Digest No. 9. 

B. At a minimum, joist shall be stored on wood sleepers on dry, level ground. Permanently 

deformed or otherwise damaged joists shall be replaced at the Contractor’s Expense. 


A. Coordination Data: Prepare and distribute to affected installers, drawings or templates 

detailing placement of bearing plates and anchor bolts. 





2.1 STEEL MATERIALS 

A. Chord and Web Sections: Conform to requirements of SJI "Specifications." 

1. ASTM A572, Grade 50 

B. Accessories: Provide accessories required for erection of steel joists, complying with SJI 

"Specifications" and with contract documents. 

1. ASTM A36 

2.2 SHOP PRIMER 

A. All joists shall receive a coat of gray rust inhibitive primer in accordance with the Steel 

Structures Painting Council Specifications, SSPC No. 15. 

2.3 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Inspection: 

1. Provide access to independent testing and inspection agency so that inspection 

can be accomplished safely. 

2. Independent testing and inspection agency shall visually inspect shop welds to 

verify compliance with the American Welding Society's "Structural Welding Code 

-- Steel (AWS D1.1)." 


3.1 JOIST FABRICATION 

A. General: All materials shall be clean and straight. 

B. Bridging is schematically shown on drawings. Detail and fabricate bridging in complete 

accordance with SJI requirements. 

C. Joists: 

1. Top chord extensions: Provide extensions where indicated. Extension members 

shall be designed as cantilever beams, with their reactions carried back at least 

to the first panel point of the joists. 

2. Bottom chords: Form bottom chord members of joists using angles. 

3. Bottom chord extensions: Where indicated, provide extended bottom chords or 

separate extension units properly designed to support ceilings attached directly to 

joist bottom chords. Maximum clearance between wall finish and end of 

extension: 1/2 inch, unless indicated otherwise. 

4. Special end connections: Provide special end connections where joists bear less 

than 2-1/2 inches over steel supports. Connections shall provide positive 

attachment to the support. 

5. Camber: Comply with recommendations of SJI "Specifications". 

6. Surface preparation for shop priming: Hand clean steel in accordance with 

SSPC-Paint 15 requirements. 

7. Shop priming: Provide 1-mil continuous dry paint film thickness. 

8. Bearing plates: Furnish bearing plates fabricated from same grade of steel as 




joists, with welded stud anchors or anchor bolts, or as otherwise shown on 

drawings. 

3.2 ERECTION 

A. Do not begin joist erection until structural support components have been installed and 

are in suitable condition to receive joists. 

B. Do not overload or exceed carrying capacity of any joist during construction period. 

C. Accurately position and space joists before permanent attachment to structural supports. 

D. Provide safe, stable structure throughout construction period. Do not remove bridging 

after construction is completed, unless specifically authorized to do so by the Engineer. 

1. Install bridging in accordance with SJI requirements. 

2. Bridging installation shall proceed concurrently with joist erection and shall be 

completed before joists are subjected to construction loads. 

E. K-Series Joist Anchorage: 

1. Weld joists to structural support members as required by SJI "Specifications." 

F. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, solvent clean and hand- or power-tool 

clean (SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3) completed field connections and damaged surfaces of 

shop-primed joists and adjoining structural steel. Apply corrosion-resistant touch-up paint 

compatible with primer. 


A. General: Provide access for independent testing agency so that inspection can be 

accomplished safely. 

B. The contractor shall engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality 

controlled testing as indicated below: 

1. Verify location, sizing, and spacing of joists. 

2. Perform visual inspection of all connections. 

3. Performance Test for K-series Joists: If directed by the Engineer, conduct load 

test in accordance with the Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Recommended Code of 

Standard Practice for Steel Joist and Joist Girders." Joists shall have bridging 

and top deck applied. Test panel shall sustain for one hour a test load of 1.65 

times the design live load. After test load is removed, the permanent deflection 

shall not exceed 20 percent of the deflection under full test loading. 





SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK 


1.1 SUMMARY 






same. 









necessary for completion of work in this Section. 

7. In the event of a conflict between the Design Drawings, referenced standards and these 





1. Roof deck. 

2. Noncomposite form deck. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Cast-in-place concrete: Elsewhere in Division 3. 

2. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5. 

3. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5. 

4. Roofing: Division 7. 




edition in force at the time these plans and specifications are issued 

A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-93a – Standard Specification for Structural Steel; 1993. 

B. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by 

the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993. 

C. ASTM A 653/A 653M-01a – Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, 

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2001. 

D. AWS D1.1-92 – Structural Welding Code – Steel; American Welding Society; 1992. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Steel Deck 05310 – 1 



E. AWS D1.3-89 – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989. 

F. MIL P-21035B(NAVY) – Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric); U.S. 

Department of Defense; 1991. 

G. Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1994. 

H. FM P7825 – Approval Guide 1992; Factory Mutual System; 1992 (with supplement 1). 

I. SDI Publication No. 28 – Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, 

Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution; Steel Deck 

Institute, Inc.; 1992. 

J. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel 

Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata). 


A. Provide deck system which is designed and fabricated to comply with requirements of the contract 

documents and which strictly conforms to material, manufacturing, and erection requirements of 

the Steel Deck Institute's (SDI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel 

Roof and Floor Decks" (referred to hereinafter as SDI "Specifications"). 

1. Wind uplift and shear: Design deck and connections to comply with wind requirements 

indicated on drawings. 


A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating 

compliance with specified requirements. 

1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics. 

2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics. 

3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence. 

4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support locations 

and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and accessories. 

C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and 

section properties. 

1. Prepare calculations under seal of a professional structural engineer registered in Florida. 

D. Welder Qualifications: Submit evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified 

under AWS qualification procedures. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by the 

contract documents or requirements of governing authorities: 

1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 

2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 

3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, and 

Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution." 




B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures 

specified in AWS D1.1. 

C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 5 years of documented experience. 

D. Testing: Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by an independent agency 

paid by the owner. If testing indicates that welds do not comply with requirements, remove 

defective work and replace at no additional expense to the owner. 

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those 

steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to architectural drawings and specifications. 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance 

Directory” or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. 

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and 

inspecting agency. 

F. FM Listing: Refer to architectural drawings for Factory Mutual rating requirements. 

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and 

handling. 

B. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage. 

Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation. 

C. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark each 

unit clearly to identify differences. 



A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the contract 


1. Bowman Metal Deck/Empire Detroit Steel Division/Armco, Inc. 

2. Epic Metals Corporation. 

3. Robertson, a United Dominion Company. 

4. United Steel Deck, Inc. 

5. Vulcraft Division/Nucor Corporation. 

6. Wheeling Corrugating Company Division/Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 

7. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Deck Group. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A653. 

B. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A 36. 

C. Miscellaneous Steel: ASTM A 36. 




D. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, galvanized. 

E. Galvanizing: ASTM A653, ASTM A924 with amount as indicated on drawings. 

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of Military Specification MIL P-21035B, Type 

I or II. 


A. Roof Deck Units - General: Provide deck complying with SDI specifications for properties 

indicated. 

B. Standard Roof Deck Units: Comply with the following: 

1. Profile type: As indicated on drawings. 

2. Material: 

a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi. 

b. Minimum metal thickness: as indicated on drawings 

3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span. 

4. Sheet coverage width: 36 inches. 

5. Side joints: Lapped. 

6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces. 

C. Eaves Plates: Fabricate of same material and gage as deck units, with flange for attachment, and 

with dimensions as indicated on drawings. 

D. Ridge/Valley Plates: Fabricate of same material and gage as deck units, in slope to match roof 

slope, not less than 4½ inches wide. 

E. Fasteners: Stainless steel, self- tapping. 



A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing 

conditions are acceptable before commencing installation. 


A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute specifications, 

manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section. Fasten deck 

units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed sheets unattached 

at end of working day. 

1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings. 

2. Bearing: Follow the manufacturer’s minimum recommended bearing lengths with a 

minimum of 6 inches at non-steel supports and 1½" at steel supports; align and level deck 

units. 

3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection. 

4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches. 

5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure. 

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. 




C. Fastening: 

1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as indicated on drawings. 

2. Fasten roof deck units to nonsteel supporting members as indicated on drawings. 

3. Side laps: Fasten side laps of adjacent deck units as indicated on drawings. 

4. If not indicated on the drawings, fasten metal deck as follows: 

a. Fasten metal deck panels to supporting members with a #12 TEK screw or 

equivalent at a spacing of 6" on center. 

b. Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports with a #10 TEK 

screw or equivalent at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/3 of the span or 36 

inches. 

D. Openings: 

1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks. 

2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure strips 

as shown or as required for strength and rigidity. 

E 

Metal Accessories: Fasten metal accessories securely to deck units, using welding or mechanical 

fasteners as appropriate to conditions. 

1. Install metal cant strips at roof edges and as otherwise detailed. 

2. Fasten or weld metal sump pans to top deck surface at openings provided, spacing 

fasteners or welds at 12 inches on center maximum and with fastener or weld in each 

corner. Neatly cut opening for drain size indicated. 

3. Install other metal accessories as indicated. 

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure 

according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Floor Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, 

according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides 

of decking. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of floor deck panels, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

H. Install piercing hanger tabs not more than 14 inches apart in both directions, within 9 inches of 

walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated. 

I 

Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire-brush burned and 

abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint. 

1. Apply galvanizing repair paint to galvanized surfaces, complying with manufacturer's 

instructions. 

3.3 CLEANING 

1. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project 

site. 





SECTION 05311 – ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK ASSEMBLY 



A. Acoustical Roof Deck Assembly: The integrally engineered and integrally tested structural 

roof deck assemblies shall consist of fluted rib-pattern steel sections, each with its protective 

coating(s), as specified; rigid thermal insulation panels; high-density, fire-resistive roofing 

substrate panels; special screw fasteners, joint reinforcement tape, compression devices, 

and composite termination members, to be assembled on the jobsite in accordance with the 

project plans, specifications, and Manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Structural Requirements: 

1. Gravity Load Requirements: Submit manufacturer's certification establishing the load 

carrying capacity of the specified integral roof deck assembly to include steel deck 

sheet, mineral board, and optional insulation. Individual component performance or 

certification is not acceptable. 

2. Diaphragm Load Requirements: Submit manufacturer's certification establishing the 

shear strength and shear stiffness of the specified integral roof deck assembly to 

include steel deck sheet, mineral board, and optional insulation. Individual component 

performance or certification is not acceptable. 

3. Wind Uplift Requirements: Submit manufacturer's certification establishing ASCE-7 

building code compliance and assembly testing of the wind uplift performance of the 

specified integral roof deck assembly to include steel deck sheet, mineral board, and 

optional insulation. Individual component performance or certification is not 

acceptable. 

4. Composite Performance: Submit professional engineer's certification establishing the 

composite performance of the roof deck assembly. Submittal shall include substrate 

stabilization attachment patterns that resist gravity forces, wind uplift forces, seismic 

and horizontal forces and forces from thermal change. 

5. Termination and Transition Requirements: Submit manufacturer's certification 

establishing the structural performance of each specified termination and transition 

assembly. Each assembly shall be able to support shear, gravity and wind uplift loads 

as specified for the particular roof deck assembly. Certification shall include shop 

drawings of terminator and transition assemblies for each roof deck area. The a 

professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida shall seal submittal drawings 

certifying compliance with these specification performance requirements, Florida 

Building Code compliance and with the latest editions of the AISI Cold-Formed Steel 

Design manual. 

C. Thermal Requirements: Submit manufacturer's certification of the thermal resistance value 

of each specified integral roof deck assembly and design details which eliminate all through 

joints from the steel section's surface to the top of the assembly. No through joints in the 

insulation medium will be allowed. 

1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS 

A. The work described in this Section, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or herein 

specified, shall be governed by the following codes and specifications. 

1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - U.L. 

2. Factory Mutual Research Corporation - FM. 

3. Manufacturer's diaphragm design manual - DDM. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Acoustical Roof Deck Assembly 05311 - 1 


HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP AS141E

4. Florida Building Code - FBC. 

5. Steel Deck Institute - SDI. 

6. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM. 

7. American Institute of Steel Construction - AISC. 

American Iron and Steel Institute - AISI. 

American Society of Civil Engineers - ASCE. 


A. Assembly Data: Submit complete, exact and specific design data for each specified integral 

roof deck assembly as follows: 

1. Submit all manufacturer's certifications as required under Paragraph 1.03, System 

Description, sealed by a licensed structural engineer, as required. 

2. Submit manufacturer's specifications to evidence compliance with Paragraph 2.02, 

Assembly Performance Requirements, as specified. 

3. Submit design details establishing the stabilization of both side and end joints against 

differential vertical deflection under concentrated loads. 

4. Submit design details describing the method used to seal all roofing substrate joints 

with a weather-resistant covering. 

5. Submit design details establishing the roofing substrate's attachment pattern which 

resists gravity loads, wind uplift forces, seismic and horizontal forces as well as 

movement due to thermal instability. 

6. Submit design details establishing the elimination of air passages and thermal gaps in 

all directions between all layers of materials. 

7. Submit termination and transition design details certifying performance as required in 

Sections 1.03.C and 2.02. 

B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings, including erection sequences, procedures, weld 

requirements, schedules and complete details, shall be submitted to the architect for 

approval. Any fabrication of material prior to the approval of drawings shall be at the risk of 

the contractor. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 

1. All components for the specified integral roof deck assembly covered under this 

section shall be provided by a single manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. 

2. Manufacturers wishing to qualify for approval to bid under this section of the 

specifications shall submit documentation requesting approval a minimum of 10 days 

prior to bid date. Submittal documentation shall include system design details, 

specifications, performance characteristics and supporting test data to establish the 

system's compliance. 

B. Subcontractor Qualifications: 

1. The subcontractor shall be licensed by the manufacturer. 

2. The subcontractor shall submit evidence of skill and not less than three (3) years 

specialized experience with the specified integral roof deck assembly. 

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store and handle products in exact accordance with the manufacturer's latest 

published requirements and specifications. 





A. Manufacturers of acoustical roof deck, sheathing boards and insulation shall provide their 

standard warranties. 

PART 2 – ASSEMBLY (Deck, Sheathing Boards, and Insulation) 

2.1 ACOUSTICAL ROOF DECK 

A. The design is based on the following product: Loadmaster Super Span 350R Acoustical I-250 RT 

insulated HIR Dual Board Roof Deck Assembly. 

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 

1. Epicore Metals Corporation, ER3.5A. 

2. Bemo USA Deck Assembly. 

3. Martin Fireproofing Deck Assembly 

4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Deck Group. 

C. Design Thickness: As required to meet the pressures noted on Structural Drawing Sheet S0.1, 

“General Notes”. 

2.2 SHEATHING BOARDS 

A. The design is based on the following product: Loadmaster Duraflex Mineral Boards. 

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: 

1. DensDeck DuraGuard Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board. 

2.3 INSULATION 

A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (for Metal Roof Panels): ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1, with 

maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per 

ASTM E 84. 

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Atlas Roofing Corporation. 

2. Dow Chemical Company (The). 

3. Rmax, Inc. 

B. Design Thickness: 3-inches. 

2.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Termination Assemblies: 

1. Self-Supporting and Supported Assemblies: Self-supporting assemblies shall be 

designed to act as flexural members that resist concentrated and uniform positive and 

negative loading. Supported assemblies shall have uniform support, designed and 

furnished by others. Where possible, both self-supporting and supported assemblies 

shall be designed to transfer diaphragm shear to their immediate supports and shear 

collectors as provided by others. No wood will be allowed in any assembly. 




2. Termination Assemblies: 

Edges, Eaves and Rakes: All termination assemblies shall provide flanges for screw 

attachment of sheet metal flashings and trim. No wood is allowed. The web of the base 

piece in all eave or rake assemblies shall be vertical. Terminator assemblies may transfer 

design diaphragm shear to the supporting purlin when the purlin’s cantilever over the 

shear wall does not exceed 12 inches or to shear collectors provided by others. Selfsupporting 

termination assemblies shall be designed for positive and negative loadings 

as follows: 

Expansion Joints: Self-supporting expansion joints shall be designed for loading and 

deflection criteria the same as for edge, eave & rake locations. 

Metal Thickness will be determined by the following criteria: 

a. Positive load designs shall be 300 lbs concentrated load. Deflection shall be 

limited to L/180. 

b. Negative uniform loads shall be those established for Zones 1, 2 and 3 of the 

roof deck area per ASCE 7 as appropriate. Tributary area shall be 6 inches 

wide and negative load deflection limits shall be limited to L/180. 

3. Roof Deck At Shear Walls: (Applies to both Self-Supported and Supported Terminations) 

Design considerations shall be made to transfer the design diaphragm shear from the 

roof deck to the supporting members at all exterior and interior shear walls. Where 

termination assemblies are inadequate or unable to function as a collector, shear 

collectors shall be designed and furnished by others. 

2.5 COMPONENTS 

A. Steel sections shall be roll-formed cold steel, having a minimum yield strength (virgin steel) 

40,000 psi for Super Span 200R with a white primer over G-90 galvanized coating. The 

configuration and physical properties of the section shall conform to those established for the 

manufacturer's steel sections designated. Steel sections shall be installed in continuous 

lengths. However, the minimum length shall not be less than a two-span condition. 

B. Fasteners for the steel sections shall be either special screw fasteners, arc spot welds, plug 

welds through special hexagonal-shaped weld washers or plug welds through special slotted 

weld washers. Side lap connectors shall be special side lap (stitch) screw fasteners, or seam 

welds, as required for diaphragm design. 

C. Acoustical batts are nominally 2" deep, 4 1/2" wide, and 4'-0" long manufactured from 3 pound 

density fiberglass. Acoustical batts expanded steel mesh spacers are nominally 8'-0" long, 4" 

wide, and manufactured from 24 gage galvanized steel. 

D. Fasteners for the high-density roofing substrate board shall be corrosion-resistant, Phillips 

bugle-head, self-driving, case-hardened screws with modified buttress threads for increased 

resistance to backout forces. Minimum corrosion resistance shall be passage of DIN 51008 

(2.0 liters sulphur dioxide) for 40 cycles with less than 15% red rust and ASTM B117 salt spray 

for 750 hours or more. 

E. Roofing Underlayment shall be a 40 mil thick, peel and stick, SBS (styrene butidyene styrene) 

modified, rubberized asphalt sheet waterproofing underlayment. With an internally reinforced 

non-woven polyester fabric, Roofing Underlayment shall have a white reflective topping for 

added foot safety as well as heat reduction on the deck and protection against short term Ultra 

Violet damage. A removable release film shall be on the membrane under side for ease of 

application. 




F. Termination and transition assemblies shall be G-90 galvanized steel as required to conform to 

the latest editions of the AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design manual. Support blocks shall be A-36 

minimum steel prime painted. All steel shall be 33,000 psi. minimum yield. Screw fasteners shall 

be corrosion-resistant, Phillips wafer head, self-drilling fasteners, specifically suited for structural 

steel connections. 



A. Visually examine and verify that the surfaces of the structure which will receive the engineered 

roof deck assembly have no apparent defects or errors which would result in substandard 

workmanship. Additionally, the following items, furnished and installed by others, shall be 

inspected for compliance prior to installation of the roof deck assembly. 

1. Structural Steel / Bar Joists. 

a. All structural steel framing has been fabricated and erected, straight and true, in 

accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice, Steel Joist Institute, and 

Division 5 project specifications. 

b. Where required, all shear collectors, and continuous termination/transition plates, 

to be furnished by others, have been installed per the approved design of the 

engineer of record. 

2. Cold Formed Steel Framing 

a. All Structural Cold Formed framing has been fabricated and erected in accordance 

with the AISI Cold-Forming Steel Design, ASTM C1007-04, and Section-Cold 

Formed Structural Framing. 

b. Where required, all shear collectors, and continuous termination/transition plates, 

to be furnished by others, have been installed per the approved design of the 

engineer of record. 

B. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect. 


A. Steel sections shall be placed with the side lap configurations facing upwards and with the 

corrugation ribs at a true right angle to the structural supports. The side lap configuration shall 

be fully nested to maintain a straight alignment of the sections. Where appropriate, end laps 

shall be a minimum of 3" and shall always occur over the top flange of a structural support. At 

each structural support, install steel section fasteners located as needed to meet the 

requirements specified in Paragraph 2.02, Assembly Performance Requirements. A minimum 

of 1 side lap connector shall be installed spaced at a maximum of 3'-0" o.c. in each nested steel 

section sidelap between adjacent structural supports. Additional fasteners, if required for 

diaphragm action, shall be indicated on the structural drawings. 

B. Prior to attaching sheets at all termination points, install composite termination pieces on areas 

as shown on plans, placing horizontal leg under steel deck sheet edge. Exercise care to align 

base piece in a straight line in accordance with the desired line of the roof edge. Weld base 

piece and steel deck sheet edge simultaneously to the structure in a pattern sufficient to 

develop the shear and uplift values required by the assembly. Screw attach or weld steel deck 

section to base piece between structural supports with attachments at the same spacing as the 

deck side lap fasteners. At all intersecting corners, install corner pieces attaching each flange 

with 4 fasteners into the face of the base piece. 




C. Acoustical batt expanded steel mesh spacers shall be placed in the bottom flanges of the deck 

prior to the installation of acoustical batts. Acoustical batts shall be placed on the expanded 

steel mesh spacers for proper alignment with the deck to insure the tested NRC value. The 

acoustical batts shall be laid along rib plates and rotated into position. Care shall be taken to 

make sure rotation of the batt is complete so that the fiberglass cut surface area fits snug 

against the webs of the steel sheet. Gaps between the 4'-0" lengths and between the fiberglass 

and steel are not permitted to insure proper NRC values. 

D. Isocyanurate Insulation panels shall be placed with their length perpendicular to the direction of 

the corrugation ribs of the steel sections. Square cut ends and sides shall be tightly abutted. A 

minimum offset of 6" between the joints of the insulation panels and the substrate board shall 

be made at the ends and sides. Where necessary, the insulation panels shall be installed in 

two layers with a minimum offset of 6" at ends and sides. 

E. After placing the insulation, on a insulated assembly, or the first layer of high-density roofing 

substrate board on a Nailable Assembly and prior to placing the final layer of high-density 

roofing substrate board, install the termination edge pieces as required. Exercise care in 

placing the edge piece to assure a snug fit of the vertical turn down against the face of the base 

piece. Butt edge pieces leaving a minimum 1/4" & maximum 1/2" space between pieces. 

Screw attach edge piece 16" o.c. with fasteners to the base piece in the horizontal overlapping 

flange. 

F. One layer of 1/2" high-density roofing substrate board shall be placed with the length of the 

board perpendicular to the direction of the corrugation ribs. If necessary, reduce the width of all 

boards in the initial run across the structure to prevent longitudinal joints from occurring over 

structural supports. In a like manner, reduce the length of the first board in the adjacent run so 

that a staggering of end joints is accomplished. End staggers should be approximately half the 

board length and should never be less than 4'-0". Place subsequent runs so that the tongueand-groove 

configuration on the long edges of the boards will be tightly nested. The square cut 

ends should be tightly abutted to adjacent boards. Where necessary, the ends of the boards 

shall be trimmed square to insure the occurrence of end joints above the center line of a 

corrugation rib crest. 

G. Screw attachment of the layer of high-density roofing substrate board shall commence after a 

sufficient quantity of the board has been positioned and properly aligned with all joints (both 

side and end) tightly abutted. Install special screw fasteners, compression discs and/or roof 

deck plates as required and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Select 

special screw fasteners of sufficient length to allow a minimum 1/2" projection through the steel 

sections. All screws shall be inserted perpendicular to the substrate board surface and the 

heads shall be set flush with the board surface. 

H. Roofing Underlayment shall be placed over the entire top surface of the installed board at the 

end of each work day. The roofing underlayment shall not be placed directly on insulation or 

steel deck sheets and not over voids or unsupported areas. Roofing underlayment shall be 

installed either horizontally from the low point of the roof in shingle fashion or vertically from the 

eave. All laps shall be applied in a manner so as to shed water shingle fashion down the slope. 

The underlayment shall be unrolled, cut in to convenient lengths, and positioned to allow for a 

minimum of 2" and 6" for side and end laps respectively. After placed in the desired location, the 

underlayment shall be pulled tightly from each end. Then one side shall be lifted to remove the 

2 1/2" portion of the release film. Once positioned and held in place by the 2" tack, one end of 

underlayment and across its entire width shall be lifted. The remaining release film from the 

entire width shall be removed out to one side. The end of underlayment shall then be placed 

back onto roofing substrate and rolled (not broomed) with adequate pressure to eliminate all air 

bubbles or fish mouths. Unworkable fish mouths or air pockets shall be cut or slit and reworked 

into a flat plane. An additional layer of underlayment shall be installed overlapping the cut 

extending 6" in all directions. 




3.3 CLEANING 

A. Cleaning: Upon completion of the installation, broom clean the surface of all construction 

debris. 

3.4 FINAL INSPECTION 

A. Final Inspection: Prior to the application of the roof covering, inspect completed portions of the 

integral roof deck assembly and correct any deficiencies and/or damage to the surface. 





SECTION 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified 

in other Sections. 

2. Elevator hoist beams. 

3. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills. 

4. Metal ladders. 

5. Ladder safety cages. 


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders shall withstand the effects of 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. 

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature 

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, 

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Paint products. 

2. Grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their 

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 

B. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers 

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Metal Fabrications 05500 – 1 



B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 

3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with 

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 


A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint 

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats 

are compatible with one another. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. 

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, 

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in 

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 


2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials 

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS 

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 6061-T6. 

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T6. 

2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior 

use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 , 

Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 

B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with hex nuts, 

ASTM A 563 ; and, where indicated, flat washers. 




C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, 

where indicated, flat washers. 

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being 

fastened is indicated to be galvanized. 

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying 

with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 

3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, 

complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as 

needed for fastening to inserts. 


A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 

compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units 

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain 

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius 

of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on 

exposed surfaces. 

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or 

otherwise impairing work. 

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no 

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent 

surface. 

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or 

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head 

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude 

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 




H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, 

and similar items. 

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring 

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with 

integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches , with a minimum 6-inch 

embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 

24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to 

complete the Work. 

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise 

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive 

adjacent construction. 

1. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. 

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 

2.8 METAL LADDERS 

A. General: 

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. 

B. Aluminum Ladders: 


following: 

a. ACL Industries, Inc. 

b. O'Keeffe's Inc. 

c. Precision Ladders, LLC. 

d. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. 

2. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches 

deep, 3/4 inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick. 

4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch deep and not less than 1/8 inch 

thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 

5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or 

brackets and aluminum rivets. 

6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating, 

supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 3/4 

inch in least dimension. 

7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or 

bolted aluminum brackets. 

8. Provide minimum 72-inch- high, hinged security door with padlock hasp at foot of ladder 

to prevent unauthorized ladder use. 

2.9 LADDER SAFETY CAGES 




A. General: 

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with 

stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet 

o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches o.c. 

between primary hoops. 

3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or 

with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Aluminum Ladder Safety Cages: 

1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch flat bar hoops. 

2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch flat bar hoops. 

3. Vertical Bars: 1/4-by-2-inch flat bars secured to each hoop. 

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into 

surrounding surface. 

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel 

and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint 

adhesion. 

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded 

in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

B. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 

0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal 

fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges 

and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and 

levels. 




B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are 

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal 

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for 

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, 

and other connectors. 

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, 

masonry, or similar construction. 

E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with 

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 

1. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, 

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. 


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. 

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 





SECTION 05511 - METAL STAIRS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 

2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs (Stair S-2 only). 


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and 

the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. . 

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. . 

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to 

loads specified above. 

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, 

whichever is less. 

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the 

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 


A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 

1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. 

2. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes. 

3. Abrasive nosings. 

4. Paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 



HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP No CS141E 

Metal Stairs 

05511 - 1

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified 

professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers 

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed 

Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless 

more stringent requirements are indicated. 

1. Preassembled Stairs: Service class. 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 


A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint 

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats 

are compatible with one another. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items 

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on 

required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 



A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without 

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). 




Metal Stairs 

05511 - 2

C. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 . 

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless 


E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25 , unless 

another grade is required by design loads; exposed. 

F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30 , unless 

another grade is required by design loads. 

G. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, structural steel, Grade 33 , unless 

another grade is required by design loads. 

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T6. 

B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 

2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS (STAIR S-2 ONLY) 

A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of 

aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary 

to accurately fit openings or conditions. 


following: 

a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. 

b. Balco Inc. 

c. Safe-T-Metal Company, Inc. 

2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, [3 inches ] [4 inches ] wide without lip. 

3. Configuration: Cross-hatched angle-shaped units, same depth as bar-grating treads and 

1 to 1-1/2 inches wide. 

B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard 

with manufacturer. 

C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete. 

2.5 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or 

ASTM F 1941 , Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior 

walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A ; with hex nuts, 

ASTM A 563 ; and, where indicated, flat washers. 

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 ; and, 

where indicated, flat washers. 




Metal Stairs 

05511 - 3

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to 

be shop primed with zinc-rich primer. 

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 . 

E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 . 

F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 . 

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 . 

H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of 

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit 

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing 

according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 , Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 



welded. 

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. 

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in- 

Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day 

compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, 

aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, 

moisture, or cleaning materials. 


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts,[ railings,] clips, 

brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and 

platforms on supporting structure. 

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units 

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and 

coordinated installation. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius 






Metal Stairs 

05511 - 4

D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or 

otherwise impairing work. 

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 

F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint 

Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed. 

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners 

where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) 

screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep 

holes where water may accumulate. 

2.8 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. Alfab, Inc. 

2. American Stair, Inc. 

3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). 

B. Stair Framing: 

1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. 

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing 

members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and 

headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 

C. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from 

steel sheet of thickness [needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 

0.067 inch ] [indicated]. 

1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated [hot]-rolled steel sheet[ unless otherwise indicated]. 

2. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld 

brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting, or bolting. 

3. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. 

4. Attach abrasive nosings to risers. 

5. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with 

reinforced concrete during fabrication. 

6. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as 

subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing. 




Metal Stairs 

05511 - 5

a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal under surfaces 

to produce smooth soffits. 

2.9 STAIR RAILINGS (STAIR S-2 ONLY) 

A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, 

dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, 

and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 

1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- square posts. 

2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear. 

B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at 

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at 

connections, including at fittings. 

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 

welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed. 

C. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 

1. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. 

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature 

for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire 

bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of 

components. 

E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends 

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. 

G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, 

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other 

work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and 

other ferrous-metal components. 

3. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, 

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and 

concrete construction. 

H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where 

needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to 

suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation 

and overstressing of substrate. 

2.10 FINISHES 



B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. 




Metal Stairs 

05511 - 6

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with 

minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and 

environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 

1. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with 

galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise 

indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and 

Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 



A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary 

for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and 

masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. 

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal 

stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established 

lines and levels and free of rack. 

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete 


D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, 

masonry, or similar construction. 

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are 

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. 

G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 3 Section "Cast-in- 

Place Concrete." 

1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on 

tread width. 

3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS 

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space 

posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each 

direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 

2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail 

ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts. 





Metal Stairs 

05511 - 7


abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop 



B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. 





Metal Stairs 

05511 - 8

SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Aluminum pipe railings. 


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified 

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable 

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 

1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate 

tensile strength divided by 1.95. 

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 

2. Railing brackets. 

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, 

posts, and balusters. 

2. Fittings and brackets. 

3. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, 

post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. 


& Alterations to the Customer Support Bldg. 

HMM 239903 / ECUA CIP CS141E 

Pipe and Tube Railings 

05521 - 1

a. Show method of connecting members at intersections. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified 

professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with 

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 

1.5 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING 

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items 

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 

B. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support 

railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 


1. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings: 


a. ATR Technologies, Inc. 

b. Kee Industrial Products, Inc. 

c. Moultrie Manufacturing Company. 

d. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. 

e. Tri Tech, Inc. 

f. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller 

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as 

supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 ALUMINUM 

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and 

finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability 

properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required. 

B. Extruded Structural Pipe: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6. 





05521 - 2

1. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 , Alloy 6061-T6. 

D. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247 , Alloy 6061-T6. 

E. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 2-inch woven-wire mesh, made from 

0.162-inch nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM B 211 , Alloy 6061-T94. 

2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide the following: 

1. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and 

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of 

construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. 

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching 

them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless 


D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of 

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit 

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing 

according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 , Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 



welded. 

1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to 

be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. 



A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, 

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to 

support structural loads. 

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and 

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly 

mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain 

structural value of joined pieces. 





05521 - 3

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius 



D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide 

weep holes where water may accumulate. 

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with nonwelded connections unless otherwise indicated. 

H. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. 

Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is 

manufacturer's standard splicing method. 

I. Form changes in direction as follows: 

1. by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings. 

J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain 

cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or 

otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. 

K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends 

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. 

M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, 

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant 

fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural 

supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 

N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry 

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 

Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 

O. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-by- 

1/2-by-1/8-inch metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames from same metal as railings 

in which they are installed. 

1. Orient wire mesh with wires horizontal and vertical. 

2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL 







05521 - 4

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of 

railings. 


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 



A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify 

that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate 

reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in 

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or 

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other 

means without further cutting or fitting. 

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet . 

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel 

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet . 

C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, 

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS 

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing 

components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored 

to match finish of railings. 

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than 

required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 

inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint 

within 6 inches of post. 

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS 

A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by 

conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 





05521 - 5

1. For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this 

purpose. 

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS 

A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets 

with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate 

brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 

1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 

2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural 

loads. 

B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 

1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger 

or lag bolts. 

2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 

3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into [fire-retardant-treated ]wood 

backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 


A. Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water. 


A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective 

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of 

Substantial Completion. 






05521 - 6

SECTION 05580 – ARCHITECTURAL METAL COLUMN COVERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Column covers. 


A. Delegated Design: Design exterior decorative formed metal items, including comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance: Decorative formed metal items, including anchors and connections, 

shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without 

exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials involved and without exhibiting 

permanent deformation in any components: 

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals 

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal. 

1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work including 

internal post structure for solid support of column cover, 

2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, 

finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. 


A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in 

other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations 

and attachments, and necessary clearances. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to 

that indicated for this Project and with a documented record of successful in-service 

performance for a minimum of five (5) years, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce 

required units. 

B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Architectural Metal Column Covers 05580 – 1 




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, rain leaders and other 

construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication 

and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting 

drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete 

inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or 

masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 

B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall 

assemblies, flashings and trim provide proper clearances with adjacent construction such as 

stair railings and doors. 


2.1 SHEET METAL 

A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, 

or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. 

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed. 


A. Sealants, Interior: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834; 

of type and grade required to seal joints in decorative formed metal; and as recommended in 

writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 

B. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as 

recommended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for strength and 

compatibility in fabricated items. 

C. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise 

indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined. 

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items and for 

attaching them to other work. 

D. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads, provide 

chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a 

load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load 

imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a 

qualified independent testing agency. 

E. Nonstructural Anchors: For applications not indicated to comply with design loads, provide 

powder-actuated fasteners, metal expansion sleeve anchors or metal-impact expansion 

anchors of type, size, and material necessary for type of load and installation indicated, as 

recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 




F. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 

G. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully bond metal to 

metal and that will prevent telegraphing and oil canning and is compatible with substrate and 

noncombustible after curing. 

H. Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating. 

2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS 

A. Manufacturer’s standard primer for interior applications. 


2.4 COLUMN COVERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that 

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. ATAS International, Inc. 

2. Ceilings Plus. 

3. Construction Services, Inc. 

4. Couturier Iron Craft, Inc. 

5. Firestone Metal Products, LLC; Una-Clad. 

6. Fry Reglet Corporation. 

7. Hi-Tech Metals, Inc. 

8. Metal Sales & Service, Inc.; Metalwerks Division. 

9. MM Systems Corporation. 

10. Pittcon Industries. 

B. Basis of Design: Fry Reglet “Series KS”, or equivalent, Soft “V” mechanical key-slot design to 

hold covers in place 

1. Diameter: 24 inch (half-round and round) 

2. Ceiling Horizontal Joint type: Through ceiling 

3. Intermediate Horizontal Joint type: Inset reveal joint 

4. Base Horizontal Joint type: Fixed Inset base reveal 

C. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated 

below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will engage continuous mounting clips. 

1. Steel Sheet: Thickness required to comply with performance requirements. 

a. Finish: Powder coat. 

2. Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after 

fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view. 

3. Form returns at vertical joints to accommodate backer rod and sealant. 

4. Fabricate column covers with hairline horizontal V-joints produced by forming returns on 

mating ends of column cover sections. Locate horizontal joints as indicated. 

5. Fabricate column covers with reveals at horizontal joints produced by forming returns on 

mating ends of column cover sections. Provide snap-in metal filler strips at reveals 

matching reveals at vertical joints. Locate horizontal joints as indicated. 

6. Fabricate base, ceiling ring to contrast with column covers. 

7. Fabricate with calk stop/stiffener ring. 




2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 



B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible. 

After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet 

finish. 

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are 

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations 

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are 

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to 

minimize contrast. 

2.6 STEEL SHEET FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove 

dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, 

if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast 

Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 

B. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic 

coating applied over it. 

C. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 

thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film thickness not less 

than 1.5 mils . Prepare, treat, and coat metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative 

formed metal. 

B. Coordinate column cover locations with existing roof drain scupper locations and rain leader 

piping. 



A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent 

construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal. 




B. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and 

openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. 

C. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work progresses, to make 

interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or lightproof as applicable to type of 

fabrication indicated. 



abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop 



3.4 SCHEDULE 

A. Column covers are to be detachable to access piping being concealed along the existing brick 

wall. Sections to be a maxiumum of 12’-0” height. Provide additional sections to achieve 

finished heights above 12’-0”. 

B. Provide additional bracing components as necessary to stiffen substructure and insure solid 

midspan bracings and connections. Coordinate with General contractor. 





SECTION 05811 - ARCHITECTURAL JOINT SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior wall expansion control systems. 


A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified. Include plans, elevations, 

sections, details, splices, blockout requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams 

showing entire route of each expansion control system. Where expansion control systems 

change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components 

interconnect. 

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of expansion control system indicated, full width by 6 

inches long in size. 

C. Product Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following 

information in tabular form: 

1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion control system. 

2. Nominal joint width. 

3. Movement capability. 

4. Classification as thermal or seismic. 

5. Materials, colors, and finishes. 

6. Product options. 



A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, materials, and operation 

indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 

1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline 

mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other 

materials. 

2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, 

cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion 

control systems. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of exterior wall[ and soffit] expansion control systems with 

roof expansion control systems to ensure that wall transitions are watertight. Roof expansion 

joint assemblies are specified in Division 7 Sections. 




Architectural Joint Systems 

05811 - 1

2.2 EXTERIOR WALL EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. EMSEAL Corporation. 

2. Tremco Incorporated. 

3. Watson Bowman Acme Corp.; a BASF Construction Chemicals business. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

C. Wall-to-Wall: 

a. Nominal Joint Width: 1-inch. 

b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent. 

c. Type of Movement: Thermal. 

2. Type: Preformed cellular foam. 

D. Soffit-to-Soffit: 

a. Foam Material: Pre-Compressed microshphere-modified acrylic-impregnated 

expanding cellular foam sealant backing. 

1. Design Criteria: 

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

a. Nominal Joint Width: 1-inch. 

b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+75 percent. 

c. Type of Movement: Thermal. 

2. Type: Preformed cellular foam. 

a. Foam Material: Pre-Compressed microshphere-modified acrylic-impregnated 

expanding cellular foam sealant backing. 

1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range color. 

2.3 ACCESSORIES 

A. Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier consisting of a continuous, 

waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint below the primary 

cover. 

1. Drain- Tube Assemblies: Equip moisture barrier with drain tubes and seals to direct 

collected moisture to drain. 

2.4 MATERIALS 

A. Cellular Foam Seals: Extruded, compressible foam designed to function under compression. 





05811 - 2

B. Moisture Barrier: Pre-Compressed flexible bellows silicone material. 

C. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard adhesives compatible with material in contact, as 

indicated or required for complete installations. 


A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of 

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 



A. Examine surfaces where expansion control systems will be installed for installation tolerances 

and other conditions affecting performance of work. 



A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Coordinate and furnish instructions for installing expansion control systems. Provide fasteners 

of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure 

attachment of expansion control systems. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion 

control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

B. Foam Seals: Install with adhesive recommended by manufacturer. 

C. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated 

termination devices. 


A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When 

protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's 







05811 - 3

SECTION 06100 – ROUGH CARPENTRY 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Description of scope and contents: 




system specified in the Section, does not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to provide 

the same. 

3. To provide installation of all items, including delivery, dispersing into the proper locations 

within the building and affixing in place. 

4. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in their craft who will perform their work 

in a professional manner and will leave the premises safe, orderly and clean. 


Conditions and Division 1 Specification System, apply to this Section. 



necessary for completion of this section. 






1. Lumber for blocking & misc uses 


A. Framing Connectors and Supports: Submit manufacturer's standard data demonstrating 

compliance with building code requirements. 

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified by minimum allowable unit stress, submit: 

1. Statement of species and grade selected for each application. 

2. Grading agency's grading rules showing allowable design values accepted by the Board of 

Review of American Lumber Standards Committee. 

A. Treated Wood: Treating plant's instructions for use, including storage, cutting, and finishing. 

1. Pressure preservative treatment: Treating plant's certification of compliance with 

specified standards and stating process employed and preservative retention values. 

a. Treatment for above-ground use: Certification of kiln drying after treatment. 


2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Rough Carpentry 06100 – 1 



A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes are 

specifically required. 

1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S). 

2. Moisture content: S-dry or MC19 (19 percent maximum moisture content). 

B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work 

specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited to 

blocking, nailers, etc. 

1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S-dry). 

2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade. 

3. Boards: Construction, 2 common, or No. 2 grade. 

2.2 BOARDS - LESS THAN 2 INCHES THICKNESS 

A. Moisture Content: S-dry (19 percent maximum). 

B. Surfacing: S4S. 

2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS 

A. Construction Panels/Plywood: Miscellaneous uses. 

1. Electrical/telephone panel backer: APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, Treating Grade 

fire-retardant treated. 


A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and where 

wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to weather. 

B. Framing Connectors and Supports: Prefabricated, formed steel units; hot-dip galvanized finish 

unless otherwise indicated; type and size as required; approved by applicable codes. 

C. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Glass fiber insulation strips; uncompressed thickness, 1 inch (1/32 inch 

compressed); width to match sill members. 

2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS 

A. Aboveground Lumber: AWPB LP-2 (waterborne preservatives). 

1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content. 

2. Treat the following: 

a. Wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 

b. Wood in contact with masonry or concrete. 

c. Wood within 18 inches of grade. 

d. Other members indicated. 

B. Ground Contact Treatment: AWPB LP-22. 

1. Treat the following: 

a. Wood in contact with ground 




C. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot-dip galvanized steel (ASTM A153). 


3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 

A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially available 

lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or appearance of the 

work. 

B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level. 

C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards. 

D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler. 

3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 

A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, nailers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for support 

of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required size. Provide 

in locations required by other work. 

B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading. 





SECTION 06402 – INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Description of scope and contents: 




functional system specified in the Section, does not relieve the Contractor of the 

obligation to provide the same. 

3. To provide installation of all items, including delivery, dispersing into the proper locations 

within the building and affixing in place. 




Conditions and Division 1 Specification System, apply to this Section. 



services necessary for completion of this section. 






1. Plastic laminate cabinets. 

2. Plastic laminate countertops 

3. Interior standing and running trim. 

4. Utility shelving 

5. Granite top caps (limited) 

6. Solid surface countertop 

7. Handrail at monumental stair 

8. Solid surface window stools. 

9. Wooden stair treads 


A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for 

installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork 

installation. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including cabinet hardware, accessories, trim 

profiles, handrail brackets, medium-density fiberboard, particleboard, plywood, high-pressure 

decorative laminates, solid surface materials and stone, as applicable. 

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Interior Architectural Woodwork 06402 –1 



B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

1. Show details full size. 

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed 

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap 

dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork, as applicable. 

C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units 

showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material 

indicated. 

1. High Pressure and thermal fused melamine decorative laminate colors, patterns and 

textures for exposed and semi-exposed materials. 

2. Solid surfacing materials, 6 inch square 

3. For each species and profile of trim with non-factory applied finish as specified, minimum 

6-inch length. To be used as control sample. 

4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 

Note: Samples of other materials shall be made available upon request. 

D. Samples for Verification: Lumber with transparent finish, not less than 6 inches by 12 inches 

long for each species and cut. 

1. Approved sample will be used as the project control sample. 

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished 

comply with requirements. 

F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project 

names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information 

specified 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions on cleaning and touch-up repair. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing architectural woodwork and 

manufacturing products similar to that indicated for this Project with a minimum 5-year 

documented record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production 

capacity to produce required units. 

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified firm to assume undivided responsibility for production 

and installation of interior architectural woodwork (including cabinets) and plastic laminate 

countertops 

C. Woodwork Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, 

finishes, and other requirements. 

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, 

provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined 




y testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate 

markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, 

where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be 

concealed from view after installation. 

E. Mock-Up: Upon request the fabricator is to provide full-size samples of both wall and base 

cabinets, countertops or other casework or woodwork for evaluation and approval prior to 

fabrication. Samples shall remain with the Architect/Owner, or as indicated, until completion of 

project to ensure compliance with specifications. 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work and similar operations that could damage 

woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than 

installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements 

specified for installation areas. 


A. Humidity and Temperature Controls: 

1. Advise contractor of requirements for maintaining heating, cooling and ventilation in installation 

areas as required to reach relative humidity necessary to maintain optimum 

moisture content. Maintain required conditions from date of delivery through the remainder 

of the construction period. 

2. Store products only in areas where ambient conditions required can be and are maintained. 

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged or mold damaged. 

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 

C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress 

to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field 

measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related 

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be 

supported and installed as indicated. 





2.1 MATERIALS- GENERAL 

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each 

type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Softwood Lumber: PS20; maximum moisture content 12 percent according to ASTM D4442 and 

ASTM D4444. 

B. Hardwood Lumber: FS MM-L-736; maximum moisture content 12 percent according to ASTM 

D4442 and ASTM D4444: 

C. Softwood Plywood: PS1; core material of particle board; maximum moisture content 12 percent 

according to ASTM D4442 and ASTM D4444; of grain type sufficient to receive opaque finish. 

D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA HP-83 core material of particle board; maximum moisture content 

12 percent according to ASTM D4442 and ASTM D4444; of grain type sufficient to receive 

transparent finish. 

E. Wood Species for transparent finish: White oak (To be verified) 

F. Wood Particle board: ANSI A208.1, density 50 pounds per cubic foot, sanded faces; maximum 

moisture content 12 percent according to ASTM D4442 and ASTM D4444. 

G. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, density 48 pounds per cubic foot, 

sanded faces; maximum moisture content 12 percent according to ASTM D4442 and ASTM 

D4444. 

H. Hardboard: PS58 pressed wood fiber with resin binder; tempered grade. 

I. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or 

medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI 208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally 

fused, melamine impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 

J. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD3, 0.050 inch general purpose, 0.028 inch vertical grade; color, 

pattern, surface finish to be selected from manufacturer’s full product line, Formica, Wilson Art, 

Nevamar, or equivalent. 

K. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with 

material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a 

precoated finish, Corian, Fountainhead, Gibraltar, or equivalent. 

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with 

requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response 

characteristics specified. 

1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced 

woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise 

adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from 

untreated materials. 




3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. 

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency 


B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance 

requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment 

type: 

1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 

2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 

3. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and 

drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from 

drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated 

woodwork. 

4. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. 

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from 

softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to 

achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per 

ASTM E 84. 

1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the 

following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi ; modulus of elasticity, 

300,000 psi ; internal bond, 80 psi ; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 

and 225 lbf , respectively. 

2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except 

for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi ; modulus of 

elasticity, 250,000 psi ; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on 

face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf , respectively. 

3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by 

Weyerhaeuser. 

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural 

cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware. 

1. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing 

BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard. 

2. Finishes on exposed hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.18. 

a. Satin chromium plated: BHMA 626, unless otherwise noted. 

3. Concealed hardware: Manufacturer's standard finish, complying with applicable requirements 

of BHMA A156.9. 

4. Frameless Concealed Hinges: Frameless, totally concealed style (European Style), 

self-closing, opening 170 degrees. 

5. Pulls: As specified in the schedule at the end of this specification. 

6. Drawer slides: Side-mounted, Typical drawer, 100-pound capacity, full extension, zincplated 

steel drawer slides with steel ball-bearing rollers; positive pull-out stop, 

self-closing, lift-out feature. File drawers, 150-pound capacity. 

7. Cabinet-mounted shelf supports: Drilled holes, at 1 inch spacing, with shelf support clips 

for each shelf indicated. 

8. Wall Mounted Shelving: Knape & Vogt # 85ANO double-slot standards and brackets, or 

equivalent, unless noted otherwise. 

9. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121. 

10. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041. 




11. Grommets for Wire Management: 3 inch molded plastic grommets and matching plastic 

caps with slot for wire passage. Color to be determined. 

12. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product 

class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 

B. Hardware Quantities: 

1. Hinges: Two per door up to 36 inches high; three per door over 36 inches high, four for 

door over 72 inches high. 

2. Pulls: One per door, drawer. 

3. Drawer slides, side mounted: Two per drawer. 

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less 

than 15 percent moisture content. Fire retardant-treated where specified. 

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure 

anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face 

of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or 

lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 

C. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following 

limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 

2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom grade interior woodwork 

complying with the referenced quality standard. 

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood 

moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation 

areas. 

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before 

fabrication. 

D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius 

indicated for the following: 

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or /less: 

1/16 inch. 

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 

3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch. 

E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum 

extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary 

for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for 

scribing, trimming, and fitting. 




1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will 

be complete. 

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be 

removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check 

measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings 

before disassembling for shipment. 

F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing 

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or 

roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts 

to remove splinters and burrs. 

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 

2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. 

B. Wood Species and Cut: White Oak, plain sawn (To be verified). 

C. Matching: selected for compatible grain and color 

D. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 

Finger jointing not allowed. 

E. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for 

width or thickness. 

F. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, 

except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 

G. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field 

assembly. 

H. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for 

field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together 

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINET AND COUNTERTOP FABRICATION 

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets. 

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. 

C. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and 

drawers, unless located directly under tops. 

D. Cores at Countertops and Splashes to be 3/4-inch thick exterior grade plywood with 1-1/2 inch 

thick built up front edge. All exposed corners shall have a 2-inch radius. 

E. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with matching hardwood edging. Use full-length pieces 

only. 

F. Cabinetwork Doors: Minimum 3/4 inch thick. 




G. Apply plastic laminate finish in full un-interrupted sheets consistent with the manufactured sizes. 

Corners and joints: Hairline. Slightly bevel splices, splices shall not be over knee space or sink 

cabinets. Post-form all edges of chemical resistant laminates. 

H. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. 

I. Shop assemble items for delivery to site in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through 

building openings. 

J. Sand Work smooth. Set exposed nails and screws. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw 

indentations and leave ready to receive site applied finishes. On items to receive transparent 

finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for 

applied finishes. 

K. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. 

L. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and 

fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint or seal edges with a 

coat of varnish contact surfaces of cutouts. 

M. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop 

substrate. 

N. Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. 

O. Coordinate requirements with equipment furnished by others 

2.8 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS 

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops. 

B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless otherwise noted. 

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solidsurfacing 

material complying with the following requirements: 

1. Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by manufacturer's designations for these 

characteristics. 

D. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise 

indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturers written recommendations for 

adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 

E. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop, when applicable. 

2.9 GRANITE TOPCAPS 

A. Material Thickness: 2 cm with square edge detail. 

B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: “Uba Tuba” black/green color; polished finish, or other 

equivalent finish/colors within same price group. 

C. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise 

indicated. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, 

fabrication, and finishing. 




2.10 HANDRAILS AND STAIR TREADS (Monumental Stair Only) 

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 800. 

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White Oak (To be verified) 

C. Finishes for Stair Parts: 

1. Handrails: Transparent. 

2. Treads: Transparent 

3. Abrasive tread strip: color to be selected 


3.1 INSPECTION 

A. The installer must examine the job site and the conditions under which the work in this section 

is to be performed and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not 

proceed with work under this section until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a 

manner acceptable to the installer. 

B. Beginning of installation means installer’s acceptance of existing conditions. 


A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas for a 

minimum of 24 hours before installation unless longer conditioning is recommended by 

manufacturer. 

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and 

complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming. 

C. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 


A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with the requirements for the same grade 

specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. 

B. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately 

seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 

1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. 

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged 

finish at cuts. 

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply 

with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used 

to install woodwork. 




F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use 

fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with 

woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 

G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length 

pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use 

pieces less than 24 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. 

Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and 

finish same as wood base, if finished. 

2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 

3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch 

in 96 inches. 

4. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across 

joints. 

5. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. 

6. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent 

movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill 

holes. 

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are 

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide 

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a 

straight line. 

2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish, if applicable. 

3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 

inches o.c. with appropriate fasteners. 

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other 

supports into underside of countertop. 

1. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written 

recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints 

smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from 

a straight line. 

3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 

4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section 

"Joint Sealants." 

J. Stairs: Install stair treads no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position. 


A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during remainder of the 

construction period. 

B. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior 

finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no 

evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 

C. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 




D. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to 

restore damaged or soiled areas. 

PART 4 - SCHEDULE 

A. Provide work of this Section for all general woodwork and casework shown on floor plans and 

elevations. Casework throughout this project to be as indicated: Plastic laminate clad casework 

with plastic laminate countertops unless noted otherwise. 

B. Refer to elevations and enlarged plans for notes regarding special conditions or requirements 

and for any accessory pieces or equipment to be included with casework. Coordinate with other 

trades for any fixtures or accessories to be incorporated into the casework. 

C. Refer to Sheets A7.1 through A7.5 for interior elevations indicating locations of casework and 

standing and running trim. Refer to Sheet A10.2 for the Millwork Schedule and A10.1, A10.2 

and A11.1 for casework details. 

D. Running and standing trim shown on interior elevations and sections to be transparent finish to 

match Sanfoot Architectural Wood Wall covering, White oak, manufacturer pre-finished sample 

unless noted otherwise. (Wood species to be verified) 

NOTE: All wood finishes throughout the project to match the selected finish and a 

control sample shall be submitted for approval by the Architect during the submittal 

phase. 

E. Reception Desk Lobby 101 : Provide the following (Refer to interior elevations and casework 

details): 

1. 2cm granite cap, as indicated, square edge, “Uba Tuba” black/green color; polished 

finish, or other equivalent finish/colors within same price group. 

2. 24” diameter decorative pedestal to be clad in Wilsonart Decorative metals, Type 419, 

Pattern #6256 “Brite Brushed Natural Aluminum”, or equivalent. 

3. ½” thick tempered glass with polished edge, all sides. Refer to enlarged plans for shape 

and dimensions. 

F. Provide ½ inch thick solid surface window stool with eased edge at all exterior windows unless 

noted otherwise, refer to detail for profile. 

G. Provide fire-retardant treated wood framing and blocking as noted on the casework details. 

H. Stair treads, handrail and top cap of guardrail for monumental stair in Lobby 101 to be White 

oak solids (species to be verified), compatible to specified finish for project consistency. Refer 

to millwork schedule. 

I. Refer to Stair Plans, Sections and Detail Sheet A5.1 and their referenced details for 

monumental stair tread and handrail information. 

J. Provide decorative hardware, Basis of design: Hafele Stainless Steel handles, Series 

117.05.640, or equivalent. Reduce handle lengths for smaller cabinet widths as necessary. 

Provide sample during submittal phase for approval. 

K. Toilet Room Vanities: Provide solid surface countertops, Corian Grade “C” or equivalent. Refer 

to casework details 




L. Provide solid surface countertops and window sills as specified, Corian grade “B” or equivalent 

for all scheduled locations. 

M. Where keyboards are indicated on interior elevations and/or plan, provide Systematix 

#PHPLF17T, or equivalent, Ergonomic keyboard platform with swivel mousing station, lever free 

lift and lock mechanism, 9” vertical adjustment (above/below worksurface); 30 degree swivel; 

lifetime warranty 

N. Reception Desk Lobby 101: Provide retractable CPU holder, Systematix #DCPUR, or 

equivalent, and single screen monitor arm Systematix #7915, or equivalent. Owner/ end user to 

advise of final location during casework installation. 

O. Provide a minimum of 10 wire grommets at Board room console desk; satin chrome finish. 

Final locations to be determined in the field during casework installation.. 

P. Provide wire grommets spaced every 36” where kneespace worksurfaces occur. Plastic with 

cover. Final locations to be determined in the field during casework installation. 

Q. Reference Interior elevations for elevator and door surrounds. Provide Fry-Reglet Reverse “V” 

reveal molding. Coordinate with installer for preparation of substrate for a high-quality final 

product. 

R. Provide adjustable shelving where indicated. 

S. Provide 2x wood frame at permanently mounted projection screen behind Board Room console 

desk. Refer to interior elevation. Wood species/ finish to match approved control sample. 

NOTE: All interior finish color selections to be chosen upon receipt of ALL complete interior 

finish submittals & shop drawings once they are reviewed and approved by HMM. 

Upon the Owner’s review and approval, a Color Schedule will be issued 





SECTION 07115 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing applied to the following 

surfaces: 

1. Exterior face of elevator foundation walls. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of 

application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course. 

B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source 

from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of 

primary materials. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written 

instructions. 


2.1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Applied Cut-Back Asphalt Liquid: Solvent-based asphaltic dampproofing compound of 

spraying (liquid) consistency, nonfibrated, meeting requirements of ASTM D41. 

1. Acceptable products include the following: 

a. “#108 Asphalt Primer”; Karnak Corporation. 

b. “Hydrocide 648”; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 

c. “Sealmastic Spray Mastic”; W. R. Meadows, Inc. 


A. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. 



A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface 

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work 

have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Bituminous Dampproofing 07115 - 1 




A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being 

stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering 

and clogging weep holes and drains. 

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and 

apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. 

3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are 

indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve coverages 

indicated. 

B. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of 

exterior masonry cavity walls. 

1. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, 

and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 

2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that 

interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting 

veneer. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. 

END OF SECTION 07115 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Bituminous Dampproofing 07115 - 2 



SECTION 07130 – SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 



A. Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of water. 


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating 

substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints 

and cracks, sheet flashings, other termination conditions. 

C. Samples: For the following products: 

1. 4-by- 4-inch square of waterproofing sheet. 

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting 

test results of waterproofing for compliance with requirements, based on comprehensive testing 

of current waterproofing formulations. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has experience with waterproofing 

manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

C. Mockups: Apply waterproofing to roof mockup of building as shown on drawings to 

demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and execution quality 

1. If Architect determines mockup does not comply with requirements, remove and reapply 

waterproofing until mockup is approved. 

2. Approved mockup on roof may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time 

of Substantial Completion. 


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with 

manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for 

storing. 

B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and 

within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. 

C. Remove and replace materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. 

D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07130 – 1 



E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate 

temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a 

damp or wet substrate. 

1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. 

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written waterproofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form 

acceptable to Owner signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of 

five years. 



A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products or 

equivalent product: 

1. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet Waterproofing (peel & stick): 

a. W. R. Grace & Co.; Ice & Water Shield 

b. Protecto-Wrap Company, Rainproof-60 High Performance Roof Underlayment 

c. GAF Materials Corporation; StormGuard Film-Surfaced Leak Barrier. 

d. TAMKO; TW-60. 

2.2 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING 

A. Rubberized-Asphalt Sheet: 60-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized 

asphalt laminated to a 4-mil-thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side. 

1. Physical Properties: As follows, measured per standard test methods referenced: 

a. Tensile Strength: 250-psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. 

b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. 

c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. 

d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. 

e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. 

f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. 

g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 

70 deg F; ASTM D 570. 

h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method. 

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended 

use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 




B. Primer: Liquid waterborne or solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer 

of sheet waterproofing material. 

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by 

manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. 




requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 

1. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by 

plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 


3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide 

clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. 

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray 

affecting other construction. 

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other 

penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from substrates. 

D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and 

other voids. 

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints 

and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 

3.3 RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET APPLICATION 

A. Install self-adhering sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and 

recommendations in ASTM D 6135. 

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be 

covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and 

maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and 

stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING 

A. Do not permit foot traffic on unprotected membrane. 

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. 




3.5 SCHEDULE 

A. Self-Adhered Membrane application includes application to the following: 

1. Provide over entire roof area (except flat roof areas and waterproofing between concrete 

slabs) applied from the bottom of the break metal fascia roof sheathing up to the top edge 

of the ridge and return. Cover the length of the ridge with an additional separate piece of 

the membrane, one foot wide, centered on the ridge. Include the elevator penthouse and 

dormer roof areas. 

2. Provide continuous at fascia and soffit detail as indicated on the drawings. 

NOTE: Refer to specification Section 07542 for roofing on flat roof and Section 07116, for 

waterproofing beneath concrete pavers on elevated concrete decks for other types of specified 

waterproofing. 





SECTION 07210 – BUILDING INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 

2. Loose-fill insulation. 

3. Concealed building insulation for fire stopping 




A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for each product. 


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, 

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's 

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and 

concealment. 

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project 

site before installation time. 

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each 

area of construction. 


2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION 

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (for Cavity Wall insulation): ASTM C 578, of type and 

minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped 

indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Building Insulation 07210 - 1 


HMM 239903 / ECUA No. CS141E

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 


the following: 

a. DiversiFoam Products. 

b. Dow Chemical Company (The). 

c. Owens Corning. 

d. Pactiv Building Products. 

2. Type VI, 40 psi . 

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation 

securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 

C. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation (for Metal Roof Panels): ASTM C 1289, Type I, 

Class 1, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, 

respectively, per ASTM E 84. 




a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. 

b. Dow Chemical Company (The). 

c. Rmax, Inc. 

D. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation 

securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 

2.2 LOOSE-FILL INSULATION 

A. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for 

poured application; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per 

ASTM E 84. 

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS 

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of 

holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in 

place. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 


a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. 

b. Gemco; Spindle Type. 

2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length 

to suit depth of insulation indicated. 

B. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanizedsteel 

sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation 

securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 



a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150, SC150. 

b. Gemco; Dome-Cap, R-150, S-150. 




2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to 

ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: 

a. Crawl spaces. 

b. Ceiling plenums. 

c. Attic spaces. 

d. Where indicated. 

C. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to 

substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 



a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. 

b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive. 

2.4 BATT INSULATION MANUFACTURER 



1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Johns Manville. 

3. Owens Corning. 

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread 

and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing 

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 



A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 

applications indicated. 

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, 

rain, or snow at any time. 

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions 

and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard 

thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness 

indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION 

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. 

both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation 

between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press 

units firmly against inside substrates. 




1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall 

ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry 

Assemblies." 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written 

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use 

mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 

B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or 

sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in 

completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation 

manufacturer. 

C. Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, 

but do not compact excessively. 

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where 

required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume 

equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 

3.4 Installation of Batt Insulation for Framed Construction 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written 

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use 

mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 

B. Fiber-Glass Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the 

following requirements: 

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If 

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a 

snug fit between ends. 

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between 

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or 

protected from contact with insulation. 

4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at 

vented eaves. 

5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches , support unfaced 

blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to 

flanges of metal studs. 

C. Installation of Insulation in Ceilings for Sound Attenuation 

1. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, extend 

insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions. 





SECTION 07241 – POLYMER-BASED EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Contractor to provide all materials, labor, and tools required to complete the installation of 


2. Any omission of reference to items required to complete the installation of products or 

systems of this section does not relieve the Contractor the obligation to provide same. 



4. Installation shall be accomplished by workers skilled in their craft that will perform their 










regulatory agency or body with jurisdiction 

B. This section includes the following: 

1. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS). 


A. Class PB EIFS: A non-load-bearing, exterior cladding system that consists of an insulation 

board attached mechanically to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base coat; and a textured 

protective finish coat. 


A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following: 

1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and 

supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other 

in-service conditions. 

2. Weather-tightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and 

assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration 

of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, 

including substrates, supporting construction, and interior finish. 

B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that 

comply with the following: 

1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-thick 

gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or 

loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, 

Method A. 

Emergency Operations Support Building Polymer-Based EIFS 07241 – 1 



2. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss 

after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. 

3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, 

checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other 

characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 

hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per either ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 155. 

4. Freeze-Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, 

blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components 

when viewed under 5 times magnification after 10 cycles per ICC-ES AC219. 

5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate, 

cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated 

according to ASTM D 3274. 

6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219. 

7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested 

per ICC-ES AC219. 

8. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch-thick 

gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the 

base coat to expanded-polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes 

at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, 

whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per 

EIMA 101.02. 

9. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1-inch-thick EIFS mounted on 1/2- 

inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, 

erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per 

ASTM D 2247. 

10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: Resist wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219. 

11. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC- 

ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330. 


A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of 

penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and 

anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other 

work. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For type of finish-coat color and texture indicated. 

1. Include similar Samples of joint sealants and exposed accessories involving color 

selection. 

D. Samples for Verification: 24-inch-square panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture 

indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including, an 

aesthetic reveal, a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected. 

1. Include sealants and exposed accessory. Samples to verify color selected. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer, and testing agency. 

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS and joint sealants 

comply with requirements. 

G. Material or Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for insulation 

and joint sealant, from manufacturer. 




H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for insulation, reinforcing mesh, joint sealant, and coating. 

I. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For joint sealants from sealant manufacturer 

indicating the following: 

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for 

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate 

preparation needed for adhesion. 

J. Field quality-control reports. 

K. Evaluation Reports: For exterior board sheathing, fasteners, adhesive membrane flashing, and 

EIFS (including insulation), from Florida Building Code 2007 Building or other authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

L. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified 

to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from 

sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following 

fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system 

components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire 

resistance per ASTM E 119. 

2. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. 

3. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259. 

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and 

finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or 

less, per ASTM E 84. 

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set 

quality standards for fabrication and installation. 

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of 

Substantial Completion. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly 

identifying products. 




B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct 

sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, 

and other causes. 

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 

2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating 

materials to Project site before installation time. 

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each 

area of construction. 


A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 

hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives 

or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be 

applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty 

requirements. 


A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall 

assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are 

protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other 

causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS. 





1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 

2. Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 

3. Sto Corp. 

4. or equivalent manufacturer 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Compatibility: Provide adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and 

finish-coat systems, sealants, vapor & water barrier, and accessories that are compatible with 

one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. 

1. Fasteners and Adhesives: Per manufacturer’s recommendation for horizontal attachment 

to concrete substrate as indicated on the drawing. 

2. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and 

polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat. 

B. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type II; EIFS 

manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded 

Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance 

and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: 




1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less 

than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. 

2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per 

ASTM E 84. 

3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in thickness 

indicated, but not more than 4 inches thick or less than thickness allowed by 

ASTM C 1397. 

C. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for 

compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained 

mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in.; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following: 

1. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 22 oz./sq. yd. over entire surface. 

2. Joint Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz./sq. yd. over heavy-duty reinforcing 

mesh. 

3. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: None. 

D. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the 

following: 

1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or 

natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use 

with portland cement. 

2. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion adhesive and 

manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement. 

3. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert 

fillers to which only water is added at Project site. 

4. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and inert fillers 

that is ready to use without adding other materials. 

E. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating with enhanced 

mildew resistance complying with the following: 

1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound 

stone particles, and fillers. 

2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

F. Water: Potable. 

G. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting 

of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected 

for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application 

indicated and a wind speed as shown on Structural Drawings. 

H. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply 

with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and 

complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and 

ASTM C 1063. 

2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended 

chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and 

other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in 

ASTM C 1481 and with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for products 

corresponding to description indicated below: 




1. Multicomponent, nonsag urethane sealant. 

2. Sealant with a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, 

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

B. Preformed Backer Rod Product: Provide backer rod compatible with adjacent materials and 

complying with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

C. Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range (to match EIFS color). 

2.4 MIXING 

A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. 

Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS 

manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by 

EIFS manufacturer or discard. 

2.5 PANEL FABRICATION 

A. EIFS Application: Apply EIFS to comply with requirements in "Trim Installation," "Insulation 

Installation," "Base-Coat Installation," and "Finish-Coat Installation" articles and as follows: 

1. Wrap base coat and reinforcing mesh at edges of panels and extend coverage not less 

than full thickness to cover edges of metal framing unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Continue finish coat around corners at edges of panels, unless otherwise indicated, and 

extend to location indicated for sealant application. Do not extend finish coat over 

surfaces where sealant will be applied. 

B. Source Quality Control: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and 

inspections indicated below and prepare test reports. 

1. Shop welds will be subject to testing and inspection. 

2. Testing and inspecting agency shall interpret tests and report whether tested Work 

complies with or deviates from requirements. 

3. Correct deficiencies in or replace EIFS prefabricated panels that test reports and 

inspections indicated do not comply with requirements. 

4. Additional testing and inspection, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to 

determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. 




requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 

2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 





A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. 

Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish 

coats on other work. 

B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during 

installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of substrates. 

C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain 

optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 

3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS 

as applicable to type of substrate indicated. 

3.4 TRIM INSTALLATION 

A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as 

indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of 

insulation. 

1. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 

2. Casing Bead: Use at other locations. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION 

A. Board Insulation: Mechanically attach and/or adhere insulation to substrate in compliance with 

ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the following: 

1. Mechanically attach and/or adhere insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS 

manufacturer's written instructions. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane 

of insulation. 

2. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented 

horizontally. 

3. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work laterally. 

4. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work from perimeter casing beads 

toward interior of panels if possible. 

5. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide. 

a. Mechanical Attachment: Offset joints of insulation from horizontal joints in 

sheathing. 

6. Miter ends at internal and external soffit corners. 

7. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, 

continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps 

greater than 1/16 inch, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without 

using adhesive or other material. 

8. Cut insulation to fit corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes 

complying with details indicated. 

9. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more 

than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun 

exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch . 

10. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit 

configured to produce grooves, and other features that comply with profiles and locations 

indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch. 

11. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 




12. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within EIFS 

and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps between 

casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining surfaces of width 

indicated. 

13. After installing insulation and before applying reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges 

with strip reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not 

less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 

14. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: 

a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, 

reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. 

b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between 

EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 

15. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not 

allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating lamina. 

B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as 

follows: 

1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS. 

2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other 

EIFS. 

3. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous soffits. 

4. Where panels abut one another. 

3.6 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION 

A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in thickness recommended in writing by 

EIFS manufacturer to comply with Large Missile Impact Requirements of the Florida Building 

Code. 

B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free 

installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or 

otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written 

instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, 

applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are 

not visible. 

1. Ultra High Impact Mesh. 

3.7 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION 

A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform 

appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color 

and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture 

variations. 

1. Texture: Fine sand texture. No swirl pattern will be accepted. 

C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS 

manufacturer. 

3.8 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 




A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable 

requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481. 

1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. 

2. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

3. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 

4. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent 

sealant from adhering to back of joint. 

5. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape 

immediately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal. 


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. EIFS Tests and Inspections: For the following: 

1. According to ICC-ES AC24. 

C. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified 

requirements. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials 

from other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. 





SECTION 07265 – UNDERSLAB VAPOR PROTECTION 

PART 1 — GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes integral pre-applied waterproofing membrane and vapor barrier that 

bonds to poured concrete for use below slabs on grade, installed in direct contact with concrete. 


A. Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions and membrane samples for 

approval. 

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

D 412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension 

D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds 

D 3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurements of Dimensions 

E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 

E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under 

Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover 

E 1643 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with 

Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 

E 1745 Plastic Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete 

Slabs 

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 

ACI 302.1R-96 Addendum Vapor Retarder Location: For slabs with vapor-sensitive floor 

coverings, locate retarder in direct contact with the slab (not beneath a layer of granular fill). 


A. Materials: For each type of material required for the work of this section, provide primary 

materials that are the products of one manufacturer. 

B. Schedule Coordination: Schedule work such that membrane will not be left exposed to weather 

for longer than that recommended by the manufacturer. 


A. Deliver materials in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with 

manufacturer’s instructions. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperature and 

construction operations. Remove and dispose of damaged material in accordance with 

applicable regulations. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Underslab Vapor Protection 07265 – 1 



PART 2 — PRODUCTS 

2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Basis of Design - Integrally Bonded Vapor Protection: Florprufe 120 Membrane by Grace 

Construction Products, or an equivalent under slab vapor barrier capable of integrally bonding 

to concrete. The vapor barrier shall be a 0.5mm (0.021 in) nominal thickness composite sheet 

membrane comprising 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) of polyolefin film, and layers of specially formulated 

synthetic adhesive layers. The membrane shall form an integral and permanent bond to poured 

concrete to prevent vapor migration at the interface of the membrane and structural concrete. 

Provide membrane with the following physical properties: 

Property Typical Value Test Method 

Thickness (nominal) 0.5mm (0.021 in) ASTM D3767 Method A 

Water Vapor Permeance 0.03 perms ASTM E96 Method B * 

Tensile Strength 68 lb./in ASTM E154 * 

Elongation 300% ASTM D412 

Puncture Resistance 3300 grams ASTM D1709 * 

Peel Adhesion to Concrete >4 lb./in ASTM D903 

* ASTM E 1745 Requirements. 

B. Equal products by other manufacturers will be acceptable. 

PART 3 — EXECUTION 

3.1 EXECUTION 

A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work 

is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the 

proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are 

corrected. 

3.2 INSTALLATION, 

A. Earth and stone substrates shall be well compacted to produce an even, solid substrate. 

Remove loose aggregate or sharp protrusions. Concrete substrates shall be smooth or broom 

finished and monolithic. Remove standing water prior to membrane applications. 

B. Place all foundation and slab insulation around slab/foundation perimeter before installation of 

membrane. Join the entire perimeter edges of the vapor barrier with the waterproof barrier 

sealing the foundation walls. 

C. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643–98, 

including but not limited to, the following: 

1. Apply membrane with the HDPE film facing the prepared substrate. Remove the release 

liner during application. 




2. Apply succeeding sheets by overlapping the previous sheet 50-mm (2 in.) along the 

marked lap line. End Laps should be staggered to avoid a build up of layers. 

a. Mechanical Fastening – To prevent the membrane from moving and gaps opening, 

the laps should be fastened together at 39 in maximum centers. Fix through the 

center of the lap area using 0.5 in long washer-head self-tapping galvanized 

screws. 

b. Taped Lap – Use manufacturer’s recommended tape to secure and seal the 

overlaps. Overband the lap with 4in wide tape using the lap line for alignment. 

Remove plastic release liner to ensure bond to concrete. 

3. Mix and apply liquid detailing compound to seal around penetrations such as drainage 

pipes, etc. 

3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Place concrete within 30 days. Inspect membrane and repair any damage with patches of tape. 

Ensure all liner is removed from membrane and tape before concrete placement. 

3.4 SCHEDULE 

A. Provide under slab vapor barrier under all interior slabs on grade, no exceptions. 

B. Provide under slab vapor barrier under all other concrete slabs. 





SECTION 07270 – AIR & VAPOR BARRIER SYSTEM 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

1. Materials and installation methods for fluid applied air and vapor barrier membrane 

system located in the non-accessible part of the wall. 

2. Materials and installation methods to bridge and seal air leakage pathways in roof and 

foundation junctions, window and door openings, control and expansion joints, masonry 

ties, piping and other penetrations through the wall assembly. 


A. Provide an air and vapor barrier system to perform as a continuous barrier to air infiltration/exfiltration 

and water vapor transmission and to act as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to 

discharge any incidental condensation or water penetration. 

B. The intent of this specification is to require compliance with the following regarding air leakage: 

The building envelope shall be designed and constructed with a continuous air barrier to control 

air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space. An air barrier shall also be provided for interior 

partitions between conditioned space and space designed to maintain temperature or humidity 

levels which differ from those in the conditioned space by more than 50% of the difference 

between the conditioned space and design ambient conditions. The air barrier shall have the 

following characteristics: 

1. It shall be continuous, with all joints made airtight. 

2. It shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential 

of 0.3 in. water (1.57 psf.) (equal to 0.02L/s/m2 @ 75 Pa.). 

3. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and 

stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the 

load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. 

4. It shall be durable or maintainable. 

5. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material 

of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and 

moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: 

a. Walls and windows, doors or louvers. 

b. Different wall systems. 

c. Wall and roof. 

d. Wall and roof over unconditioned space. 

e. Walls, floor and roof across construction, interior control and expansion joints. 

f. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 

C. Air barrier penetrations: 

All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made airtight. 


A. The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text. The 

most recent version of these standards is implied unless otherwise stated. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Air & Vapor Barrier System 07270 – 1 



B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

1. C 836 Standard Specification for High Solids, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric 

Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course 

2. D 412-87 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension 

3. D 903-83 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds 

4. D 1644-93 Test Methods for Non-volatile Content of Varnishes 

5. D 1970-94 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous 

Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam 

Protection 

6. D 4541-02 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable 

Adhesion Testers 

7. D 3767-92 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurements of Dimensions 

8. E 96-95 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 

9. E 2178-01 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 

10. E 283-91 Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through 

Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure 

Differences Across the Specimen 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and 

substrate preparation recommendations. 

B. Shop drawings showing locations and extent of air and vapor barrier system including details for 

terminations flashings, penetrations, window and door openings and treatment of substrate 

joints and cracks. 

C. Written documentation demonstrating installers qualifications under the "Quality Assurance" 

article including reference projects of a similar scope. 

D. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 

1. Fluid applied membrane 

2. Transition tape 

3. Through Wall Flashing 

E. Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions stated in Paragraph 

1.8–A. – “WARRANTY”. 


A. Manufacturer: Air and vapor barrier systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with 

a minimum of 20 years experience in the production and sales of waterproofing. Manufacturers 

proposed for use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet 

all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity 

completed within the past five years. 

B. Installer: The installer shall demonstrate qualifications to perform the work of this Section by 

submitting the following: 

1. List of at least three (3) projects contracted within the past five (5) years of similar scope 

and complexity to this project carried out by the firm and site supervisor. 

2. Installer must show evidence of adequate equipment and trained field personnel to 

successfully complete the project in a timely manner. 




C. Materials: Fluid applied air and vapor barrier material shall be two part synthetic rubber based 

systems free of solvents, isocyanates and bitumen. For each type of material required for the 

work of this section, provide primary materials that are the products of one manufacturer. 

D. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement 

of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to 

coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include but not 

be limited to the following: 

1. Review of submittals. 

2. Review of surface preparation, minimum curing period and installation procedures. 

3. Review of special details and flashings. 

4. Sequence of construction, responsibilities and schedule for subsequent operations. 

5. Review of mock-up requirements. 

6. Review of inspection, testing, protection and repair procedures. 

E. Mock-up: 

1. Prior to installation of the air and vapor barrier system a field-constructed mock-up shall 

be provided under the provisions of Section [01340 – Shop Drawings, Product Data, 

Samples and Mock-ups] to verify details and tie-ins and to demonstrate the required 

quality of materials and installation. 

2. Construct a typical exterior wall section, 5’-0’ feet high and 4’-0” feet wide, incorporating 

back-up wall, cladding, window and doorframe and sill, insulation, flashing and any other 

critical junction (roof, foundation, etc). 

3. Allow 24 hours for inspection and testing of mock-up before proceeding with air and vapor 

barrier work. 

4. Approved mock-up to be removed from site. 

F. Inspection and Testing: Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner’s inspection and testing 

agency. Do not cover any installed air and vapor barrier membrane until it has been inspected, 

tested and approved. 


A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with 

manufacturer’s instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from 

damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. Remove 

damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations. 

B. Do not double-stack pallets of fluid applied membrane components on the job site. Provide 

cover on top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. 

C. Protect fluid-applied membrane components from freezing and extreme heat. 

D. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage. 


A. Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits 

established by the manufacturer of the materials used. Proceed with installation only when the 

substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in condition to receive the air and 

vapor barrier membrane. 

1.8 WARRANTY 




A. Submit manufacturer's warranty that air and vapor barrier and accessories are free of defects at 

time of delivery and are manufactured to meet manufacturer's published physical properties and 

material specifications. 


2.1 GENERAL 

For each type of material required for the work of this section, provide primary materials that are 

the products of one manufacturer. 

2.2 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANES 

Footnote: 

1 

A. Description: a two part, self-curing, synthetic rubber based material free of solvents, isocyanates 

and bitumen 

B. Performance Requirements: 

Property Test Method Typical Value 

Color 

Green 

Cured Film Thickness ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) nominal 

Solids Content ASTM D 1644 100% 

Air Permeance at 75Pa (0.3 in. 

water) Differential Pressure 

ASTM E 283- 91 0.0006 L/(s.m 2 ) 

(0.00012 cfm/ft 2 ) 

Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96, Method BW Less than 4.6 ng/Pa.s.m 2 

(0.08 Perms) 

Pull Adhesion to Concrete Block ASTM D 4541-02 0.24 N/mm² (35 psi) 

(CMU) 

Pull Adhesion to Glass Faced ASTM D 4541-02 0.12 N/mm² (18 psi) 

Wall Board 

Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 Modified 1 880 N/m (5 lb./in.) 

Elongation ASTM D 412 500% minimum 

Pliability, 180° Bend over 25 mm ASTM D 1970 

Unaffected 

(1 in.) Mandrel at -30°C (-23°F) 

Low Temperature Flexibility and ASTM C836 

Pass 

Crack Bridging 

3.2mm (1/8in.) crack cycling at – 

26°C (-15°F) 

Extensibility over 6.4mm (1/4in.) 

crack after heat aging 

ASTM C836 

Pass 

The membrane is applied to concrete and allowed to cure. Peel adhesion of the membrane is 

measured at a rate of 50 mm (2 in.) per minute with a peel angle of 90° at room temperature. 

C. Acceptable Materials: 

Perm-A-Barrier ® Liquid from Grace Construction Products, 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, 

MA, or equivalent. 

2.3 TRANSITION TAPE 

A. Description: 0.9 mm (36 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm 

(4 mil) of cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 0.1 mm (40 mil) thick 




membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until 

installed. 


1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96, Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa (0.05 perms) max. 

2. Air Permeance at 75Pa (0.3 in. water) pressure difference: 0.0006 L/(s.m 2 ) (0.00012 

cfm/ft 2 ) max. 

3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E 154: 178 N (40 lbs.) min. 

4. Lap Adhesion at –4°C (25°F): ASTM D 1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width min. 

5. Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970: Unaffected to –43°C (-45°F). 

6. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412, Die C Modified: min. 2.7 MPa (400 psi) 

7. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D 412 Die C: min. 200% 


Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 

2.4 FLEXIBLE MEMBRANE WALL FLASHING 

A. Description: 0.8 mm (32 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.2 mm (8 

mil) of cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick 

membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until 

installed. 


1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96, Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa (0.05 perms) max. 

2. Water Absorption: ASTM D 570: max. 0.1% by weight 

3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E 154: 356 N (80 lbs.) min. 

4. Tear Resistance 

a. Initiation ASTM D 1004: min. 58 N (13.0 lbs.) M.D. 

b. Propagation ASTM D 1938: min. 40 N (9.0 lbs.) M.D. 

5. Lap Adhesion at -4ºC (25ºF): ASTM D 1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width 

6. Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970: Unaffected to -43ºC (-45ºF) 

7. Tensile Strength: ASTM D 412, Die C Modified: min. 5.5 MPa (800 psi) 

8. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200% 


Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 

2.5 AIR & VAPOR BARRIER ACCESSORIES 

A. Description: Water-based primer which imparts an aggressive, high tack finish on the treated 

substrate 

1. Flash Point: No flash to boiling point 

2. Solvent Type: Water 

3. VOC Content: Not to exceed 10 g/l 

4. Application Temperature: -4°C (25°F) and above 

5. Freezing point (as packaged): -7°C (21°F) 

Product: Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 

B. Description: two part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with self-adhered 

membranes and tapes. 10 g/l max. VOC Content. 




Product: Bituthene ® Liquid Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 

C. Optional Primers: 

1. Description: High tack water based primer. 10 g/l max. VOC content. 

Product: Perm-A-Barrier Liquid Part B manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 

2. Description: High tack solvent based primer. 440 g/l max. VOC content. 

Product: Bituthene Primer B2 manufactured by Grace Construction Products. 



A. The installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work 

is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the 

proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are 

corrected. 


A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall 

be sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove 

contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose 

stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods that are acceptable to manufacturer of the 

fluid-applied waterproofing. 

B. Exterior sheathing panels: Ensure that the boards are sufficiently stabilized with corners and 

edges fastened with appropriate screws. Pre-treat all board joints with 50 - 75mm (2-3 in.) wide, 

reinforced self-adhesive tape or fiberglass mesh style wallboard tape. Gaps greater than 6mm 

(1/4 in.) should be filled with mastic or caulk, allowing sufficient time to fully cure before 

application of the tape and fluid applied membrane. 

C. Masonry Substrates: Apply air and vapor barrier over concrete block and brick with smooth flush 

mortar joints. Fill all voids and holes, particularly in the mortar joints, with a lean mortar mix, 

non-shrinking grout or parge coat. 

D. Related Materials: Treat construction joints and install flashing as recommended by 

manufacturer. 


A. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for recommendations on installation 

B. Application of Fluid Applied Membrane 

1. Spray or trowel apply a continuous uniform film at min. 40 mils dry film thickness using 

multiple, overlapping passes. 

2. When spraying use a cross-hatching technique (alternating horizontal and vertical 

passes) to ensure even thickness and coverage. 

3. When spraying use high pressure, multi-component, airless spray equipment approved by 

material manufacturer. 

4. Carry membrane into any openings a minimum of 2 in.. 

5. Seal all brick-ties and other penetrations as work progresses. 




C. Application of Transition Membrane 

1. After allowing the Fluid Applied Membrane to cure to tack-free, apply transition membrane 

with a minimum overlap of 3 in. onto each surface at all beams, columns and joints as 

indicated in detail drawings. 

2. Tie in to window and door frames, spandrel panels, roof and floor intersections and 

changes in substrate. 

3. Use pre-cut, easily handled lengths for each location. 

4. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position membrane flashing carefully before 

placing it against the surface. 

5. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand 

roller. 

6. Overlap adjacent pieces 50 mm ( 2 in.) and roll all seams with a hand roller. 

7. Seal top edge of flashing with termination mastic. 

8. When transition flashing is pre-installed prior to application of Fluid Applied Membrane, 

apply transition flashing as above. Spray or trowel a continuous uniform film of Fluid 

Membrane at min. 60 mils (1.5 mm or .060 in.) dry film thickness using multiple, 

overlapping passes, with a minimum overlap of 75 mm (3 in.) onto transition flashing. For 

sill condition, spray or trowel Fluid Membrane onto pre-installed sill flashing and onto 

horizontal section of sill. 

D. Application of Flexible Membrane Wall Flashing 

1. Precut pieces of flashing to easily handled lengths for each location. 

2. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position flashing carefully before placing it 

against the surface. 

3. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand 

roller. Fully adhere flashing to substrate to prevent water from migrating under flashing. 

4. Overlap adjacent pieces 2 in. and roll all seams with a hand roller. 

5. Trim bottom edge 1/2 in back from exposed face of the wall. Flashing shall not be 

permanently exposed to sunlight. 

6. At heads, sills and all flashing terminations, turn up ends a minimum of 4 in. and make 

careful folds to form an end dam, with the seams sealed. 

7. Seal top edge of flashing with termination mastic. 

8. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the flashing membrane to come in contact 

with poly-sulfide sealants, creosote, uncured coal tar products or EPDM. 

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING 

A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials that would be 

exposed in the completed work using procedures as recommended by manufacturer. 

B. Specified material is not suitable for permanent exposure and should be protected from the 

effects of sunlight. 

C. Schedule work to ensure that the specified material is covered as soon as possible after 

installation. Protect specified material from damage during subsequent operations. If the 

specified material cannot be covered within 60 days after installation, apply temporary UV 

protection such as dark plastic sheet or tarpaulins. 





SECTION 07411 – METAL ROOF PANELS 

PART1-GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes the following: 

1. Standing- seam roof panels. 

2. Flashing and Sheetmetal flashing contiguous with roof panels. 


A. General: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies complying with performance 

requirements indicated and capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally 

induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into the 

building interior. 

B. Weather tightness- when tested in accord with the principles of AAMA 501.1, the roof 

system without sealant in the ribs shall show no leakage when exposed to dynamic rain 

and wind velocity up to 70 mph for five minutes. 

C. Structural Performance-Uniform load capacity shall be determined by testing in accord 

with the principles of ASTM E-1592. Calculations showing compliance with project loads 

shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in Florida. Calculations shall be 

based on data obtained from the ASTM E-1592 testing. The roof panels and accessories 

shall resist the pressures as indicated on Structural Sheet S0.1, General Notes. 

D. Panels and flashings attachments shall be designed to accommodate the thermal 

expansion and contraction of exterior metal through a 180-degree degree F temperature 

change. 

E. Roof System must meet all wind load requirements without the use of throughbolts or 

other external devices on the surface of the panel. 


A. Shop drawings must be in scale large enough to clearly show all layers. Include 

dimensions of fabricated work, reference dimensions to the structure, show the type size 

and spacing of fasteners with the material thickness and finishes, provide a plan layout 

with erection sequence and notations of coordination with other trades. Shop drawings 

must be reviewed and approved by the architect prior to the commencement of the work. 

B. Submit with the drawings copies of independent laboratory test, mill certifications, and 

calculations stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida 

certifying structural performance data on the panels, anchor clips, and fasteners to meet 

the structural testing and performance and material requirements of this specification. 

Manufacturer’s certification letters will not be accepted in lieu of the specified 

independent laboratory test, mill certificates, and calculations by a registered professional 

engineer. 

C. Submit material samples as follows; 

1. Panels- one piece, full width and minimum of 12” long of each type to be used 

2. Accessories- one each of each anchor clip, rolled-formed part or press formed or 

molded closure. 

3. Fasteners-Two samples of each type to be used identified as to use. 

4. Sealant and seal tape- one sample at least 8 oz. With descriptive data. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Metal Roof Panels 7411- 1 




A. Manufacturer-shall have a permanent indoor production facility. Manufacturer 

shall have had at least ten years experience using structural standing seam roof 

panels in architectural applications, and the roof panel itself shall have been in 

use for at least ten years. Manufacturer shall demonstrate past experience with a 

list of five projects similar in size and scope completed in the past five years. 

Submit complete description of each project including product utilized, name and 

phone numbers of representatives of the Owner, Architect, Installer, and 

Contractor to the Architect for verification. 

B. Installer- shall be authorized by the panel manufacturer, and the actual work shall 

be supervised by personnel trained by the manufacturer in the proper application 

of the product. Installer must execute 100% of metal roofing system installation 

with installer’s own forces. Field roll forming of roof panels, however must be 

performed by the manufacturer’s own forces. 

1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, handle, and stack panels in strict accord with manufacturer’s 

instructions to avoid damage that would void the warranty. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 

or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. 

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering. 

2. Warranty Period: Minimum of Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of 

deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to 

ASTM D 2244. 

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to 

ASTM D 4214. 

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 

2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion. 

C. Applicator shall furnish warranty covering watertightness and workmanship of the 

roofing system for the period of two (2) years from the date of substantial completion. 

D. Applicator shall supply the owner with copies of all invoices of metal products delivered 

to the job site and attach invoices to manufacturer’s warranty. Invoices shall bare 

manufacturer’s contact information as well as ordering numbers, coil numbers, coil color 

code, date of shipment and date of installation. 

E. Warranty Conditions: 

1. Under no circumstances shall the installer be referred to as the manufacturer 

without written notification signed by both the manufacturer and the installer and 

submitted to the architect for approval. 




2. Under no circumstances shall the installer be referred to as the customer by the 

manufacturer. 

PART 2- PRODUCTS 

2.1 METAL ROOFING PANEL 

A. Smooth surface 0.040 aluminum sheet with 12-inch rib spacing; ASTM B-209, 

alloy 3004-H274. Standard Kynar 500 finish with color to match Berridge Co. 

“Champagne”. 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available 

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include: 

1. Zip-Rib by Merchant & Evans, Inc. 

2. Ametco, Inc. 

3. Rmerspan by The Garland Co. 

4. 2-1/2-inch SSR by Bemo USA 

2.2 ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES 

A. Standing – Seam Roof Panels. - 2 ½ “ high x 12” wide curved standing seam roof 

panel assembly designed for concealed mechanical attachment of panels to 

deck. 

B. Clips-Anchor clips shall be series 300 non-magnetic stainless steel (2-piece 

sliding clip) or extruded aluminum to minimize wear from thermal movement. 

C. Clips shall be designed to design loads and allow for thermal movement through 

out the temperature range called for in this specification. 

D. Fasteners- shall be designed for loading conditions specified. Fasteners shall be 

either cadmium-plated stainless steel or aluminum. Exposed fasteners should be 

kept to a minimum and shall match the color of the panel. For weathertightness, 

screws shall have separate washers with hot bonded neoprene faces, and pop 

rivets shall be set in wet sealant. Exposed fasteners shall be a minimum # 14 

sizes screw or 3/16 “diameter rivet. 

E. Foam Closures- precut foam profile closures shall be black closed cell foam 

meeting specification ASTM D-1056 grade SCE-41 Black EPT. Field fabricated 

hip closures shall be foam PVC, supported and protected from weathering by a 

metal channel matching the finish of the metal roof. 

F. Sealant used with the roofing shall be applied between surfaces during assembly 

with a minimum amount exposed on the completed installation. Concealed 

sealant may be a non-curing, non-skinning butyl, polyisobutylene or polybutane 

tape of sufficient thickness to make full contact with both surfaces. Exposed 

sealant shall be a curing type with excellent weather and sunlight resistance. The 

Architect shall select color. Apply in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

G. Flashing and trim shall be the same material, finish, and color as the metal roof 

panels, however temper may be reduced to facilitate forming . All flashings 

shown as curved on the drawings shall be fabricated curved, not segmented. 


A. General- Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to the 

greatest extent possible. Fulfill indicated performance requirements 

demonstrated by laboratory testing 




B. Minimum inside bend radius on flashing shall be 3T and all edges shall have 

open hem for stiffness. 

C. Insofar as possible, attachment screws shall be eliminated in favor of concealed 

cleats or clips. 

PART-3 EXECUTION 


A. Prior to the start of metal roof installation the manufacturer’s technical 

representative shall visit the site and report on acceptability of the substrate for 

applying the metal roof. 

B. Final visit of the manufacturer’s technical representative shall be at the 

substantial completion of the metal roofing. 

C. Reports-After each visit the manufacturer’s technical representative shall render 

a report on the status of the installation, and file copies with the Architect, the 

General Contractor, the Owner, and the Installer. 


A. Coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work; flashing; trim; and 

construction of decks, parapet walls, expansion joint at existing parapet, and 

other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure noncorrosive installation. 

3.3 PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. General; Comply with panel manufacturer’s written recommendations for 

installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor 

panels and other components of the work in place, with provisions for thermal 

and structural movement. 

B. Storage and Handling; protection shall be provided during shipment, storage and 

erection. During shipment, finished surfaces shall be protected from abrasion by 

a removable plastic film between areas of contact. Jobsite storage shall be in a 

clean dry area out of direct contact with the ground, under cover or sloped for 

drainage, protected from abuse by traffic and from contamination by corrosive or 

staining materials. Stored materials and unfinished work shall be protected 

against wind damage. Installed panels shall be protected from abuse by other 

trades. 

C. Before installation, this contractor shall verify that the structure is ready to receive 

his work. He shall check field dimensions and alignment of structural members to 

assure that the roof panels and flashings will be straight and true. The Architect 

shall be notified on unresolved conditions, which may adversely affect the 

performance, or appearance of the installed roof, and the work on that location 

will not proceed until approved by the Architect 




D. All work shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop details under 

direct supervision of an experienced sheet metal craftsman. Attachments and 

joints shall allow for expansion and contraction from temperature changes 

without distortion or elongation of fastener holes. Flashing shall be installed in 

strict accord with the recommended practice in the AA, NRCA and SMACNA 

architectural sheet metal manuals: without fasteners in end laps and isolated 

from dissimilar materials. 

E. In addition to complying with requirements in section, coordinate proper details at 

interface to EIFS products. 

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Completed work shall be plumb and true, free of scrapes and dents. Panel ribs 

shall be on the module indicated in the contract drawings within the tolerance 

allowed by actual construction dimension. Excess sealant shall be removed and 

touch up paint applied to any areas where paint scrapes occur. Any panels, 

which are badly damaged and in the judgement of the Architect cannot be 

repaired shall be removed and replaced. 

B. Cleaning – On completion of the panel installation, clean finish surfaces as 

recommended by the panel manufacturer. 





SECTION 07541 – FELTBACK ADHERED THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. To provide a complete feltback adhered thermoplastic membrane roofing system, 

including membrane, flashings and other components. 

2. The work includes but is not limited to the installation of: 

a. Substrate Preparation 

b. Scupper tie-in into roofing systems 

c. Insulation 

d. Roof Membrane (Fully Adhered and Mechanically Fastened at the perimeter to 

achieve the required windload design) 

e. Fasteners 

f. Adhesive for Flashings 

g. Roof Membrane Flashings 

h. Metal Flashings 

i. Sealants 

B. Upon successful completion of work the following warranties shall be obtained: 

1. Manufacturer’s Twenty (20) Year Warranty 

2. Roofing Contractor’s Five (5) Year Warranty 


A. This roofing system shall be applied only by a Roofing Contractor authorized by Manufacturer. 

B. Upon completion of the installation and the delivery to Manufacturer by the Applicator of a 

certification that all work has been done in strict accordance with the contract specifications and 

Manufacturer’s requirements, an inspection shall be made by a Technical Representative of 

Manufacturer to review the installed roof system. 

C. There shall be no deviation made from the Project Specification or the approved shop drawings 

without prior written approval by the Owner, the Architect and Manufacturer. 

1. All work pertaining to the installation of the feltback membrane and flashings shall only be 

completed by Applicator personnel trained and authorized by Manufacturer in those 

procedures. 


A. At the time of award of contract, the Applicator shall submit for approval to the Architect the 

following: 

1. Copies of Specification. 

2. Samples of each primary component to be used in the roof system and the 

manufacturer's current literature for each component. 

3. Written approval by the insulation manufacturer (as applicable) for use and performance 

of the product in the proposed system. 

4. Sample copy of Manufacturer’s warranty. 

5. Sample copy of Applicator's warranty. 

6. Dimensioned shop drawings which shall include: 

a. Outline of roof with roof size and elevations shown. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Feltback Adhered Thermoplastic 07541-1 


Membrane Roofing 


. Details of flashing methods for penetrations. 

c. Technical acceptance from manufacturer. 

7. Certifications by manufacturers of roofing and insulating materials that all materials 

supplied comply with all requirements of the identified ASTM and other industry 

standards or practices. 

8. Certification from the Applicator that the system specified meets all identified code and 

insurance requirements as required by the Specification. 

9. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 

10. Submit Florida Product Approval number for composite system specified herein. 

1.4 CODE REQUIREMENTS 

A. The applicator shall submit evidence that the proposed roof system meets all the requirements, 

including windloading, of the Florida Building Code, 2007 and has been tested and approved or 

listed by the following test organizations. These requirements are minimum standards and no 

roofing work shall commence without written documentation of the system's compliance, as 

required in the "Submittals" section of this specification. 

B. The roof windload design requirements for this facility are to be 135 mph. 

1. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM) - Norwood, MA 

a. Class 1. 

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. – Northbrook, IL 

a. Class A assembly 

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. All products delivered to the job site shall be in the original unopened containers or wrappings 

bearing all seals and approvals. 

B. Handle all materials to prevent damage. Place all materials on pallets and fully protect from 

moisture. 

C. Membrane rolls shall be stored lying down on pallets and fully protected from the weather with 

clean canvas tarpaulins.. 

D. As a general rule all adhesives shall be stored at temperatures between 40º F (5º C) and 80º F 

(27º C). Read instructions contained on adhesive canister for specific storage instructions. 

E. All flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open flames. 

Follow precautions outlined on containers or supplied by material manufacturer/supplier. 

F. All materials which are determined to be damaged by the Owner's Representative or 

Manufacturer are to be removed from the job site and replaced at no cost to the Owner. 

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Manufacturer’s materials may be installed under certain adverse weather conditions but only 

after consultation with Manufacturer, as installation time and system integrity may be affected. 

B 

Only as much of the new roofing as can be made weathertight each day, including all flashing 

and detail work, shall be installed. All seams shall be heat welded before leaving the job site 

that day. 

C. All surfaces to receive new insulation, membrane or flashings shall be dry. Should surface 

moisture occur, the Applicator shall provide the necessary equipment to dry the surface prior to 

application. 





D. All new and temporary construction, including equipment and accessories, shall be secured in 

such a manner as to preclude wind blow-off and subsequent roof or equipment damage. 

E. Uninterrupted waterstops shall be installed at the end of each day's work and shall be 

completely removed before proceeding with the next day's work. Waterstops shall not emit 

dangerous or unsafe fumes and shall not remain in contact with the finished roof as the 

installation progresses. Contaminated membrane shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 

F. The Applicator is cautioned that certain membranes are incompatible with asphalt, coal tar, 

heavy oils, roofing cements, creosote and some preservative materials. Such materials shall 

not remain in contact with membranes. The Applicator shall consult Manufacturer regarding 

compatibility, precautions and recommendations. 

G. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing as a walking surface or for 

equipment movement and storage. Where such access is absolutely required, the Applicator 

shall provide all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent 

damage to adjacent areas. A substantial protection layer consisting of plywood over 

Manufacturer’s roofing or plywood over insulation board shall be provided for all roof areas that 

receive rooftop traffic during construction. 

H. Prior to and during application, all dirt, debris and dust shall be removed from surfaces either by 

vacuuming, sweeping, blowing with compressed air and/or similar methods. 

I. The Applicator shall follow all safety regulations as required by OSHA and any other applicable 

authority having jurisdiction. 

J. All new roofing waste material (i.e., scrap roof membrane, empty cans of adhesive) shall be 

immediately removed from the site by the Applicator and properly transported to a legal 

dumping area authorized to receive such material. 

K. The Applicator shall take precautions that storage and/or application of materials and/or 

equipment does not overload the roof deck or building structure. 

L. Flammable adhesives and deck primers shall not be stored and not be used in the vicinity of 

open flames, sparks and excessive heat. 

M. All rooftop contamination that is anticipated or that is occurring shall be reported to 

Manufacturer to determine the corrective steps to be taken. 

N. The Applicator shall verify that all roof drain lines are functioning correctly (not clogged or 

blocked) before starting work. Applicator shall report any such blockages in writing (letter copy 

to Manufacturer) to the Architect for corrective action prior to the installation of the roof system. 

O. Applicator shall immediately stop work if any unusual or concealed condition is discovered and 

shall immediately notify Owner of such condition in writing for correction (letter copy to 

Manufacturer). 

P. Site cleanup, including both interior and exterior building areas that have been affected by 

construction, shall be completed to the Owner's satisfaction. 

Q. All landscaped areas damaged by construction activities shall be repaired at no cost to the 

Owner. 

R. The Applicator shall conduct fastener pullout tests in accordance with the latest version of the 

SPRI/ANSI Fastener Pullout Standard to help verify condition of the deck/substrate and to 

confirm expected pullout values. 





S. The membrane shall not be installed under the following conditions without consulting 

Manufacturer’s Technical Dept. for precautionary steps: 

1. The roof assembly permits interior air to pressurize the membrane underside. 

2. Any exterior wall has 10% or more of the surface area comprised of opening doors or 

windows. 

3. The wall/deck intersection permits air entry into the wall flashing area. 

T. Precautions shall be taken when using adhesives at or near rooftop vents or air intakes. 

Adhesive odors could enter the building. Coordinate the operation of vents and air intakes in 

such a manner as to avoid the intake of adhesive odor while ventilating the building. Keep lids 

on unused cans at all times. 

U. Protective wear shall be worn when using solvents or adhesives or as required by job 

conditions. 

V. Membranes are slippery when wet or covered with snow, frost, or ice. Working on surfaces 

under these conditions is hazardous. Appropriate safety measures must be implemented prior 

to working on such surfaces. Always follow OSHA and other relevant fall protection standards 

when working on roofs. 


A. Manufacturer’s 20-Year Standard Warranty 

Upon successful completion of the work to Manufacturer’s satisfaction and receipt of final 

payment, the Manufacturer’s High Wind Warranty shall be issued. Warranty to provide full 

replacement coverage for up to 120 mph winds 

B. Applicator/Roofing Contractor 5-Year Warranty 

The Applicator shall supply the Owner with a separate workmanship warranty. In the event any 

work related to roofing, flashing, or metal is found to be within the Applicator warranty term, 

defective or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Applicator shall 

repair that defect at no cost to the Owner. The Applicator's warranty obligation shall run directly 

to the Owner, and a copy shall be sent to Manufacturer. 

C. All Warranties referenced in this Specification shall have been submitted and have been 

accepted at time of contract award. 

D. Owner Responsibility 

Owner shall notify both Manufacturer and the Applicator of any leaks as they occur during the 

time period when both warranties are in effect. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. Basis of Design: The components of the adhered roof system are to be products of Sika 

Sarnafil, 3483 Satellite Road, Suite 3155, Duluth, GA 30096, as indicated on the working 

Drawings and specified in this Project Manual, or an equivalent product of an equal 

manufacturer. Submit requests for review of alternative systems at least 10 days prior to bid 

date. 





2.2 MEMBRANE 

A. Sarnafil G410 Feltback fiberglass reinforced membrane with a lacquer coating. 

B. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434 (latest version), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride 

Sheet Roofing". Classification: Type II, Grade I. 

1. Sarnafil G410-20 feltback, 60 mil, thermoplastic membrane with fiberglass reinforcement 

and a factory applied 9 oz. felt backing. See paragraph C., certified polymer thickness 

requirement. 

2. Johns-Mansville, GAF, Fibertite and Flex Membrane shall be considered acceptable 

manufacturers. Specific products are subject to the requirements of this Section. 

C. Certified Polymer Thickness: 

1. Membrane manufacturer shall certify that the polymer thickness is of the polymer 

thickness specified. Certification shall be signed by the membrane manufacturer’s quality 

control manager. ASTM +/- tolerance for membrane thickness shall not be accepted. 

Membrane felt not included to meet required membrane thickness. 

D. Color of Membrane: 

1. Feltback (white), initial reflectivity of 0.83, initial emissivity 0.90, solar reflective index 

(SRI) of >104. 

E. Typical Physical Properties (1) 

Parameters 

ASTM 

Test Method 

Minimum 

ASTM 

Requirement 

Required 

Physical 

Properties 

Reinforcing Material - Fiberglass 

Overall Thickness, min., inches (mm) D638 0.045 (1.14) [0.0 80 inches)] 

Tensile Strength, min., psi (MPa) D638 1500 (10.4) 1600 (11.1) 

Elongation at Break, min. (machine x 

D638 250% / 230% 270% / 250% 

tranverse) 

Seam strength (2), min. (% of tensile strength) D638 75 80 

Retention of Properties After Heat Aging D3045 - - 

Tensile Strength, min., (% of original) D638 90 95 

Elongation, min., (% of original) D638 90 90 

Tearing Resistance, min., lbf (N) D1004 10 (45.0) 14 (63.0) 

Low Temperature Bend, -40º F (-40º C) D2136 Pass Pass 

Accelerated Weathering Test (Xenon Arc) D2565 5,000 Hours Pass 

Cracking (7x magnification) - None None 

Discoloration (by observation) - Negligible Negligible 

Crazing (7 x magnification) - None None 

Linear Dimensional Change D1204 0.10 % 0.02% 

Weight Change After Immersion in Water D570 ± 3.0% 2.5% 

Static Puncture Resistance, 33 lbf (15 kg) D5602 Pass Pass 

Dynamic Puncture Resistance, 7.3 ft-lbf (10 

J) 

D5635 Pass Pass 

*Notes 

(1) Physical properties without felt backing. 

(2) Failure occurs through membrane rupture not seam failure. 





2.3 FLASHING MATERIALS 

A. Wall/Curb Flashing: 

1. Membrane 

A fiberglass reinforced membrane adhered to approved substrate using adhesive. 

Consult Product Data Sheets for adhesive options and additional information. 

2. Clad Metal 

PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes 

and profiles, 25 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil unsupported membrane 

laminated on one side. 

B. Perimeter Edge Flashing 

1. Clad Metal 

PVC-coated, heat-weldable sheet metal capable of being formed into a variety of shapes 

and profiles, 25 gauge, G90 galvanized metal sheet with a 20 mil unsupported membrane 

laminated on one side. 

2. Non-Typical Edge 

Project-specific perimeter edge detail reviewed and accepted by manufacturer's 

Technical Department. 

C. Miscellaneous Flashing 

1. Stacks 

Prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.048 inch thick membrane. 

2. Intersections 

Circular 0.048 inch thick membrane patch welded over T-joints formed by overlapping 

thick membranes. 

3. Corners - Universal 

Prefabricated outside and inside flashing corners made of 0.060 inch thick membrane 

that are heat-welded to membrane or clad base flashings. 

4. Multi-Purpose Sealant 

Sealant used at flashing terminations. 

5. Adhesive 

A solvent-based reactivating-type adhesive used to attach membrane to flashing 

substrate. 

2.4 INSULATION/OVERLAYMENT/RECOVER BOARD 

A. Cellular Concrete 

Defined as an aerated insulating concrete slurry mixed on-site and poured in-place onto the roof 

deck. Apply surface sealant is used to improve the curing process and to reduce dusting at the 

surface. 

2.5 ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS 

A. Membrane Adhesive 

1. Adhesive: 

Solvent-based reactivating-type adhesive used to attach the membrane to the substrate, 

either horizontally or vertically. Application rates are as follows: 





APPLICATION RATES FOR FELTBACK MEMBRANE 

Adhesive Rates - Gallons/100 Ft² (Liters/Meter²) Approximate 

Substrate 

Substrate 

Sq. Ft./Pail 

(1 st coat) 

(2 nd Total 

coat) 

Isocyanurate Paper Facer 1.25 + 1.00 = 2.25 222 

Smooth Plywood 1.00 + 1.00 = 2.00 250 

Metal 0.75 + 1.00 = 1.75 285 

Concrete Deck 1.00 + 1.00 = 2.00 250 

Concrete Wall 1.00 + 1.00 = 2.00 250 

Masonry Wall 1.00 + 1.00 = 2.00 250 

Cellular Concrete 1.25 + 1.00 = 2.25 222 

GP DensDeck ® 1.00 + 1.00 = 2.00 250 

GP DensDeck Prime ® 

GP DensDeck ® DuraGuard 0.75 + 1.00 = 1.75 285 

APPLICATION RATES FOR MEMBRANE FLASHINGS 

Adhesive Rates - Gallons/100 Ft² (Liters/Meter²) Approximate 

Substrate Substrate 

Sq. Ft./Pail 

(1 st coat) (2 nd Membrane Total 

coat) 

Smooth Plywood 1.00 + 1.00 + 0.50 = 2.50 167 

Concrete Wall 1.00 + 1.00 + 0.50 = 2.50 167 

Masonry Wall 1.00 + 1.00 + 0.50 = 2.50 167 

Granular Bitumen 1.00 + 1.00 + 0.50 = 2.50 167 

Smooth Aged 

Bitumen 

1.00 + 1.00 + 0.50 = 2.50 167 

Notes: Use a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press the 

membrane into the adhesive layer. 

2. Alternative Adhesive: 

A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to horizontal or near-horizontal 

substrates. Consult Product Data Sheets of Manufacturer for additional information. 

Application rates are as follows: 

APPLICATION RATES FOR FELTBACK MEMBRANE 

Adhesive Rates - Gallons/100 Ft² 

Substrate Membrane Total 

Approximate 

Sq. Ft./Pail 

Isocyanurate Paper Facer 1.75 + 0 = 1.75 285 

Smooth Plywood 1.75 + 0 = 1.75 285 

Concrete Deck 2.00 + 0 = 2.00 250 

Cellular Concrete 2.00 + 0 = 2.00 250 

GP DensDeck ® 1.75 + 0 = 1.75 285 

GP DensDeck ® Prime 1.50 + 0 = 1.50 333 

Note: Use water filled, foam covered lawn roller to consistently and evenly press the 

membrane into the adhesive layer. 

A. Fasteners 

Number 15, heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant fastener used with plate to attach insulation or 

stops, bars and roof membrane to wood nailers. Shank diameter of approximately 0.21 inch 

and the thread diameter is approximately 0.26 inch (6.6 mm). The driving head has a diameter 

of approximately 0.435 inch. 





Nail-in, corrosion-resistant fasteners used with plates, stops or bars to attach insulation or 

membrane to normal weight concrete roof deck. Shank diameter to be 0.215 inch, a split 

diameter of 0.265/0.275 inch and a flat head with a 0.435 inch diameter. 

B. Stops 

Extruded aluminum, low profile bar used with fasteners to attach to the roof deck or to 

walls/curbs at terminations, penetrations and at incline changes of the substrate. 1 inch wide, 

flat aluminum bar 1/8 inch thick that has predrilled holes every 6 inches on center. 

C. Bars 

FM-approved, heavy-duty, 14 gauge, galvanized or stainless, roll-formed steel bar used to 

attach membrane to base of parapet walls. Pre-punched formed steel with holes every 1 inch 

on center to allow various fastener spacing options. 

D. Cord 

5/32 inch diameter, flexible thermoplastic extrusion welded to the top surface of the membrane 

and against the side of the bar, to hold the membrane in position. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 

A. Aluminum Tape 

2 inch wide pressure-sensitive aluminum tape used as a separation layer between small areas 

of asphalt contamination and the membrane and as a bond-breaker under the coverstrip at 

Sarnaclad joints. 

B. Sealing Tape Strip 

Compressible foam with pressure-sensitive adhesive on one side. Used with metal flashings as 

a preventive measure against air and wind blown moisture entry. 

C. Multi-Purpose Tape 

High performance sealant tape used with metal flashings as a preventive measure against air 

and wind blown moisture entry. 

D. Welding Equipment 

220 volt, self-propelled, hot-air welding machine used to seal membrane seams. 

E. Solvent 

High quality solvent cleaner used for the general cleaning of residual asphalt, scuff marks, etc., 

from the membrane surface and to clean seam areas prior to hot-air welding in tear off or dirty 

conditions or if the membrane is not welded the same day it is unrolled. 

2.7 SEALANTS AND PITCH POCKET FILLERS 

A. Multi-Purpose Sealant (for termination details). 

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS 

A. All fasteners, anchors, nails, straps, bars, etc. shall be post-galvanized steel, aluminum or 

stainless steel. Mixing metal types and methods of contact shall be assembled in such a 

manner as to avoid galvanic corrosion. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry shall be 





expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins. All concrete fasteners and anchors shall 

have a minimum embedment of 1¼ inch (32 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the 

fastener manufacturer. All miscellaneous wood fasteners and anchors used for flashings shall 

have a minimum embedment of 1 inch (25 mm) and shall be approved for such use by the 

fastener manufacturer. 

2.9 WALKWAY PROTECTION 

A. Polyester reinforced, 0.096 inch (96 mil/2.4 mm), weldable membrane with surface 

embossment, used as a protection layer from rooftop traffic. Supply in rolls of 39.3inches 

(1.0m) wide. 


3.1 SUBSTRATE CONDITION 

A. Applicator shall be responsible for acceptance or provision of proper substrate to receive new 

roofing materials. 

B. Applicator shall verify that the work done under related sections meets the following conditions: 

1. Roof drains and/or scuppers have been installed properly. 

2. Roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof penetrations are properly 

secured and prepared to receive new roofing materials. 

3. All surfaces are smooth and free of dirt, debris and incompatible materials. 

4. All roof surfaces shall be free of water. 

3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 

The roof deck roof construction must be structurally sound to provide support for the new roof 

system. The Applicator shall load materials on the rooftop in such a manner as to eliminate risk 

of deck overload due to concentrated weight. The Contractor shall ensure that the roof deck is 

secured to the structural framing according to Florida Building Code, 2007 and in such a 

manner as to resist all anticipated wind loads in that location. 

A. New Construction 

1. Poured Lightweight (Cellular) Concrete Substrate: 

Lightweight concrete shall be installed by a trained lightweight concrete Applicator in 

accordance with the lightweight concrete manufacturer's requirements and industry practice. 

The surface shall be sealed with a water-based sealer accepted by the lightweight concrete 

manufacturer to create a surface free from dust and loose material. The wet and dry densities 

shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's and FM’s requirements. Sharp ridges or other 

projections above the surface shall be removed before roofing. 

3.3 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION 

A. A dry, clean and smooth substrate shall be prepared to receive adhered roof system. 

B. The Applicator shall inspect the substrate for defects such as excessive surface roughness, 

contamination, structural inadequacy, or any other condition that will adversely affect the quality 

of work. 





C. The substrate shall be clean, smooth, dry, free of flaws, sharp edges, loose and foreign 

material, oil and grease. Roofing shall not start until all defects have been corrected. 

D. All roof surfaces shall be free of water. 

E. Membrane shall be applied over compatible and accepted substrates only. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MEMBRANE 

The surface of the insulation or substrate shall be inspected prior to installation of the roof 

membrane. The substrate shall be clean, dry, free from debris and smooth with no surface 

roughness or contamination. Broken, delaminated, wet or damaged insulation boards shall be 

removed and replaced. 

A. Adhesive: 

1. Over the properly installed and prepared substrate surface, adhesive shall be applied 

using solvent-resistant 3/4 inch nap paint rollers. The adhesive shall be applied to the 

substrate at a rate according to manufacturer’s requirements. No adhesive is applied to 

the back of the feltback membrane. The adhesive shall be applied in smooth, even coats 

with no gaps, globs, puddles or similar inconsistencies. Only an area which can be 

completely covered in the same day’s operations shall be coated with adhesive. The first 

layer of adhesive shall be allowed to dry completely prior to installing a second layer of 

adhesive and the membrane. 

2. The feltback roof membrane is unrolled immediately into a second layer of wet adhesive. 

Adjacent to that first installed roll of membrane, another second layer of wet adhesive is 

applied and the second roll of membrane is immediately unrolled into it, overlapping the 

first roll by 3 inches (75 mm). This process is repeated throughout the roof area. 

Immediately after application into adhesive, each roll shall be pressed firmly in place with 

a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. Do not 

allow the second application of adhesive to dry. 

3. Weld coverstrips at all feltback seams that do not have a factory selvage edge. 

3.7 HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS 

A. General 

1. All seams shall be hot-air welded. Seam overlaps should be 3 inches wide when 

automatic machine-welding and 4 inches wide when hand-welding, except for certain 

details. 

2. Welding equipment shall be provided by or approved by manufacturer. All mechanics 

intending to use the equipment shall have successfully completed a training course 

provided by a Manufacturers Technical Representative prior to welding. 

3. All membrane to be welded shall be clean and dry. 

B. Quality Control of Welded Seams 

1. The Applicator shall check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver. 

Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the welding 

operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark grey material 

from the underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be 

made daily by the Applicator at locations as directed by the Owner's Representative or 

Manufacturer's Representative. One inch wide cross-section samples of welded seams 

shall be taken at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of 





the membrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the 

Applicator at no extra cost to the Owner. 

3.8 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS 

All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. If 

water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, the affected area shall be removed 

and replaced at the Applicator's expense. Flashing shall be adhered to compatible, dry, 

smooth, and solvent-resistant surfaces. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are not drawn 

into the building. 

A. Adhesive for Membrane Flashings 

1. Over the properly installed and prepared flashing substrate, adhesive shall be applied 

according to instructions found on the Product Data Sheet. The adhesive shall be 

applied in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies. Only an 

area which can be completely covered in the same day's operations shall be flashed. 

The bonded sheet shall be pressed firmly in place with a hand roller. 

2. No adhesive shall be applied in seam areas that are to be welded. All panels of 

membrane shall be applied in the same manner, overlapping the edges of the panels as 

required by welding techniques. 

B. Install stops, bars, cords, and etc. according to the approved Shop Drawings with approved 

fasteners into the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. 

C. Manufacturers requirements and recommendations and the specifications shall be followed. All 

material submittals shall have been accepted by Architect prior to installation. 

D. All flashings shall extend a minimum of 8 inches above roofing level. 

E. All flashing membranes shall be consistently adhered to substrates. All interior and exterior 

corners and miters shall be cut and hot-air welded into place. 

F. All flashing membranes shall be mechanically fastened along the counter-flashed top edge with 

stops at 6-8 inches on center. 

G. All flashings shall be terminated according to recommended details. 

H. All flashings that exceed 30 inches in height shall receive additional securement. Provide 

method for securement . 

3.9 METAL FLASHINGS 

A. Metal details, fabrication practices and installation methods shall conform to the applicable 

requirements of the following: 

1. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 (latest issue). 

2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - 

latest issue. 

B. Metal, shall be provided by roof manufacturer, and covered under the warranty, no exceptions. 

C. Complete all metal work in conjunction with roofing and flashings so that a watertight condition 

exists daily. 





D. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending to allow for normal thermal 

expansion and contraction. 

E. Metal joints shall be watertight. 

F. Metal flashings shall be securely fastened into solid wood blocking. Fasteners shall penetrate 

the wood nailer a minimum of 1 inch. 

G. Airtight and continuous metal hook strips are required behind metal fascias. Hook strips are to 

be fastened 12 inches on center into the wood nailer or masonry wall. 

H. Counter flashings shall overlap base flashings at least 4 inches. 

I. Hook strips shall extend past wood nailers over wall surfaces by 1-1/2 inch minimum and shall 

be securely sealed from air entry. 

3.10 CLAD METAL BASE FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL 

All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. If 

water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing due to incomplete flashings, the 

affected area shall be removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. 

A. Clad metal flashings shall be formed and installed per the Detail Drawings. 

1. All metal flashings shall be fastened into solid wood nailers with two rows of post 

galvanized flat head annular ring nails, 4 inches on center staggered. Fasteners shall 

penetrate the nailer a minimum of 1 inch. 

2. Metal shall be installed to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal 

thermal expansion and contraction. 

B. Adjacent sheets of clad metal shall be spaced ¼ inch apart. The joint shall be covered with 2 

inch wide aluminum tape. A 4 inch minimum wide strip of flashing membrane shall be hot-air 

welded over the joint. 

3.11 TEMPORARY CUT-OFF 

A. All flashings shall be installed concurrently with the roof membrane in order to maintain a 

watertight condition as the work progresses. All temporary waterstops shall be constructed to 

provide a 100% watertight seal. The stagger of the insulation joints shall be made even by 

installing partial panels of insulation. The new membrane shall be carried into the waterstop. 

The waterstop shall be sealed to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed to 

travel under the new or existing roofing. The edge of the membrane shall be sealed in a 

continuous heavy application of sealant as described in this Section. When work resumes, the 

contaminated membrane shall be cut out. All sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation 

fillers, etc. shall be removed from the work area and properly disposed of off site. None of 

these materials shall be used in the new work. 

B. If inclement weather occurs while a temporary waterstop is in place, the Applicator shall provide 

the labor necessary to monitor the situation to maintain a watertight condition. 

C. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly-completed roofing, the affected area shall be 

removed and replaced at the Applicator's expense. 

3.12 COMPLETION 





A. Prior to demobilization from the site, the work shall be reviewed by the Architect and the 

Applicator. 

B. All defects noted and non-compliances with the Specifications or the recommendations of 

manufacturer shall be itemized in a punch list. These items shall be corrected immediately. 

3.13 SCHEDULE: Contractor shall provide, but is not limited to providing, the following: 

A. Check roof drain installation for acceptability. 

B. Verify concrete substrate 

C. Provide insulation, wood blocking and lightweight concrete fill 

D. Provide membrane sheet, metal bars, and flashing 

E. Provide fasteners and sealants, as required 






SECTION 07600 – ROOF FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 



A. Product Data. 

1. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings clearly indicating component profiles, joints, 

transitions, fastening methods, and relationship of flashing materials to adjacent 

construction. 

2 Samples: Submit 6-inch-square samples of each type of metal and finish required. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Prefinished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for 

indicated applications. 

1. Minimum thickness: 20 B & S gage (0.0320 inch), unless indicated otherwise. 

2. Finish: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish over epoxy primer; 

minimum system thickness 1.0 mil. Provide manufacturer's standard prime coat on 

underside. 

a. Color: Match Architect’s standing seam metal roofing sample. For bidding 

purposes color to be “Champagne” as manufactured by “Berridge Roofing 

Co.” 

3. Provide strippable plastic protective film on prefinished surface. 

4. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with 

requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered 

acceptable: 

a. Atlas Aluminum Corporation. 

b. Copper Sales, Inc. 

c. MM Systems Corporation. 

d. Petersen Aluminum Corporation. 

e. Met-Tile Incorporated. 

f. Manufacturers providing standing seam roof material. 

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant metal of same material as the material being fastened or 

other material recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish and color of 

exposed fastener heads to finish and color of sheet material being fastened. 

B. Joint Adhesive: Two-component noncorrosive epoxy adhesive, recommended by metal 

manufacturer for sealing of nonmoving joints. 

C. Bituminous Coating: Heavy bodied, sulfur-free, asphalt-based paint; FS TT-C-494. 

2.3 FABRICATION - GENERAL 

A. Form sheet metal to match profiles indicated, substantially free from oil-canning, fish-mouths, 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Roof Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600 – 1 



and other defects. 

B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for applications indicated. 

C. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15 feet running 

length. 

1. Flashing and trim: Provide movement joints at maximum spacing of 10 feet; no 

joints allowed within 2 feet of corner or intersection. 

D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. 

1. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. 

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component 

being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal 

manufacturer, unless indicated otherwise. 

1. Gage: As recommended by SMACNA or metal manufacturer for application, but in 

no case less than gage of metal being secured. 



A. Isolate dissimilar metals by means of a heavy bituminous coating, approved paint coating, 

adhered polyethylene sheet, or other means approved by the engineer. 


A. General: Except as indicated otherwise, comply with sheet metal manufacturer's installation 

instructions and recommendations in the SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 


A. Repair or replace work that is damaged or defaced, as directed by the engineer. 

B. Protect sheet metal work as recommended by the installer so that completed work will be 

clean, secured, and without damage at substantial completion. 

3.4 SCHEDULE 

A. Roof Flashing and sheet metal work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

1. Providing formed low-slope roof flashing and trim, as required 

2. Providing copings as required. 

3. Providing formed equipment support or curb flashing. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Roof Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600 – 2 



SECTION 07720 – ROOF ACCESSORIES 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Roof hatches. 


A. General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist 

thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to 

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and 

attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish 

between plant- and field-assembled work. 

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, prepared on 

Samples of size to adequately show color. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted 

items. Show the following: 

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, 

piping, and conduit. 

4. Required clearances. 

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and 

maintenance manuals. 


A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing 

and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and 

noncorrosive installation. 




Roof Accessories 

07720 - 1

B. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be 

supported. 

1.7 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of 

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 METAL MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coated. 

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and 

thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat. Comply 

with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a 

minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils . 

B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 , manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for 

type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished. 

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 

D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless 


E. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube. 

F. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to 

ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other 

miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. 

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, thickness as indicated. 

C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

D. Underlayment: 

1. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 

2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. 

3. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 

E. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and 

metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 






Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following 

unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless 

steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 

3. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300 

stainless steel. 

4. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 

F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or 

silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. 

G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by 

roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and 

use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight. 

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; 

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement. 

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 

2.3 ROOF HATCH 

A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated double-walled curbs, welded or 

mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and 

weathertight perimeter gasketing, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck-mounting 

flange at perimeter bottom. 




a. Bilco Company (The). 

b. Metallic Products Corp. 

c. O'Keeffe's Inc. 

B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 36 by 30 inches. 

C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load. 

D. Hatch Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. 

1. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat. 

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

E. Construction: 

1. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board. 

2. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above finished roofing unless otherwise 

indicated. 

F. Hardware: Galvanized-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, 

and padlock hasps inside and outside. 






G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps, 

fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation; 

attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. 

2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel 

tube, 1-5/8 inches in diameter. 

3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick. 

4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inches 

in diameter. 

5. Chain Passway Barrier: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end. 

6. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing 

system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism. 

7. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated 

end fittings. 

8. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of 

handrail and railing members. 

9. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight. 

10. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system. 

11. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 




B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of 

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, 

dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs 

in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. 

2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated 

loads. 






3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to 

complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 

4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or 

loosening of fasteners and seals. 

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from 

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with 

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 

1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating 

where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 

2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood 

substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a 

course of polyethylene sheet. 

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of 

roof accessories for waterproof performance. 

C. Roof-Hatch Installation: 

1. Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level. 

2. Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating 

mechanism and hardware. 

3. Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb. 

4. Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer. 

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Clean off excess sealants. 

C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by 

finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 







SECTION 07811 - SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM). 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing. 

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by 

fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install 

manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. 

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction 

testing on fireproofing. 

1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and 

construction. 

B. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test for compliance with requirements for 

specified performance and test methods. 

1. Bond Strength: Test for cohesive and adhesive strength according to ASTM E 736. 

Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than 

minimum specified in Part 2. 

2. Density: Test for density according to ASTM E 605. Provide density indicated in 

referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 

3. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, attests 

that primers or coatings are compatible with fireproofing. 

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 

5. For materials failing tests, obtain applied-fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions 

for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated bonding agents or 

primers. 


Emergency Operations Support Addition Sprayed Fire Resistive Materials 

& Alterations to the Customer Services Building 



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 

44 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at 

or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. 

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing 

complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, 

if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly. 


2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of 

each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by 

a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing 

agency. 

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise. 

C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction[.] 

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos. 

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS 

A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with 

indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar 

before conveyance and application. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide one of the following]: 

a. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.; Grace Construction Products; Monokote MK-6 Series. 

b. Pyrok, Inc.; Pyrok-HD. 

c. Southwest Fireproofing Products Co.; Type 5EF. 

2. Density: Not less than as specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according to 

ASTM E 605. 

3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to 

requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less 

than 0.50 inch . 

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing 

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. 

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less. 

5. Compressive Strength: Minimum 100 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM E 761. 

6. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 

7. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 

8. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to 

ASTM E 859. 





2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and 

are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated. 

B. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with 

requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing 

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 




requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and 

according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following: 

1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, 

loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances 

capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use 

or fire exposure. 

2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar 

items, are securely attached to substrates. 

3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other 

suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application. 

B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that 

substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. 

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the 

Work. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during 

application. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and 

products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, 

topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work. 

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application 

procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable 

to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings 

indicated. 





C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove 

fireproofing. 

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items 

penetrating fireproofing are in place. 

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying 

fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed. 

D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and 

fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended 

use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in 

writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 

E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each 

area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in 

writing by fireproofing manufacturer. 

F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. 

G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by 

fireproofing manufacturer. 

H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing 

material and matching finish approved for required mockups. 

I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations. 

J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, 

inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications. 


A. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed 

with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed 

applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or 

exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. 

B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 

2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results 

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest. 

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING 

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of 

Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean 

exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. 

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting 

from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or 

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 





C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas 

and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades. 

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction. 

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using 

manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product. 






SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 



B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design 

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, 

with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fireprotection 

engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated 

assembly. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in 

compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. 

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to 

FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to 

comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in 

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in 

construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the 

necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified 

requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to 

Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Through Penetration Firestop Systems 07841 - 1 



2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in 

"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following 

requirements: 

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing 

and inspecting agency. 

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations 

listed by the following: 


1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate 

temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when 

substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural 

means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 


A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration 

firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate 

penetration firestopping. 

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping 

installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. 





1. Hilti, Inc. 

2. Johns Manville. 

3. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

4. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according 

to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance 

rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be 

compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if 

any. 

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings 

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 

0.01-inch wg . 




1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls and fire partitions. 

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined 

per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg 

. 

1. Horizontal assemblies include floor/ceiling assemblies. 

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated. 

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 

D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed 

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to 

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by 

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency 

for firestopping indicated. 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: 

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to 

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 

2.3 FILL MATERIALS 

A. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, 

fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a 

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. 

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand 

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

C. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of 

grade indicated below: 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal 

surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless 

indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 






A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting 


B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to 

comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign 

materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces 

capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose 

particles remaining from cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that 

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not 

allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 


A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during 

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths 

required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming 

materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. 

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and 

penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of 

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection 

reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 





A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and 

with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers 

and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that 

penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, 

despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove 

damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems 

complying with specified requirements. 





SECTION 07900 – JOINT SEALANTS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes the following: 

1. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated on the schedule shall be sealed 

with same sealer, whether indicated on drawings to be sealed or not. 


A. Substrates: 

1. M-type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar. The term 

"masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work. 

2. G-type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets. 

3. A-type substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics. 

4. O-type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile; substrates not included under other 

categories. 


A. Product data. 

B. Samples for Color Selection. (Products exposed to view only.) 

C. Samples for Color Verification. (Products exposed to view only.) 

D. Certified Product Test Reports. 

E. Manufacturers' certificates. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sealers if any of the following conditions exist: 

1. Air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by sealer 

manufacturers. 

2. Substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost. 

B. Dimensional Limitations: Do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater 

than that recommended by sealer manufacturer; notify the engineer and get sealer 

manufacturer's recommendations for alternative procedures. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Submit written warranty signed by contractor and installer guaranteeing to correct failures in 

sealer work that occur within 5 years after substantial completion, without reducing or 

otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract 

documents. Failure is defined as failure to remain weather tight due to faulty materials or 

workmanship. Correction is limited to replacement of sealers. 

Emergency Operations Support Addition Joint Sealants 07900 – 1 




2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL 

A. General: Provide only products which are recommended and approved by their manufacturer 

for the specific use to which they are put and which comply with all requirements of the 

contract documents. 

1. Provide only materials which are compatible with each other and with joint 

substrates. 

2. Colors of exposed sealers: To match engineer's samples. 

B. Manufacturers: Products of the manufacturers listed, provided they comply with 

requirements of the contract documents will be among those considered acceptable. 

1. Polysulfide sealants: 

a. A. C. Horn, Inc. 

b. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 

c. Pecora Corporation. 

2. Silicone sealants: 

a. Bostik Inc. 

b. Dow Corning Corporation. 


d. Tremco, Inc. 

3. Urethane sealants: 


b. Mameco International, Inc. 


d. Sika Corporation. 

e. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 

f. Tremco, Inc. 

4. Acrylic-latex emulsion sealant: 


b. Pecora Corporation. 

c. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc. 

2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. Elastomeric Sealants - General: Chemically curing elastomeric sealants of types indicated, 

complying with ASTM C 920, including specific Type, Grade, Class, and Uses indicated, as 

well as all other requirements specified. 

1. Where movement capability exceeding that measured by ASTM C 920 is 

specified, sealant shall withstand the total movement indicated while remaining in 

compliance with the other requirements specified, when tested in accord with 

ASTM C 719, with base joint width measured at the time of application. 

2. For M-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M. 

3. For G-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use G. 

4. For A-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use A. 

5. For O-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M (minimum) and Use O 

for the particular substrate. 

B. Polysulfide Sealant for Water Immersion: Type M, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Use T, 

specifically recommended by the manufacturer for sealing joints immersed continuously in 

water. 




C. High Movement Silicone Sealant: One- or two-part, non-acid-curing, Grade NS, Class 25, 

Use NT, plus movement capability of at least 50 percent in both extension and compression. 

D. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: One-part, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, 

formulated with fungicide, for interior use on nonporous substrates. 

E. Silicone Sealant for Use T: One-part, non-acid curing, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T, 

Use M, plus movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression. 

F. Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T. 

G. Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion: One- or two-part urethane, Grade NS, Class 25, Use 

NT, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for sealing joints immersed continuously 

in water. 

2.3 LATEX SEALANTS 

A. Acrylic-Latex Emulsion Sealant: One-part, Nonsag, mildew-resistant, paint-able; complying 

with ASTM C 834. 

2.4 SEALANT BACKERS 

A. Backers - General: Non-staining; recommended or approved by sealant manufacturer for 

specific use. 


A. Do not begin joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealers off of adjacent surfaces which 

would be damaged by contact or by cleanup. Remove tape as soon as practical. 


A. Comply with sealer manufacturers' installation instructions and recommendations, except 

where more restrictive requirements are specified. 

3.3 SCHEDULE OF JOINT SEALERS 

A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated: 

1. Use one of the following sealants: 

a. High movement silicone sealant. 

2. Backer: Backer rod. 

3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration. 

B. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated: 





a. Acrylic-emulsion latex sealant. 



C. Below-Grade Joints: 


a. Polysulfide sealant for water immersion. 

b. Urethane sealant for water immersion. 



D. Exterior Joints Well Protected from Weather and Not Subject to Movement: 


a. Any sealer. 


E. Interior Floor Joints and Pedestrian Paving Joints, Less than 1-1/2 Percent Slope: 


a. Silicone sealant for Use T. 

b. Two-part Nonsag urethane sealant for Use T. 


3. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration. 

F. Joints around Pipes, Ducts, and Conduit Penetrating Exterior Walls and Roofs: 


a. Same as used for adjacent substrates. 

G. Joints in Interior Wet Areas: 


a. Mildew-resistant silicone sealant. 



H. Exterior Storefront Joints 

1. Silicone Sealant: Dow 790 or approved equal.

Specifications Volume One (Div. 0 thru 07) - Lord and Son ...

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?